texlive[61750] Master/texmf-dist/doc: latex2e-help-texinfo (26jan22)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Wed Jan 26 22:10:01 CET 2022
Revision: 61750
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=61750
Author: karl
Date: 2022-01-26 22:10:01 +0100 (Wed, 26 Jan 2022)
Log Message:
-----------
latex2e-help-texinfo (26jan22)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.7 from
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.8 from
latex2e.texi.
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
-preparation system, version of July 2021.
+preparation system, version of January 2022.
This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Dietze. (From these references no text was directly copied.)
Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016,
-2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry.
+2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021, 2022 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
@@ -44,8 +44,8 @@
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of July 2021)
-for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of January
+2022) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
* Menu:
@@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@
'\accent' (*note \accent::) but this disables hyphenation. TeX users
have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using 'pdflatex' then
-this in the preamble
+put this in the preamble
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -1211,8 +1211,8 @@
\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
The TEXT-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX will run every time it
-switches from one encoding to another with the '\selectfont' or
-'\fontencoding' command. The MATH-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX
+switches from one encoding to another with the '\selectfont' and
+'\fontencoding' commands. The MATH-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX
will use whenever the font is accessed as a math alphabet.
LaTeX ignores any space characters inside TEXT-SETTINGS and
@@ -1243,6 +1243,8 @@
Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding
ENCODING at the location SLOT.
+ A "slot" is the number identifying a glyph within a font.
+
This line from 't1enc.def' declares that to make a circumflex accent
as in '\^A', the system will put the accent in slot 2 over the 'A'
character, which is represented in ASCII as 65. (This holds unless
@@ -1263,9 +1265,9 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextAccentDefault{CMD}{ENCODING}
+ \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\CMD}{ENCODING}
- If there is an encoding-specific accent command CMD but there is no
+ If there is an encoding-specific accent command \CMD but there is no
associated '\DeclareTextAccent' for that encoding then this command will
pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for ENCODING.
@@ -1280,8 +1282,8 @@
That is, this command is equivalent to this call (*note
\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent::).
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{CMD}
- {\UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{CMD}{#1}}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{\CMD}
+ {\UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{\CMD}{#1}}
Note that '\DeclareTextAccentDefault' works for any one-argument
'fontenc' command, not just the accent command.
@@ -1294,21 +1296,21 @@
Synopsis, one of:
- \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
- \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
- \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
or one of:
- \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
- \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
- \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- Define the command CMD, which will be specific to one encoding. The
-command name CMD must begin with a backslash, \. These commands can
-only appear in the preamble. Redefining 'cmd' does not cause an error.
-The defined command will be robust even if the code in DEFN is fragile
-(*note \protect::).
+ Define the command '\CMD', which will be specific to one encoding.
+The command name CMD must be preceded by a backslash, '\'. These
+commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining \CMD does not
+cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code in
+DEFN is fragile (*note \protect::).
For example, the file 't1enc.def' contains this line.
@@ -1324,18 +1326,18 @@
'LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding OT1'.
The '\ProvideTextCommand' variant does the same, except that it does
-nothing if CMD is already defined. The '\DeclareTextSymbol' command is
-faster than this one for simple slot-to-glyph association (*note
+nothing if '\CMD' is already defined. The '\DeclareTextSymbol' command
+is faster than this one for simple slot-to-glyph association (*note
\DeclareTextSymbol::)
- The optional NARGS and OPTARGSDEFAULT arguments play the same role
+ The optional NARGS and OPTARGDEFAULT arguments play the same role
here as in '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
Briefly, NARGS is an integer from 0 to 9 specifying the number of
-arguments that the defined command 'cmd' takes. This number includes
+arguments that the defined command '\CMD' takes. This number includes
any optional argument. Omitting this argument is the same as specifying
-0, meaning that CMD will have no arguments. And, if OPTARGSDEFAULT is
+0, meaning that '\CMD' will have no arguments. And, if OPTARGDEFAULT is
present then the first argument of '\CMD' is optional, with default
-value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If OPTARGSDEFAULT
+value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If OPTARGDEFAULT
is not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.
@@ -1346,13 +1348,13 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\CMD}{DEFN}
or:
- \ProvideTextCommandDefault{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\CMD}{DEFN}
- Give a default definition for CMD, for when that command is not
+ Give a default definition for '\CMD', for when that command is not
defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only
use encodings known to be available.
@@ -1360,7 +1362,7 @@
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
- It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available.
+It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available.
The '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' should not occur in the encoding
definition files since those files should declare only commands for use
@@ -1368,7 +1370,7 @@
As with the related non-default commands, the
'\ProvideTextCommandDefault' has exactly the same behavior as
-'\DeclareTextCommandDefault' except that it does nothing if CMD is
+'\DeclareTextCommandDefault' except that it does nothing if '\CMD' is
already defined (*note \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand::).
So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks that other packages can
improve upon.
@@ -1381,14 +1383,14 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextComposite{CMD}{ENCODING}{SIMPLE_OBJECT}{SLOT}
+ \DeclareTextComposite{\CMD}{ENCODING}{SIMPLE_OBJECT}{SLOT}
Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an
accent over a separate character.
This line from 't1enc.def' means that '\^o' will cause LaTeX to
-typeset lowercase 'o' by taking the character directly from location 224
-in the font.
+typeset lowercase 'o' by taking the character directly from slot 224 in
+the font.
\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
@@ -1395,7 +1397,7 @@
*Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. The
SIMPLE_OBJECT should be a single character or a single command. The
SLOT argument is usually a positive integer represented in decimal
-(although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally CMD has already
+(although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally \CMD has already
been declared for this encoding, either with '\DeclareTextAccent' or
with a one-argument '\DeclareTextCommand'. In 't1enc.def', the above
line follows the '\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}' command.
@@ -1408,10 +1410,10 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{ARG}{CODE}
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}{ARG}{CODE}
A more general version of '\DeclareTextComposite' that runs arbitrary
-code with CMD.
+code with '\CMD'.
This allows accents on 'i' to act like accents on dotless i, '\i'.
@@ -1418,7 +1420,7 @@
\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
*Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. Normally
-CMD will have already been declared with '\DeclareTextAccent' or as a
+'\CMD' will have already been declared with '\DeclareTextAccent' or as a
one argument '\DeclareTextCommand'.
@@ -1429,7 +1431,7 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextSymbol{CMD}{ENCODING}{SLOT}
+ \DeclareTextSymbol{\CMD}{ENCODING}{SLOT}
Define a symbol in the encoding ENCODING at the location SLOT.
Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not mathematics.
@@ -1448,7 +1450,7 @@
in '"13'), although decimal has the advantage that single quote or
double quote could be redefined by another package.
- If CMD has already been defined then '\DeclareTextSymbol' does not
+ If '\CMD' has already been defined then '\DeclareTextSymbol' does not
give an error but it does log the redefinition in the transcript file.
@@ -1459,10 +1461,10 @@
Synopsis:
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{CMD}{ENCODING}
+ \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\CMD}{ENCODING}
- If there is an encoding-specific symbol command CMD but there is no
-associated '\DeclareTextSymbol' for that encoding, then this command
+ If there is an encoding-specific symbol command '\CMD' but there is
+no associated '\DeclareTextSymbol' for that encoding, then this command
will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for
ENCODING.
@@ -1474,8 +1476,8 @@
That is, this command is equivalent to this call (*note
\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent::).
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{CMD}
- {\UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{CMD}}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\CMD}
+ {\UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{\CMD}}
Note that '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault' can be used to define a default
for any zero-argument 'fontenc' command.
@@ -1508,11 +1510,11 @@
Synopsis:
- \UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{CMD}
+ \UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{\CMD}
or:
- \UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{CMD}{TEXT}
+ \UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{\CMD}{TEXT}
Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding.
@@ -1719,6 +1721,17 @@
end of the current group, so you could enclose it in curly braces
'{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}'.
+ Trying to use these commands in math, as with '$\small mv^2/2$',
+results in 'LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small invalid in math mode',
+and the font size doesn't change. To work with a too-large formula,
+often the best option is to use the 'displaymath' environment (*note
+Math formulas::), or one of the environments from the 'amsmath' package.
+For inline mathematics, such as in a table of formulas, an alternative
+is something like '{\small $mv^2/2$}'. (Sometimes '\scriptsize' and
+'\scriptstyle' are confused. Both change the font size, but the latter
+also changes a number of other aspects of how mathematics is typeset.
+*Note Math styles::.)
+
An "environment form" of each of these commands is also defined; for
instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. However, in practice this form
can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or end of the
@@ -1846,8 +1859,8 @@
'\linespread{FACTOR}'
Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
- Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
- just described.
+ Best specified in the preamble. *Note \baselineskip &
+ \baselinestretch::, for using 'setspace' package instead.
'\selectfont'
The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
@@ -2188,8 +2201,8 @@
========================================
The '\baselineskip' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::). It gives the
-leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from baseline
-to baseline.
+"leading", the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
+baseline to baseline.
Ordinarily document authors do not directly change '\baselineskip'
while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection
@@ -2254,8 +2267,8 @@
document is to put '\linespread{FACTOR}' in the preamble. For double
spacing, take FACTOR to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half spacing use 1.3.
These number are rough: for instance, since the '\baselineskip' is about
-1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a font size to
-baseline ratio of about 2. (The '\linespread' command is defined as
+1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a baseline skip to
+font size ratio of about 2. (The '\linespread' command is defined as
'\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}' so it won't take effect until
a font setting happens. But that always takes place at the start of a
document, so there you don't need to follow it with '\selectfont'.)
@@ -2265,14 +2278,17 @@
\usepackage{setspace}
\doublespacing % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
- In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing.
-But you can also use these declarations in the document body to change
-the spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is
+In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing. But
+you can also use these declarations in the document body to change the
+spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is
'\singlespacing' to return the spacing to normal. In the document body,
a better practice than using the declarations is to use environments,
such as '\begin{doublespace} ... \end{doublespace}'. The package also
has commands to do arbitrary spacing: '\setstretch{FACTOR}' and
-'\begin{spacing}{FACTOR} ... \end{spacing}'.
+'\begin{spacing}{FACTOR} ... \end{spacing}'. This package also keeps
+the line spacing single-spaced in places where that is typically
+desirable, such as footnotes and figure captions. See the package
+documentation.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Floats, Prev: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch, Up: Layout
@@ -2427,7 +2443,88 @@
environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
(<https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf>).
+* Menu:
+
+* \caption:: Make a caption for a floating environment.
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \caption, Up: Floats
+
+5.7.1 '\caption'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \caption{CAPTION-TEXT}
+
+or
+
+ \caption[SHORT-CAPTION-TEXT]{CAPTION-TEXT}
+
+ Make a caption for a floating environment, such as a 'figure' or
+'table' environment (*note figure:: or *note table::).
+
+ In this example, LaTeX places a caption below the vertical blank
+space that is left by the author for the later inclusion of a picture.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \vspace*{1cm}
+ \caption{Alonzo Cushing, Battery A, 4th US Artillery.}
+ \label{fig:CushingPic}
+ \end{figure}
+
+The '\caption' command will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like
+'Figure 1:' for an article or 'Figure 1.1:' for a book. The text is
+centered if it is shorter than the text width, or set as an unindented
+paragraph if it takes more than one line.
+
+ In addition to placing the CAPTION-TEXT in the output, the '\caption'
+command also saves that information for use in a list of figures or list
+of tables (*note Table of contents etc.::).
+
+ Here the '\caption' command uses the optional SHORT-CAPTION-TEXT, so
+that the shorter text appears in the list of tables, rather than the
+longer CAPTION-TEXT.
+
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{|*{3}{c}|}
+ \hline
+ 4 &9 &2 \\
+ 3 &5 &7 \\
+ 8 &1 &6 \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption[\textit{Lo Shu} magic square]{%
+ The \textit{Lo Shu} magic square, which is unique among
+ squares of order three up to rotation and reflection.}
+ \label{tab:LoShu}
+ \end{table}
+
+LaTeX will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like 'Table 1:' for an
+article or 'Table 1.1:' for a book.
+
+ The caption can appear at the top of the 'figure' or 'table'. For
+instance, that would happen in the prior example by putting the
+'\caption' between the '\centering' and the '\begin{tabular}'.
+
+ Different floating environments are numbered separately, by default.
+It is '\caption' that updates the counter, and so any '\label' must come
+after the '\caption'. The counter for the 'figure' environment is named
+'figure', and similarly the counter for the 'table' environment is
+'table'.
+
+ The text that will be put in the list of figures or list of tables is
+moving argument. If you get the LaTeX error '! Argument of \@caption
+has an extra }' then you must put '\protect' in front of any fragile
+commands. *Note \protect::.
+
+ The 'caption' package has many options to adjust how the caption
+appears, for example changing the font size, making the caption be
+hanging text rather than set as a paragraph, or making the caption
+always set as a paragraph rather than centered when it is short.
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top
6 Sectioning
@@ -2568,8 +2665,8 @@
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the part title in the
table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
-there. This example puts a line break in TITLE but leaves out the break
-in the table of contents.
+there. This example puts a line break in TITLE but omits the break in
+the table of contents.
\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
@@ -2722,7 +2819,7 @@
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
-there. This shows the full name in the title of the section,
+there. This shows the full name in the title of the section:
\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
@@ -2798,7 +2895,7 @@
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the subsection title
in the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
present then TITLE will be there. This shows the full text in the title
-of the subsection,
+of the subsection:
\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
@@ -3358,7 +3455,7 @@
\usepackage{xr}
\externaldocument{DOCUMENT-BASENAME}
- or
+or
\usepackage{xr}
\externaldocument[REFERENCE-PREFIX]{DOCUMENT-BASENAME}
@@ -3373,17 +3470,16 @@
\externaldocument[H-]{hints}
\externaldocument{answers}
- then it can use cross reference labels from the other three
-documents. Suppose that 'exercises.tex' has an enumerated list
-containing this,
+then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents.
+Suppose that 'exercises.tex' has an enumerated list containing this,
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
- and 'hints.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
+and 'hints.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
- and 'answers.tex' has an enumerated list with this.
+and 'answers.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
are exactly two vertices.
@@ -3526,10 +3622,10 @@
\end{array}
Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
-math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
-environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Inside of each row
-the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&'). Rows are
-terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
+math mode (*note Modes::), and normally appears within a displayed
+mathematics environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Inside
+of each row the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&').
+Rows are terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
This example shows a three by three array.
@@ -3553,7 +3649,7 @@
There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
-Modes::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
+Math styles::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
'p{...}', which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
is that, instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's
intercolumn space in an 'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which
@@ -4037,9 +4133,9 @@
The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
-for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
-is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents
-etc.::).
+for the figure (*note \caption::). By default it is numbered. If
+LOFTITLE is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE
+(*note Table of contents etc.::).
This example makes a figure out of a graphic. LaTeX will place that
graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
@@ -4558,6 +4654,7 @@
..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
......................................................................." ]
+
The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
right edge of the bracket for H1 equals the right edge of the bracket
for H4, so that the left edge of the label box is at H3+H4-(H0+H1).
@@ -4797,12 +4894,12 @@
center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line.
't'
- Match the top line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
- surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vtop').
+ Align the baseline of the top line in the 'minipage' with the
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vtop').
'b'
- Match the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
- surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vbox').
+ Align the baseline of the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vbox').
To see the effects of these, contrast running this
@@ -5231,7 +5328,8 @@
Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in
a picture to be DIM, which must be a positive length (*note Lengths::).
It differs from '\thinlines' and '\thicklines' in that it does not
-affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals.
+affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals (*note
+\oval::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
@@ -5253,7 +5351,7 @@
Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also *note \linethickness::
and *note \thinlines::. This command is illustrated in the Trapezoidal
-Rule example of *note picture::.
+Rule example of *note \qbezier::.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \oval, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture
@@ -5288,9 +5386,10 @@
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
- Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
-PORTION allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval. For
-half an oval take PORTION to be one of these.
+ Produce a rectangle with rounded corners, hereinafter referred to as
+an "oval". The optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only
+half or a quarter of the oval. For half an oval take PORTION to be one
+of these.
't'
top half
@@ -5313,8 +5412,8 @@
These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of 20pt
-(*note \circle:: for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just boxes with a
-small amount of corner rounding.
+(*note \circle:: for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just frames with
+a small amount of corner rounding.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
@@ -5328,16 +5427,19 @@
Produce a vertical stack of objects.
- This labels the y axis.
+ This labels the y axis by writing the word 'y' above the word 'axis'.
- \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
- \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
- \put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+ \begin{picture}(5,2.5)(-0.75,0)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+ \put(-0.2,2){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+ \end{picture}
For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
-In the above example the *note \mbox & \makebox:: puts the stack flush
-right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
-the left of the y axis.
+In the above example the '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) puts the
+stack flush right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits
+slightly to the left of the y axis.
The valid positions are:
@@ -5350,13 +5452,14 @@
Separate objects into lines with '\\'. These stacks are short in
that, unlike in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, here the rows are
-not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+not spaced out to be of even baseline skips. Thus, in
'\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}' the first and last rows are taller than the
-middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the usual
-interline spacing with '\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}', or by hand,
-via an explicit zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt}
-o\\o\\X}' or by using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt]
-o\\o\\X}'.
+middle two, and therefore the baseline skip between the two middle rows
+is smaller than that between the third and last row. You can adjust row
+heights and depths either by putting in the usual interline spacing with
+'\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}' (*note \strut::), or explicitly, via
+an zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}' or by
+using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}'.
The '\shortstack' command is also available outside the 'picture'
environment.
@@ -5742,9 +5845,9 @@
The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::). The '\caption' command is also optional. It specifies
-caption text TITLE for the table. By default it is numbered. If its
-optional LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of
-tables instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
+caption text TITLE for the table (*note \caption::). By default it is
+numbered. If its optional LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in
+the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -6020,7 +6123,7 @@
\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
- &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
Classical &1730 &1820 \\
Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
@@ -6314,8 +6417,8 @@
BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
documentation on CTAN (*note CTAN::).
- With BibTeX, you don't use 'thebibliography' (*note
-thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines.
+ With BibTeX, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment directly
+(*note thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines:
\bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
\bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
@@ -6335,8 +6438,8 @@
Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
-various publications. See CTAN's listing
-<https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+various publications. See the CTAN topic
+<https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty>.
The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
@@ -6364,7 +6467,45 @@
your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
+ With BibTeX, the KEYS argument to '\nocite' can also be the single
+character '*'. This means to implicitly cite all entries from all given
+bibliographies.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* BibTeX error messages::
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: BibTeX error messages, Up: Using BibTeX
+
+8.24.4.1 BibTeX error messages
+..............................
+
+If you forget to use '\bibliography' or '\bibliographystyle' in your
+document (or, less likely, any '\cite' or '\nocite' command), BibTeX
+will issue an error message. Because BibTeX can be used with any
+program, not just LaTeX, the error messages refer to the internal
+commands read by BibTeX (from the '.aux' file), rather than the
+user-level commands described above.
+
+ Here is a table showing internal commands mentioned in the BibTeX
+errors, and the corresponding user-level commands.
+
+'\bibdata'
+ '\bibliography'
+
+'\bibstyle'
+ '\bibliographystyle'
+
+'\citation'
+ '\cite', '\nocite'
+
+ For example, if your document has no '\bibliographystyle' command,
+BibTeX complains as follows:
+
+ I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file DOCUMENT.aux
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
8.25 'theorem'
@@ -6635,12 +6776,12 @@
the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between
-the two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
-
\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
a tale of woe}
+The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between the
+two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
+
Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
particular, don't start new paragraphs with '\\'. Instead leave a blank
line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of '\\''s
@@ -6728,8 +6869,8 @@
==============
In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
-the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph
-mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
+it, so the text before the end of line is not stretched. That is, in
+paragraph mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
double-backslash (*note \\::). This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).
@@ -6742,7 +6883,7 @@
This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
of the table.
- \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ \begin{tabular}{p{1in}@{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
@@ -6756,8 +6897,8 @@
Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
-those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might
-otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+those points and not at any of the other hyphenation points that LaTeX
+might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The '\-'
@@ -6781,10 +6922,9 @@
better fit.
The '\-' command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
-require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
-like 'Hef-\linebreak feron'. Of course, if you later change the text
-then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
-care.
+require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
+'Hef-\linebreak feron'. Of course, if you later change the text then
+this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires care.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \discretionary, Next: \fussy & \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
@@ -6802,10 +6942,10 @@
If a line break occurs at the point where '\discretionary' appears
then TeX puts PRE-BREAK at the end of the current line and puts
POST-BREAK at the start of the next line. If there is no line break
-here then TeX puts NO-BREAK
+here then TeX puts NO-BREAK.
In 'difficult' the three letters 'ffi' form a ligature. But TeX can
-nonetheless break between the two f's with this.
+nonetheless break between the two 'f''s with this.
di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
@@ -6824,9 +6964,10 @@
overfull boxes while suffering loose interword spacing.
The default is '\fussy'. Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
-by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or '\par', or
-displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect the line breaks,
-include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
+by whichever declaration is current at the end of the paragraph, i.e.,
+at the blank line or '\par' or displayed equation ending that paragraph.
+So to affect the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in
+the scope of the command.
* Menu:
@@ -6882,7 +7023,8 @@
\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
-exactly. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.
+exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands
+accumulate.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking
@@ -6901,11 +7043,12 @@
\nolinebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
-an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is 4,
-so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
-prevent the break. But for instance, '\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion
-that another place may be better. The higher the number, the more
-insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+an integer lying between 0 and 4 that allows you to soften the
+instruction. The default is 4, so that without the optional argument
+these commands entirely force or prevent the break. But for instance,
+'\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion that another place may be better. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request. Both commands are
+fragile (*note \protect::).
Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
standard legal text.
@@ -6915,7 +7058,7 @@
underrepresented groups.
When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
-so that it extends to the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note
+so that the break point reaches the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note
\newline::, to have the spaces not stretched out.
@@ -7111,6 +7254,12 @@
'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
*Note \newpage::, for a command that does not have these effects.
+ (There is an obsolete declaration '\samepage', which tries to only
+allow a break between two paragraphs. There is a related environment
+'samepage', also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For more on
+keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ entry
+<https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk>.)
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking, Up: Top
@@ -7228,9 +7377,9 @@
mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
-it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote.
+increments the 'footnote' counter, but if you use the optional NUMBER
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive
+footnote markers referring to the same footnote.
The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
@@ -7237,9 +7386,9 @@
and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
-of the common mark. This example gives the same institutional
-affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version
-of 'footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+of the number of the common mark. This example gives the same
+institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks'
+is a version of '\footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
@@ -7330,7 +7479,7 @@
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{%
- Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ Starting with \textit{HMS Surprise}.}
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
@@ -7401,7 +7550,7 @@
...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{%
- First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+ Noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
File: latex2e.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Counters, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Top
@@ -7462,9 +7611,9 @@
CMD
- Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, '\',
- and must not begin with the four letter string '\end'. For
- '\newcommand', it must not be already defined. For
+ Required; '\CMD' is the command name. It must begin with a
+ backslash, '\', and must not begin with the four character string
+ '\end'. For '\newcommand', it must not be already defined. For
'\renewcommand', this name must already be defined.
NARGS
@@ -7499,10 +7648,10 @@
default value if there is an optional argument and you don't
exercise the option).
- TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
-sequence, as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and another
-solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
+ TeX ignores blanks in the source following a control word (*note
+Control sequences::), as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space
+there, one solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and
+another solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text. Redefining
@@ -7515,14 +7664,14 @@
redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
something like 'LaTeX Error: \hank undefined'.
- Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second
-has one required argument.
+ Here the first definition creates a command with no arguments, and
+the second, one with one required argument.
\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
Use the first as in 'I highly recommend \student{} to you'. The second
-has a variable, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
+has a variable argument, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
'Definition~\ref{def:basis}', which ultimately expands to something like
'Definition~3.14'.
@@ -7557,7 +7706,46 @@
put another pair of braces inside the definition:
'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.
+* Menu:
+
+* Control sequences:: Control sequence, control word and control symbol.
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Control sequences, Up: \newcommand & \renewcommand
+
+12.1.1 Control sequence, control word and control symbol
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+When reading input TeX converts the sequences of read characters into a
+sequence of "tokens". When TeX sees a backslash '\', it will handle the
+following characters in a special way in order to make a "control
+sequence" token.
+
+ The control sequences fall into two categories:
+
+ * "control word", when the control sequence is gathered from a '\'
+ followed by at least one ASCII letter, followed by at least one
+ blank. The sequence of at least one ASCII letter is called the
+ "control sequence name".
+ * "control symbol", when the control sequence is gathered from a '\'
+ followed by one non-letter character.
+
+ Blanks after a control word are ignored and do not produce any
+whitespace in the output (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand:: and *note
+\(SPACE)::).
+
+ Just as the '\relax' command does nothing, the following will print
+'Hello!'--if you use the Emacs info viewer, turn on the whitespace-mode
+minor mode to see the trailing spaces:
+
+ Hel\relax
+ lo!
+
+This is because blanks after '\relax', including the newline are
+ignored, and blanks at the beginning of a line are also ignored (*note
+Leading blanks::).
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \providecommand, Next: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
12.2 '\providecommand'
@@ -7565,12 +7753,12 @@
Synopses, one of:
- \providecommand{CMD}{DEFN}
- \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
- \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- \providecommand*{CMD}{DEFN}
- \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
- \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
@@ -7582,8 +7770,8 @@
This example
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
- \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
- >From \myaffiliation.
+ \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Lyc\'ee Henri IV}
+ From \myaffiliation.
outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'. Unlike '\newcommand', the
repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
@@ -7764,13 +7952,15 @@
Synopsis:
- \newlength{ARG}
+ \newlength{\LEN}
Allocate a new length register (*note Lengths::). The required
-argument ARG must begin with a backslash, '\'. The new register holds
-rubber lengths such as '72.27pt' or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX
-length register is what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register). The initial
-value is zero. The control sequence '\ARG' must not be already defined.
+argument '\LEN' has to be a control sequence (*note Control
+sequences::), and as such must begin with a backslash, '\' under normal
+circumstances. The new register holds rubber lengths such as '72.27pt'
+or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX length register is what plain TeX
+calls a 'skip' register). The initial value is zero. The control
+sequence '\LEN' must not be already defined.
An example:
@@ -7777,7 +7967,7 @@
\newlength{\graphichgt}
If you forget the backslash then you get 'Missing control sequence
-inserted'. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+inserted'. If the control sequence already exists then you get
something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.
@@ -8168,11 +8358,12 @@
\ignorespacesafterend
- Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
-command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
-from plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+ Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore blanks (that is, characters of
+catcode 10 such as space or tabulation) after the end of the command up
+to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a command from
+plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
- The 'ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
+ The '\ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'. The example below
illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values for quiz
questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as shown in the
@@ -8190,7 +8381,7 @@
\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
- A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.
+ A second example shows blanks being removed from the front of text.
The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
'\fullname' will reproduce that.
@@ -8210,7 +8401,7 @@
end of the BEGIN clause, as in '\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{...
\ignorespaces}{...}'.
- To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+ To strip blanks off the end of an environment use
'\ignorespacesafterend'. An example is that this will show a much
larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
between the second and third.
@@ -8243,13 +8434,14 @@
...
\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
- The '\xspace' macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a space
-unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters.
+ The '\xspace' macro, when used at the end of a command definition,
+adds a space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation
+characters.
- After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single
-character command names using non-letters such as '\$'), TeX gobbles
-white space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has
-'Vermont' placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
+ After a command control sequence that is a control word (*note
+Control sequences::, as opposed to control symbols such as '\$'), TeX
+gobbles blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output
+has 'Vermont' placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
space.
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
@@ -8256,15 +8448,16 @@
Our college is in \VT .
The \VT{} summers are nice.
- But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy
+ But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the empty
curly braces or else there would be no space separating 'Vermont' from
-'summers'. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space '\ ' for
-this. *Note \(SPACE)::.)
+'summers'. (Many authors instead use a backslash-space '\ ' for this.
+*Note \(SPACE)::.)
The 'xspace' package provides '\xspace'. It is for writing commands
-which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a space after
+which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be place at the
+very end of the definition of these commands. It inserts a space after
that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of exceptions.
-In this example, the dummy braces are not needed.
+In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
Our college is in \VT .
@@ -8273,15 +8466,16 @@
The default exception list contains the characters ',.'/?;:!~-)', the
open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, and
the commands '\footnote' or '\footnotemark'. Add to that list as with
-'\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}' and remove from that list as with
+'\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}' which adds '\myfni' and '\myfnii'
+to the list, and remove from that list as with
'\xspaceremoveexception{!}'.
A comment: many experts prefer not to use '\xspace'. Putting it in a
definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
-But it isn't easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because
+But it isn't easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
'\xspace' will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
command, and so '\xspace' can make editing material harder and more
-error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces.
+error-prone than instead always inserting the empty braces.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top
@@ -8371,17 +8565,17 @@
Here are the symbols:
- Number Name Command Symbol
+ Number Name Command Symbol
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 1 asterisk '\ast' *
- 2 dagger '\dagger' †
- 3 ddagger '\ddagger' ‡
- 4 section-sign '\S' §
- 5 paragraph-sign '\P' ¶
- 6 double-vert '\parallel' ‖
- 7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
- 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' ††
- 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' ‡‡
+ 1 asterisk '\ast' *
+ 2 dagger '\dagger' †
+ 3 ddagger '\ddagger' ‡
+ 4 section-sign '\S' §
+ 5 paragraph-sign '\P' ¶
+ 6 double-vert '\parallel' ‖
+ 7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
+ 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' ††
+ 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' ‡‡
File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
@@ -8535,8 +8729,8 @@
LaTeX defines the counter '\day' for the day of the month (nominally
with value between 1 and 31), '\month' for the month of the year
-(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year '\year'. When TeX
-starts up, they are set from the current values on the system. The
+(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and '\year' for the year. When
+TeX starts up, they are set from the current values on the system. The
related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day
(*note \today::).
@@ -8549,6 +8743,9 @@
gives no error or warning and results in the output '-2, -4' (the bogus
month value produces no output).
+ *Note Command line input::, to force the date to a given value from
+the command line.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters, Up: Top
@@ -8640,10 +8837,10 @@
\hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
\end{minipage}
- TeX actually has three levels of infinity for glue components: 'fil',
-'fill', and 'filll'. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier
-ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note
-\hfill:: and *note \vfill::).
+ TeX has three levels of infinity for glue components: 'fil', 'fill',
+and 'filll'. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier ones.
+Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note \hfill:: and
+*note \vfill::).
Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length,
so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
@@ -8670,8 +8867,8 @@
mode.
'pt'
- Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units is 1point =
- 2.845mm = .2845cm.
+ Point, 1/72.27 inch. The (approximate) conversion to metric units
+ is 1point = .35146mm = .035146cm.
'pc'
Pica, 12 pt
@@ -8683,12 +8880,12 @@
Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+'mm'
+ Millimeter, 2.845 pt
+
'cm'
- Centimeter
+ Centimeter, 10 mm
-'mm'
- Millimeter
-
'dd'
Didot point, 1.07 pt
@@ -8698,21 +8895,32 @@
'sp'
Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
- Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
-of the font. The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
-height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
-Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
-often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
-'0.5em'). Use of these can help make a definition work better across
-font changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between
-list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
-is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
+ Three other units are defined according to the current font, rather
+than being an absolute dimension.
+
+'ex'
+ The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the height of
+ the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+
+'em'
+ Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+ often used for horizontal lengths. This is also often the size of
+ the current font, e.g., a nominal 10pt font will have 1em = 10pt.
+ LaTeX has several commands to produce horizontal spaces based on
+ the em (*note \enspace & \quad & \qquad::).
+
+'mu'
+ Finally, in math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of
+ the math unit "mu", defined by 1em = 18mu, where the em is taken
+ from the current math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math
+ mode::.
+
+ Using these units can help make a definition work better across font
+changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between list
+items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}' is
+more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
definition given in points.
- In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
-unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math mode::.
-
File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: Units of length, Up: Lengths
@@ -8721,12 +8929,14 @@
Synopsis:
- \setlength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+ \setlength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
- Set the length LEN to AMOUNT. The length name LEN must begin with a
-backslash, '\'. The 'amount' can be a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
-It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
-understands (*note Units of length::).
+ Set the length \LEN to AMOUNT. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
+with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT can be a
+rubber length (*note Lengths::). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (*note Units of
+length::).
Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
while the second will not.
@@ -8736,13 +8946,12 @@
\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
He said stop going to those places.
- If you did not declare LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
-mistype the above as
+ If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+mistype it as in
'\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name then you get
-an error like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
-\relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}'
+an error like 'Missing number, treated as zero.'.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
@@ -8752,12 +8961,14 @@
Synopsis:
- \addtolength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+ \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
- Increment the length LEN by AMOUNT. The length name LEN begins with
-a backslash, '\'. The 'amount' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
-It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
-understands (*note Units of length::).
+ Increment the length \LEN by AMOUNT. The length name '\LEN' has to
+be a control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must
+begin with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT is a
+rubber length (*note Lengths::). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (*note Units of
+length::).
Below, if '\parskip' starts with the value '0pt plus 1pt'
@@ -8768,11 +8979,15 @@
then it has the value '1pt plus 1pt' for the second paragraph.
- If you did not declare the length LEN with '\newlength', if for
-example you mistype the above as
+ If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+mistype it as in
+'\newlength{\specparindent}\addtolength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
+get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
+If the AMOUNT uses some length that has not been declared, for instance
+if for example you mistype the above as
'\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}', then you get something
like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent'. If you leave
-off the backslash at the start of LEN, as in
+off the backslash at the start of \LEN, as in
'\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}', then you get something like 'You can't
use `the letter p' after \advance'.
@@ -8784,22 +8999,23 @@
Synopsis:
- \settodepth{LEN}{TEXT}
+ \settodepth{\LEN}{TEXT}
- Set the length LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on typesetting
-the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a backslash,
-'\'.
+ Set the length \LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
+with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
- This will show how low the character descenders go.
+ This will print how low the character descenders go.
\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetdepth
- If you did not set aside the length LEN, if for example you mistype
-the above as '\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}', then you get
+ If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', if for example you
+mistype the above as '\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}', then you get
something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetdepth'.
-If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
'\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
@@ -8811,22 +9027,23 @@
Synopsis:
- \settoheight{LEN}{text}
+ \settoheight{\LEN}{text}
- Sets the length LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the 'text' argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
-backslash, '\'.
+ Sets the length \LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the 'text' argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
+with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
- This will show how high the characters go.
+ This will print how high the characters go.
\newlength{\alphabetheight}
\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetheight
- If no such length LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
+ If no such length \LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
example you mistype as '\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}', then you
get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\alphabetheight'. If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+\alphabetheight'. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
'\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
@@ -8838,22 +9055,23 @@
Synopsis:
- \settowidth{LEN}{TEXT}
+ \settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}
- Set the length LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
-backslash, '\'.
+ Set the length \LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
+with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
- This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+ This prints the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetwidth
- If no such length LEN has been set aside, if for example you mistype
-the above as '\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}', then you get
-something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetwidth'.
-If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+ If no such length \LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
+example you mistype the above as '\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}',
+then you get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\aplhabetwidth'. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
'\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
@@ -8973,12 +9191,12 @@
TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
doing register assignment. Thus '\the\numexpr\dimexpr 1pt\relax\relax'
-will result in '65536', which is '1pt' converted to scaled points (TeX's
-internal unit) and then coerced into an integer. With a '\glueexpr'
-here, the stretch and shrink would be dropped. Going the other way, a
-'\numexpr' inside a '\dimexpr' or '\glueexpr' will need appropriate
-units, as in '\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax', which produces
-'3.0pt'.
+will result in '65536', which is '1pt' converted to scaled points (*note
+'sp': units of length sp, TeX's internal unit) and then coerced into an
+integer. With a '\glueexpr' here, the stretch and shrink would be
+dropped. Going the other way, a '\numexpr' inside a '\dimexpr' or
+'\glueexpr' will need appropriate units, as in '\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 +
+2\relax pt\relax', which produces '3.0pt'.
The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the
allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute value, and
@@ -9001,8 +9219,8 @@
********************
To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
-paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
-two empty lines.
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, the separation
+of which is made by two empty lines.
It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
@@ -9015,15 +9233,32 @@
``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
- The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
-character, '%'.
+ A paragraph separator is made of a sequence of at least one blank
+line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank
+line is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as
+space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a '%' and span
+up to the end of line. In the following example the two columns are
+identical:
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ First paragraph.
+
+ Second paragraph.
+ \newpage
+ First paragraph.
+
+ % separator lines may contain blank characters.
+
+ Second paragraph.
+ \end{document}
+
Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
(*note Line breaking::).
There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
-blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the line before the
+blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the blank line before the
'\end{equation}'
\begin{equation}
@@ -9032,7 +9267,7 @@
\end{equation}
will get you the error 'Missing $ inserted'. Similarly, the blank line
-in this 'section' argument
+in this '\section' argument
\section{aaa
@@ -9054,8 +9289,8 @@
15.1 '\par'
===========
-Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two consecutive
-newlines to a '\par'):
+Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts any sequence of
+one or more blank lines to a '\par', *note Making paragraphs::):
\par
@@ -9069,18 +9304,19 @@
\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
\whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
- In LR mode or a vertical mode the '\par' command does nothing but it
-terminates paragraph mode, switching LaTeX to vertical mode (*note
-Modes::).
+ In LR mode the '\par' command does nothing and is ignored. In
+paragraph mode, the '\par' command terminates paragraph mode, switching
+LaTeX to vertical mode (*note Modes::).
You cannot use the '\par' command in a math mode. You also cannot
-use it in the argument of many commands, such as the '\section' command
-(*note Making paragraphs:: and *note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the sectioning
+commands, e.g. '\section' (*note Making paragraphs:: and *note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::).
The '\par' command is not the same as the '\paragraph' command. The
-latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning unit used by
-the standard LaTeX documents (*note \subsubsection & \paragraph &
-\subparagraph::).
+latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning command used
+by the LaTeX document standard classes (*note \subsubsection &
+\paragraph & \subparagraph::).
The '\par' command is not the same as '\newline' or the line break
double backslash, '\\'. The difference is that '\par' ends the
@@ -9179,15 +9415,15 @@
The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead are
vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase 'x'.
- In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for '\parindent' in
-one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt',
+ In LaTeX standard class documents, the default value for '\parindent'
+in one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt',
'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. In two-column documents it
is '1em'. (These values are set before LaTeX calls '\normalfont' so
'em' is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a
-different font then to set '\parindent' in units matching that font, do
-'\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}'.)
+different font then to set '\parindent' to 1em matching that font, put
+'\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}' in the preamble.)
- The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document styles
+ The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document classes
is '0pt plus1pt'.
@@ -9304,31 +9540,6 @@
'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}'. These environments can
only be used in paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
- The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some
-differences. One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts;
-in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they
-are closer together.
-
- Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen
-in the inline math mode. For this, the '\displaystyle' declaration
-forces the size and style of the formula to be that of 'displaymath'.
-Thus '\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n\)' will have the limits
-above and below the summation sign, not next to it. Another example is
-that
-
- \begin{tabular}{r|cc}
- \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
- Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
- &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
- Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
- &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
- \end{tabular}
-
-because it has no '\displaystyle', the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will
-be scrunched. But, because of its '\displaystyle', the 'Geometric'
-line's fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as
-in the rest of the line.
-
The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
'amsmath' and 'amssymb' (also be aware of the 'mathtools' package that
@@ -9339,12 +9550,13 @@
* Menu:
-* Subscripts & superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index.
+* Subscripts & superscripts:: Also known as exponents or indices.
* Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles.
* Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp.
* Math accents:: Accents in math.
* Over- and Underlining:: Things over or under formulas.
* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
+* Math styles:: Determine the size of things.
* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
@@ -10451,13 +10663,13 @@
delimiters. For instance, if you put
'\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' in your preamble then you
get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work in math
-mode). The starred version, such as '\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}', has the
-height of the vertical bars match the height of the argument. The
-unstarred version, such as '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}', has the bars fixed at a
-default height. This version accepts an optional argument, as in
-'\abs[SIZE COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}', where the height of the bars is
-given in SIZE COMMAND, such as '\Bigg'. Using '\lVert' and '\rVert' as
-the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same behavior.
+mode). The starred form, such as '\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}', has the height
+of the vertical bars match the height of the argument. The unstarred
+form, such as '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}', has the bars fixed at a default
+height. This form accepts an optional argument, as in '\abs[SIZE
+COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}', where the height of the bars is given in SIZE
+COMMAND, such as '\Bigg'. Using instead '\lVert' and '\rVert' as the
+symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same behavior.
* Menu:
@@ -10506,8 +10718,9 @@
\end{equation}
Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
-backslash, '\{'. (The packages 'amsmath' and 'mathtools' allow you to
-get the above construct through in a 'cases' environment.)
+backslash, '\{' (*note Reserved characters::). (The packages 'amsmath'
+and 'mathtools' allow you to get the above construct through in a
+'cases' environment.)
The '\left ... \right' pair make a group. One consequence is that
the formula enclosed in the '\left ... \right' pair cannot have line
@@ -10546,7 +10759,7 @@
stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better.
TeX scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the
-contained formula. Here LaTeX grows the brackets to extend the full
+enclosed formula. Here LaTeX grows the brackets to extend the full
height of the integral.
\begin{equation}
@@ -10582,25 +10795,25 @@
Synopsis, one of:
- \biglDELIMITER1 ... \bigrDELIMITER2
- \BiglDELIMITER1 ... \bigrDELIMITER2
- \bigglDELIMITER1 ... \biggrDELIMITER2
- \BigglDELIMITER1 ... \BiggrDELIMITER2
+ \bigl DELIMITER1 ... \bigr DELIMITER2
+ \Bigl DELIMITER1 ... \bigr DELIMITER2
+ \biggl DELIMITER1 ... \biggr DELIMITER2
+ \Biggl DELIMITER1 ... \Biggr DELIMITER2
(as with '\bigl[...\bigr]'; strictly speaking they need not be paired,
see below), or one of:
- \bigmDELIMITER
- \BigmDELIMITER
- \biggmDELIMITER
- \BiggmDELIMITER
+ \bigm DELIMITER
+ \Bigm DELIMITER
+ \biggm DELIMITER
+ \Biggm DELIMITER
(as with '\bigm|'), or one of:
- \bigDELIMITER
- \BigDELIMITER
- \biggDELIMITER
- \BiggDELIMITER
+ \big DELIMITER
+ \Big DELIMITER
+ \bigg DELIMITER
+ \Bigg DELIMITER
(as with '\big[').
@@ -10617,8 +10830,8 @@
displayed equations.
*Note Delimiters::, for a list of the common delimiters. In the
-family of commands with 'l' and 'r', DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not
-be the same.
+family of commands with 'l' or 'r', DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not
+match together.
The 'l' and 'r' commands produce open and close delimiters that
insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the delimiter,
@@ -10649,7 +10862,7 @@
\end{equation}
Unlike the '\left...\right' pair (*note \left & \right::), the
-commands here with 'l' and 'r' do not make a group. Strictly speaking
+commands here with 'l' or 'r' do not make a group. Strictly speaking
they need not be matched so you can write something like this.
\begin{equation}
@@ -10985,7 +11198,7 @@
improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math miscellany, Prev: Over- and Underlining, Up: Math formulas
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math styles, Prev: Over- and Underlining, Up: Math formulas
16.6 Spacing in math mode
=========================
@@ -11007,25 +11220,28 @@
something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
'\;'
- Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. With
- 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in
- text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+ Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. With the
+ 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be
+ used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode
+ only.
+
'\negthickspace'
- Normally '-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
- the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
- math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+ Normally '-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With the 'amsmath'
+ package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text
+ mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode only.
'\:'
'\>'
Synonym: '\medspace'. Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
- With 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used
- in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+ With the 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
+ can be used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math
+ mode only.
'\negmedspace'
- Normally '-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
- the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
- math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+ Normally '-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With the 'amsmath'
+ package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text
+ mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
'\,'
Synonym: '\thinspace'. Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em. Can be
@@ -11042,11 +11258,12 @@
\end{equation}
'\!'
- A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
- the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
- math mode; before that, The '\!' command is math mode only but the
- '\negthinspace' command has always worked in text mode (*note
- \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
+ Synonym: '\negthinspace'. A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'.
+ With the 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
+ can be used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, the '\!'
+ command is math mode only but the '\negthinspace' command has
+ always also worked in text mode (*note \thinspace &
+ \negthinspace::).
'\quad'
This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
@@ -11148,10 +11365,12 @@
The '\phantom' command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
width as SUBFORMULA, but empty. That is, this command causes LaTeX to
typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here LaTeX will
-put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty.
+put a blank line that is the correct width for the answer, but will not
+show that answer.
- \fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals.
- --- Mark Twain}}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int x^2\,dx=\mbox{\underline{$\phantom{(1/3)x^3+C}$}}
+ \end{displaymath}
The '\vphantom' variant produces an invisible box with the same
vertical size as SUBFORMULA, the same height and depth, but having zero
@@ -11217,9 +11436,80 @@
amount of space, use '\rule' with a width of zero. *Note \rule::.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math styles, Next: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
-16.7 Math miscellany
+16.7 Math styles
+================
+
+TeX's rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
+example, inside a displayed equation, the input '\sum_{0\leq
+i<n}k^m=\frac{n^{m+1}}{m+1}+\mbox{lower order terms}' will give output
+with the summation index centered below the summation symbol. But if
+that input is inline then the summation index is off to the right rather
+than below, so it won't push the lines apart. Similarly, in a displayed
+context, the symbols in the numerator and denominator will be larger
+than for an inline context, and in display math subscripts and
+superscripts are further apart then they are in inline math.
+
+ TeX uses four math styles.
+
+ * Display style is for a formula displayed on a line by itself, such
+ as with '\begin{equation} ... \end{equation}'.
+
+ * Text style is for an inline formula, as with 'so we have $ ... $'.
+
+ * Script style is for parts of a formula in a subscript or
+ superscript.
+
+ * Scriptscript style is for parts of a formula at a second level (or
+ more) of subscript or superscript.
+
+ TeX determines a default math style but you can override it with a
+declaration of '\displaystyle', or '\textstyle', or '\scriptstyle', or
+'\scriptscriptstyle'.
+
+ In this example, the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will look
+scrunched.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &$a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b)$
+ &$na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}$ \\
+ Geometric &$a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1}$
+ &$\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}$ \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+But because of the '\displaystyle' declaration, the 'Geometric' line's
+fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as in the
+rest of the line.
+
+ Another example is that, compared to the same input without the
+declaration, the result of
+
+ we get
+ $\pi=2\cdot{\displaystyle\int_{x=0}^1 \sqrt{1-x^2}\,dx}$
+
+will have an integral sign that is much taller. Note that here the
+'\displaystyle' applies to only part of the formula, and it is delimited
+by being inside curly braces, as '{\displaystyle ...}'.
+
+ The last example is a continued fraction.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ a_0+\frac{1}{
+ \displaystyle a_1+\frac{\mathstrut 1}{
+ \displaystyle a_2+\frac{\mathstrut 1}{
+ \displaystyle a_3}}}
+ \end{equation}
+
+Without the '\displaystyle' declarations, the denominators would be set
+in script style and scriptscript style. (The '\mathstrut' improves the
+height of the denominators; *note \mathstrut::.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math miscellany, Prev: Math styles, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.8 Math miscellany
====================
LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some
@@ -11236,7 +11526,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Colon character & \colon, Next: \*, Up: Math miscellany
-16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+16.8.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
-------------------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11259,7 +11549,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \*, Next: \frac, Prev: Colon character & \colon, Up: Math miscellany
-16.7.2 '\*'
+16.8.2 '\*'
-----------
Synopsis:
@@ -11278,7 +11568,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \frac, Next: \sqrt, Prev: \*, Up: Math miscellany
-16.7.3 '\frac'
+16.8.3 '\frac'
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -11293,7 +11583,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \sqrt, Next: \stackrel, Prev: \frac, Up: Math miscellany
-16.7.4 '\sqrt'
+16.8.4 '\sqrt'
--------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11312,7 +11602,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \stackrel, Prev: \sqrt, Up: Math miscellany
-16.7.5 '\stackrel'
+16.8.5 '\stackrel'
------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11334,9 +11624,11 @@
in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
- * "Paragraph mode" is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text.
- It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
- pages. This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time.
+ * "Paragraph mode" (in plain TeX this is called "horizontal mode") is
+ what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text. It breaks the
+ input text into lines and finds the positions of line breaks, so
+ that in vertical mode page breaks can be done. This is the mode
+ LaTeX is in most of the time.
"LR mode" (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
"restricted horizontal mode") is in effect when LaTeX starts making
@@ -11357,11 +11649,13 @@
'\int' differs in the two situations.)
* "Vertical mode" is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
- other material making the output page. This is the mode LaTeX is
- in when it starts a document.
+ other material making the output page, which comprises insertion of
+ page breaks. This is the mode LaTeX is in when it starts a
+ document.
"Internal vertical mode" is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
- '\vbox'. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+ '\vbox'. It has not such thing as page breaks, and as such is the
+ vertical analogue of LR mode.
For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with 'Let \( x \) be ...'
then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in vertical
@@ -11558,9 +11852,9 @@
main matter of a document uses arabic. *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
& \backmatter::.
- If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
-see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of page number
-then you will manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
+ If you want to change where the page number appears on the page,
+see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of the page
+number, then you manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles
@@ -11587,7 +11881,7 @@
centered.
'empty'
- The header and footer is empty.
+ The header and footer are both empty.
'headings'
Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
@@ -11686,11 +11980,9 @@
19 Spaces
*********
-LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of these
-are best suited to mathematical text; see *note Spacing in math mode::.
-Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text and
-mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
-chapter.
+LaTeX has many ways to produce white space, or filled space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; for these see *note Spacing
+in math mode::.
* Menu:
@@ -11755,21 +12047,21 @@
\hspace{LENGTH}
\hspace*{LENGTH}
- Insert the horizontal space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive,
-negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing. It is a
-rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, or
-both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is stretchable and
-shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
+ Insert the amount LENGTH of horizontal space. The LENGTH can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding a negative amount of space is like
+backspacing. It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or
+'minus' component, or both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
This makes a line with 'Name:' an inch from the right margin.
\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
- The '*'-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable. More
+ The '*'-form inserts horizontal space that is non-discardable. More
precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
-and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The '*'-version
-avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in
-front of the space).
+and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The '*'-form avoids
+that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in front of
+the space).
In this example
@@ -11923,11 +12215,11 @@
* Menu:
* \@:: Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.
-* \frenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+* \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
* \normalsfcodes:: Restore space factor settings to the default.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \@, Next: \frenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@, Next: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
19.5.1 '\@'
-----------
@@ -11976,10 +12268,10 @@
in the last one that the '\@' comes before the closing parenthesis).
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing, Next: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \@, Up: \spacefactor
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Next: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \@, Up: \spacefactor
-19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
------------------------
+19.5.2 '\frenchspacing' & '\nonfrenchspacing'
+---------------------------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11986,10 +12278,11 @@
\frenchspacing
\nonfrenchspacing
- The first declaration causes LaTeX to treat spacing between sentences
-in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
-The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
-(*note \spacefactor::); this is the default.
+ The first declaration causes LaTeX to handle spacing between
+sentences in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a
+sentence. The second switches back to the default handling in which
+spacing between sentences stretches or shrinks more (*note
+\spacefactor::).
Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
@@ -11999,7 +12292,7 @@
treated equally.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \frenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
-----------------------
@@ -12008,7 +12301,7 @@
\normalsfcodes
- Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default (*note
+ Reset the LaTeX space factors to the default values (*note
\spacefactor::).
@@ -12018,9 +12311,10 @@
==========================
This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
-backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+backslash followed by a space.
+Synopsis:
- \
+ \
Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
@@ -12028,33 +12322,45 @@
When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces white
space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- One blank: makes some space \\
- Three blanks: in a row \\
- Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ One blank:& makes some space \\
+ Three blanks:& in a row \\
+ Three spaces:&\ \ \ in a row \\
\end{tabular}
On the first line LaTeX puts some space after the colon. On the second
line LaTeX collapses the three blanks to output one whitespace, so you
end with the same space after the colon as in the first line. LaTeX
-would similarly collapse a blank followed by a tab, or a blank and a
-newline and a blank. However, the bottom line asks for three spaces so
-the white area is wider. That is, the backslash-space command creates a
-fixed amount of horizontal space. (Note that you can define a
-horizontal space of any width at all with '\hspace'; see *note
-\hspace::.)
+would similarly collapse them to a single whitespace if one, two or all
+of the three blanks were replaced by a tab, or by a newline. However,
+the bottom line asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That
+is, the backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal
+space. (Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all
+with '\hspace'; see *note \hspace::.)
The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used
-after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
-follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'. (But using curly parentheses, as in
-'\TeX{} is best', has the advantage of still working if the next
-character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
-as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in 'So says
-Prof.\ Smith' or 'Jones et al.\ (1993)' (*note \@::).
+after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the blank that
+follows, as after '\TeX' in '\TeX\ (or \LaTeX)'. (But using curly
+braces has the advantage of still working whether the next character is
+a blank or any other non-letter, as in '\TeX{} (or \LaTeX{})' in which
+'{}' can be added after '\LaTeX' as well as after '\TeX'.) The other
+common use is that it marks a period as ending an abbreviation instead
+of ending a sentence, as in 'Prof.\ Smith' or 'Jones et al.\ (1993)'
+(*note \@::).
- Under normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent
+ Under normal circumstances, '\'<TAB> and '\'<NEWLINE> are equivalent
to backslash-space, '\ '.
+ Please also note that in order to allow source code indentation,
+under normal circumstances, TeX ignores leading blanks in a line. So
+the following prints 'one word':
+
+ one
+ word
+
+where the white space between 'one' and 'word' is produced by the
+newline after 'one', not by the space before 'word'.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: ~, Next: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Prev: \(SPACE), Up: Spaces
@@ -12065,12 +12371,17 @@
BEFORE~AFTER
- The tie character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER at
-which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
+ The "tie" character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER
+at which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
- Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words.
+ Note that the word 'tie' has this meaning in the TeX/Texinfo
+community; this differs from the typographic term "tie", which is a
+diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a "tie-after" accent in 'The
+TeXbook'.
+ Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words:
+
Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
@@ -12085,7 +12396,7 @@
among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them
from 'The TeXbook'.
- * Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+ * Between an enumerator label and number, such as in references:
'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'.
@@ -12094,12 +12405,12 @@
* Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'. This
- includes between a month and a date: 'October~12' or '12~Oct'. In
- general, in any expressions where numbers and abbreviations or
- symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or '2:50~pm', or
- 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'. Other
- common choices here are a thin space (*note \thinspace &
- \negthinspace::) and no space at all.
+ includes between a month and day number in a date: 'October~12' or
+ '12~Oct'. In general, in any expressions where numbers and
+ abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or
+ '2:50~pm', or 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or
+ '\$$1.4$~billion'. Other common choices here are a thin space
+ (*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::) and no space at all.
* When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
@@ -12144,10 +12455,11 @@
three dots and/or four dots are plenty). Another style-specific use is
between initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
- LaTeX provides a variety of similar spacing commands (*note Spacing
-in math mode::). With 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
-they can be used in text mode as well as math mode, including '\!' for
-'\negthinspace'; before that, they were available only in math mode.
+ LaTeX provides a variety of similar spacing commands for math mode
+(*note Spacing in math mode::). With the 'amsmath' package, or as of
+the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, they can be used in text mode as well as
+math mode, including '\!' for '\negthinspace'; but otherwise, they are
+available only in math mode.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Prev: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Up: Spaces
@@ -12190,9 +12502,9 @@
include italic correction values even for italic fonts.
Technically, LaTeX uses another font-specific value, the so-called
-slant parameter (namely '\fontdimen1'), to determine whether to possibly
-insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to particular
-font commands.
+"slant parameter" (namely '\fontdimen1'), to determine whether to
+possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to
+particular font commands.
There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing
is done in a different way.
@@ -12229,13 +12541,13 @@
here
\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
- \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern0pt }
which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt. Similarly, adjust
the dot spacing as with
\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
- \leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hbox to 1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern0pt }
which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
@@ -12292,7 +12604,7 @@
of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'.
- Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use on in mid-paragraph
+ Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use it in mid-paragraph
then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
these are best between paragraphs.
@@ -12345,7 +12657,7 @@
and depth at least '0.3\baselineskip'. Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
the line a rectangle having zero width,
'\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}' (*note \rule::). The
-'\baselineskip' changes with the current font and fontsize.
+'\baselineskip' changes with the current font or fontsize.
In this example the '\strut' keeps the box inside the frame from
having zero height.
@@ -12387,11 +12699,11 @@
\end{enumerate}
\end{minipage}%
-The final two lists use '\fbox' to show what's happening. The third
-list's '\parbox' goes only to the bottom of its second 'test', which
-happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline. The
-fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline
-space.
+The final two lists use '\fbox' to show what's happening. The first
+item '\parbox' of the third list goes only to the bottom of its second
+'test', which happens not have any characters that descend below the
+baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra
+below-baseline space.
The '\strut' command is often useful in graphics, such as in 'TikZ'
or 'Asymptote'. For instance, you may have a command such as
@@ -12414,10 +12726,10 @@
\end{tabular}
(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
-optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won't work here.
-Changing the first double backslash to something like '\\[2.5ex]' will
-put the room between the header line and the '\hline', and the integral
-would still hit the line.)
+optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won't
+solve this issue. Changing the first double backslash to something like
+'\\[2.5ex]' will put more room between the header line and the '\hline'
+rule, and the integral would still hit the rule.)
File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Next: \vfill, Prev: \strut, Up: Spaces
@@ -12444,9 +12756,9 @@
(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for common inter-paragraph
spaces.)
- The '*'-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+ The '*'-form inserts vertical space that is non-discardable. More
precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
-'*'-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
+'*'-form causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
the two questions.
Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
@@ -12521,10 +12833,11 @@
VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
\protect::). The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
- This example illustrates. The 'picture' draws a scale. In a
-standard LaTeX article the length '\baselineskip' is 12pt. The two
-rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt
-from the first 'addvspace'.
+ This example illustrates. The 'picture' draws a scale over which to
+rules are placed. In a standard LaTeX article the length
+'\baselineskip' is 12pt. As shown by the scale, the two rules are 22pt
+apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt from the first
+'\addvspace'.
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{color}
@@ -12683,16 +12996,16 @@
\framebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
\framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
- Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the
-space. These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
+ Create a box with an enclosing frame, four rules surrounding the
+TEXT. These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::). The '\fbox' command is robust,
the '\framebox' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
-LaTeX puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
-Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
-a frame.
+LaTeX puts the text into a box, the text cannot be hyphenated. Around
+that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four rules making a
+frame.
The first two command invocations, '\fbox{...}' and '\framebox{...}',
are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the
@@ -12703,13 +13016,12 @@
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
-The '\strut' inserts a vertical height of '\baselineskip' (*note
-\strut::).
+The '\strut' ensures a total height of '\baselineskip' (*note \strut::).
These parameters determine the frame layout.
'\fboxrule'
- The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+ The thickness of the rules around the enclosed box. The default is
0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
'\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}' (*note \setlength::).
@@ -12719,7 +13031,7 @@
(*note \setlength::). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: this
will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
- {\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ {\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}%
\framebox{%
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
@@ -12737,8 +13049,9 @@
*Note Colored boxes::, for colors other than black and white.
- The 'picture' environment has a version of this command where the
-units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox (picture)::).
+ The 'picture' environment has a version of the '\framebox' command
+where the units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox
+(picture)::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \fbox & \framebox, Up: Boxes
@@ -12891,6 +13204,7 @@
'\usebox{\newreg}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
+ \newsavebox{\areg}
\savebox{\areg}{%
\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
\begin{enumerate}
@@ -12938,8 +13252,8 @@
\end{lrbox}
This is the environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands,
-and is equivalent to them. for the full description, *Note \sbox &
-\savebox::.
+and is equivalent to them. *Note \sbox & \savebox::, for the full
+description.
The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box register referred
to by variable 'BOX-CMD'. The variable name BOX-CMD must begin with a
@@ -12969,7 +13283,7 @@
Produce the box most recently saved in the box register BOX-CMD by
the commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. For
-more information and examples, *Note \sbox & \savebox::. (Note that the
+more information and examples, *note \sbox & \savebox::. (Note that the
variable name BOX-CMD starts with a backslash, '\'.) This command is
robust (*note \protect::).
@@ -13286,8 +13600,8 @@
Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. LaTeX can use
both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
-in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
-in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph in
+JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
instructions such as 'draw a circle with this radius and that center'.
An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote program, in PDF
format. Generally vector graphics are more useful because you can
@@ -13523,7 +13837,7 @@
Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in EXTENSION.
- This example declares that all files with names have the form
+ This example declares that all files with names of the form
'filename-without-dot.mps' will be treated as output from MetaPost,
meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
input the file.
@@ -14024,7 +14338,8 @@
The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
-I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection against a vertical
+axis.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \resizebox, Prev: \scalebox, Up: Commands for graphics
@@ -14049,8 +14364,8 @@
The unstarred form '\resizebox' takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
height while the starred form '\resizebox*' takes it to be height+depth.
-For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter inch with
-'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This box has both height and
+For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter-inch with
+'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{3.5in}{This box has both height and
depth.}}'.
You can use '\depth', '\height', '\totalheight', and '\width' to
@@ -14481,7 +14796,9 @@
'\capitaltie'
'\newtie'
'\capitalnewtie'
- oo͡ Tie-after accent. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
+ Tie-after accent (used for transliterating from Cyrillic, such as
+ in the ALA-LC romanization). It expects that the argument has two
+ characters. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
'\u'
'\capitalbreve'
@@ -14507,8 +14824,8 @@
A TeX primitive command used to generate accented characters from
accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by NUMBER, a
-numeric argument, followed by a space and then a CHARACTER argument
-constructs the accented character in the current font.
+numeric argument, followed by a space and then a CHARACTER argument to
+construct the accented character in the current font.
These are accented 'e' characters.
@@ -14518,7 +14835,8 @@
\accent22 e
\accent23 e
-The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc.
+The first is a grave, the second a caron, the third a breve, the fourth
+a macron, and the fifth a ring above.
The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so
the outcome of '\accent' use may differ between fonts. In LaTeX it is
@@ -14621,10 +14939,10 @@
called the "encoding". There are many different encodings. The
simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough
for most of the world's languages. For instance, to typeset the
-a-umlaut character ä in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the sequence
-'\"a' is used. This would make source files for anything but English
-hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive encoding is more
-convenient.
+a-umlaut character 'ä' in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the
+sequence '\"a' is used. This would make source files for anything but
+English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive encoding
+is more convenient.
The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is
UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for
@@ -14992,8 +15310,8 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Table of contents etc., Next: Indexes, Up: Front/back matter
-25.1 Table of contents etc.
-===========================
+25.1 Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables
+=======================================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -15150,18 +15468,18 @@
In this example, '\@dottedcline' appears to have been given only three
arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up the
final TEXT and PAGENUMBER arguments in the synopsis from a call to
-'\contentsline'.
+'\contentsline' (*note \contentsline::).
Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin
box, these '\@dottedtocline' commands insert "leaders", that is,
evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command
-'\@dotsep'. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which are
-'1/18' em. Change it using '\renewcommand', as in
+'\@dotsep'. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, aka. 'mu', which
+are '1/18' em. Change it using '\renewcommand', as in
'\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}'.
- In the default book class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for the
-Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class it does
-not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
+ In the standard 'book' class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for
+the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the standard 'article' class
+it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Prev: \@dottedtocline, Up: Table of contents etc.
@@ -15182,26 +15500,27 @@
It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
-where it appears in the input file.
+where the command appears in the input file.
The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
-'ROOT-NAME.EXT'. It writes that information as the text of the command
-'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
-counter 'UNIT' (*note \contentsline::). The most common case is the
-table of contents and there NUM is the page number of the first page of
-UNIT.
+'ROOT-NAME.EXT', where ROOT-NAME is the file name of the root file
+(*note Splitting the input::). It writes that information as the text
+of the command '\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the
+current value of counter 'UNIT' (*note \contentsline::). The most
+common case is the table of contents and there NUM is the page number of
+the first page of UNIT.
- This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.,
-and also by '\caption' inside a float environment. But it is also used
-by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style is to
-have an unnumbered preface may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that
-command leaves out table of contents information, which can be entered
-manually, as here.
+ This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.
+(*note Sectioning::), and also by '\caption' inside a float environment
+(*note Floats::). But it is also directly used by authors. For
+example, an author writing a book whose style is to have an unnumbered
+preface may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that command leaves out
+table of contents information, which can be entered manually, as here.
\chapter*{Preface}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
-In the '.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
+In the 'ROOT-NAME.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note that the page number '3' is
automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.
@@ -15213,7 +15532,8 @@
filename extension of the information file.
UNIT
- A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument:
+ A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument, typically
+ one of:
'toc'
For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional
@@ -15226,8 +15546,8 @@
For the list of tables: 'table'.
TEXT
- The text of the entry. You must '\protect' any commands that are
- fragile (*note \protect::).
+ The text of the entry. You must '\protect' any fragile commands
+ (*note \protect::) used in it.
The '\addcontentsline' command has an interaction with '\include'
(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
@@ -15235,7 +15555,8 @@
table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
- If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as here
+ If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as with the typo
+here
\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
@@ -15320,7 +15641,7 @@
Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the
commands '\chapter', '\section', etc. for the table of contents, or by
the '\caption' command inside of a '\figure' or '\table' environment
-(*note figure:: and *note table::). Thus, where the base file is
+(*note figure:: and *note table::). Thus, where the root file is
'thesis.tex', and contains the declaration '\tableofcontents', the
command '\chapter{Chapter One}' produces something like this in the file
'thesis.toc'.
@@ -15343,8 +15664,9 @@
Note that the 'hyperref' package changes the definition of
'\contentsline' (and '\addcontentsline') to add more arguments, to make
hyperlinks. This is the source of the error 'Argument of \contentsline
-has an extra }'. Fix this error by deleting the '.toc' or '.lof' or
-'.lot' file, and running LaTeX again.
+has an extra }' when one adds/remove the use of package 'hyperref' and a
+compilation was already run. Fix this error by deleting the '.toc' or
+'.lof' or '.lot' file, and running LaTeX again.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \nofiles, Next: \numberline, Prev: \contentsline, Up: Table of contents etc.
@@ -15388,8 +15710,8 @@
'\contentsline' command to typeset the section number (*note
\contentsline::).
- For example, this line in a '.toc' file causes the '1' to be typeset
-flush left.
+ For example, this line in a '.toc' file causes the '1.1' to be
+typeset flush left.
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
@@ -15396,16 +15718,18 @@
By default, LaTeX typesets the section numbers in a box of length
'\@tempdima'. That length is set by the commands '\l at section',
'\l at subsection', etc. Put section numbers inside a natural-width box
-with '\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}'.
+with '\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}' before '\tableofcontents'.
- This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with
-'\protect' (*note \protect::). An example is the use of '\protect' in
-the command
-'\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}' to get
-the '\numberline' into this command in the '.toc' file: '\contentsline
-{section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}' (the page number '6' is
-automatically added by LaTeX; *note \addcontentsline::).
+ This command is fragile so you may need to precede it with '\protect'
+(*note \protect::). An example is the use of '\protect' in this
+command,
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}
+
+to get the '\numberline' into the '\contentsline' command in the '.toc'
+file: '\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}' (the page
+number '6' is automatically added by LaTeX; *note \addcontentsline::).
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Indexes, Next: Glossaries, Prev: Table of contents etc., Up: Front/back matter
@@ -15412,35 +15736,54 @@
25.2 Indexes
============
-This document has an index.
+If you tell LaTeX what terms you want to appear in an index then it can
+produce that index, alphabetized and with the page numbers automatically
+maintained. This illustrates the basics.
\documentclass{article}
- \usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+ \usepackage{makeidx} % Provide indexing commands
+ \makeindex
+ % \usepackage{showidx} % Show marginal notes of index entries
...
\begin{document}
...
- Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
- a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
- is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ Wilson's Theorem\index{Wilson's Theorem}
+ says that a number $n>1$ is prime if and only if the factorial
+ of $n-1$ is congruent to $-1$
+ modulo~$n$.\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}
...
\printindex
- ...
+ \end{document}
-The '\usepackage{makeidx}' and '\makeindex' in the preamble bring in the
-relevant commands.
+As that shows, declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
+\index::). When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information,
+such as 'Wilson's Theorem' and the page number, to an auxiliary file
+whose name ends in '.idx'. Next, to alphabetize and do other
+manipulations, run an external command, typically 'makeindex' (*note
+makeindex::), which writes a file whose name ends in '.ind'. Finally,
+'\printindex' brings this manipulated information into the output (*note
+\printindex::).
- Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
-body you declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
-\index::). When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information to
-an auxiliary file 'ROOT-NAME.idx'. Next, to alphabetize and to do other
-manipulations you run an external command, typically 'makeindex' or
-'xindy' (*note makeindex::). These output a file 'ROOT-NAME.ind'.
-Finally, you bring the information back into your document and typeset
-it with the '\printindex' command (*note \printindex::).
+ Thus, if the above example is in the file 'numth.tex' then running
+'pdflatex numth' will save index entry and page number information to
+'numth.idx'. Then running 'makeindex numth' will alphabetize and save
+the results to 'numth.ind'. Finally, again running 'pdflatex numth'
+will show the desired index, at the place where the '\printindex'
+command is in the source file.
+ There are many options for the output. An example is that the
+exclamation point in '\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}' produces
+a main entry of 'congruence' with a subentry of 'and Wilson's Theorem'.
+For more, *note makeindex::.
+
+ The '\makeindex' and '\printindex' commands are independent. Leaving
+out the '\makeindex' will stop LaTeX from saving the index entries to
+the auxiliary file. Leaving out the '\printindex' will cause LaTeX to
+not show the index in the document output.
+
There are many packages in the area of indexing. The 'showidx'
package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page
-where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. The
+where the '\index' appears. This can help in preparing the index. The
'multind' package, among others, supports multiple indexes. See also
the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind>,
and the CTAN topic, <https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi>.
@@ -15447,14 +15790,45 @@
* Menu:
+* Produce the index manually:: Alphabetize entries yourself.
* \index:: Declare an index entry.
-* makeindex:: Alphabetize index entries.
+* makeindex:: Alphabetize index entries automatically.
* \printindex:: Put the index here.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \index, Next: makeindex, Up: Indexes
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Produce the index manually, Next: \index, Up: Indexes
-25.2.1 '\index'
+25.2.1 Produce the index manually
+---------------------------------
+
+Documents that are small and static can have a manually produced index.
+This will make a separate page labeled 'Index', in twocolumn format.
+
+ \begin{theindex}
+ \item acorn squash, 1
+ \subitem maple baked, 2
+ \indexspace
+ \item bacon, 3
+ \subitem maple baked, 4
+ \end{theindex}
+
+ Note that the author must enter the page numbers, which is tedious
+and which will result in wrong numbers if the document changes. This is
+why in most cases automated methods such as 'makeindex' are best. *Note
+Indexes::.
+
+ However we cover the commands for completeness, and because the
+automated methods are based on these commands. There are three levels
+of entries. As the example shows, a main entry uses '\item', subentries
+use '\subitem', and the lowest level uses '\subsubitem'. Blank lines
+between entries have no effect. The example above includes
+'\indexspace' to produce vertical space in the output that some index
+styles use before the first entry starting with a new letter.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \index, Next: makeindex, Prev: Produce the index manually, Up: Indexes
+
+25.2.2 '\index'
---------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15469,6 +15843,8 @@
process the index entries with 'makeindex test', and then compile again
with 'pdflatex test'.
+ % file test.tex
+ ...
W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
...
Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
@@ -15481,7 +15857,7 @@
levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
'\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}' then 'makeindex'
says 'Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
-rejected)' and nothing appears in the index).
+rejected)' and the fourth level is silently missing from the index.)
If you enter a second '\index' with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
you will get a single index entry with two page numbers (unless they
@@ -15495,12 +15871,12 @@
W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
...
- D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+ D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert|(}
...
- disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+ disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert|)}
If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
-just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+just gives a single page number, not a range.
If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
'\index{Jones!program}' and '\index{Jones!results}', then the output is
@@ -15507,15 +15883,15 @@
the item 'Jones' with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
like 'program, 50' and 'results, 51'.
- Generate a index entry that says 'See' by using a vertical bar
+ Generate a index entry that says 'see' by using a vertical bar
character: '\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}'. You
-can instead get 'See also' with 'seealso'. (The text 'See' is defined
-by '\seename', and 'See also' by '\alsoname'. You can redefine these
+can instead get 'see also' with 'seealso'. (The text 'see' is defined
+by '\seename', and 'see also' by '\alsoname'. You can redefine these
either by using an internationalization package such as 'babel' or
-'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
-#1}'.)
+'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}{Also
+see}'.)
- The 'See' feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
+ The 'see' feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
'\index{group|textit}' (note the missing backslash on the '\textit'
command) and the system will apply that command to the page number, here
@@ -15548,9 +15924,9 @@
produces an index entry 'SMC' alphabetized into a different location
than its spelling would naturally give it.
- To put a '!', or '@', or '|' character in an index entry, preceding
-it with a double quote, '"'. (The double quote gets deleted before
-alphabetization.)
+ To put a '!', or '@', or '|', or '"' character in an index entry,
+escape it by preceding it with a double quote, '"'. (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond
that provided by 'makeidx'. One is 'index', which allows for multiple
@@ -15572,7 +15948,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: makeindex, Next: \printindex, Prev: \index, Up: Indexes
-25.2.2 'makeindex'
+25.2.3 'makeindex'
------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -15612,7 +15988,7 @@
CTAN.
A style file consists of a list of pairs: SPECIFIER and ATTRIBUTE.
-These can appear in the file in any order. All of the ATTRIBUTES are
+These can appear in the file in any order. All of the ATTRIBUTEs are
strings, except where noted. Strings are surrounded with double quotes,
'"', and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters. The '\n' is
for a newline and '\t' is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with
@@ -15620,18 +15996,19 @@
then it is a comment.
'preamble'
- Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the
- index is formatted. Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
+ Preamble of the output index file. Defines the context in which
+ the index is formatted. Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
'postamble'
- Postamble of the output file. Default: '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
+ Postamble of the output index file. Default:
+ '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
'group_skip'
Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
- for entries starting with 'a', etc. This specifier gives what is
- inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n \\indexspace\n"'
- ('\indexspace' is a command inserting a rubber length, by default
- '10pt plus5pt minus3pt').
+ for entries starting with letter 'a', etc. This specifier gives
+ what is inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n
+ \\indexspace\n"' ('\indexspace' is a command inserting a rubber
+ length, by default '10pt plus5pt minus3pt').
'lethead_flag'
An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
@@ -15721,7 +16098,7 @@
'"rnaRA"'.
There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
-does. One is 'xindy' (https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does
+does. One is 'xindy' (<https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy>), which does
internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
using LaTeX and a number of other languages. It is written in Lisp,
highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating
@@ -15733,7 +16110,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \printindex, Prev: makeindex, Up: Indexes
-25.2.3 '\printindex'
+25.2.4 '\printindex'
--------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -16278,9 +16655,9 @@
\openout NUMBER=FILENAME
- Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The NUMBER must
-be between 0 and 15, as in '\openin3' (in LuaLaTeX NUMBER can be between
-0 and 255).
+ Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. In most
+engines, the NUMBER must be between 0 and 15, as in '\openin3'; in
+LuaLaTeX, NUMBER can be between 0 and 127.
Here TeX opens the file 'presidents.tex' for reading.
@@ -16436,8 +16813,8 @@
being printed.
LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. As above, use
-the command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. Use the
+command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
spaces. Use '^^J' to get a newline. Get a percent character with
'\csname @percentchar\endcsname'.
@@ -16922,18 +17299,28 @@
pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
-called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first. (See the
-next section.)
+called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first. (*note
+Jobname::.)
- In this example, we pass the 'draft' option to the 'graphicx'
-package:
+ In this example we use the command line to select which parts of a
+document to include. For a book named 'mybook.tex' and structured like
+this.
- pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ \include{chap1}
+ \include{chap2}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
-so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information
-but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only
-the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink.
+the command line
+ pdflatex "\includeonly{chap1}\input{mybook}"
+
+will give output that has the first chapter but no other chapter. *Note
+Splitting the input::.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Jobname, Next: Recovering from errors, Prev: Command line input, Up: Command line interface
@@ -16950,10 +17337,12 @@
where LATEX-ENGINE is 'pdflatex', 'lualatex', etc. (*note TeX
engines::). If ARGUMENT does not start with a backslash, as is the case
above with 'thesis', then TeX considers it to be the name of the file to
-input as the main document. The name of that root file, without the
-'.tex' extension, is the jobname. If ARGUMENT does start with a
-backslash, or if TeX is in interactive mode, then it waits for the first
-'\input' command, and the jobname is the argument to '\input'.
+input as the main document. This file is referred to as the "root file"
+(*note Splitting the input::, and *note \input::). The name of that
+root file, without the '.tex' extension if any, is the jobname. If
+ARGUMENT does start with a backslash, or if TeX is in interactive mode,
+then it waits for the first '\input' command, and the jobname is the
+argument to '\input'.
There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly
specified with the '-jobname' option, as in 'pdflatex -jobname=myname'
@@ -16960,9 +17349,9 @@
(*note Command line input:: for a real example).
The final possibility is 'texput', which is the final fallback
-default if no other name is available to TeX. For example, if no
-'-jobname' option was specified, and the compilation stops before there
-is any output, then the log file will be named 'texput.log'.
+default if no other name is available to TeX. That is, if no '-jobname'
+option was specified, and the compilation stops before any input file is
+met, then the log file will be named 'texput.log'.
A special case of this is that in LaTeX versions of (approximately)
2020 or later, the jobname is also 'texput' if the first '\input' occurs
@@ -17218,6 +17607,7 @@
* & for table cells: tabular. (line 32)
* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
(line 23)
+* *, to \nocite all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 61)
* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 27)
* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
@@ -17249,6 +17639,8 @@
(line 18)
* -1, write stream number: \write. (line 30)
* .aux file: Output files. (line 33)
+* .aux file and BibTeX commands: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 6)
* .dvi file: Output files. (line 10)
* .fmt file: TeX engines. (line 6)
* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 43)
@@ -17284,16 +17676,16 @@
(line 6)
* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
-* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
* \!: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 25)
-* \#: Reserved characters. (line 14)
-* \$: Reserved characters. (line 14)
-* \%: Reserved characters. (line 14)
-* \&: Reserved characters. (line 14)
+* \#: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \$: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \%: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \&: Reserved characters. (line 13)
* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 29)
* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 87)
* \(...\) inline math: math. (line 12)
@@ -17300,13 +17692,13 @@
* \*: \*. (line 6)
* \+: tabbing. (line 79)
* \,: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* \-: tabbing. (line 83)
* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 32)
* \/: \/. (line 6)
* \:: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 34)
+ (line 36)
* \;: Spacing in math mode.
(line 23)
* \<: tabbing. (line 75)
@@ -17314,16 +17706,16 @@
* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 69)
* \>: tabbing. (line 73)
* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 34)
+ (line 36)
* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 72)
* \@: \@. (line 6)
* \@auxout: \write. (line 45)
-* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 242)
+* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 243)
* \@dottedtocline: \@dottedtocline. (line 6)
-* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 250)
+* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 251)
* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 24)
* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 6)
-* \@itempenalty: list. (line 246)
+* \@itempenalty: list. (line 247)
* \@mainaux: \write. (line 45)
* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 6)
* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 102)
@@ -17352,12 +17744,12 @@
(line 14)
* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
(line 19)
-* \alsoname: \index. (line 56)
+* \alsoname: \index. (line 58)
* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 27)
* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
* \angle: Math symbols. (line 30)
* \appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 35)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 34)
* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
(line 24)
* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9)
@@ -17367,8 +17759,8 @@
* \arraycolsep: array. (line 51)
* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 157)
* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 163)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 38)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 46)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 37)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 44)
* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 6)
* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
(line 9)
@@ -17382,7 +17774,7 @@
* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 51)
* \backmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 49)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 47)
* \bar: Math accents. (line 13)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
(line 101)
@@ -17391,47 +17783,55 @@
* \baselinestretch: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 6)
* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 53)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 51)
* \bf: Font styles. (line 75)
* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 40)
+* \bibdata: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 16)
* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bibliography and internal \bibdata: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 17)
* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bibliographystyle and internal \bibstyle: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 20)
* \bibname: thebibliography. (line 44)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 56)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 61)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 64)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 69)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 72)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 75)
+* \bibstyle: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 19)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 54)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 58)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 61)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 65)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 68)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 71)
* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 28)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 29)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 84)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 78)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 81)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 87)
-* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 91)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 94)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 80)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 74)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 77)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 83)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 87)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 90)
* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 6)
* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 14)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 97)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 93)
* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 94)
* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 95)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 102)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 105)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 97)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 100)
* \breve: Math accents. (line 16)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 110)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 105)
* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 61)
* \cal: Font styles. (line 78)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 113)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 108)
* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 29)
-* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 87)
-* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 91)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 89)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 93)
* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 61)
* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 40)
* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 25)
@@ -17444,10 +17844,11 @@
* \capitalring: Accents. (line 77)
* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 83)
* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 48)
-* \caption: figure. (line 44)
-* \caption <1>: table. (line 42)
+* \caption: \caption. (line 6)
+* \caption <1>: figure. (line 43)
+* \caption <2>: table. (line 42)
* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 118)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 112)
* \cdots: Dots. (line 17)
* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
@@ -17457,10 +17858,14 @@
(line 21)
* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
(line 21)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 121)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 124)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 115)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 118)
* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
+* \citation: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 22)
* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
+* \cite and internal \citation: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 23)
* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
(line 41)
* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
@@ -17479,7 +17884,7 @@
* \closein: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \closeout: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 129)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 122)
* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
(line 6)
* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 20)
@@ -17497,13 +17902,13 @@
(line 8)
* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 9)
-* \complement: Math symbols. (line 132)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 138)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 125)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 131)
* \contentsline: Table of contents etc..
- (line 63)
+ (line 62)
* \contentsline <1>: \addcontentsline. (line 10)
* \contentsline <2>: \contentsline. (line 6)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 141)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 134)
* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 13)
* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
@@ -17510,14 +17915,14 @@
* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 144)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 137)
* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
(line 60)
* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 65)
* \dag: Text symbols. (line 17)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 148)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 141)
* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 151)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 144)
* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 50)
* \day: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
@@ -17527,7 +17932,7 @@
* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 45)
* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 84)
* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 20)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 156)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 148)
* \ddot: Math accents. (line 22)
* \ddots: Dots. (line 21)
* \DeclareFontEncoding: \DeclareFontEncoding.
@@ -17553,51 +17958,51 @@
(line 6)
* \DeclareTextCommand <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
(line 6)
-* \DeclareTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
+* \DeclareTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
(line 6)
-* \DeclareTextCommandDefault <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
- (line 6)
* \DeclareTextComposite: \DeclareTextComposite.
(line 6)
* \DeclareTextCompositeCommand: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
(line 6)
-* \DeclareTextSymbol: \DeclareTextSymbol. (line 6)
-* \DeclareTextSymbol <1>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
+* \DeclareTextSymbol: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
+ (line 37)
+* \DeclareTextSymbol <1>: \DeclareTextSymbol. (line 6)
+* \DeclareTextSymbol <2>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
(line 6)
* \DeclareTextSymbolDefault: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
(line 6)
* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
* \DelayedShellEscape: \write18. (line 71)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 159)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 162)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 151)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 154)
* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
* \dh (ð): Additional Latin letters.
(line 20)
* \DH (Ð): Additional Latin letters.
(line 20)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 165)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 169)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 174)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 157)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 161)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 165)
* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
-* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 61)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 177)
+* \displaystyle: Math styles. (line 29)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 168)
* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
(line 26)
* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
(line 26)
* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
-* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 30)
+* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 32)
* \dot: Math accents. (line 25)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 180)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 171)
* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
(line 6)
* \dots: Text symbols. (line 37)
* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 168)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 185)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 189)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 193)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 175)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 179)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 183)
* \emph: Font styles. (line 60)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 196)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 186)
* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
* \end: Environments. (line 6)
* \endinput: \endinput. (line 6)
@@ -17608,9 +18013,9 @@
* \enumii: enumerate. (line 47)
* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 47)
* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 47)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 199)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 206)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 209)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 189)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 195)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 198)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
(line 84)
* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -17619,19 +18024,19 @@
(line 68)
* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
(line 172)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 212)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 201)
* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
* \externaldocument: xr package. (line 6)
* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 108)
* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 6)
* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 31)
-* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
-* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 38)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 38)
+* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 37)
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 31)
-* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 44)
-* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 43)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 43)
+* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 42)
* \fill: \hfill. (line 18)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 215)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 204)
* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 98)
* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 99)
* \floatsep: Floats. (line 114)
@@ -17661,23 +18066,24 @@
(line 26)
* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 27)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 218)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 207)
* \frac: \frac. (line 6)
* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 6)
-* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
+ (line 6)
* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 221)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 210)
* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 224)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 227)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 213)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 216)
* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 230)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 234)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 238)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 241)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 219)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 223)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 227)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 230)
* \gls: \gls. (line 6)
* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 6)
* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 6)
@@ -17688,7 +18094,7 @@
* \guilsinglright (›): Text symbols. (line 32)
* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 69)
* \hat: Math accents. (line 31)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 244)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 233)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
(line 14)
* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -17697,12 +18103,12 @@
(line 19)
* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 20)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 247)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 236)
* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 250)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 253)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 239)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 242)
* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
(line 6)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
@@ -17716,7 +18122,7 @@
* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 19)
* \IfBeginWith* macro from xstring: Jobname. (line 53)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 256)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 245)
* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
(line 128)
* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
@@ -17727,10 +18133,10 @@
(line 32)
* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 32)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 260)
-* \imath: Math symbols. (line 263)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 249)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 252)
* \immediate\write: \write. (line 60)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 267)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 256)
* \include: \include & \includeonly.
(line 6)
* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
@@ -17739,32 +18145,37 @@
* \indent: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
* \index: Indexes. (line 6)
* \index <1>: \index. (line 6)
-* \indexentry: \index. (line 106)
-* \indexspace: makeindex. (line 58)
+* \indexentry: \index. (line 108)
+* \indexspace: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 22)
+* \indexspace <1>: makeindex. (line 59)
* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 271)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 260)
* \input: \input. (line 6)
+* \inputencoding: inputenc package. (line 50)
* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
(line 128)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 274)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 263)
* \intextsep: Floats. (line 118)
* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 119)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 277)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 266)
* \it: Font styles. (line 81)
* \item: description. (line 31)
* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 29)
* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6)
* \item <3>: itemize. (line 30)
+* \item <4>: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 22)
* \itemindent: list. (line 84)
* \itemsep: list. (line 88)
* \itshape: Font styles. (line 34)
* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 19)
-* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 283)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 272)
* \jobname: Jobname. (line 6)
-* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 44)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 280)
+* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 46)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 269)
* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 73)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 287)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 276)
* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
* \kill: tabbing. (line 107)
* \l (ł): Additional Latin letters.
@@ -17785,10 +18196,10 @@
* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 42)
* \labelsep: list. (line 100)
* \labelwidth: list. (line 105)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 290)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 293)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 296)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 300)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 279)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 282)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 285)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 289)
* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
@@ -17796,19 +18207,19 @@
(line 6)
* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 23)
* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 26)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 304)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 307)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 310)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 293)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 296)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 299)
* \ldots: Dots. (line 24)
* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 36)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 315)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 318)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 303)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 306)
* \left: \left & \right. (line 6)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 324)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 329)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 46)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 333)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 336)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 312)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 316)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 44)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 320)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 323)
* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 125)
* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 58)
@@ -17817,12 +18228,12 @@
* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 58)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 339)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 344)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 349)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 352)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 326)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 330)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 334)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 337)
* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 355)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 340)
* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
@@ -17849,9 +18260,9 @@
(line 6)
* \listoftables <1>: \contentsline. (line 6)
* \listparindent: list. (line 142)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 361)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 346)
* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 364)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 349)
* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
(line 148)
* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
@@ -17860,11 +18271,11 @@
* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
* \long: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 27)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 367)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 372)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 377)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 382)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 387)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 352)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 356)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 360)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 364)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 368)
* \lq: Text symbols. (line 42)
* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
@@ -17876,7 +18287,7 @@
* \makelabel: list. (line 61)
* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 391)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 372)
* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
(line 40)
@@ -17897,17 +18308,17 @@
* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 84)
* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 111)
* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 127)
-* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 872)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 832)
* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 124)
-* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 875)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 835)
* \mathring: Math accents. (line 34)
* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 108)
-* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 878)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 838)
* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 114)
-* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 881)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 841)
* \mathstrut: \mathstrut. (line 6)
* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 117)
-* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 884)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 844)
* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 129)
* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
@@ -17917,35 +18328,35 @@
* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 34)
* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 34)
+ (line 36)
* \message: \message. (line 6)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 396)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 399)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 376)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 379)
* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 409)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 389)
* \month: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 414)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 417)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 393)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 396)
* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 420)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 399)
* \name: \name. (line 6)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 423)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 426)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 429)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 402)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 405)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 408)
* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
(line 182)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 432)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 411)
* \negmedspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 39)
+ (line 42)
* \negthickspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 28)
+ (line 30)
* \negthinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
(line 6)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 436)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 415)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
@@ -17955,7 +18366,7 @@
* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 6)
* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
-* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \<NEWLINE>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
@@ -17965,8 +18376,11 @@
(line 40)
* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
(line 40)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 439)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 418)
* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
+* \nocite and internal \citation: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 23)
+* \nocite {*}, for all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 61)
* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 22)
* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 22)
* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 6)
@@ -17973,8 +18387,9 @@
* \noindent: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
(line 6)
-* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
-* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 41)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
+ (line 6)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 39)
* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 58)
@@ -17981,11 +18396,11 @@
* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 6)
* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 444)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 452)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 456)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 422)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 430)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 434)
* \numberline: \numberline. (line 6)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 459)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 437)
* \o (ø): Additional Latin letters.
(line 44)
* \O (Ø): Additional Latin letters.
@@ -17998,31 +18413,31 @@
(line 66)
* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 68)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 462)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 440)
* \oe (œ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 48)
* \OE (Œ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 48)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 466)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 444)
* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 133)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 469)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 472)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 475)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 447)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 450)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 453)
* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* \openin: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
* \openout: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 478)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 456)
* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
(line 200)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 483)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 486)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 460)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 463)
* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 40)
+ (line 39)
* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 21)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 491)
+ (line 20)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 467)
* \P: Text symbols. (line 45)
* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
(line 41)
@@ -18051,7 +18466,7 @@
* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 496)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 471)
* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
* \parindent: minipage. (line 103)
* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
@@ -18063,7 +18478,7 @@
* \parskip example: itemize. (line 78)
* \part: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \part <1>: \part. (line 6)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 499)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 474)
* \partopsep: list. (line 157)
* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
(line 206)
@@ -18073,32 +18488,31 @@
(line 40)
* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
(line 40)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 502)
-* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 506)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 509)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 514)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 517)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 521)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 477)
+* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 481)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 484)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 488)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 491)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 495)
* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 113)
* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 114)
* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 49)
* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 524)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 527)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 498)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 501)
* \prevdepth: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 45)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 531)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 505)
* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 43)
* \printindex: \printindex. (line 6)
-* \printindex <1>: \printindex. (line 10)
* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
(line 243)
* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
(line 243)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 540)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 543)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 514)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 517)
* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
* \protected at write: \write. (line 70)
* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6)
@@ -18115,17 +18529,17 @@
* \ProvideTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
(line 6)
* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 546)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 549)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 520)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 523)
* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 116)
* \put: \put. (line 6)
* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 6)
* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 71)
+ (line 75)
* \qquad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
(line 6)
* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 65)
+ (line 69)
* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
(line 6)
* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 53)
@@ -18135,11 +18549,11 @@
* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 552)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 557)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 560)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 564)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 567)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 526)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 530)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 533)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 537)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 540)
* \read: \read. (line 6)
* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 6)
@@ -18149,24 +18563,24 @@
(line 6)
* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
(line 323)
-* \RequirePackage, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 30)
+* \RequirePackage, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 32)
* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
(line 323)
* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 6)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
-* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 573)
-* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 578)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 545)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 550)
* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 583)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 588)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 594)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 555)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 559)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 565)
* \right: \left & \right. (line 6)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 599)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 604)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 608)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 611)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 614)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 569)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 573)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 577)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 580)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 583)
* \rightmargin: list. (line 172)
* \rm: Font styles. (line 84)
* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 31)
@@ -18178,36 +18592,40 @@
* \rq: Text symbols. (line 57)
* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
* \S: Text symbols. (line 60)
+* \samepage: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 44)
* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
* \sc: Font styles. (line 87)
* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* \scriptscriptstyle: Math styles. (line 29)
* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \scriptstyle: Math styles. (line 29)
* \scshape: Font styles. (line 52)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 617)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 586)
* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
* \section: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \section <1>: \section. (line 6)
-* \seename: \index. (line 56)
+* \seename: \index. (line 58)
* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
(line 118)
* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 620)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 589)
* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
* \sf: Font styles. (line 90)
* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 49)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 626)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 594)
* \ShellEscape: \write18. (line 71)
* \shipout and expansion: \write. (line 65)
* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 629)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 632)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 597)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 600)
* \signature: \signature. (line 11)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 636)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 639)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 604)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 607)
* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
* \sl: Font styles. (line 93)
@@ -18214,57 +18632,65 @@
* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
* \slshape: Font styles. (line 46)
* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 642)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 610)
* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 38)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 39)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 646)
-* \SPACE: \(SPACE). (line 6)
-* \SPACE <1>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 614)
+* \<SPACE>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \<SPACE> <1>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \space: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 88)
+* \space <1>: \input. (line 32)
+* \space <2>: \typeout. (line 22)
* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 10)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 649)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 652)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 656)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 617)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 620)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 624)
* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 6)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 660)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 665)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 670)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 675)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 628)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 633)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 637)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 642)
* \ss (ß): Additional Latin letters.
(line 52)
* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
(line 52)
* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 6)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 680)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 646)
* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
* \stop: Recovering from errors.
(line 23)
* \stretch: \stretch. (line 6)
* \strut: \strut. (line 6)
+* \subitem: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 22)
* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 6)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 688)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 691)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 653)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 656)
+* \subsubitem: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 22)
* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 694)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 697)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 702)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 659)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 662)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 666)
* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 87)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 705)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 708)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 711)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 716)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 669)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 672)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 675)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 680)
* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
(line 6)
* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 83)
-* \TAB: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \<TAB>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 121)
* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 172)
* \tableofcontents: Table of contents etc..
@@ -18272,7 +18698,7 @@
* \tableofcontents <1>: \contentsline. (line 6)
* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 719)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 683)
* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 64)
* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 102)
@@ -18279,7 +18705,7 @@
* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 67)
* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 70)
* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 73)
-* \textbackslash: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \textbackslash: Reserved characters. (line 18)
* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 76)
* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 79)
* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 82)
@@ -18337,6 +18763,7 @@
* \textsf: Font styles. (line 49)
* \textsl: Font styles. (line 46)
* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 50)
+* \textstyle: Math styles. (line 29)
* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 200)
* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 203)
* \texttt: Font styles. (line 55)
@@ -18353,23 +18780,23 @@
* \TH (Þ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 56)
* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 56)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 722)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 686)
* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 23)
* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6)
* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
(line 6)
* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
* \tilde: Math accents. (line 37)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 726)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 690)
* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 63)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 729)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 693)
* \today: \today. (line 6)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 733)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 697)
* \topfraction: Floats. (line 107)
* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 108)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18379,15 +18806,15 @@
(line 131)
* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 132)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 738)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 741)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 747)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 701)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 704)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 710)
* \tt: Font styles. (line 96)
* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 55)
* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
-* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 87)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 89)
* \unboldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 6)
* \unboldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
@@ -18394,21 +18821,21 @@
(line 14)
* \underbar: Accents. (line 53)
* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 26)
+ (line 25)
* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
(line 9)
* \unitlength: picture. (line 28)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 753)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 759)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 765)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 769)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 773)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 778)
-* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 783)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 788)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 716)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 722)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 728)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 732)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 736)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 741)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 746)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 751)
* \upshape: Font styles. (line 43)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 795)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 798)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 756)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 759)
* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
@@ -18418,34 +18845,34 @@
(line 6)
* \UseTextSymbol: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent.
(line 6)
-* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 91)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 93)
* \value: \value. (line 6)
-* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 806)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 801)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 811)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 815)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 819)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 823)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 827)
-* \vbox plain TeX: minipage. (line 57)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 831)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 767)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 762)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 772)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 776)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 780)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 784)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 788)
+* \vbox (plain TeX): minipage. (line 57)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 792)
* \vdots: Dots. (line 33)
* \vec: Math accents. (line 40)
* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 835)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 796)
* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 839)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 843)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 800)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 804)
* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
* \vtop plain TeX: minipage. (line 53)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 850)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 810)
* \widehat: Math accents. (line 43)
* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 46)
* \wlog: \wlog. (line 6)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 854)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 857)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 814)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 817)
* \write: \write. (line 6)
* \write and security: \write and security. (line 6)
* \write streams 16, 17, 18: \write. (line 86)
@@ -18452,39 +18879,39 @@
* \write18: \write18. (line 6)
* \write18, enabling: Command line options.
(line 61)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 860)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 863)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 820)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 823)
* \xspace: xspace package. (line 6)
* \year: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 866)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 826)
* \[...\] display math: displaymath. (line 26)
* \\ (for center): center. (line 16)
* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 29)
* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12)
-* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 32)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 35)
* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 66)
* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 14)
-* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 49)
-* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 35)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 48)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 36)
* \\ for verse: verse. (line 21)
* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 64)
* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
-* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 37)
-* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 35)
+* \^: Reserved characters. (line 18)
* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 40)
-* \_: Reserved characters. (line 14)
+* \_: Reserved characters. (line 13)
* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 44)
* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 93)
-* \{: Reserved characters. (line 14)
+* \{: Reserved characters. (line 13)
* \|: Math symbols. (line 18)
-* \}: Reserved characters. (line 14)
-* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \}: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \~: Reserved characters. (line 18)
* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 48)
* ^ superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
-* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 95)
+* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 94)
* _ subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
@@ -18524,35 +18951,39 @@
* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 6)
* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
* amscd package: Arrows. (line 41)
-* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 61)
* amsfonts package <1>: Arrows. (line 6)
* amsmath package: array. (line 55)
-* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 66)
+* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 63)
* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 22)
* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 20)
* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 28)
-* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 61)
* amsmath package <6>: \left & \right. (line 30)
-* amsmath package <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 68)
+* amsmath package <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 67)
* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 36)
* amsmath package <9>: Math functions. (line 111)
-* amsmath package <10>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 54)
-* amsmath package <11>: Colon character & \colon.
+* amsmath package <10>: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 23)
+* amsmath package <11>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 56)
+* amsmath package <12>: Colon character & \colon.
(line 15)
-* amsmath package <12>: Colon character & \colon.
+* amsmath package <13>: Colon character & \colon.
(line 19)
+* amsmath package <14>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 26)
* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
* amsthm package: theorem. (line 28)
* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 18)
-* answers package: \write. (line 100)
+* answers package: \write. (line 99)
* appendices: \appendix. (line 6)
* appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
* appendix package: \appendix. (line 29)
* aring: Additional Latin letters.
(line 12)
-* array (package) package: array. (line 77)
* array environment: array. (line 6)
+* array package: array. (line 74)
* arrays, math: array. (line 6)
* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 157)
* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 198)
@@ -18562,7 +18993,7 @@
* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 68)
* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 71)
* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 74)
-* Asymptote package: \line. (line 36)
+* Asymptote package: \line. (line 35)
* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 62)
* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 74)
* Asymptote package <3>: \write18. (line 13)
@@ -18577,8 +19008,8 @@
* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 6)
* babel package <3>: \today. (line 13)
* babel package <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 124)
-* babel package <5>: \index. (line 56)
+ (line 123)
+* babel package <5>: \index. (line 58)
* back matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 6)
@@ -18598,6 +19029,8 @@
(line 67)
* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
+* BibTeX error messages: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 6)
* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
* big point: Units of length. (line 20)
@@ -18624,15 +19057,15 @@
(line 6)
* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 130)
* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 131)
-* bounding box: \includegraphics. (line 122)
+* bounding box: \includegraphics. (line 121)
* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 6)
-* box, bounding: \includegraphics. (line 122)
+* box, bounding: \includegraphics. (line 121)
* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 6)
* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 6)
* boxes: Boxes. (line 6)
-* bp: Units of length. (line 20)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 19)
* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 92)
* braces: Delimiters. (line 6)
@@ -18640,22 +19073,24 @@
* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6)
* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6)
* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 6)
-* breve accent: Accents. (line 87)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 89)
* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
* bug reporting: About this document. (line 24)
* bullet lists: itemize. (line 6)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 111)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 106)
* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 95)
* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 6)
* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 79)
* cap height: Text symbols. (line 103)
-* caron accent: Accents. (line 91)
+* caption package: \caption. (line 72)
+* captions: \caption. (line 6)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 93)
* catcode: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 19)
+ (line 18)
* category code, character: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 19)
-* cc: Units of length. (line 33)
+ (line 18)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 32)
* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 61)
* center environment: center. (line 6)
@@ -18665,13 +19100,14 @@
* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 170)
* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
-* centimeter: Units of length. (line 24)
+* centimeter: Units of length. (line 27)
* changing case of characters: Upper and lower case.
(line 6)
* chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 6)
+* chapter counter: Counters. (line 15)
* character category code: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 19)
+ (line 18)
* character encoding: inputenc package. (line 15)
* character, invisible: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
(line 6)
@@ -18683,7 +19119,7 @@
(line 6)
* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6)
* characters, special: Reserved characters. (line 6)
-* check accent: Accents. (line 91)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 93)
* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
* cicero: Units of length. (line 33)
* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
@@ -18718,7 +19154,7 @@
(line 99)
* closing letters: \closing. (line 6)
* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 58)
-* cm: Units of length. (line 24)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 26)
* cm-super package: fontenc package. (line 36)
* cmd.exe, used by \write18: \write18. (line 60)
* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
@@ -18770,7 +19206,7 @@
* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
(line 6)
* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6)
-* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 26)
+* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 25)
* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 45)
* creating pictures: picture. (line 6)
* creating tables: table. (line 6)
@@ -18794,8 +19230,8 @@
* datetime package: \today. (line 27)
* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 134)
* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 135)
-* dcolumn package: array. (line 77)
-* dd: Units of length. (line 30)
+* dcolumn package: array. (line 74)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 29)
* declaration form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 24)
* declaration form of font style commands: Font styles. (line 8)
* define color: Define colors. (line 6)
@@ -18810,11 +19246,11 @@
* delayed \write: \write. (line 65)
* delimiters: Delimiters. (line 6)
* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 6)
-* delim_0: makeindex. (line 110)
-* delim_1: makeindex. (line 114)
-* delim_2: makeindex. (line 118)
-* delim_n: makeindex. (line 122)
-* delim_r: makeindex. (line 126)
+* delim_0: makeindex. (line 109)
+* delim_1: makeindex. (line 113)
+* delim_2: makeindex. (line 117)
+* delim_n: makeindex. (line 121)
+* delim_r: makeindex. (line 125)
* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 46)
* description environment: description. (line 6)
* description lists, creating: description. (line 6)
@@ -18827,7 +19263,8 @@
* directory listings, from system: \write18. (line 65)
* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 6)
* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6)
-* display math mode: Modes. (line 29)
+* display math mode: Modes. (line 31)
+* display style: Math styles. (line 18)
* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
(line 6)
* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
@@ -18849,9 +19286,9 @@
* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 32)
* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 65)
* dotless i: Accents. (line 19)
-* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 264)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 253)
* dotless j: Accents. (line 19)
-* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 284)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 273)
* dots: Dots. (line 6)
* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 21)
@@ -18876,8 +19313,8 @@
* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 16)
* ellipses: Dots. (line 6)
* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 39)
-* em: Units of length. (line 38)
-* em <1>: Units of length. (line 38)
+* em: Units of length. (line 46)
+* em <1>: Units of length. (line 45)
* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 119)
* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 201)
* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 207)
@@ -18893,10 +19330,14 @@
* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6)
+* enumi counter: Counters. (line 15)
+* enumii counter: Counters. (line 15)
+* enumiii counter: Counters. (line 15)
* enumitem package: itemize. (line 66)
-* enumitem package <1>: list. (line 254)
+* enumitem package <1>: list. (line 255)
+* enumiv counter: Counters. (line 15)
* environment: Starting and ending. (line 25)
-* environment form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 36)
+* environment form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 47)
* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 6)
* environment, array: array. (line 6)
* environment, center: center. (line 6)
@@ -18922,10 +19363,13 @@
* environment, picture: picture. (line 6)
* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 6)
* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* environment, sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6)
* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
* environment, table: table. (line 6)
* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 6)
* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* environment, theindex: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 9)
* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6)
* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6)
@@ -18937,16 +19381,19 @@
* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 55)
* EPS files: \includegraphics. (line 6)
* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equation counter: Counters. (line 15)
* equation environment: equation. (line 6)
* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
(line 63)
-* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 41)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 39)
* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
(line 57)
+* error messages, from BibTeX: BibTeX error messages.
+ (line 6)
* errorstopmode: Command line options.
(line 27)
* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
@@ -18959,15 +19406,15 @@
* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 128)
* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 128)
* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 129)
-* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
-* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 38)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 42)
+* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 41)
* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 136)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* expl3 package: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 37)
+ (line 35)
* expl3 package <1>: Upper and lower case.
- (line 49)
+ (line 48)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
* expressions: Expressions. (line 6)
@@ -18975,14 +19422,15 @@
(line 6)
* external commands: \write18. (line 6)
* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 6)
-* fallback jobname: Jobname. (line 25)
+* fallback jobname: Jobname. (line 27)
* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 21)
* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 12)
* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 13)
* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 146)
-* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 42)
+* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 41)
* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* figure counter: Counters. (line 15)
* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 139)
* figure environment: figure. (line 6)
* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
@@ -18992,6 +19440,7 @@
* file, opening: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* file, reading: \read. (line 6)
* file, root: Splitting the input. (line 10)
+* file, root <1>: Jobname. (line 6)
* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 6)
* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 6)
* filename for current job: Command line options.
@@ -19030,9 +19479,11 @@
* fonts: Fonts. (line 6)
* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 6)
+* fontspec package: fontenc package. (line 17)
* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
+* footnote counter: Counters. (line 15)
* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 34)
* footnote, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
@@ -19053,9 +19504,9 @@
* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 33)
* fraction: \frac. (line 6)
* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6)
-* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
-* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
-* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 44)
+* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 38)
+* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 38)
+* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 43)
* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
* front matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
@@ -19085,7 +19536,7 @@
(line 6)
* graphics package options: Graphics package options.
(line 6)
-* graphics packages: \line. (line 36)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 35)
* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 6)
* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
@@ -19099,8 +19550,8 @@
* grfext package: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
(line 39)
* group, and environments: Environments. (line 18)
-* group_skip: makeindex. (line 57)
-* hacek accent: Accents. (line 91)
+* group_skip: makeindex. (line 58)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 93)
* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 13)
* hard space: ~. (line 6)
* hat accent: Accents. (line 40)
@@ -19122,7 +19573,8 @@
* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 48)
* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
-* hyperref package <3>: Command line input. (line 14)
+* hyperref package <3>: \contentsline. (line 37)
+* hyperref package <4>: Command line input. (line 14)
* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 160)
* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6)
@@ -19133,13 +19585,13 @@
(line 20)
* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
(line 56)
-* idx file: \index. (line 106)
+* idx file: \index. (line 108)
* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
(line 32)
* immediate \write: \write. (line 60)
* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
-* in: Units of length. (line 17)
+* in: Units of length. (line 16)
* inch: Units of length. (line 17)
* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
* indent, forcing: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
@@ -19149,23 +19601,26 @@
* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 60)
* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 48)
* indentfirst package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 61)
+ (line 59)
* indentfirst package <5>: \indent & \noindent. (line 48)
-* indent_length: makeindex. (line 138)
-* indent_space: makeindex. (line 134)
-* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 56)
+* indent_length: makeindex. (line 137)
+* indent_space: makeindex. (line 133)
+* index entries, subentries: \index. (line 26)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 58)
* index entry: \index. (line 6)
-* index package: \index. (line 101)
-* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 32)
-* index, page range: \index. (line 40)
+* index package: \index. (line 103)
+* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 51)
+* index, page range: \index. (line 42)
* index, printing: \printindex. (line 6)
* index, processing: makeindex. (line 6)
+* index, producing manually: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 6)
* index, style file: makeindex. (line 18)
* indexes: Indexes. (line 6)
* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 6)
* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 6)
* inline formulas: math. (line 6)
-* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 47)
+* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 51)
* input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
* input, on command line: Command line input. (line 6)
* input/output: Input/output. (line 6)
@@ -19177,7 +19632,7 @@
(line 6)
* interline space: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 6)
-* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 38)
+* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 41)
* invisible character: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
(line 6)
* invisible character <1>: \mathstrut. (line 6)
@@ -19184,12 +19639,12 @@
* italic correction: \/. (line 6)
* italic font: Font styles. (line 82)
* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6)
-* item_0: makeindex. (line 81)
-* item_01: makeindex. (line 90)
-* item_1: makeindex. (line 84)
+* item_0: makeindex. (line 82)
+* item_01: makeindex. (line 91)
+* item_1: makeindex. (line 85)
* item_12: makeindex. (line 100)
-* item_2: makeindex. (line 87)
-* item_x1: makeindex. (line 94)
+* item_2: makeindex. (line 88)
+* item_x1: makeindex. (line 95)
* item_x2: makeindex. (line 104)
* jobname: Command line options.
(line 43)
@@ -19201,7 +19656,7 @@
* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 6)
* label: Cross references. (line 6)
* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6)
-* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 28)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 27)
* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 6)
* landscape option: Document class options.
(line 49)
@@ -19218,7 +19673,7 @@
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document. (line 33)
* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 27)
* LaTeX3 syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 37)
+ (line 35)
* <latexrefman at tug.org> email address: About this document. (line 20)
* latexsym package: Arrows. (line 6)
* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
@@ -19239,7 +19694,7 @@
(line 63)
* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
-* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 16)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 18)
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
@@ -19249,9 +19704,9 @@
* leqno option: Document class options.
(line 49)
* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 154)
-* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 64)
-* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 73)
-* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 77)
+* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 65)
+* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 74)
+* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 78)
* letter class: Document classes. (line 11)
* letter environment: letter. (line 6)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
@@ -19271,7 +19726,7 @@
* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
(line 6)
* lines in tables: tabular. (line 6)
-* line_max: makeindex. (line 130)
+* line_max: makeindex. (line 129)
* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 133)
* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6)
* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6)
@@ -19280,7 +19735,7 @@
* list of figures file: Output files. (line 43)
* list of tables file: Output files. (line 43)
* listings package: tabbing. (line 146)
-* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 36)
+* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 35)
* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 42)
* lists of items: itemize. (line 6)
* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
@@ -19301,7 +19756,7 @@
* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
(line 6)
* LR box: picture. (line 93)
-* LR mode: Modes. (line 16)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 18)
* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
* lshort document: About this document. (line 39)
* lualatex: TeX engines. (line 32)
@@ -19308,18 +19763,19 @@
* lualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 65)
* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 33)
* LuaTeX, 256 output streams in: \write. (line 42)
-* m-width: Units of length. (line 38)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 46)
* macron accent: Accents. (line 36)
* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
* macros2e package: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 41)
+ (line 38)
* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 6)
* mail merges: \read. (line 31)
* main matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
-* makeindex: makeindex. (line 6)
+* makeidx package: \printindex. (line 12)
* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 6)
+* makeindex, program: makeindex. (line 6)
* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 18)
* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
@@ -19333,7 +19789,7 @@
* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 6)
* math functions: Math functions. (line 6)
* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 6)
-* math mode: Modes. (line 26)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 28)
* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 6)
* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
(line 6)
@@ -19341,40 +19797,42 @@
(line 6)
* math mode, spacing <2>: \mathstrut. (line 6)
* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 6)
+* math styles: Math styles. (line 6)
* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
* math, arrows: Arrows. (line 6)
* math, bold: Font styles. (line 129)
-* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 61)
* mathtools package <1>: Delimiters. (line 41)
* mathtools package <2>: \left & \right. (line 30)
* mathtools package <3>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 45)
-* mathtools package <4>: \smash. (line 61)
+ (line 44)
+* mathtools package <4>: \smash. (line 60)
* mathtools package <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 46)
-* MetaPost package: \line. (line 36)
+ (line 48)
+* MetaPost package: \line. (line 35)
* mfirstuc package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 46)
+ (line 45)
* mhchem package: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 62)
-* millimeter: Units of length. (line 27)
+* millimeter: Units of length. (line 24)
* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6)
* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
* minted package: tabbing. (line 146)
-* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 36)
+* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 35)
* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 42)
* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 25)
-* mm: Units of length. (line 27)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 23)
* modes: Modes. (line 6)
* monospace font: Font styles. (line 97)
* moving arguments: \protect. (line 19)
* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 62)
-* mu: Units of length. (line 49)
-* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 49)
+* mpfootnote counter <1>: Counters. (line 15)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 52)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 53)
* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* multilingual support: Accents. (line 6)
-* multind package: Indexes. (line 32)
-* multiple indexes: Indexes. (line 32)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 51)
+* multiple indexes: Indexes. (line 51)
* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 6)
* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 43)
* name of document root: Jobname. (line 6)
@@ -19395,7 +19853,7 @@
* new line, starting: \\. (line 6)
* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6)
* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6)
-* newline, in \write: \write. (line 95)
+* newline, in \write: \write. (line 94)
* noheader option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 34)
* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 160)
* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
@@ -19450,7 +19908,7 @@
* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
(line 44)
* OT1: fontenc package. (line 6)
-* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 47)
+* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 51)
* output directory for all external files: Command line options.
(line 48)
* overbar accent: Accents. (line 36)
@@ -19469,30 +19927,34 @@
* package, adjustbox: Boxes. (line 9)
* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 146)
* package, amscd: Arrows. (line 41)
-* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 61)
* package, amsfonts <1>: Arrows. (line 6)
* package, amsmath: array. (line 55)
-* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 66)
+* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 63)
* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 22)
* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 20)
* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 28)
-* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 61)
* package, amsmath <6>: \left & \right. (line 30)
-* package, amsmath <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 68)
+* package, amsmath <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 67)
* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 36)
* package, amsmath <9>: Math functions. (line 111)
-* package, amsmath <10>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 54)
-* package, amsmath <11>: Colon character & \colon.
+* package, amsmath <10>: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 23)
+* package, amsmath <11>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 56)
+* package, amsmath <12>: Colon character & \colon.
(line 15)
-* package, amsmath <12>: Colon character & \colon.
+* package, amsmath <13>: Colon character & \colon.
(line 19)
+* package, amsmath <14>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 26)
* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 28)
* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 18)
-* package, answers: \write. (line 100)
+* package, answers: \write. (line 99)
* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 29)
-* package, array (package): array. (line 77)
-* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 36)
+* package, array: array. (line 74)
+* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 35)
* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 62)
* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 74)
* package, Asymptote <3>: \write18. (line 13)
@@ -19501,25 +19963,26 @@
* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 6)
* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 13)
* package, babel <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 124)
-* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 56)
+ (line 123)
+* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 58)
* package, beamer: beamer template. (line 6)
* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
(line 6)
* package, bm: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 32)
+* package, caption: \caption. (line 72)
* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 38)
* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 29)
* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 48)
* package, cm-super: fontenc package. (line 36)
* package, comprehensive: Math symbols. (line 6)
-* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 26)
+* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 25)
* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 45)
* package, datatool: \read. (line 31)
* package, datetime: \today. (line 27)
-* package, dcolumn: array. (line 77)
+* package, dcolumn: array. (line 74)
* package, enumitem: itemize. (line 66)
-* package, enumitem <1>: list. (line 254)
+* package, enumitem <1>: list. (line 255)
* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 55)
* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
(line 110)
@@ -19526,15 +19989,16 @@
* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 128)
* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 129)
* package, expl3: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 37)
+ (line 35)
* package, expl3 <1>: Upper and lower case.
- (line 49)
+ (line 48)
* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 12)
* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 13)
* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 146)
-* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 42)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 41)
* package, flafter: Floats. (line 82)
* package, float: Floats. (line 52)
+* package, fontspec: fontenc package. (line 17)
* package, geometry: Document class options.
(line 40)
* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
@@ -19545,57 +20009,61 @@
* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 48)
* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
-* package, hyperref <3>: Command line input. (line 14)
+* package, hyperref <3>: \contentsline. (line 37)
+* package, hyperref <4>: Command line input. (line 14)
* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 50)
* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 58)
* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 60)
* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 48)
* package, indentfirst <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 61)
+ (line 59)
* package, indentfirst <5>: \indent & \noindent. (line 48)
-* package, index: \index. (line 101)
+* package, index: \index. (line 103)
* package, latexsym: Arrows. (line 6)
* package, listings: tabbing. (line 146)
-* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 36)
+* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 35)
* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 42)
* package, lmodern: fontenc package. (line 36)
* package, macros2e: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 41)
-* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 86)
+ (line 38)
+* package, makeidx: \printindex. (line 12)
+* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 61)
* package, mathtools <1>: Delimiters. (line 41)
* package, mathtools <2>: \left & \right. (line 30)
* package, mathtools <3>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 45)
-* package, mathtools <4>: \smash. (line 61)
+ (line 44)
+* package, mathtools <4>: \smash. (line 60)
* package, mathtools <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 46)
-* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 36)
+ (line 48)
+* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 35)
* package, mfirstuc: Upper and lower case.
- (line 46)
+ (line 45)
* package, mhchem: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 62)
* package, minted: tabbing. (line 146)
-* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 36)
+* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 35)
* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 42)
-* package, multind: Indexes. (line 32)
-* package, pict2e: \line. (line 36)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 51)
+* package, pict2e: \line. (line 35)
* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 6)
* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 13)
* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 125)
-* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 56)
-* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 36)
+ (line 124)
+* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 58)
+* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 35)
* package, setspace: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 79)
* package, shellesc: \write18. (line 71)
-* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 32)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 51)
* package, siunitx: minipage. (line 137)
-* package, siunitx <1>: ~. (line 37)
-* package, suffix: \@ifstar. (line 66)
+* package, siunitx <1>: ~. (line 42)
+* package, suffix: \@ifstar. (line 64)
+* package, tablefootnote: Footnotes in a table.
+ (line 53)
* package, texosquery: \write18. (line 65)
* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 43)
-* package, TikZ: \line. (line 36)
+ (line 42)
+* package, TikZ: \line. (line 35)
* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 62)
* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
* package, tikz-cd: Arrows. (line 41)
@@ -19605,19 +20073,23 @@
* package, titlesec <3>: \section. (line 64)
* package, titlesec <4>: \subsection. (line 52)
* package, titlesec <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 65)
+ (line 63)
* package, tocbibbind: Table of contents etc..
- (line 111)
+ (line 110)
* package, tocloft: Table of contents etc..
- (line 111)
+ (line 110)
+* package, tocloft <1>: \contentsline. (line 34)
* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
(line 15)
* package, unicode-math: Greek letters. (line 37)
* package, url: \verb. (line 39)
-* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 42)
+* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 41)
* package, xparse: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 37)
-* package, xparse <1>: \@ifstar. (line 66)
+ (line 35)
+* package, xparse <1>: \@ifstar. (line 64)
+* package, xr: xr package. (line 6)
+* package, xr-hyper: xr package. (line 6)
+* package, xspace: xspace package. (line 6)
* package, xstring: Jobname. (line 53)
* packages, loading additional: Additional packages. (line 6)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
@@ -19625,6 +20097,7 @@
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6)
+* page counter: Counters. (line 15)
* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 6)
@@ -19632,11 +20105,12 @@
* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
* page styles: Page styles. (line 6)
* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 6)
-* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 143)
+* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 142)
* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 6)
* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
* paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
+* paragraph counter: Counters. (line 15)
* paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
(line 6)
* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 103)
@@ -19656,8 +20130,9 @@
* parentheses: Delimiters. (line 6)
* part: Sectioning. (line 6)
* part <1>: \part. (line 6)
+* part counter: Counters. (line 15)
* pattern, current tab stops, tabbing: tabbing. (line 51)
-* pc: Units of length. (line 14)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 13)
* PDF graphic files: \includegraphics. (line 6)
* pdflatex: TeX engines. (line 15)
* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 20)
@@ -19669,8 +20144,7 @@
* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 6)
* period, spacing after: \@. (line 6)
* pica: Units of length. (line 14)
-* pict2e package: \line. (line 36)
-* pict2e package <1>: \line. (line 36)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 35)
* picture environment: picture. (line 6)
* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 47)
@@ -19686,8 +20160,8 @@
* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 6)
* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 13)
* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 125)
-* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 56)
+ (line 124)
+* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 58)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
(line 60)
* position, in picture: picture. (line 64)
@@ -19694,6 +20168,7 @@
* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 54)
* postamble: makeindex. (line 54)
+* PostScript point: Units of length. (line 20)
* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 51)
* preamble: makeindex. (line 50)
@@ -19701,11 +20176,11 @@
* prerelease testing: TeX engines. (line 70)
* prompt, *: Recovering from errors.
(line 23)
-* pronunciation: Overview. (line 28)
-* PSTricks package: \line. (line 36)
-* pt: Units of length. (line 10)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 27)
+* PSTricks package: \line. (line 35)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 9)
* quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 65)
+ (line 69)
* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 173)
* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 6)
* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 33)
@@ -19752,6 +20227,7 @@
* robust commands: \protect. (line 6)
* roman font: Font styles. (line 85)
* root file: Splitting the input. (line 10)
+* root file <1>: Jobname. (line 6)
* roots: \sqrt. (line 6)
* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 6)
* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 6)
@@ -19762,6 +20238,8 @@
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* samepage environment: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 44)
* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 91)
* scaled point: Units of length. (line 36)
* scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
@@ -19768,6 +20246,8 @@
* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 6)
* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 79)
+* script style: Math styles. (line 23)
+* scriptscript style: Math styles. (line 26)
* scrollmode: Command line options.
(line 27)
* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 69)
@@ -19774,6 +20254,7 @@
* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 70)
* section: Sectioning. (line 6)
* section <1>: \section. (line 6)
+* section counter: Counters. (line 15)
* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 70)
* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 62)
@@ -19781,7 +20262,7 @@
* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 6)
* sectioning, part: \part. (line 6)
* security and \write: \write and security. (line 6)
-* see and see also index entries: \index. (line 56)
+* see and see also index entries: \index. (line 58)
* self-contained sources: filecontents. (line 42)
* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 48)
@@ -19798,7 +20279,7 @@
(line 61)
* SHELL, environment variables: \write18. (line 60)
* shellesc package: \write18. (line 71)
-* showidx package: Indexes. (line 32)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 51)
* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 33)
@@ -19807,18 +20288,19 @@
* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 188)
* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 185)
* siunitx package: minipage. (line 137)
-* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 37)
+* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 42)
* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
* skip plain TeX: Lengths. (line 9)
* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
* slanted font: Font styles. (line 94)
* slides class: Document classes. (line 11)
-* sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6)
* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 6)
+* sloppypar environment <1>: sloppypar. (line 6)
+* slot, font: \DeclareTextAccent. (line 13)
* small caps font: Font styles. (line 88)
* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 55)
* source files, making self-contained: filecontents. (line 42)
-* sp: Units of length. (line 36)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 35)
* space between lines: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 6)
* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 6)
@@ -19835,7 +20317,8 @@
* spaces, ignore around commands <1>: xspace package. (line 6)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
(line 6)
-* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
+ (line 6)
* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 6)
* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
(line 6)
@@ -19865,20 +20348,25 @@
* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 6)
* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 6)
* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
-* strut: \strut. (line 6)
+* strut: \footnote. (line 47)
+* strut <1>: \strut. (line 6)
+* strut, math: \mathstrut. (line 6)
* styles of text: Font styles. (line 6)
* styles, page: Page styles. (line 6)
* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
* subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
+* subparagraph counter: Counters. (line 15)
* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
* subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 6)
+* subsection counter: Counters. (line 15)
* subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
-* suffix package: \@ifstar. (line 66)
+* subsubsection counter: Counters. (line 15)
+* suffix package: \@ifstar. (line 64)
* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 59)
@@ -19893,6 +20381,7 @@
* T1: fontenc package. (line 6)
* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6)
+* table counter: Counters. (line 15)
* table environment: table. (line 6)
* table of contents: \contentsline. (line 6)
* table of contents entry, create dotted line: \@dottedtocline.
@@ -19904,6 +20393,8 @@
* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
(line 6)
* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning. (line 81)
+* tablefootnote package: Footnotes in a table.
+ (line 53)
* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6)
* template (simple), article: article template. (line 6)
@@ -19917,7 +20408,8 @@
* TeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 6)
* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 65)
* texosquery package: \write18. (line 65)
-* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 25)
+* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 27)
+* text style: Math styles. (line 21)
* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6)
* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 6)
* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
@@ -19924,20 +20416,24 @@
* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
* textcase package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 43)
+ (line 42)
* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 6)
* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 57)
* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* theindex: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 6)
+* theindex environment: Produce the index manually.
+ (line 9)
* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6)
* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
* thin space: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* thin space <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
(line 6)
* thin space, negative: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* thin space, negative <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
(line 6)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
@@ -19945,7 +20441,7 @@
* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 201)
* tie: ~. (line 6)
* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 83)
-* TikZ package: \line. (line 36)
+* TikZ package: \line. (line 35)
* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 62)
* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
* tikz-cd package: Arrows. (line 41)
@@ -19966,13 +20462,14 @@
* titlesec package <3>: \section. (line 64)
* titlesec package <4>: \subsection. (line 52)
* titlesec package <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 65)
+ (line 63)
* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 111)
+ (line 110)
* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 80)
* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 81)
* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 111)
+ (line 110)
+* tocloft package <1>: \contentsline. (line 34)
* today's date: \today. (line 6)
* tombstone: \rule. (line 13)
* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
@@ -20025,11 +20522,11 @@
* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6)
* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6)
* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6)
-* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 42)
+* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 41)
* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 83)
* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 80)
-* vertical mode: Modes. (line 34)
+* vertical mode: Modes. (line 36)
* vertical space: \vspace. (line 6)
* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 6)
* vertical space before paragraphs: \parindent & \parskip.
@@ -20049,563 +20546,571 @@
* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 70)
* Wright, Joseph: Upper and lower case.
- (line 49)
+ (line 48)
* writing external files: filecontents. (line 6)
* writing letters: Letters. (line 6)
-* x-height: Units of length. (line 38)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 42)
* xdvi command: Output files. (line 10)
* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 42)
* xelatex: TeX engines. (line 41)
* xelatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 69)
* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 42)
-* xindex program: makeindex. (line 160)
-* xindy program: makeindex. (line 153)
+* xindex program: makeindex. (line 159)
+* xindy program: makeindex. (line 152)
* xparse package: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 37)
-* xparse package <1>: \@ifstar. (line 66)
+ (line 35)
+* xparse package <1>: \@ifstar. (line 64)
* xr package: xr package. (line 6)
* xr-hyper package: xr package. (line 6)
+* xspace package: xspace package. (line 6)
* xstring package: Jobname. (line 53)
Tag Table:
-Node: Top1852
-Node: About this document3656
-Node: Overview5394
-Node: Starting and ending7174
-Ref: Starting & ending7309
-Node: Output files8486
-Ref: output files dvi8765
-Ref: output files pdf9277
-Ref: output files log9602
-Ref: output files aux9799
-Node: TeX engines10768
-Ref: tex engines latex11304
-Ref: tex engines lualatex12139
-Ref: tex engines xelatex12600
-Node: LaTeX command syntax14560
-Node: Environment16487
-Node: CTAN17714
-Node: Document classes19170
-Ref: document classes article19610
-Ref: document classes book19698
-Ref: document classes letter19883
-Ref: document classes report19959
-Ref: document classes slides20111
-Node: Document class options20564
-Node: Additional packages23646
-Node: Class and package construction24277
-Node: Class and package structure25727
-Node: Class and package commands28022
-Node: Fonts45627
-Ref: Typefaces45730
-Node: fontenc package47692
-Node: \DeclareFontEncoding51940
-Node: \DeclareTextAccent53358
-Node: \DeclareTextAccentDefault54215
-Node: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand55286
-Node: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault57520
-Node: \DeclareTextComposite58827
-Node: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand59914
-Node: \DeclareTextSymbol60589
-Node: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault61694
-Node: \LastDeclaredEncoding62648
-Node: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent63272
-Node: Font styles64480
-Node: Font sizes68710
-Node: Low-level font commands70935
-Ref: low level font commands fontencoding71219
-Ref: low level font commands fontfamily71775
-Ref: low level font commands fontseries72538
-Ref: low level font commands fontshape73690
-Ref: low level font commands fontsize73987
-Ref: low level font commands linespread74564
-Ref: low level font commands selectfont74814
-Ref: low level font commands usefont75140
-Node: Layout75383
-Node: \onecolumn75949
-Node: \twocolumn76308
-Ref: twocolumn columnsep76931
-Ref: twocolumn columnseprule77175
-Ref: twocolumn columnwidth77475
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction78058
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction79024
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep79262
-Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep79571
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber79751
-Node: \flushbottom80700
-Node: \raggedbottom81800
-Node: Page layout parameters82336
-Ref: page layout parameters columnsep82565
-Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule82565
-Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth82565
-Ref: page layout parameters headheight82819
-Ref: page layout parameters headsep82986
-Ref: page layout parameters footskip83298
-Ref: page layout parameters linewidth83632
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush83985
-Ref: page layout parameters marginsep83985
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth83985
-Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin85025
-Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin85025
-Ref: page layout parameters paperheight85570
-Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth85796
-Ref: page layout parameters textheight86020
-Ref: page layout parameters textwidth86409
-Ref: page layout parameters hsize87347
-Ref: page layout parameters topmargin87544
-Ref: page layout parameters topskip87848
-Node: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch88064
-Node: Floats93057
-Ref: floats bottomfraction97395
-Ref: floats floatpagefraction97522
-Ref: floats textfraction97633
-Ref: floats topfraction97835
-Ref: floats floatsep98087
-Ref: floats intextsep98197
-Ref: floats textfloatsep98412
-Ref: floats bottomnumber98676
-Ref: floats dbltopnumber98784
-Ref: floats topnumber98903
-Ref: floats totalnumber99007
-Node: Sectioning99549
-Ref: sectioning secnumdepth102658
-Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth102658
-Ref: sectioning tocdepth103284
-Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth103284
-Node: \part104324
-Node: \chapter106501
-Node: \section110274
-Node: \subsection113541
-Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph116255
-Node: \appendix118912
-Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter120205
-Node: \@startsection121614
-Ref: startsection name123103
-Ref: \@startsection/name123103
-Ref: startsection level123557
-Ref: \@startsection/level123557
-Ref: startsection indent124438
-Ref: \@startsection/indent124438
-Ref: startsection beforeskip124701
-Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip124701
-Ref: startsection afterskip126222
-Ref: \@startsection/afterskip126222
-Ref: startsection style127533
-Ref: \@startsection/style127533
-Node: Cross references131234
-Node: \label133383
-Node: \pageref135203
-Node: \ref135993
-Node: xr package136988
-Node: Environments138822
-Node: abstract140824
-Node: array142413
-Node: center145305
-Node: \centering147058
-Node: description148555
-Node: displaymath150772
-Node: document152468
-Node: \AtBeginDocument152898
-Node: \AtEndDocument153522
-Node: enumerate154166
-Ref: enumerate enumi156029
-Ref: enumerate enumii156029
-Ref: enumerate enumiii156029
-Ref: enumerate enumiv156029
-Ref: enumerate labelenumi156427
-Ref: enumerate labelenumii156427
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiii156427
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiv156427
-Node: eqnarray156966
-Node: equation158962
-Node: figure159630
-Node: filecontents161784
-Node: flushleft163693
-Node: \raggedright164720
-Node: flushright165918
-Node: \raggedleft166742
-Node: itemize167613
-Ref: itemize labelitemi169161
-Ref: itemize labelitemii169161
-Ref: itemize labelitemiii169161
-Ref: itemize labelitemiv169161
-Ref: itemize leftmargin169820
-Ref: itemize leftmargini169820
-Ref: itemize leftmarginii169820
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiii169820
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiv169820
-Ref: itemize leftmarginv169820
-Ref: itemize leftmarginvi169820
-Node: letter171302
-Node: list171540
-Ref: list makelabel173987
-Ref: list itemindent175372
-Ref: list itemsep175509
-Ref: list labelsep176162
-Ref: list labelwidth176325
-Ref: list leftmargin177336
-Ref: list listparindent178189
-Ref: list parsep178420
-Ref: list partopsep178888
-Ref: list rightmargin179686
-Ref: list topsep179871
-Ref: list beginparpenalty183446
-Ref: list itempenalty183545
-Ref: list endparpenalty183649
-Node: \item184520
-Node: trivlist185766
-Node: math187294
-Node: minipage187600
-Node: picture193165
-Node: \put199395
-Node: \multiput199960
-Node: \qbezier200699
-Node: \graphpaper202172
-Node: \line202966
-Node: \linethickness204940
-Node: \thinlines205389
-Node: \thicklines205800
-Node: \circle206184
-Node: \oval206726
-Node: \shortstack207702
-Node: \vector209099
-Node: \makebox (picture)210013
-Node: \framebox (picture)211195
-Node: \frame212668
-Node: \dashbox213108
-Node: quotation & quote214243
-Node: tabbing215139
-Node: table221042
-Node: tabular223106
-Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth229443
-Ref: tabular arraystrech229683
-Ref: tabular doublerulesep229904
-Ref: tabular tabcolsep230040
-Node: \multicolumn230561
-Node: \vline234437
-Node: \cline235828
-Node: \hline236538
-Node: thebibliography237220
-Node: \bibitem239703
-Node: \cite242005
-Node: \nocite243873
-Node: Using BibTeX244381
-Node: theorem246552
-Node: titlepage247474
-Node: verbatim248757
-Node: \verb250570
-Node: verse252663
-Node: Line breaking253890
-Node: \\255256
-Node: \obeycr & \restorecr257689
-Node: \newline258500
-Node: \- (hyphenation)259529
-Node: \discretionary261167
-Node: \fussy & \sloppy262055
-Node: sloppypar262838
-Node: \hyphenation263984
-Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak264578
-Node: Page breaking265726
-Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage267756
-Node: \newpage269276
-Node: \enlargethispage270574
-Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak271530
-Node: Footnotes273197
-Node: \footnote274343
-Ref: footnote footnoterule275611
-Ref: footnote footnotesep276222
-Node: \footnotemark277288
-Node: \footnotetext279627
-Node: Footnotes in section headings280229
-Node: Footnotes in a table281062
-Node: Footnotes of footnotes283984
-Node: Definitions284688
-Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand285735
-Node: \providecommand291036
-Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother292201
-Node: \@ifstar294303
-Node: \newcounter297788
-Node: \newlength299508
-Node: \newsavebox300330
-Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment301309
-Node: \newtheorem306633
-Node: \newfont310205
-Node: \protect311438
-Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend313826
-Node: xspace package316507
-Node: Counters318572
-Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol320273
-Node: \usecounter322898
-Node: \value323757
-Node: \setcounter324810
-Node: \addtocounter325406
-Node: \refstepcounter325860
-Node: \stepcounter326529
-Node: \day & \month & \year327082
-Node: Lengths327893
-Node: Units of length332481
-Ref: units of length pt332684
-Ref: units of length pc332784
-Ref: units of length in332807
-Ref: units of length bp332833
-Ref: units of length cm332964
-Ref: units of length mm332986
-Ref: units of length dd333008
-Ref: units of length cc333040
-Ref: units of length sp333065
-Ref: Lengths/em333096
-Ref: Lengths/en333096
-Ref: Lengths/ex333096
-Ref: units of length em333096
-Ref: units of length en333096
-Ref: units of length ex333096
-Node: \setlength333952
-Node: \addtolength335037
-Node: \settodepth336112
-Node: \settoheight336990
-Node: \settowidth337883
-Node: \stretch338768
-Node: Expressions339970
-Node: Making paragraphs344752
-Node: \par346523
-Node: \indent & \noindent348470
-Node: \parindent & \parskip350005
-Node: Marginal notes351312
-Ref: marginal notes marginparpush352708
-Ref: marginal notes marginparsep352882
-Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth353014
-Node: Math formulas353363
-Node: Subscripts & superscripts357531
-Node: Math symbols359692
-Node: Arrows383463
-Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath384651
-Node: Blackboard bold386170
-Node: Calligraphic386972
-Node: Delimiters387503
-Node: \left & \right389691
-Node: \bigl & \bigr etc.393699
-Node: Dots396452
-Ref: ellipses cdots396883
-Ref: ellipses ddots397028
-Ref: ellipses ldots397109
-Ref: ellipses vdots397526
-Node: Greek letters398710
-Node: Math functions400389
-Node: Math accents402033
-Node: Over- and Underlining402932
-Node: Spacing in math mode404759
-Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace405694
-Ref: spacing in math mode medspace406119
-Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace406546
-Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace406546
-Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace407027
-Ref: spacing in math mode quad407354
-Ref: spacing in math mode qquad407610
-Node: \smash407948
-Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom410165
-Node: \mathstrut412712
-Node: Math miscellany413674
-Node: Colon character & \colon414180
-Node: \*414873
-Node: \frac415453
-Node: \sqrt415824
-Node: \stackrel416410
-Node: Modes416683
-Ref: modes paragraph mode417133
-Ref: modes lr mode417329
-Ref: modes math mode417935
-Ref: modes vertical mode418270
-Ref: modes internal vertical mode418441
-Ref: modes inner paragraph mode418914
-Ref: modes outer paragraph mode418914
-Node: \ensuremath419328
-Node: Page styles420033
-Node: \maketitle420796
-Node: \pagenumbering423814
-Node: \pagestyle425802
-Node: \thispagestyle429304
-Node: Spaces430258
-Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad431699
-Node: \hspace432614
-Node: \hfill434452
-Node: \hss435516
-Node: \spacefactor436210
-Node: \@439597
-Ref: \AT439697
-Node: \frenchspacing441637
-Node: \normalsfcodes442472
-Node: \(SPACE)442719
-Node: ~444509
-Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace447086
-Node: \/448257
-Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill450213
-Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip451569
-Ref: bigskip452387
-Ref: medskip452591
-Ref: smallskip452800
-Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak453461
-Node: \strut454447
-Node: \vspace457642
-Node: \vfill459206
-Node: \addvspace460134
-Node: Boxes462130
-Node: \mbox & \makebox462836
-Ref: mbox makebox depth464104
-Ref: mbox makebox height464104
-Ref: mbox makebox width464104
-Ref: mbox makebox totalheight464104
-Node: \fbox & \framebox466199
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule467513
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep467703
-Node: \parbox468793
-Node: \raisebox471099
-Ref: raisebox depth472072
-Ref: raisebox height472072
-Ref: raisebox width472072
-Ref: raisebox totalheight472072
-Node: \sbox & \savebox472773
-Node: lrbox475835
-Node: \usebox476721
-Node: Color477160
-Node: Color package options477959
-Node: Color models479605
-Ref: color models cmyk480402
-Ref: color models gray480765
-Ref: color models rgb480914
-Ref: color models RGB481251
-Ref: color models named481626
-Node: Commands for color481914
-Node: Define colors482329
-Node: Colored text483054
-Node: Colored boxes485451
-Node: Colored pages486840
-Node: Graphics487533
-Node: Graphics package options489660
-Node: Graphics package configuration492413
-Node: \graphicspath493215
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions496173
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule497991
-Node: Commands for graphics501172
-Node: \includegraphics501677
-Ref: includegraphics width506740
-Ref: includegraphics height507273
-Ref: includegraphics totalheight507679
-Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio507943
-Ref: includegraphics viewport509629
-Ref: includegraphics trim510024
-Ref: includegraphics clip510480
-Ref: includegraphics page510740
-Ref: includegraphics pagebox510831
-Ref: includegraphics interpolate511696
-Ref: includegraphics quiet511901
-Ref: includegraphics draft512062
-Ref: includegraphics bb512867
-Ref: includegraphics bbllx513265
-Ref: includegraphics bblly513265
-Ref: includegraphics bburx513265
-Ref: includegraphics bbury513265
-Ref: includegraphics natwidth513407
-Ref: includegraphics natheight513407
-Ref: includegraphics hiresbb513593
-Ref: includegraphics type514355
-Ref: includegraphics ext514395
-Ref: includegraphics read514498
-Ref: includegraphics command514615
-Node: \rotatebox514861
-Node: \scalebox517715
-Node: \resizebox518771
-Node: Special insertions519963
-Node: Reserved characters520831
-Node: Upper and lower case522091
-Node: Symbols by font position524477
-Node: Text symbols525156
-Node: Accents530140
-Node: \accent532293
-Node: Additional Latin letters534055
-Ref: Non-English characters534237
-Node: inputenc package535256
-Node: \rule537806
-Node: \today538994
-Node: Splitting the input539930
-Node: \endinput541672
-Node: \include & \includeonly542975
-Node: \input547272
-Node: Front/back matter548487
-Node: Table of contents etc.548820
-Node: \@dottedtocline554525
-Node: \addcontentsline556071
-Node: \addtocontents558949
-Node: \contentsline561166
-Node: \nofiles562859
-Node: \numberline563610
-Node: Indexes564725
-Node: \index566399
-Node: makeindex571504
-Ref: makeindex preamble573172
-Ref: makeindex postamble573312
-Ref: makeindex group skip573397
-Ref: makeindex letheadflag573730
-Ref: makeindex lethead prefix574191
-Ref: makeindex lethead suffix574343
-Ref: makeindex item 0574491
-Ref: makeindex item 1574571
-Ref: makeindex item 2574646
-Ref: makeindex item 01574724
-Ref: makeindex item x1574829
-Ref: makeindex item 12575034
-Ref: makeindex item x2575142
-Ref: makeindex delim 0575302
-Ref: makeindex delim 1575432
-Ref: makeindex delim 2575562
-Ref: makeindex delim n575688
-Ref: makeindex delim r575823
-Ref: makeindex line max575931
-Ref: makeindex indent space576066
-Ref: makeindex indent length576161
-Ref: makeindex page precedence576346
-Node: \printindex577381
-Node: Glossaries577854
-Node: \newglossaryentry579821
-Node: \gls581288
-Node: Letters582082
-Node: \address585700
-Node: \cc586511
-Node: \closing586953
-Node: \encl587267
-Node: \location587681
-Node: \makelabels587945
-Node: \name590262
-Node: \opening590503
-Node: \ps590784
-Node: \signature591073
-Node: \telephone592301
-Node: Input/output592666
-Node: \openin & \openout593396
-Node: \read596139
-Node: \typein597326
-Node: \typeout598586
-Node: \write599636
-Node: \write and security604363
-Node: \message605307
-Node: \wlog607136
-Node: \write18607637
-Node: Command line interface611128
-Ref: Command line611292
-Node: Command line options613445
-Ref: interaction modes614448
-Ref: output directory615402
-Node: Command line input617101
-Node: Jobname619132
-Node: Recovering from errors622274
-Node: Document templates623702
-Node: beamer template624136
-Node: article template624778
-Node: book template625241
-Node: Larger book template625720
-Node: Index627262
-Ref: Command Index627348
+Node: Top1861
+Node: About this document3668
+Node: Overview5406
+Node: Starting and ending7186
+Ref: Starting & ending7321
+Node: Output files8498
+Ref: output files dvi8777
+Ref: output files pdf9289
+Ref: output files log9614
+Ref: output files aux9811
+Node: TeX engines10780
+Ref: tex engines latex11316
+Ref: tex engines lualatex12151
+Ref: tex engines xelatex12612
+Node: LaTeX command syntax14572
+Node: Environment16499
+Node: CTAN17726
+Node: Document classes19182
+Ref: document classes article19622
+Ref: document classes book19710
+Ref: document classes letter19895
+Ref: document classes report19971
+Ref: document classes slides20123
+Node: Document class options20576
+Node: Additional packages23658
+Node: Class and package construction24289
+Node: Class and package structure25739
+Node: Class and package commands28034
+Node: Fonts45639
+Ref: Typefaces45742
+Node: fontenc package47704
+Node: \DeclareFontEncoding51956
+Node: \DeclareTextAccent53376
+Node: \DeclareTextAccentDefault54295
+Node: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand55370
+Node: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault57622
+Node: \DeclareTextComposite58934
+Node: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand60019
+Node: \DeclareTextSymbol60701
+Node: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault61810
+Node: \LastDeclaredEncoding62770
+Node: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent63394
+Node: Font styles64604
+Node: Font sizes68834
+Node: Low-level font commands71713
+Ref: low level font commands fontencoding71997
+Ref: low level font commands fontfamily72553
+Ref: low level font commands fontseries73316
+Ref: low level font commands fontshape74448
+Ref: low level font commands fontsize74765
+Ref: low level font commands linespread75342
+Ref: low level font commands selectfont75623
+Ref: low level font commands usefont75949
+Node: Layout76192
+Node: \onecolumn76758
+Node: \twocolumn77117
+Ref: twocolumn columnsep77740
+Ref: twocolumn columnseprule77984
+Ref: twocolumn columnwidth78284
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction78867
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction79833
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep80071
+Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep80380
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber80560
+Node: \flushbottom81509
+Node: \raggedbottom82609
+Node: Page layout parameters83145
+Ref: page layout parameters columnsep83374
+Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule83374
+Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth83374
+Ref: page layout parameters headheight83628
+Ref: page layout parameters headsep83795
+Ref: page layout parameters footskip84107
+Ref: page layout parameters linewidth84441
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush84794
+Ref: page layout parameters marginsep84794
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth84794
+Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin85834
+Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin85834
+Ref: page layout parameters paperheight86379
+Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth86605
+Ref: page layout parameters textheight86829
+Ref: page layout parameters textwidth87218
+Ref: page layout parameters hsize88156
+Ref: page layout parameters topmargin88353
+Ref: page layout parameters topskip88657
+Node: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch88873
+Node: Floats94043
+Ref: floats bottomfraction98381
+Ref: floats floatpagefraction98508
+Ref: floats textfraction98619
+Ref: floats topfraction98821
+Ref: floats floatsep99073
+Ref: floats intextsep99183
+Ref: floats textfloatsep99398
+Ref: floats bottomnumber99662
+Ref: floats dbltopnumber99770
+Ref: floats topnumber99889
+Ref: floats totalnumber99993
+Node: \caption100610
+Node: Sectioning103336
+Ref: sectioning secnumdepth106445
+Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth106445
+Ref: sectioning tocdepth107071
+Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth107071
+Node: \part108111
+Node: \chapter110283
+Node: \section114056
+Node: \subsection117323
+Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph120037
+Node: \appendix122694
+Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter123987
+Node: \@startsection125396
+Ref: startsection name126885
+Ref: \@startsection/name126885
+Ref: startsection level127339
+Ref: \@startsection/level127339
+Ref: startsection indent128220
+Ref: \@startsection/indent128220
+Ref: startsection beforeskip128483
+Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip128483
+Ref: startsection afterskip130004
+Ref: \@startsection/afterskip130004
+Ref: startsection style131315
+Ref: \@startsection/style131315
+Node: Cross references135016
+Node: \label137165
+Node: \pageref138985
+Node: \ref139775
+Node: xr package140770
+Node: Environments142591
+Node: abstract144593
+Node: array146182
+Node: center149095
+Node: \centering150848
+Node: description152345
+Node: displaymath154562
+Node: document156258
+Node: \AtBeginDocument156688
+Node: \AtEndDocument157312
+Node: enumerate157956
+Ref: enumerate enumi159819
+Ref: enumerate enumii159819
+Ref: enumerate enumiii159819
+Ref: enumerate enumiv159819
+Ref: enumerate labelenumi160217
+Ref: enumerate labelenumii160217
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiii160217
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiv160217
+Node: eqnarray160756
+Node: equation162752
+Node: figure163420
+Node: filecontents165593
+Node: flushleft167502
+Node: \raggedright168529
+Node: flushright169727
+Node: \raggedleft170551
+Node: itemize171422
+Ref: itemize labelitemi172970
+Ref: itemize labelitemii172970
+Ref: itemize labelitemiii172970
+Ref: itemize labelitemiv172970
+Ref: itemize leftmargin173629
+Ref: itemize leftmargini173629
+Ref: itemize leftmarginii173629
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiii173629
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiv173629
+Ref: itemize leftmarginv173629
+Ref: itemize leftmarginvi173629
+Node: letter175111
+Node: list175349
+Ref: list makelabel177796
+Ref: list itemindent179181
+Ref: list itemsep179318
+Ref: list labelsep179971
+Ref: list labelwidth180134
+Ref: list leftmargin181145
+Ref: list listparindent181998
+Ref: list parsep182229
+Ref: list partopsep182697
+Ref: list rightmargin183495
+Ref: list topsep183680
+Ref: list beginparpenalty187256
+Ref: list itempenalty187355
+Ref: list endparpenalty187459
+Node: \item188330
+Node: trivlist189576
+Node: math191104
+Node: minipage191410
+Node: picture197007
+Node: \put203237
+Node: \multiput203802
+Node: \qbezier204541
+Node: \graphpaper206014
+Node: \line206808
+Node: \linethickness208782
+Node: \thinlines209247
+Node: \thicklines209658
+Node: \circle210043
+Node: \oval210585
+Node: \shortstack211600
+Node: \vector213298
+Node: \makebox (picture)214212
+Node: \framebox (picture)215394
+Node: \frame216867
+Node: \dashbox217307
+Node: quotation & quote218442
+Node: tabbing219338
+Node: table225241
+Node: tabular227324
+Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth233661
+Ref: tabular arraystrech233901
+Ref: tabular doublerulesep234122
+Ref: tabular tabcolsep234258
+Node: \multicolumn234779
+Node: \vline238656
+Node: \cline240047
+Node: \hline240757
+Node: thebibliography241439
+Node: \bibitem243922
+Node: \cite246224
+Node: \nocite248092
+Node: Using BibTeX248600
+Node: BibTeX error messages250980
+Node: theorem251885
+Node: titlepage252807
+Node: verbatim254090
+Node: \verb255903
+Node: verse257996
+Node: Line breaking259223
+Node: \\260589
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr263019
+Node: \newline263830
+Node: \- (hyphenation)264871
+Node: \discretionary266511
+Node: \fussy & \sloppy267402
+Node: sloppypar268217
+Node: \hyphenation269363
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak269983
+Node: Page breaking271163
+Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage273193
+Node: \newpage274713
+Node: \enlargethispage276011
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak276967
+Node: Footnotes278938
+Node: \footnote280084
+Ref: footnote footnoterule281352
+Ref: footnote footnotesep281963
+Node: \footnotemark283029
+Node: \footnotetext285386
+Node: Footnotes in section headings285988
+Node: Footnotes in a table286821
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes289752
+Node: Definitions290450
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand291497
+Node: Control sequences296932
+Node: \providecommand298286
+Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother299449
+Node: \@ifstar301551
+Node: \newcounter305036
+Node: \newlength306756
+Node: \newsavebox307679
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment308658
+Node: \newtheorem313982
+Node: \newfont317554
+Node: \protect318787
+Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend321175
+Node: xspace package323925
+Node: Counters326124
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol327825
+Node: \usecounter330460
+Node: \value331319
+Node: \setcounter332372
+Node: \addtocounter332968
+Node: \refstepcounter333422
+Node: \stepcounter334091
+Node: \day & \month & \year334644
+Node: Lengths335553
+Node: Units of length340131
+Ref: units of length pt340334
+Ref: units of length pc340451
+Ref: units of length in340474
+Ref: units of length bp340500
+Ref: units of length mm340631
+Ref: units of length cm340663
+Ref: units of length dd340692
+Ref: units of length cc340724
+Ref: units of length sp340749
+Ref: Lengths/ex340891
+Ref: units of length ex340891
+Ref: Lengths/em341034
+Ref: units of length em341034
+Ref: units of length mu341375
+Node: \setlength341904
+Node: \addtolength343016
+Node: \settodepth344439
+Node: \settoheight345427
+Node: \settowidth346425
+Node: \stretch347430
+Node: Expressions348632
+Node: Making paragraphs353446
+Node: \par355761
+Node: \indent & \noindent357807
+Node: \parindent & \parskip359342
+Node: Marginal notes360671
+Ref: marginal notes marginparpush362067
+Ref: marginal notes marginparsep362241
+Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth362373
+Node: Math formulas362722
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts365770
+Node: Math symbols367931
+Node: Arrows391702
+Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath392890
+Node: Blackboard bold394409
+Node: Calligraphic395211
+Node: Delimiters395742
+Node: \left & \right397929
+Node: \bigl & \bigr etc.401966
+Node: Dots404736
+Ref: ellipses cdots405167
+Ref: ellipses ddots405312
+Ref: ellipses ldots405393
+Ref: ellipses vdots405810
+Node: Greek letters406994
+Node: Math functions408673
+Node: Math accents410317
+Node: Over- and Underlining411216
+Node: Spacing in math mode413043
+Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace413974
+Ref: spacing in math mode medspace414425
+Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace414881
+Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace414881
+Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace415362
+Ref: spacing in math mode quad415735
+Ref: spacing in math mode qquad415991
+Node: \smash416329
+Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom418546
+Node: \mathstrut421120
+Node: Math styles422082
+Node: Math miscellany424816
+Node: Colon character & \colon425313
+Node: \*426006
+Node: \frac426586
+Node: \sqrt426957
+Node: \stackrel427543
+Node: Modes427816
+Ref: modes paragraph mode428266
+Ref: modes lr mode428578
+Ref: modes math mode429184
+Ref: modes vertical mode429519
+Ref: modes internal vertical mode429737
+Ref: modes inner paragraph mode430260
+Ref: modes outer paragraph mode430260
+Node: \ensuremath430674
+Node: Page styles431379
+Node: \maketitle432142
+Node: \pagenumbering435160
+Node: \pagestyle437147
+Node: \thispagestyle440655
+Node: Spaces441609
+Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad442929
+Node: \hspace443844
+Node: \hfill445701
+Node: \hss446765
+Node: \spacefactor447459
+Node: \@450866
+Ref: \AT450986
+Node: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing452926
+Ref: \frenchspacing453044
+Node: \normalsfcodes453846
+Node: \(SPACE)454114
+Ref: Leading blanks456054
+Node: ~456367
+Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace459177
+Node: \/460375
+Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill462333
+Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip463693
+Ref: bigskip464511
+Ref: medskip464715
+Ref: smallskip464924
+Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak465585
+Node: \strut466571
+Node: \vspace469808
+Node: \vfill471369
+Node: \addvspace472297
+Node: Boxes474343
+Node: \mbox & \makebox475049
+Ref: mbox makebox depth476317
+Ref: mbox makebox height476317
+Ref: mbox makebox width476317
+Ref: mbox makebox totalheight476317
+Node: \fbox & \framebox478412
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule479719
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep479909
+Node: \parbox481011
+Node: \raisebox483317
+Ref: raisebox depth484290
+Ref: raisebox height484290
+Ref: raisebox width484290
+Ref: raisebox totalheight484290
+Node: \sbox & \savebox484991
+Node: lrbox488077
+Node: \usebox488963
+Node: Color489402
+Node: Color package options490201
+Node: Color models491847
+Ref: color models cmyk492644
+Ref: color models gray493007
+Ref: color models rgb493156
+Ref: color models RGB493493
+Ref: color models named493868
+Node: Commands for color494156
+Node: Define colors494571
+Node: Colored text495296
+Node: Colored boxes497693
+Node: Colored pages499082
+Node: Graphics499775
+Node: Graphics package options501901
+Node: Graphics package configuration504654
+Node: \graphicspath505456
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions508414
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule510232
+Node: Commands for graphics513411
+Node: \includegraphics513916
+Ref: includegraphics width518979
+Ref: includegraphics height519512
+Ref: includegraphics totalheight519918
+Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio520182
+Ref: includegraphics viewport521868
+Ref: includegraphics trim522263
+Ref: includegraphics clip522719
+Ref: includegraphics page522979
+Ref: includegraphics pagebox523070
+Ref: includegraphics interpolate523935
+Ref: includegraphics quiet524140
+Ref: includegraphics draft524301
+Ref: includegraphics bb525106
+Ref: includegraphics bbllx525504
+Ref: includegraphics bblly525504
+Ref: includegraphics bburx525504
+Ref: includegraphics bbury525504
+Ref: includegraphics natwidth525646
+Ref: includegraphics natheight525646
+Ref: includegraphics hiresbb525832
+Ref: includegraphics type526594
+Ref: includegraphics ext526634
+Ref: includegraphics read526737
+Ref: includegraphics command526854
+Node: \rotatebox527100
+Node: \scalebox529954
+Node: \resizebox531034
+Node: Special insertions532228
+Node: Reserved characters533096
+Node: Upper and lower case534356
+Node: Symbols by font position536742
+Node: Text symbols537421
+Node: Accents542405
+Node: \accent544690
+Node: Additional Latin letters546516
+Ref: Non-English characters546698
+Node: inputenc package547717
+Ref: \inputencoding549933
+Node: \rule550269
+Node: \today551457
+Node: Splitting the input552393
+Node: \endinput554135
+Node: \include & \includeonly555438
+Node: \input559735
+Node: Front/back matter560950
+Node: Table of contents etc.561283
+Node: \@dottedtocline567044
+Node: \addcontentsline568631
+Node: \addtocontents571694
+Node: \contentsline573911
+Node: \nofiles575689
+Node: \numberline576440
+Node: Indexes577604
+Node: Produce the index manually580398
+Node: \index581562
+Node: makeindex586773
+Ref: makeindex preamble588441
+Ref: makeindex postamble588587
+Ref: makeindex group skip588683
+Ref: makeindex letheadflag589023
+Ref: makeindex lethead prefix589484
+Ref: makeindex lethead suffix589636
+Ref: makeindex item 0589784
+Ref: makeindex item 1589864
+Ref: makeindex item 2589939
+Ref: makeindex item 01590017
+Ref: makeindex item x1590122
+Ref: makeindex item 12590327
+Ref: makeindex item x2590435
+Ref: makeindex delim 0590595
+Ref: makeindex delim 1590725
+Ref: makeindex delim 2590855
+Ref: makeindex delim n590981
+Ref: makeindex delim r591116
+Ref: makeindex line max591224
+Ref: makeindex indent space591359
+Ref: makeindex indent length591454
+Ref: makeindex page precedence591639
+Node: \printindex592676
+Node: Glossaries593149
+Node: \newglossaryentry595116
+Node: \gls596583
+Node: Letters597377
+Node: \address600995
+Node: \cc601806
+Node: \closing602248
+Node: \encl602562
+Node: \location602976
+Node: \makelabels603240
+Node: \name605557
+Node: \opening605798
+Node: \ps606079
+Node: \signature606368
+Node: \telephone607596
+Node: Input/output607961
+Node: \openin & \openout608691
+Node: \read611451
+Node: \typein612638
+Node: \typeout613898
+Node: \write614938
+Node: \write and security619665
+Node: \message620609
+Node: \wlog622438
+Node: \write18622939
+Node: Command line interface626430
+Ref: Command line626594
+Node: Command line options628747
+Ref: interaction modes629750
+Ref: output directory630704
+Node: Command line input632403
+Node: Jobname634520
+Node: Recovering from errors637763
+Node: Document templates639191
+Node: beamer template639625
+Node: article template640267
+Node: book template640730
+Node: Larger book template641209
+Node: Index642751
+Ref: Command Index642837
End Tag Table
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,4 +1,2278 @@
+2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ January 2022 release to CTAN.
+ * NEWS: update.
+
+2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): correct pt/mm/cm conversions.
+ Report from Geoff Odhner, 24 Jan 2022 22:08:58.
+ Also use @ftable, other wording changes.
+
+2022-01-17 Pieter van Oostrum <pieter at vanoostrum.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\hrulefill & \dotfill): replace "@" macros
+ with user-level macros.
+
+2021-12-09 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (NeedsAMSSymb flag, Footnotes in a table, Math
+ formulas, Math symbols): @file{...} -> @package{...}.
+ (sloppypar): Use EnvIndex
+ (Footnotes in a table): Use italic for book title _HMS
+ Surprise_. Add `tablefootnote' to package index.
+ (Math symbols, Math symbols, Math symbols, Math symbols)
+ (\DeclareGraphicsRule): Minor rewording ``with'' -> ``the ... of
+ which''.
+ (\resizebox): Fix example 1in -> 3.5in.
+ (\accent): Minor rewording ``constructs'' -> ``to construct''. Fix
+ example of use of \accent, and list all the cases.
+ (\openin & \openout): Fix compilation error introduced by K's
+ r1073.
+
+2021-11-13 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\openin & \openout): max \openout for lualatex is
+ 127, not 255. Report from Faheem Mitha, 13 Nov 2021 16:08:07.
+
+2021-10-30 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: use @r on remaining @findex lines that have
+ regular text, notably include @l{} and @L{}.
+ Use @c instead of @ignore ... @end ignore, so the spellcheck
+ ignores them.
+ Other small wording changes and typos.
+
+2021-10-28 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Bib at TeX{} error messages): index entries,
+ mention aux file.
+
+2021-10-24 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Bib at TeX{} error messages): new subsection,
+ suggested by bb, following
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/618346.
+ Also fix some typos.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak): translate
+ node.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\day & \month & \year): Align translation on
+ English.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotetext): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Jim's r830.
+ (\providecommand): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Finish propagating Jim's r637.
+ (\linebreak & \nolinebreak): Align on English
+ (\hyphenation): Align on English, add some clarification about
+ internationalization package.
+
+2021-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\discretionary): Merge changes in English into
+ the French text.
+ (\fussy & \sloppy): Align on English.
+ (sloppypar): New node, translate from English.
+ (Letters): Align on English text, example with ``Ninon de l'Enclos''.
+ (\address): Align on English text, add example with ``Stephen Maturin''.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typoes.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for
+ PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typoes.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\footnotemark): Align on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in section headings)
+ (Footnotes in a table): swap nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Reword along my proposal at
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000822.html.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add and translate this node.
+ (Footnotes): Align on English.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): @var{cmd} ->
+ \@var{cmd}.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Translate this node.
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd}.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): typos.
+ (\DeclareFontEncoding): Translate this node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van
+ Deik. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000832.html.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using
+ it.
+ (lrbox): Typos.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\multicolumn): Typos, notably reported by Faheem
+ Mitha cf. https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000821.html
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix guillemet glyph for PDF output.
+ (\subsection): Fix Greek letter glyphs for the PDF output.
+ (verse): Align on English with better examples.
+ (Math symbols): Add \Phi --- as per Jim's r722.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parindent & \parskip): Align this node on en.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add link to the English version in the HTML
+ header.
+ (\left & \right): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Calligraphic, Delimiters): Translate node.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Start page, give new URL
+ https://latexref.xyz/fr for the French version.
+ (Math symbols): Mention mathtools, as in current English version,
+ but fr still needs alignment. Add menu & create all sub-nodes.
+ (Math miscellany): Remove dots --- they have their own node.
+ (Arrows): Translate from en.
+ (\boldmath & \unboldmath, Blackboard bold, Dots, Greek letters):
+ Translate these nodes
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents): adjust \t text to make HTML output
+ not wrong --- propagate Jim's r1027.
+
+2021-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Produce the index manually): New node, creation
+ & translation from English.
+
+2021-10-05 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * README-fr (outline): Mention how it was translated concerning
+ font shape.
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add dependance to common.texi where applicable.
+
+2021-10-05 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\DeclareFontEncoding): ``or'' -> ``and'' in
+ ``@code{\selectfont} and @code{\fontencoding}'', see https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000824.html.
+ (\DeclareTextAccent): Define word ``slot''. See https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000825.html.
+ (\DeclareTextAccentDefault, \DeclareTextCommand &
+ \ProvideTextCommand, \DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault, \DeclareTextComposite)
+ (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand, \DeclareTextSymbol)
+ (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault, \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent)
+ (\providecommand): ``@var{cmd}'' -> ``\@var{cmd}''.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Remove
+ ``\DeclareTextCommandDefault'' from index. Add \DeclareTextSymbol
+ to index.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Typo on
+ ``@var{optargdefault}''.
+ (\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault)
+ (\DeclareTextComposite): ``location'' -> ``slot''.
+ (Line breaking): Mention within @ignore comment alternative text
+ concerning word processors, see
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000803.html
+ (\footnotemark): @code{...}-ify ``footnote''. Typo.
+ (Footnotes of footnotes): Remove ``First'' concerning Wilson
+ theorem, see
+ https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000839.html.
+ (\providecommand ): In exemple does not use the same definition
+ twice to illustrate that the first one met is that used.
+
+ * latex2e-help-texinfo-tree/latex2e-fr/latex2e-figures: Symlink to
+ the English one.
+
+2021-09-15 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\DeclareFontEncoding): ``or'' -> ``and'',
+ concerning \selectfont & \fontencoding.
+ (\DeclareTextAccent): Add definition of slot, and index it.
+ (\DeclareTextAccentDefault, \DeclareTextCommand &
+ \ProvideTextCommand, \DeclareTextCommandDefault &
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault, \DeclareTextComposite)
+ (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand, \DeclareTextSymbol)
+ (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault, \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent)
+ (\providecommand): @var{cmd} -> \@var{cmd} + some
+ @code{...}-ification.
+ (\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand): Suppress
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault from index. Some rewording. Add
+ \DeclareTextSymbol to index, where applicable. Typos.
+ (\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault): @noindent
+ inserted.
+ (\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault)
+ (\DeclareTextComposite): ``location'' -> ``slot''.
+ (Line breaking): Recall as @ignored text the alternative wording
+ about differing line break adjustments.
+ (Footnotes of footnotes): ``First noted in Wilson'' -> ``Noted in
+ Wilson''.
+
+2021-09-05 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Implement fix suggested by Laurent Van Deik.
+ (\sbox & \savebox): In example, declare box register before using it.
+ (lrbox): Fix @xref.
+
+2021-09-01 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\multicolumn): Typo, credits Faheem Mitha
+ 2021-09-01 on latexrefman list.
+
+2021-09-01 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * common.texi (\mathbbN): New math symbol.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Fix \guillemotleft TeX output.
+ (\parindent & \parskip): Use @dmn, plus some rewording, classes
+ not styles.
+ (Blackboard bold): Use new math symbol \mathbbN defined in
+ common.texi.
+ (Delimiters): ``starred version'' -> ``starred form''.
+ (\left & \right): Add linke to node ``Reserved
+ characters''. ``contained'' -> ``enclosed'' for consistency.
+ (\bigl & \bigr etc.): Insert a space for the info output. Reword
+ ``be the same'' -> ``match together'', ``and'' -> ``or''.
+ (Produce the index manually): @command{...}-ify ``makeindex''.
+
+2021-08-26 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newline): Clarify phrase ``prior text''. Fix
+ example: ``{...}'' -> ``@{...}''.
+ (\- (hyphenation)): Clarify that specified hyphenation points are
+ valid even though TeX might have chosen the same one. ``insist
+ on'' -> ``force''.
+ (\discretionary): Fix punctuation. @sample{...}-ize letter f. Add
+ texi-escaped text from fr, for translation by Jim.
+ (\fussy & \sloppy): Clarify end of paragraph.
+ (\hyphenation): Restore text ``no inflections are tried'', and
+ insert also some @ignored text from fr for Jim to translate.
+ (\linebreak & \nolinebreak): Add ``lying between 0 and 4'', just
+ the name of the @var{...} does not says that, as this is arbitrary
+ text. Clarify what is meant by line extending.
+ (\linebreak & \nolinebreak, \printindex): Observe 2 empty lines
+ before next node.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: (\newline, \- (hyphenation)): Align on en ---
+ propagate Jim's r636. Change ``insist on'' to ``force'' concerning
+ forced hyphenation with ``-\linebreak''.
+ (\newline): Fix the example with \newline in a tabular.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \\, \obeycr & \restorecr): Align
+ on Jim's r636.
+ (\fussy & \sloppy): Merge node \fussy & node \sloppy in one node,
+ as in r636. Alignment to en still needs some work.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Complete propagation of Jim's r631.
+ (picture): Typos. Propagate some fixes by Jim's r631: .3 -> 0.3,
+ lR -> LR, menu descriptions.
+ (\put, \multiput): Propagate Jim's r631.
+ (\qbezier): Typos.
+ (\line): Rename xpente ypente to x_avance, y_monte, to stick to
+ the English original. Remove extra indexation of pict2e as in my
+ r994.
+ (\linethickness): Add some references as in my r994.
+ (\thinlines, \thicklines): Propagate Jim's r631.
+ (\circle): Typos.
+ (\oval): @dfn{...}-ize word oval as in my r994. Propagate Jim's
+ r631.
+ (\shortstack): Propagate Jim's r631.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: No other changes than node reordering.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): Translate ``ol'' by
+ ``D\'etour\'e'' on a recommendation by Jean-C\^ome Charpentier.
+
+ * README-fr: Add credit to Jean-C\^ome for the translation of outline
+ font shape.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (array): Fix typos. Align on English, notably
+ Karl's r504.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (fontenc package): Suppress
+ ``\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}'' --- as per Jim's r908
+ Rename ``\UseTextAccent & \UseTextSymbol'' to ``\UseTextSymbol &
+ \UseTextAccent''
+ (Font styles): Typos.
+ (minipage): Add argument ``{\columnwidth}'' --- as per Jim's r908
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (makeindex): Re-align node translation on English.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Make formatting of package names uniform.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\twocolumn): Typo.
+ (\caption): Translate the node --- propagate Jim's r988.
+ (figure, table): add reference to node \caption --- propagate Jim's
+ r988.
+ (\numberline): @example ... @end example around some example ---
+ propagate Jim's r988.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex-fr.texi (\index): realign on English.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\printindex): Align on English.
+ (makeindex): move some text from \printindex.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Indexes): re-align node on English
+ (\index, makeindex, \printindex): Create new nodes with old French
+ text, they will need translation refurbish.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Counters): Add index entry for each standard
+ counter. Typos on standard counter names.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Font sizes): Propagate Jim's r950 on font size
+ change warning in math mode.
+ (\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom): Propagate Jim's r950 on
+ replacing Mark Twain's controversial quote.
+ (\strut): Propagate Jim's r950 on restoring d instead of
+ \mathrm{d} for integral infenitesimal variation.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math formulas): Add ``Math styles'' to menu.
+ (Math styles): Add & translate node.
+ (~): Use French bullet for itemize.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: adopt HTML head from easyurls for .texi file
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: adopt HTML head from easyurls for .texi file
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Text symbols): more \text... dash characters in
+ LaTeX June 2021 release
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Two blank lines before each node. Remove line
+ trailing blanks.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Definitions): add to menu ``\ignorespaces &
+ \ignorespacesafterend'' & ``xspace package''.
+ (\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, xspace package): and &
+ translate these nodes.
+ (Footnote parameters): typos.
+ (Footnote parameters, \mathstrut, \strut): Add ``\'etai'' --- ie
+ strut --- to index.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (xr package): Translate from en.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (inputenc package): Translate from en.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (~): Translate node.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Command line interface, Command line options)
+ (Command line input): Align on English.
+ (Command line input): Typo.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch): typo.
+ (Units of length): typo on ``cicero'' + add ``douze''.
+ (Jobname): rework the node.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Units of length, \footnote): lower case in index
+ entries.
+ (Units of length): add some anchors.
+ (Expressions): scaled point, add reference to ``Unit of length''.
+ (\contentsline): typo.
+ (Command line interface): index, ``command line inrterface'' to follow
+ Karl's r928.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): Place @anchor before @item.
+ (low level font commands fontseries): Typo.
+ (Low-level font commands fontsize): Remove item about
+ \baselinestrech and refer to node ``\baselineskip &
+ \baselinestretch'' instead.
+ (low level font commands linespread): Simplify text with a
+ reference to node ``\baselineskip & \baselinestretch''.
+ (Low-level font commands): <<commandes de police>> -> <<commandes
+ de fonte>>.
+ (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch): Restore the statement about
+ setspace package that it does not change the baseline skip in
+ footnotes and caption.
+
+2021-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch): Add & translate
+ this node.
+
+2021-08-24 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Producing the index manually): Add subsection.
+ Provides a place to define theindex environment.on \caption.
+
+2021-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * writing.html (Document structure): Add item ``Check
+ references''.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): Add reference to ``Modes'' where
+ applicable, and change erroneous reference to ``Modes'' into
+ ``Math styles''. Remove ``(package)'' from @PkdIndex argument, the
+ macro already adds this. @file -> @pacakge.
+ (\line): Remove extra indexing of ``pict2e'' as a package.
+ (\linethickness): Add reference to ``\oval'', as ovals are not
+ ellipse and you have to read the \oval node to know this.
+ (\thicklines): Fix reference ``picture'' -> ``\qbezier''.
+ (\oval): @dfn{...}-ize the term oval. ``boxes'' -> ``frames''.
+ (\shortstack): Fix the example which did not compile, and make it
+ complete. Clarify \makebox is used. Clarify baseline skip and not
+ just height can be controlled in some ways.
+ (makeindex): Clarify index of makeindex by mentionning
+ ``program''. @var{attributes} -> @var{attribute}s. ``output file''
+ -> ``output index file''. ``starting with a'' -> ``starting with
+ letter a'', otherwise it sounds strange because ``a'' is an
+ article in English, as in ``*a* pear''. @uref{...}-ize the xindy
+ URL.
+
+2021-08-21 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * writing.html (Document structure): new section.
+
+2021-08-19 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: in all document uniformize @code{...} or
+ @file{...} for package names to @code{...}.
+
+2021-08-19 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\caption): Clarify ``vertical'' blank. Use @pxref
+ where applicable. ``moving text'' -> ``moving argument''.
+ (\index): Mention that " also needs escaping.
+
+2021-08-17 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * writing.html (Coding conventions): Mention to use @PkgIndex
+ where applicable.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font sizes): typo.
+ (Low-level font commands): Place @anchor{...} immediately before
+ @item, see this thread
+ https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/help-texinfo/2021-08/msg00000.html
+ For \linespread reword text about setspace package with a
+ reference to node ``\baselineskip & \baselinestretch''.
+ (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch): @dfn{...}-ize word
+ ``leading''. @dmn{...}-ize units. Reword statement about baskine
+ skip/font size ratio. @noindent after example. Restore statement
+ about setspace producing single-spaced lines where typically
+ desirable.
+ (xr package): Use @PkgIndex. @noindent before or, after
+ example. @code -> @file.
+ (\footnote): index strut.
+ (\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend): blanks, not spaces. And
+ also says that a box, not only a non-blank stops the
+ space-ignoring. Typo, add ``\''.
+ (xspace package): Reword to use ``control sequence'', ``control
+ word'', ``control symbol'' and add reference to ``Control
+ sequences'' node. Say to place \xspace at the very end of the
+ definition. Clarify \xspaceaddexceptions example adds two
+ exceptions.
+ (Expressions): Add reference about scaled points.
+ (\mathstrut): index strut.
+ (~): @dfn{...}-ize word ``tie''. Add a note that meaning of
+ ``tie'' in typography differs from this TeX-community specific
+ meaning. Reword what concerns label/number month/day tieing.
+ (inputenc package): @samp{...}-ize @"{a}. index+anchor for \inputenc macro.
+ (Indexes): clarify the showidx places the note where \index
+ is. Comment in example for filename. Reword the enigmatic
+ ``nothing appears''.
+ (\index): ``\'' -> ``|'' where applicable. ``page entry'' ->
+ ``page number''. ``see'' not ``See'' is the default, same for
+ ``see also''. ``\seename'' is a no-arg macro, ``see'' is a two arg
+ macro.
+ (\printindex): Remove one too many @findex. Add @PkgIndex{makeidx}.
+ (Command line input): Add reference to Jobname node.
+ (Jobname): index ``root file'', and explain this term and its
+ relation to job name. ``For example'' -> ``That is'', and reword
+ ``before any output'' to ``before any input file is met''.
+
+2021-08-16 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\caption): Add section on \caption. Put in
+ cross-references to figure and table entries.
+
+2021-08-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Command line input): Replace the graphics draft
+ option example with \includeonly{} example.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@dottedtocline, \numberline): New nodes,
+ translate them to English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Table of contents etc., \contentsline): Add
+ node \contentsline and translate it.
+ (\addcontentsline): Realign on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\fbox & \framebox): realign on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\mbox & \makebox): align on English. Plus some
+ typos correction.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Control sequence): Create node.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Making paragraph): align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\settoheight, \settowidth): align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\settodepth): align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\addtolength): Align node on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Update copyright notice & credits, cf rev 684.
+ (\setlength): Align node en English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newlength): align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Typo.
+ (\par): Translated from English.
+ (Modes): Re-align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\par): New node --- to be translated.
+ (\addvspace): Realign on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\vspace): Re-align one English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\strut): translate node from English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\/): align node on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\thinspace & \negthinspace): Re-align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\(SPACE)): Re-align on English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\normalsfcodes): translate node to French.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\spacefactor): Translate menu entry
+ \@. (\frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing): Align on the English.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\hspace): Re-align node on English version.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\mathstrut): Translate node.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom): Translate node to French.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\smash): translate node to French.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Spacing in math mode): Align on English version.
+ (\smash, \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, \mathstrut): New nodes to be translated.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Expressions): Translate the node to French.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\hss): Translate node to French.
+
+2021-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Command line input): Add more text from the French
+ version to be translated.
+ (\day & \month & \year): wording + refer to Command line input.
+ (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): wording.
+ (\mbox & \makebox): add TODO after discussion with Karl.
+ (\fbox & \framebox): ``lines'' -> ``rules''. Remove word
+ ``split''. ``height'' -> ``total height''. Suppress spurious space
+ in example.
+ (\@@dottedtocline): Ref to \contentsline + wording.
+ (\addcontentsline): Add some refs, notably about root-name + some
+ clarification & wording.
+ (\contentsline): base file -> root file. tocloft & hyperref to
+ Index + clarification about the hyperref addition error.
+ (\numberline): Minor fix.
+ (Command line input): Slurp the text from the French version.
+
+2021-08-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Indexes): Expand section header text.
+
+2021-08-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newlength): ``command sequence'' -> ``control
+ sequence''.
+ (Making paragraphs): Clarify the empty lines are in the source
+ code. Clarify that the paragrapgh separation can have more than
+ one blank line, and the line may be not empty for the
+ blanks. ``line'' -> ``blank line'' where applicable for clarity. Typo.
+ (\par): Refer to node ``Making paragraph'' for the usual par
+ separator. Fix description of what \par does in LR and in
+ paragraph mode.
+ (Modes): Clarify that ``paragraph mode'' is the same as
+ ``horizontal mode'' and the the actual page breaks occur in outer
+ vertical mode, horizontal mode gets just the line break positions.
+
+2021-08-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): ``alphabetic control
+ sequence'' -> ``control word''.
+ (Control sequences): new node.
+ (\newlength): ``@var{arg}'' -> ``\@var{len}''.
+ (\setlength, \addtolength, \settoheight, \settodepth, \settowidth):
+ ``@var{len}'' -> ``\@var{len}''. Fix error messages description.
+ (\(SPACE)): Indicate leading blanks are ignored.
+
+2021-08-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font sizes): Add paragraph on using font size
+ commands in formulas.
+
+2021-08-09 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\normalsfcodes): ``space factor values'' ->
+ ``space factors''.
+ (\(SPACE) ): @key{...}-ify index entries such as \NEWLINE ->
+ \@key{NEWLINE}. Use a two column table in the exemple to stress
+ change of space amount. Make more generic the statement about
+ collapsing whatever blanks in a single white space. Improve
+ description how to prevent a control sequence from swallowing
+ subsequent spaces.
+ (\thinspace & \negthinspace): For consistency @file{...}-ize
+ package names.
+ (\/): @dfn{...}-ize ``slant parameter''.
+ (\strut): and -> or. Clarify where the problem happens in the
+ lists example. \mathrm{...}-ize d in integral dt. Calrify that \\
+ optional argument changes the baseline skip.
+ (\addvspace): Fix missing ``\'' + clarifications.
+
+2021-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\hspace, \vspace): add missing ``is'' before ``non-discardable''.
+ (\frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing): Add anchor to old node name.
+ (\vspace): version -> form, concerning *-forms.
+
+2021-08-07 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom): Fix Twain's quotation.
+ (\hspace): distinguish ``space'' from ``amount of space''. version
+ -> form concerning *-forms.
+ (\frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing): node renamed from
+ \frenchspacing. Some rewording.
+
+2021-08-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math styles): Add section on Math styles,
+ include moving some material from Math formulas and expanding.
+
+2021-08-05 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): wording
+ adjustments. amsmath as a package + send to index.
+
+2021-08-04 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Spaces): Re-align on the English version.
+ (\enspace & \quad & \qquad): New node, translate from English.
+ (\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, \strut): New nodes to be
+ translated
+ (\vspace, \vfill, \addvspace): Change order of these nodes to align the
+ doc strcuture on English version.
+
+2021-08-04 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align node on
+ English version.
+
+2021-08-04 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\clearpage & \cleardoublepage): Align node on
+ English version.
+
+2021-08-04 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\centering): Align node on English version.
+
+2021-08-03 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (fontenc package): Translate the node to French.
+ (list): typos.
+ (\@@ ): Translate the node to French.
+
+2021-08-03 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (fontenc package): Add fontspec to the package
+ index + add word put.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): letter -> character, as \ is not a
+ letter + minor clarification.
+
+2021-07-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\pagebreak & \nopagebreak): add mention of
+ \samepage and samepage environment; note they are obsolete and
+ unreliable.
+
2021-07-24 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
New release for CTAN, version of July 2021.
2021-07-21 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
@@ -140,7 +2414,7 @@
2020-12-30 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * latex2e-fr.texi: Few typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Few typos.
* NEWS-fr: Delivery note December 2020 French delivery to CTAN.
@@ -207,7 +2481,7 @@
* latex2e.texi (verbatim): Explain why it cannot be used within a
macro argument. Forward reference to CTAN node.
- * latex2e-fr.texi (\verb): Typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\verb): Typos.
(verbatim): Align on English.
2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -274,7 +2548,7 @@
separator, but for English it also make the column alignment
easier.
- * latex2e-fr.texi (list): Complete translation + fix typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (list): Complete translation + fix typos.
(minipage): Fix translation, do not use inches (French people
don't understand what it means). Fix the neighbourhood population
example.
@@ -396,7 +2670,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (\ref): typo, ``item'' duplicate word
removal. Reported by Denis Bitouz\'e.
- (figure): Typoes.
+ (figure): Typos.
2020-12-08 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
@@ -524,7 +2798,7 @@
2020-09-06 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
* latex2e-fr.texi: Finalize propagating Jim's r649, notably
- include article template. Fix lots of typoes.
+ include article template. Fix lots of typos.
* latex2e.texi: Insert a comma after @xref{...} wherever
applicable.
@@ -596,8 +2870,12 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (minipage): Re-align on English translation.
- * latex2e.texi (minipage): Typoes + insert a few TODO comments.
+ * latex2e.texi (minipage): Typos + insert a few TODO comments.
+2020-07-124 Jim Hefferon <jim at joshua.smcvt.edu>
+
+ * July 2020 release.
+
2020-07-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
* latex2e.texi (\appendix): Fix \og\appendixname\fg description.
@@ -772,7 +3050,7 @@
2020-04-16 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package construction): Typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package construction): Typos.
(\write): Clarify example comment, \og courant\fg \rightarrow \og racine\fg.
(\wlog): Suppress spurious space in example.
(\write18): Translate node with fixing statement on \jobname.
@@ -808,11 +3086,11 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (\include & \includeonly): Complete translation.
- * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly): Typoes.
+ * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly): Typos.
2020-04-06 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * latex2e-fr.texi (Sectioning): Typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Sectioning): Typos.
* latex2e.texi (Sectioning): Fix \og secnumdepth\fg \rightarrow \og tocdepth\fg
@@ -831,7 +3109,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (Top, Front/back matter): Change \og Front/back
matter\fg translation to \og Parties pr\'e/post-liminaires\fg.
- (CTAN): Typoes.
+ (CTAN): Typos.
(Document classes): Refresh translation.
(\part): Translate node.
(\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph): Typo.
@@ -878,7 +3156,7 @@
* latex2e.texi (\endinput): clarify \og during mailing\fg.
(Table of contents etc.): Move package index reference to the
concerned paragaph.
- (\openin & \openout): Typoes.
+ (\openin & \openout): Typos.
(\read): \og\file\fg \rightarrow \og\recipient file\fg
(\write): \og at code{\ldots}\fg \rightarrow \og at var{\ldots}\fg.
(\write): typo.
@@ -1004,7 +3282,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (\@@startsection): \og scenumdepth\fg \rightarrow \og tocdepth\fg where applicable.
(Class and package commands): Translate index entries.
(figure): \og figure\fg \rightarrow \og figure*\fg.
- (list): Typoes.
+ (list): Typos.
(quotation & quote): Typo.
(Color): Translate menu entry.
(Commands for color): Translate node.
@@ -1058,7 +3336,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (trivlist): typo.
(\linethickness): typo
- (tabular): typoes.
+ (tabular): typos.
(\newcommand & \renewcommand): use @var{\ldots}.
(\parbox): Re-align French on English version.
(Color package options): progress translation.
@@ -1793,7 +4071,7 @@
2017-10-03 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
* latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Typo.
- (quotation and quote): Typoes.
+ (quotation and quote): Typos.
2017-08-24 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
@@ -1826,7 +4104,7 @@
2017-08-09 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * NEWS-fr: Typoes.
+ * NEWS-fr: Typos.
* Makefile.1: Add common.texi to the list of files to be zipped
into distribution.
@@ -1848,7 +4126,7 @@
* NEWS-fr: svn propset keywords to Id for leading timestap to be
uptodate
- * README-fr: Typoes. Extend the leading English part fo the French
+ * README-fr: Typos. Extend the leading English part fo the French
readme to comply with CTAN requirements.
2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -1901,7 +4179,7 @@
as \@@startsection and how \section keeps is standard calling form
when redefined. heading -> title for consistency. @code{}-ify
class names, book, report & article. Use anchor to
- secnumdepth. Typoes. rubber -> typically rubber. Solve overfully
+ secnumdepth. Typos. rubber -> typically rubber. Solve overfully
hbox in example by not repeating explanations in examplified LaTeX
comments, rather make a simple link. style [...] file -> package
[...] file. redefined [...] sectional units -> redefined [...]
@@ -2190,7 +4468,7 @@
(Cross references, \label, abstract): Same changes as in
latex2e.texi.
(Cross references, \label, \pageref, \ref): Take Jim's rev481
- edits + fix some typoes.
+ edits + fix some typos.
(\includeonly): Fix typo.
* Makefile.1: Add check-license-<lang> targets to check that the
@@ -2205,12 +4483,12 @@
license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
(dircategory): fix `LaTeX2e-fr' -> `latex2e-fr'
(throughout document): Use proper unbreakable space before colons.
- (tabular, \newtheorem): typoes.
- (\address): @var{...} instead of @code{...} for the argument + typoes.
- (\cc): typoes + add example from latex2e.texi
+ (tabular, \newtheorem): typos.
+ (\address): @var{...} instead of @code{...} for the argument + typos.
+ (\cc): typos + add example from latex2e.texi
(\closing): typo.
- (\signature): Typoes, translate @var name.
- (Command line): Typoes.
+ (\signature): Typos, translate @var name.
+ (Command line): Typos.
* latex2e.texi: Restore license text without @inclusion of
license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
@@ -2431,12 +4709,12 @@
package variable @var{paquo} in the synopsis description.
(\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align description on latest
latex2e.texi by @code{...}-ifying all the occurrence of
- `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typoes.
+ `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typos.
(\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): nargs starting from 0
- rather than from 1. Fix typoes. `argument positionnel' ->
+ rather than from 1. Fix typos. `argument positionnel' ->
`param\`etre positionnel'.
(Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the
- @findex in accordance with description. Fix typoes.
+ @findex in accordance with description. Fix typos.
2016-04-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -2443,7 +4721,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Top): Make version under quotes to
avoid incorrect French ``de Avril 2016'' or ``du Avril 2016''
instead of ``d'Avril 2016''.
- (Document classes): Typoes.
+ (Document classes): Typos.
* latex2e-{es,fr}.texi (top comment): Update dates in copyright
notice up to 2016.
@@ -2460,7 +4738,7 @@
* latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Output files, Using BibTeX):
Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment
by Petra R\"ube-Pugliese.
- (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typoes.
+ (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typos.
* latex2e.texi (top comment, Output files): Replace CTAN central
server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra
@@ -2537,10 +4815,10 @@
environment by a call to this macro.
* latex2e-fr.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
- (filecontents): Typoes.
+ (filecontents): Typos.
(table): Typo (table evironment name mistakenly translated to
French).
- (\\): Typoes.
+ (\\): Typos.
(\enlargethispage): translate cindex entry to French.
* latex2e-es.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
@@ -2623,11 +4901,11 @@
2016-03-08 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typoe in `Modes' menu entry.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typo in `Modes' menu entry.
(eqnarray): `or' -> `ou'.
(Math symbols): Progress translation of this node + same changes
as in latex2e.texi.
- (Modes): Typoes + same changes as in latex2e.texi.
+ (Modes): Typos + same changes as in latex2e.texi.
(\ensuremath): new node.
(\(SPACE) and \@@): `guillemet anglais' -> `guillemet-apostrophe'.
(Text symbols): Progess translation of this node + same changes as
@@ -2765,7 +5043,7 @@
(\addtocontents): Translate this node.
(Glossaries): Translate this node.
(Indexes): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
- (Letters): Typoes. `cl\^oture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete
+ (Letters): Typos. `cl\^oture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete
translation with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
(\address): Translate this node.
(\cc): Translate this node.
@@ -2849,7 +5127,7 @@
2016-01-27 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
- * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typoes.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typos.
(Subscripts & superscripts): Typo.
(Math functions): Translate this node to French.
(Math accents): Translate this node to French.
@@ -3016,7 +5294,7 @@
@example... at end~example.
* latex2e-fr.texi (Output files): Typo.
- (tabular): Typoes.
+ (tabular): Typos.
(\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo. Introduce the concept of positional parameter.
(\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Complete the translation
and make the same text improvements as in latex2e.texi.
@@ -3575,7 +5853,7 @@
concerning \parindent length.
* latex2e-fr.texi (Tables of contents): Translation of this node.
- (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Boxes): Typoes.
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Boxes): Typos.
2015-08-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
@@ -3604,10 +5882,12 @@
2015-07-30 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincent.belaiche at gmail.com>
- * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Correct menu item French translation for "Making paragraphs"
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Correct menu item French translation for
+ "Making paragraphs"
(itemize): typo, remove left-over English word "dash"
- (Making paragraphs): typoes.
- (\indent, \noindent, \parskip, \parbox): Translate to French these nodes.
+ (Making paragraphs): typos.
+ (\indent, \noindent, \parskip, \parbox): Translate to French these
+ nodes.
* latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Correct -- for --- for en-dash
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# $Id: Makefile 935 2021-07-23 17:48:15Z jimhefferon $
+# $Id: Makefile 1073 2021-11-13 21:50:34Z karl $
# Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry.
# Makefile for latexrefman.
@@ -133,6 +133,7 @@
# make
# make htmlsplit
# make dist
+# make easyurls
# make commitready
# svn commit # to commit regenerated files
# then:
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,24 +1,38 @@
-$Id: NEWS 712 2018-10-15 23:08:38Z jimhefferon $
+$Id: NEWS 1078 2022-01-26 18:12:17Z karl $
NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen.
-Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained).
French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche.
+Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently looking for
+a maintainer).
+
Some changes in January 2022 release:
-Changes in July 2020 release:
+New sections:
+* \caption
+* BibTeX error messages
+* Producing the index manually
-Among the changes since the last release:
- * Entries for \openin, \openout, \message, \write, \write18.
- * Section on fontenc.
- * Section on math delimiters.
- * Describe -output-directory option.
- * Section on xr.
- * Section on expressions.
- * Entry on \contentsline.
+Fixes:
+* Units of length: correct pt/mm/cm conversions.
+* Command line input: extended text.
+* throughout: index entries; typographical, reference, wording.
+
Changes in July 2021 release
-Changes in October 2018 release:
+(see ChangeLog)
+
Changes in July 2020 release:
+
+* Entries for \openin, \openout, \message, \write, \write18.
+* Section on fontenc.
+* Section on math delimiters.
+* Describe -output-directory option.
+* Section on xr.
+* Section on expressions.
+* Entry on \contentsline.
+
+
Changes in October 2018 release:
+
The main change is that we now offer the manual in a version that
is split into separate web pages for each section or subsection.
This new version is more host-friendly. To celebrate we have
@@ -35,10 +49,8 @@
In addition to the format news, there were many bug fixes and new entries,
including \smash and \phantom.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
Changes in July 2018 release:
-Changes in July 2018 release:
-
We have gone through the two documents latex-info and
latex2e-reference and checked that any information in those documents
is in this one.
@@ -54,10 +66,8 @@
In addition, there were many bug fixes, including greatly shrinking
the size of one of the graphics.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
Changes in April 2018 release:
-Changes in April 2018 release:
-
There is a new chapter on color and a new chapter on graphics
inclusion (all the commands from grfguide.pdf are now covered),
there is much greater coverage of the list environment including a
@@ -65,8 +75,7 @@
environment.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in Aug 2017 release:
+
Changes in Aug 2017 release:
Besides the usual bug fixes, some of the changes in this version
include coverage of \makeatletter and \makeatother, \@startsection,
@@ -74,8 +83,7 @@
in the descriptions of floats, the letter environment, \raisebox,
\onecolumn and \twocolumn, and many more.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in Apr 2016 release:
+
Changes in Apr 2016 release:
Provide first complete French translation --- still not fully aligned
on the latest revisions of the English version.
@@ -86,8 +94,7 @@
for optional parameters. Improve naming of Math symbols. Usual bug and
typo fixes.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in Oct 2015 release:
+
Changes in Oct 2015 release:
Many examples added, often using typical constructs.
Extend many entries to include points frequently asked.
@@ -95,8 +102,7 @@
Translations not yet part of update; needs to be worked out.
Thanks to Vincent Belaiche for many contributions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in May 2015 release:
+
Changes in May 2015 release:
Usual bug fixes, more indexing, template updates.
Improve document and LaTeX overview, including general syntax.
@@ -106,12 +112,11 @@
For HTML, make the Up from Top be http://tug.org/texinfohtml.
Exception word list for spell checking, and make target for spell
checking and doubled words.
--
+
French translation begun (only in sources); Spanish translation updated.
Thanks to Vincent Belaiche and Jim Hefferon for their many contributions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in May 2014 release:
+
Changes in May 2014 release:
Usual bug fixes, template updates.
Add filecontents description, fnsymbol info, non-obsolescence of \tt et al.,
@@ -118,41 +123,35 @@
mostly due to Vincent Belaiche.
Updates to Spanish translation, also from Vincent.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in May 2013 release:
+
Changes in May 2013 release:
Usual bug fixes, template updates.
Mention \unitlength default (1pt) and \oldstylenums.
Fix in ltx-help.el to find correct nodes for environments, etc.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in May 2012 release:
+
Changes in May 2012 release:
Template updates and references.
More on floats.
Mention a few other documents.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in May 2011 release:
+
Changes in May 2011 release:
Usual bug fixes, additional background info.
TUGboat sample document updated.
Discussion of width parameters.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in July 2010 release:
+
Changes in July 2010 release:
Usual bug fixes. Added a number of control sequences from ltoutenc that
typeset particular glyphs.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in September 2009 release:
+
Changes in September 2009 release:
A bit more about figures and indexes, use of @table where appropriate in
the source, usual array of minor fixes, added references, etc.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in release 2.0:
+
Changes in release 2.0:
After discussions with Torsten and Stephen Gilmore, maintainership of
this document has been handed off to me. See the README for more
@@ -170,8 +169,7 @@
Karl Berry (karl at freefriends.org), June 12 2008
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in release 1.6:
+
Changes in release 1.6:
Some minor bug fixes; thanks to Piet van Oostrum and Ralf
Fassel for those.
@@ -187,8 +185,7 @@
Torsten Martinsen, April 24 1996
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in release 1.3:
+
Changes in release 1.3:
A selection of low-level NFSS2 commands added.
A short description of how to use BibTeX.
@@ -200,8 +197,7 @@
Torsten Martinsen, March 13th 1995
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in release 1.4:
+
Changes in release 1.4:
NOTE: The name of the generated Info file is now `latex' and not `latex2e'.
More commands added to function index (ahem).
@@ -210,8 +206,7 @@
Torsten Martinsen, April 5th 1995
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-Changes in release 1.5:
+
Changes in release 1.5:
All menu items now have one-line descriptions.
Major cleanup of next/previous links.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-$Id: README 905 2021-05-15 22:41:07Z karl $
+$Id: README 936 2021-07-24 15:13:12Z jimhefferon $
README for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
This README file originally written 2008, Karl Berry.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -281,3 +281,11 @@
qed
dottedtocline
xindex
+visiblespace
+theindex
+samepage
+entendre
+disproven
+unimagined
+vitalism
+tablefootnote
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
- at c $Id: common.texi 729 2018-11-13 23:22:27Z karl $
+ at c $Id: common.texi 1031 2021-09-01 17:02:05Z vincentb1 $
@c Public domain.
@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://latexref.xyz
@set LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org
@@ -14,6 +14,9 @@
\else\@c
@end macro
@end ifnottex
+ at macro package {packagename}
+ at code{\packagename\}
+ at end macro
@tex
\globaldefs=1
@@ -52,6 +55,9 @@
\lasymathchardef{2003}{\rhd}
\lasymathchardef{2002}{\unlhd}
\lasymathchardef{2004}{\unrhd}
+\font\tenmathbb = msbm10
+% use \hbox to force horizontal mode, as \mathbbN is to be called from Math mode.
+\def\mathbbN{{\hbox{\tenmathbb N}}}
%
% must explicitly reset before the (at)end tex, not let the (at)end group
% reset it; else internal Texinfo variables get messed up.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -4,10 +4,10 @@
<!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
]>
<book id="latex2e.dbk" lang="en">
-<!-- $Id: common.texi 729 2018-11-13 23:22:27Z karl $ -->
+<!-- $Id: common.texi 1031 2021-09-01 17:02:05Z vincentb1 $ -->
<!-- Public domain. -->
-<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)</title>
+<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</title>
<!-- %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
<!-- latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
@@ -28,8 +28,9 @@
<!-- xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
<!-- xx JH something on code listings -->
<!-- xx JH ligatures -->
-<!-- xx JH \caption -->
<!-- -->
+<!-- xx \NewCommandCopy et al. (Brian Dunn, 21 Dec 2021 06:50:17). -->
+<!-- -->
<!-- xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
<!-- xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
<!-- xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands. -->
@@ -38,7 +39,7 @@
<!-- xx All the special characters should be definitively described. -->
<bookinfo><legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of July 2021.
+document preparation system, version of January 2022.
</para>
<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -55,7 +56,7 @@
text was directly copied.)
</para>
<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021, 2022 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
@@ -82,7 +83,7 @@
<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of July 2021.
+document preparation system, version of January 2022.
</para>
<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -99,7 +100,7 @@
text was directly copied.)
</para>
<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021, 2022 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
@@ -128,7 +129,7 @@
<title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-July 2021) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+January 2022) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
</para>
</chapter>
@@ -1034,7 +1035,7 @@
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>etoolbox</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>etoolbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>etoolbox</filename> package offers the commands
+<para>The <literal>etoolbox</literal> package offers the commands
<literal>\newrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\newrobustcmd*</literal>, as well as the commands
<literal>\renewrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\renewrobustcmd*</literal>, and the commands
<literal>\providerobustcmd</literal>, and <literal>\providerobustcmd*</literal>. These are
@@ -1366,9 +1367,12 @@
<para>Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the
character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fontspec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fontspec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>This package only applies if you use the <literal>pdflatex</literal> engine
(see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>). If you use the <command>xelatex</command> or
-<command>lualatex</command> engine then instead use the <filename>fontspec</filename> package.
+<command>lualatex</command> engine then instead use the <literal>fontspec</literal> package.
</para>
<para>&tex;’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use
@@ -1375,7 +1379,7 @@
<literal>\accent</literal> (see <link linkend="_005caccent">\accent</link>) but this disables hyphenation. &tex;
users have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using
-<command>pdflatex</command> then this in the preamble
+<command>pdflatex</command> then put this in the preamble
</para>
<screen>\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
</screen>
@@ -1393,7 +1397,7 @@
<para>If you are using an encoding such as <literal>T1</literal> and the characters appear
blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped,
sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a
-package such as <filename>lmodern</filename> or <filename>cm-super</filename> to get a font that
+package such as <literal>lmodern</literal> or <literal>cm-super</literal> to get a font that
extends &latex;’s default using vector fonts.
</para>
<para>For each <replaceable>font_encoding</replaceable> given as an option but not already
@@ -1465,7 +1469,7 @@
</screen>
<para>The <replaceable>text-settings</replaceable> are the commands that &latex; will run every
time it switches from one encoding to another with the
-<literal>\selectfont</literal> or <literal>\fontencoding</literal> command. The
+<literal>\selectfont</literal> and <literal>\fontencoding</literal> commands. The
<replaceable>math-settings</replaceable> are the commands that &latex; will use whenever the
font is accessed as a math alphabet.
</para>
@@ -1501,6 +1505,9 @@
<para>Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding
<replaceable>encoding</replaceable> at the location <replaceable>slot</replaceable>.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>slot, font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>A <firstterm>slot</firstterm> is the number identifying a glyph within a font.
+</para>
<para>This line from <filename>t1enc.def</filename> declares that to make a circumflex
accent as in <literal>\^A</literal>, the system will put the accent in slot 2
over the ‘<literal>A</literal>’ character, which is represented in ASCII as 65.
@@ -1525,9 +1532,9 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextAccentDefault{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>If there is an encoding-specific accent command <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> but there is
+<para>If there is an encoding-specific accent command \<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> but there is
no associated <literal>\DeclareTextAccent</literal> for that encoding then this
command will pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for
<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>.
@@ -1544,8 +1551,8 @@
<para>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <link linkend="_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">\UseTextSymbol
& \UseTextAccent</link>).
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
- {\UseTextAccent{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{#1}}
+<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+ {\UseTextAccent{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{#1}}
</screen>
<para>Note that <literal>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</literal> works for any one-argument
<filename>fontenc</filename> command, not just the accent command.
@@ -1556,26 +1563,25 @@
<title><literal>\DeclareTextCommand</literal> & <literal>\ProvideTextCommand</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvideTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\DeclareTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn}</replaceable>
-\DeclareTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn}</replaceable>
+\DeclareTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>or one of:
</para>
-<screen>\ProvideTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\ProvideTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\ProvideTextCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\ProvideTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Define the command <replaceable>cmd</replaceable>, which will be specific to one encoding.
-The command name <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> must begin with a backslash, \. These
-commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining <literal>cmd</literal> does
-not cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code
-in <replaceable>defn</replaceable> is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<para>Define the command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>, which will be specific to one
+encoding. The command name <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> must be preceded by a backslash,
+<literal>\</literal>. These commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining
+\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> does not cause an error. The defined command will be robust
+even if the code in <replaceable>defn</replaceable> is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
<para>For example, the file <filename>t1enc.def</filename> contains this line.
</para>
@@ -1591,22 +1597,23 @@
‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding
OT1</literal>’.
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextSymbol</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>\ProvideTextCommand</literal> variant does the same, except that it
-does nothing if <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> is already defined. The
+does nothing if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is already defined. The
<literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal> command is faster than this one for simple
slot-to-glyph association (see <link linkend="_005cDeclareTextSymbol">\DeclareTextSymbol</link>)
</para>
-<para>The optional <replaceable>nargs</replaceable> and <replaceable>optargsdefault</replaceable> arguments play the
-same role here as in <literal>\newcommand</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &
+<para>The optional <replaceable>nargs</replaceable> and <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> arguments play the same
+role here as in <literal>\newcommand</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &
\renewcommand</link>). Briefly, <replaceable>nargs</replaceable> is an integer from 0 to 9
-specifying the number of arguments that the defined command <literal>cmd</literal>
-takes. This number includes any optional argument. Omitting this
-argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> will have
-no arguments. And, if <replaceable>optargsdefault</replaceable> is present then the first
-argument of <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value
-<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> (which may be the empty string). If
-<replaceable>optargsdefault</replaceable> is not present then <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not take
-an optional argument.
+specifying the number of arguments that the defined command
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> takes. This number includes any optional argument.
+Omitting this argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> will have no arguments. And, if <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+is present then the first argument of <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional,
+with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> (which may be the empty string).
+If <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> is not present then <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not
+take an optional argument.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -1620,15 +1627,15 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>or:
</para>
-<screen>\ProvideTextCommandDefault{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Give a default definition for <replaceable>cmd</replaceable>, for when that command is not
-defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only use
-encodings known to be available.
+<para>Give a default definition for <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>, for when that command
+is not defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should
+only use encodings known to be available.
</para>
<para>This makes <literal>\copyright</literal> available.
</para>
@@ -1643,7 +1650,7 @@
<para>As with the related non-default commands, the
<literal>\ProvideTextCommandDefault</literal> has exactly the same behavior as
<literal>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</literal> except that it does nothing if
-<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> is already defined (see <link linkend="_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">\DeclareTextCommand &
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is already defined (see <link linkend="_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">\DeclareTextCommand &
\ProvideTextCommand</link>). So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks
that other packages can improve upon.
</para>
@@ -1657,7 +1664,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextComposite{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>simple_object</replaceable>}{<replaceable>slot</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextComposite{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>simple_object</replaceable>}{<replaceable>slot</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an
accent over a separate character.
@@ -1664,7 +1671,7 @@
</para>
<para>This line from <filename>t1enc.def</filename> means that <literal>\^o</literal> will cause
&latex; to typeset lowercase ‘<literal>o</literal>’ by taking the character
-directly from location 224 in the font.
+directly from slot 224 in the font.
</para>
<screen>\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
</screen>
@@ -1672,7 +1679,7 @@
<replaceable>simple_object</replaceable> should be a single character or a single command.
The <replaceable>slot</replaceable> argument is usually a positive integer represented in
decimal (although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally
-<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> has already been declared for this encoding, either with
+\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> has already been declared for this encoding, either with
<literal>\DeclareTextAccent</literal> or with a one-argument
<literal>\DeclareTextCommand</literal>. In <filename>t1enc.def</filename>, the above line follows
the <literal>\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}</literal> command.
@@ -1687,10 +1694,10 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>A more general version of <literal>\DeclareTextComposite</literal> that runs
-arbitrary code with <replaceable>cmd</replaceable>.
+arbitrary code with <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>.
</para>
<para>This allows accents on ‘<literal>i</literal>’ to act like accents on dotless i,
<literal>\i</literal>.
@@ -1698,7 +1705,7 @@
<screen>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
</screen>
<para>See <link linkend="fontenc-package">fontenc package</link>, for a list of common encodings. Normally
-<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> will have already been declared with <literal>\DeclareTextAccent</literal>
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> will have already been declared with <literal>\DeclareTextAccent</literal>
or as a one argument <literal>\DeclareTextCommand</literal>.
</para>
@@ -1711,7 +1718,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextSymbol{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>slot</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextSymbol{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>slot</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Define a symbol in the encoding <replaceable>encoding</replaceable> at the location
<replaceable>slot</replaceable>. Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not
@@ -1731,9 +1738,9 @@
hexadecimal (as in <literal>"13</literal>), although decimal has the advantage that
single quote or double quote could be redefined by another package.
</para>
-<para>If <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> has already been defined then <literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal>
-does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the
-transcript file.
+<para>If <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> has already been defined then
+<literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal> does not give an error but it does log the
+redefinition in the transcript file.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -1746,12 +1753,12 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}
+<screen>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>If there is an encoding-specific symbol command <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> but there is no
-associated <literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal> for that encoding, then this command
-will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for
-<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>.
+<para>If there is an encoding-specific symbol command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> but
+there is no associated <literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal> for that encoding, then
+this command will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as
+described for <replaceable>encoding</replaceable>.
</para>
<para>For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning for
<literal>\textdollar</literal> then use the one from <literal>OT1</literal>, declare this.
@@ -1761,8 +1768,8 @@
<para>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <link linkend="_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">\UseTextSymbol
& \UseTextAccent</link>).
</para>
-<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
- {\UseTextSymbol{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}}
+<screen>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+ {\UseTextSymbol{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}}
</screen>
<para>Note that <literal>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</literal> can be used to define a
default for any zero-argument <filename>fontenc</filename> command.
@@ -1798,11 +1805,11 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\UseTextSymbol{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+<screen>\UseTextSymbol{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>or:
</para>
-<screen>\UseTextAccent{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\UseTextAccent{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding.
</para>
@@ -2093,6 +2100,18 @@
style command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it
in curly braces <literal>{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}</literal>.
</para>
+<para>Trying to use these commands in math, as with <literal>$\small mv^2/2$</literal>,
+results in ‘<literal>LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small
+invalid in math mode</literal>’, and the font size doesn’t
+change. To work with a too-large formula, often the best option is to
+use the <literal>displaymath</literal> environment (see <link linkend="Math-formulas">Math formulas</link>), or
+one of the environments from the <literal>amsmath</literal> package. For inline
+mathematics, such as in a table of formulas, an alternative is something
+like <literal>{\small $mv^2/2$}</literal>. (Sometimes <literal>\scriptsize</literal> and
+<literal>\scriptstyle</literal> are confused. Both change the font size, but the
+latter also changes a number of other aspects of how mathematics is
+typeset. See <link linkend="Math-styles">Math styles</link>.)
+</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment form of font size commands</primary></indexterm>
<para>An <firstterm>environment form</firstterm> of each of these commands is also defined; for
instance, <literal>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</literal>. However, in practice
@@ -2251,10 +2270,10 @@
weight and width are <literal>m</literal>, in which case use just one
(‘<literal><literal>m</literal></literal>’).
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontshape{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontshape{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontshape</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>shapes, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"/><para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+<para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
</para>
<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="19*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>n</literal>
</para></entry><entry><para>Upright (normal)
@@ -2287,11 +2306,10 @@
</para>
<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-linespread"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linespread</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Equivalent to
-<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>, and
-therefore must be followed by <literal>\selectfont</literal> to have any effect.
-Best specified in the preamble, or use the <literal>setspace</literal> package, as
-just described.
+<para>Equivalent to <literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>,
+and therefore must be followed by <literal>\selectfont</literal> to have any
+effect. Best specified in the preamble. See <link linkend="_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">\baselineskip &
+\baselinestretch</link>, for using <literal>setspace</literal> package instead.
</para>
<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-selectfont"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\selectfont</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\selectfont</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2679,7 +2697,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double spacing</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>\baselineskip</literal> is a rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It gives
-the leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
+the <firstterm>leading</firstterm>, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
baseline to baseline.
</para>
<para>Ordinarily document authors do not directly change <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
@@ -2730,9 +2748,9 @@
then &tex; instead uses <literal>\lineskip</literal> as the interline glue. The
second is that &tex; doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous
line. Instead it uses <literal>\prevdepth</literal>, which usually contains that
-depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list)
-or just after a rule, <literal>\prevdepth</literal> has the value -1000pt and this
-special value tells &tex; not to insert any interline glue at the
+depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list) or
+just after a rule, <literal>\prevdepth</literal> has the value -1000pt and
+this special value tells &tex; not to insert any interline glue at the
paragraph start.
</para>
<para>In the standard classes <literal>\lineskiplimit</literal> is 0pt and
@@ -2752,7 +2770,7 @@
For double spacing, take <replaceable>factor</replaceable> to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half
spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the
<literal>\baselineskip</literal> is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by
-1.6 gives a font size to baseline ratio of about 2. (The
+1.6 gives a baseline skip to font size ratio of about 2. (The
<literal>\linespread</literal> command is defined as
<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal> so it won’t
take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at
@@ -2762,7 +2780,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>setspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>setspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A simpler approach is the <filename>setspace</filename> package. The basic example:
+<para>A simpler approach is the <literal>setspace</literal> package. The basic example:
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{setspace}
\doublespacing % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
@@ -2776,8 +2794,10 @@
... \end{doublespace}</literal>. The package also has commands to do
arbitrary spacing: <literal>\setstretch{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal> and
<literal>\begin{spacing}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>} ... \end{spacing}</literal>.
+This package also keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
</para>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 label="5.7" id="Floats">
<title>Floats</title>
@@ -2789,7 +2809,7 @@
<para>&latex; can have a number of different classes of floating material.
The default is the two classes, <literal>figure</literal> (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>) and
<literal>table</literal> (see <link linkend="table">table</link>), but you can create a new class with the
-package <filename>float</filename>.
+package <literal>float</literal>.
</para>
<para>Within any one float class &latex; always respects the order, so that
the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
@@ -2875,7 +2895,7 @@
the <replaceable>placement</replaceable> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
the <literal>t</literal> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
-the <filename>flafter</filename> package or using the command
+the <literal>flafter</literal> package or using the command
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\suppressfloats</primary></indexterm>
<literal>\suppressfloats[t]</literal>, which causes floats for the top position on
this page to moved to the next page.
@@ -2958,6 +2978,92 @@
(<ulink url="https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf">https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf</ulink>).
</para>
+
+<sect2 label="5.7.1" id="_005ccaption">
+<title><literal>\caption</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>captions</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\caption{<replaceable>caption-text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\caption[<replaceable>short-caption-text</replaceable>]{<replaceable>caption-text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Make a caption for a floating environment, such as a <literal>figure</literal> or
+<literal>table</literal> environment (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link> or <link linkend="table">table</link>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example, &latex; places a caption below the vertical blank
+space that is left by the author for the later inclusion of a picture.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}
+ \vspace*{1cm}
+ \caption{Alonzo Cushing, Battery A, 4th US Artillery.}
+ \label{fig:CushingPic}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\caption</literal> command will label the <replaceable>caption-text</replaceable> with
+something like ‘<literal>Figure 1:</literal>’ for an article or
+‘<literal>Figure 1.1:</literal>’ for a book. The text is centered if it is
+shorter than the text width, or set as an unindented paragraph if it
+takes more than one line.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to placing the <replaceable>caption-text</replaceable> in the output, the
+<literal>\caption</literal> command also saves that information for use in a list of
+figures or list of tables (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the <literal>\caption</literal> command uses the optional
+<replaceable>short-caption-text</replaceable>, so that the shorter text appears in the list
+of tables, rather than the longer <replaceable>caption-text</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{|*{3}{c}|}
+ \hline
+ 4 &9 &2 \\
+ 3 &5 &7 \\
+ 8 &1 &6 \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption[\textit{Lo Shu} magic square]{%
+ The \textit{Lo Shu} magic square, which is unique among
+ squares of order three up to rotation and reflection.}
+ \label{tab:LoShu}
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; will label the <replaceable>caption-text</replaceable> with something like
+‘<literal>Table 1:</literal>’ for an article or ‘<literal>Table 1.1:</literal>’ for a
+book.
+</para>
+<para>The caption can appear at the top of the <literal>figure</literal> or <literal>table</literal>.
+For instance, that would happen in the prior example by putting the
+<literal>\caption</literal> between the <literal>\centering</literal> and the
+<literal>\begin{tabular}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Different floating environments are numbered separately, by default. It
+is <literal>\caption</literal> that updates the counter, and so any <literal>\label</literal>
+must come after the <literal>\caption</literal>. The counter for the <literal>figure</literal>
+environment is named <literal>figure</literal>, and similarly the counter for the
+<literal>table</literal> environment is <literal>table</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The text that will be put in the list of figures or list of tables is
+moving argument. If you get the &latex; error ‘<literal>! Argument of
+\@caption has an extra }</literal>’ then you must put <literal>\protect</literal> in front
+of any fragile commands. See <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>caption</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>caption</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <literal>caption</literal> package has many options to adjust how the caption
+appears, for example changing the font size, making the caption be
+hanging text rather than set as a paragraph, or making the caption
+always set as a paragraph rather than centered when it is short.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="6" id="Sectioning">
@@ -3048,7 +3154,7 @@
letters with <literal>\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}</literal> in the
preamble (see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>). CTAN
has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably
-<filename>titlesec</filename>.
+<literal>titlesec</literal>.
</para>
<para>Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning commands.
</para>
@@ -3123,8 +3229,8 @@
<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the part title in
the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in running
headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). If it is not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable>
-will be there. This example puts a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but leaves
-out the break in the table of contents.
+will be there. This example puts a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but omits
+the break in the table of contents.
</para>
<screen>\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
</screen>
@@ -3137,12 +3243,12 @@
<para>In the class <literal>article</literal>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
-<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+<literal>indentfirst</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>One package to change the behavior of <literal>\part</literal> is <filename>titlesec</filename>.
+<para>One package to change the behavior of <literal>\part</literal> is <literal>titlesec</literal>.
See its documentation on CTAN.
</para>
@@ -3212,7 +3318,7 @@
<para>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
-<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+<literal>indentfirst</literal>.
</para>
<para>You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
something like ‘<literal>Lecture 1</literal>’, put in the preamble either
@@ -3227,7 +3333,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>To make this change because of the primary language for
-the document, see the package <filename>babel</filename>.
+the document, see the package <literal>babel</literal>.
</para>
<para>In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
@@ -3240,7 +3346,7 @@
<para>To change the behavior of the <literal>\chapter</literal> command, you can copy its
definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments. But
there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
-<filename>titlesec</filename>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+<literal>titlesec</literal>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
sense of what it can do.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
@@ -3301,7 +3407,7 @@
in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in
running headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). If it is not present then
<replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
-section,
+section:
</para>
<screen>\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
@@ -3324,7 +3430,7 @@
<para>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+package <literal>indentfirst</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3332,7 +3438,7 @@
<para>In general, to change the behavior of the <literal>\section</literal> command, there
are a number of options. One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
-address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation but the
+address this, including <literal>titlesec</literal>. See the documentation but the
example below gives a sense of what they can do.
</para>
<!-- credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4 -->
@@ -3386,8 +3492,8 @@
</para>
<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the subsection title
in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>). If it is
-not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This shows the full text in
-the title of the subsection,
+not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This
+shows the full text in the title of the subsection:
</para>
<screen>\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
@@ -3404,7 +3510,7 @@
<para>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+package <literal>indentfirst</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3412,7 +3518,7 @@
<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
<literal>\subsection</literal> command. One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
-address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation but the
+address this, including <literal>titlesec</literal>. See the documentation but the
example below gives a sense of what they can do.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
@@ -3497,7 +3603,7 @@
<para>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+package <literal>indentfirst</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3505,7 +3611,7 @@
<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>).
There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
-<filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation on CTAN.
+<literal>titlesec</literal>. See the documentation on CTAN.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -3545,7 +3651,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>appendix</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>appendix</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>appendix</filename> package adds the command
+<para>The <literal>appendix</literal> package adds the command
<literal>\appendixpage</literal> to put a separate ‘<literal>Appendices</literal>’ in the document
body before the first appendix, and the command <literal>\addappheadtotoc</literal>
to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
@@ -3617,7 +3723,7 @@
<para>Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
divisions such as <literal>\section</literal> or <literal>\subsection</literal>.
</para>
-<para>Note that the <filename>titlesec</filename> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+<para>Note that the <literal>titlesec</literal> package makes manipulation of sectioning
easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
satisfied with <literal>\@startsection</literal>, some cannot. For instance, in
the standard &latex; <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> classes the commands
@@ -4004,7 +4110,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>cleveref</filename> package includes text such as ‘<literal>Theorem</literal>’ in the
+<para>The <literal>cleveref</literal> package includes text such as ‘<literal>Theorem</literal>’ in the
reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
</para>
@@ -4012,8 +4118,12 @@
<sect1 label="7.4" id="xr-package">
<title><literal>xr</literal> package</title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>xr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>xr-hyper</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>xr</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>xr-hyper</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xr-hyper</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\externaldocument</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross referencing, across documents</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4028,9 +4138,9 @@
\externaldocument[<replaceable>reference-prefix</replaceable>]{<replaceable>document-basename</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Make cross references to the external document
-<literal><replaceable>document-basename</replaceable>.tex</literal>.
+<filename><replaceable>document-basename</replaceable>.tex</filename>.
</para>
-<para>Here is an example. If <literal>lectures.tex</literal> has this in the preamble
+<para>Here is an example. If <filename>lectures.tex</filename> has this in the preamble
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{xr}
\externaldocument{exercises}
@@ -4038,22 +4148,22 @@
\externaldocument{answers}
</screen>
<para>then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents.
-Suppose that <literal>exercises.tex</literal> has an enumerated list containing
+Suppose that <filename>exercises.tex</filename> has an enumerated list containing
this,
</para>
<screen>\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
</screen>
-<para>and <literal>hints.tex</literal> has an enumerated list with this,
+<para>and <filename>hints.tex</filename> has an enumerated list with this,
</para>
<screen>\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
</screen>
-<para>and <literal>answers.tex</literal> has an enumerated list with this.
+<para>and <filename>answers.tex</filename> has an enumerated list with this,
</para>
<screen>\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
are exactly two vertices.
</screen>
<para>After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering
-this in the body of <literal>lectures.tex</literal> will result in the lectures
+this in the body of <filename>lectures.tex</filename> will result in the lectures
getting the reference numbers used in the other documents.
</para>
<screen>See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}.
@@ -4178,10 +4288,10 @@
\end{array}
</screen>
<para>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
-mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
-such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>). Inside of each row the
-column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<literal>&</literal>). Rows are
-terminated with double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>), and normally appears within a displayed
+mathematics environment such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).
+Inside of each row the column entries are separated by an ampersand,
+(<literal>&</literal>). Rows are terminated with double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
</para>
<para>This example shows a three by three array.
</para>
@@ -4206,7 +4316,7 @@
</para>
<para>There are two ways that <literal>array</literal> diverges from <literal>tabular</literal>. The
first is that <literal>array</literal> entries are typeset in math mode, in
-textstyle (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies
+textstyle (see <link linkend="Math-styles">Math styles</link>) except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies
the column with <literal>p{...}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
text mode. The second is that, instead of <literal>tabular</literal>’s parameter
<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an <literal>array</literal> is
@@ -4219,7 +4329,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <filename>amsmath</filename>
+<para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <literal>amsmath</literal>
package. It comes with environments <literal>pmatrix</literal> for an array
surrounded by parentheses <literal>(...)</literal>, <literal>bmatrix</literal> for an array
surrounded by square brackets <literal>[...]</literal>, <literal>Bmatrix</literal> for an
@@ -4231,7 +4341,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The next example uses the <filename>amsmath</filename> package.
+<para>The next example uses the <literal>amsmath</literal> package.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
@@ -4242,14 +4352,14 @@
\end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
\end{equation}
</screen>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>array (package)</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>array (package)</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>array</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>array</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>dcolumn</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>dcolumn</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <filename>array</filename> package has
-many useful extensions, including more column types. The <filename>dcolumn</filename>
+<para>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <literal>array</literal> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The <literal>dcolumn</literal>
package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
the documentation on CTAN.
</para>
@@ -4318,7 +4428,6 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\centering</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, declaration for</primary></indexterm>
-
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>{\centering ... }
@@ -4419,7 +4528,7 @@
</para>
<para>For information about list layout parameters, including the default
values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
-<link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <filename>enumitem</filename> is useful for customizing
+<link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <literal>enumitem</literal> is useful for customizing
lists.
</para>
<para>This example changes the description labels to small caps.
@@ -4456,7 +4565,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Note that the <filename>amsmath</filename> package has significantly more extensive
+<para>Note that the <literal>amsmath</literal> package has significantly more extensive
displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
</para>
@@ -4604,7 +4713,7 @@
<para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
<link linkend="description">description</link> and <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>. For information about list layout
parameters, including the default values, and for information about
-customizing list layout, see <link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <filename>enumitem</filename> is
+customizing list layout, see <link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <literal>enumitem</literal> is
useful for customizing lists.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumi</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4645,7 +4754,7 @@
including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
(See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
<ulink url="https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf">https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</ulink>). New documents
-should include the <filename>amsmath</filename> package and use the displayed
+should include the <literal>amsmath</literal> package and use the displayed
mathematics environments provided there, such as the <literal>align</literal>
environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
working with old documents.
@@ -4725,7 +4834,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The package <filename>amsmath</filename> package has extensive displayed equation
+<para>The package <literal>amsmath</literal> package has extensive displayed equation
facilities. New documents should include this package.
</para>
@@ -4776,13 +4885,12 @@
placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> <literal>b</literal>
in <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
-references</link>).
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
-The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
-figure. By default it is numbered. If <replaceable>loftitle</replaceable> is present, it is
-used in the list of figures instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
-contents etc.</link>).
+references</link>). The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption
+text for the figure (see <link linkend="_005ccaption">\caption</link>). By default it is numbered.
+If <replaceable>loftitle</replaceable> is present, it is used in the list of figures
+instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).
</para>
<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic. &latex; will place that
graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
@@ -5059,7 +5167,7 @@
\item Rice portrait
\end{itemize}
</screen>
-<para>With the default locale—without loading e.g. <filename>babel</filename> package
+<para>With the default locale—without loading e.g. <literal>babel</literal> package
with another language than USenglish—as a top-level list each label
would come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling
depends on the nesting level; see below.
@@ -5121,7 +5229,7 @@
<literal>enumerate</literal> and <literal>description</literal> environment use the same list
layout parameters. For a description, including the default values, and
for information about customizing list layout, see <link linkend="list">list</link>. The
-package <filename>enumitem</filename> is useful for customizing lists.
+package <literal>enumitem</literal> is useful for customizing lists.
</para>
<para>This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
lists.
@@ -5633,15 +5741,13 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vtop plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
-<!-- xx Is there any reason why the word ``match'' is used instead of word -->
-<!-- ``align''. Do we mean some more permissive alignment? -->
-<para>Match the top line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
-surrounding text (plain &tex;’s <literal>\vtop</literal>).
+<para>Align the baseline of the top line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the
+baseline of the surrounding text (plain &tex;’s <literal>\vtop</literal>).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vbox plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Match the bottom line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
-surrounding text (plain &tex;’s <literal>\vbox</literal>).
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vbox (plain &tex;)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Align the baseline of the bottom line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the
+baseline of the surrounding text (plain &tex;’s <literal>\vbox</literal>).
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
</para>
@@ -6007,7 +6113,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>graphpap</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>graphpap</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <filename>graphpap</filename> package.
+<para>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <literal>graphpap</literal> package.
The grid’s origin is <literal>(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)</literal>.
Grid lines come every <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> units (the default is 10).
The grid extends <replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable> units to the right and <replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable> units up.
@@ -6063,7 +6169,6 @@
<para>If <replaceable>travel</replaceable> is negative then you get <literal>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
\vector argument.</literal>
</para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics packages</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>pict2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6088,7 +6193,7 @@
(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
-<literal>picture</literal>, see the package <filename>pict2e</filename>
+<literal>picture</literal>, see the package <literal>pict2e</literal>
(<ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e">https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e</ulink>). Another solution
is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks,
MetaPost, or Asymptote.
@@ -6108,7 +6213,7 @@
picture to be <replaceable>dim</replaceable>, which must be a positive length
(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It differs from <literal>\thinlines</literal> and
<literal>\thicklines</literal> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
-lines, circles, or ovals.
+lines, circles, or ovals (see <link linkend="_005coval">\oval</link>).
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -6132,7 +6237,7 @@
<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also
<link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> and <link linkend="_005cthinlines">\thinlines</link>. This command is illustrated
-in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <link linkend="_005cqbezier">\qbezier</link>.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -6169,9 +6274,10 @@
<screen>\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)
\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>portion</replaceable>]
</screen>
-<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
-<replaceable>portion</replaceable> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
-For half an oval take <replaceable>portion</replaceable> to be one of these.
+<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners, hereinafter referred to as an
+<firstterm>oval</firstterm>. The optional argument <replaceable>portion</replaceable> allows you to produce
+only half or a quarter of the oval. For half an oval take <replaceable>portion</replaceable>
+to be one of these.
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
</term><listitem><para>top half
@@ -6195,7 +6301,7 @@
<para>These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
20pt (see <link linkend="_005ccircle">\circle</link> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
-boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+frames with a small amount of corner rounding.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -6210,16 +6316,20 @@
</screen>
<para>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
</para>
-<para>This labels the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
+<para>This labels the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis by writing the word ‘<literal><inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation></literal>’ above
+the word ‘<literal>axis</literal>’.
</para>
-<screen>\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
-\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
-\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(5,2.5)(-0.75,0)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+ \put(-0.2,2){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+\end{picture}
</screen>
<para>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
-In the above example the <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link> puts the stack flush
-right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
-the left of the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
+In the above example the <literal>\makebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>) puts
+the stack flush right in a zero width box so in total the short stack
+sits slightly to the left of the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
</para>
<para>The valid positions are:
</para>
@@ -6233,11 +6343,13 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>\shortstack</literal> objects)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Separate objects into lines with <literal>\\</literal>. These stacks are short in
that, unlike in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment, here the
-rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+rows are not spaced out to be of even baseline skips. Thus, in
<literal>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</literal> the first and last rows are taller than
-the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
-usual interline spacing with <literal>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</literal>,
-or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <literal>\shortstack{X \\
+the middle two, and therefore the baseline skip between the two middle
+rows is smaller than that between the third and last row. You can
+adjust row heights and depths either by putting in the usual interline
+spacing with <literal>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>),
+or explicitly, via an zero-width box <literal>\shortstack{X \\
\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</literal> or by using <literal>\\</literal>’s optional
argument <literal>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</literal>.
</para>
@@ -6686,10 +6798,11 @@
<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
references</link>).
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
-The <literal>\caption</literal> command is also optional. It specifies caption text
-<replaceable>title</replaceable> for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
-<replaceable>lottitle</replaceable> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
-instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).
+The <literal>\caption</literal> command is also optional. It specifies caption
+text <replaceable>title</replaceable> for the table (see <link linkend="_005ccaption">\caption</link>). By default it is
+numbered. If its optional <replaceable>lottitle</replaceable> is present then that text is
+used in the list of tables instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
+contents etc.</link>).
</para>
<para>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -6977,7 +7090,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
- &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
Classical &1730 &1820 \\
Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
@@ -7132,7 +7245,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Language support packages such as <filename>babel</filename> will automatically
+<para>Language support packages such as <literal>babel</literal> will automatically
redefine <literal>\refname</literal> or <literal>\bibname</literal> to fit the selected
language.
</para>
@@ -7294,8 +7407,8 @@
Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full
documentation on CTAN (see <link linkend="CTAN">CTAN</link>).
</para>
-<para>With Bib&tex;, you don’t use <literal>thebibliography</literal>
-(see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). Instead, include these lines.
+<para>With Bib&tex;, you don’t use the <literal>thebibliography</literal> environment
+directly (see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). Instead, include these lines:
</para>
<screen>\bibliographystyle{<replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>}
\bibliography{<replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>, <replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>, ...}
@@ -7316,8 +7429,8 @@
</term><listitem><para>Like <literal>plain</literal>, but more compact labels.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist,
-tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN’s listing
-<ulink url="https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</ulink>.
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See the CTAN topic
+<ulink url="https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty">https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty</ulink>.
</para>
<para>The <literal>\bibliography</literal> command is what actually produces the
bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
@@ -7346,7 +7459,50 @@
files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that
you used.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>‘<literal>*</literal>’, to <literal>\nocite</literal> all keys</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocite {*}, for all keys</primary></indexterm>
+<para>With Bib&tex;, the <replaceable>keys</replaceable> argument to <literal>\nocite</literal> can also be
+the single character ‘<literal>*</literal>’. This means to implicitly cite all
+entries from all given bibliographies.
+</para>
+<sect3 label="8.24.4.1" id="BibTeX-error-messages">
+<title>Bib&tex; error messages</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Bib&tex; error messages</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>error messages, from Bib&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.aux file and Bib&tex; commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>If you forget to use <literal>\bibliography</literal> or <literal>\bibliographystyle</literal>
+in your document (or, less likely, any <literal>\cite</literal> or <literal>\nocite</literal>
+command), Bib&tex; will issue an error message. Because Bib&tex;
+can be used with any program, not just &latex;, the error messages
+refer to the internal commands read by Bib&tex; (from the <filename>.aux</filename>
+file), rather than the user-level commands described above.
+</para>
+<para>Here is a table showing internal commands mentioned in the Bib&tex;
+errors, and the corresponding user-level commands.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibdata</primary></indexterm><literal>\bibdata</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliography and internal <literal>\bibdata</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para><literal>\bibliography</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibstyle</primary></indexterm><literal>\bibstyle</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliographystyle and internal <literal>\bibstyle</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para><literal>\bibliographystyle</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\citation</primary></indexterm><literal>\citation</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cite and internal <literal>\citation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocite and internal <literal>\citation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para><literal>\cite</literal>, <literal>\nocite</literal>
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>For example, if your document has no <literal>\bibliographystyle</literal>
+command, Bib&tex; complains as follows:
+</para>
+<screen>I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file <replaceable>document</replaceable>.aux
+</screen>
+
+</sect3>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="8.25" id="theorem">
@@ -7564,7 +7720,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
-<literal>\verb</literal>. One is <filename>listings</filename>, another is <filename>minted</filename>.
+<literal>\verb</literal>. One is <literal>listings</literal>, another is <literal>minted</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cprotect</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cprotect</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7645,6 +7801,8 @@
breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+<!-- Alernative text proposed here: https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2021q3/000803.html -->
+<!-- this text is that of the French version. -->
</para>
@@ -7671,12 +7829,12 @@
the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
+<screen>\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
+</screen>
<para>The starred form, <literal>\\*</literal>, tells &latex; not to start a new page
between the two lines, by issuing a <literal>\nobreak</literal>.
</para>
-<screen>\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
- a tale of woe}
-</screen>
<para>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;. In
particular, don’t start new paragraphs with <literal>\\</literal>. Instead leave a
blank line between the two paragraphs. And don’t put in a sequence of
@@ -7775,9 +7933,9 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting (paragraph mode)</primary></indexterm>
<para>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
-the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
-(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>), the <literal>\newline</literal> command is equivalent to
-double-backslash (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>). This command is fragile
+it, so the text before the end of line is not stretched. That is, in
+paragraph mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>), the <literal>\newline</literal> command is
+equivalent to double-backslash (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>). This command is fragile
(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
<para>However, the two commands are different inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or
@@ -7790,7 +7948,7 @@
<para>This will print ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Address:</literal>’ as two lines in a
single cell of the table.
</para>
-<screen>\begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{p{1in}@{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
</screen>
@@ -7806,8 +7964,9 @@
<para>Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
insert <literal>\-</literal> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
-those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex;
-might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+those points and not at any of the other hyphenation points that
+&latex; might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
<para>&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
@@ -7831,9 +7990,9 @@
better fit.
</para>
<para>The <literal>\-</literal> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
-require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
-like <literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>. Of course, if you later change the
-text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
+<literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>. Of course, if you later change the text
+then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
care.
</para>
@@ -7853,10 +8012,10 @@
<para>If a line break occurs at the point where <literal>\discretionary</literal> appears
then &tex; puts <replaceable>pre-break</replaceable> at the end of the current line and puts
<replaceable>post-break</replaceable> at the start of the next line. If there is no line
-break here then &tex; puts <replaceable>no-break</replaceable>
+break here then &tex; puts <replaceable>no-break</replaceable>.
</para>
<para>In ‘<literal>difficult</literal>’ the three letters <literal>ffi</literal> form a ligature. But
-&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f’s with this.
+&tex; can nonetheless break between the two ‘<literal>f</literal>’’s with this.
</para>
<screen>di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
</screen>
@@ -7863,7 +8022,10 @@
<para>Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
automatically by &tex;’s hyphenation algorithm.
</para>
+<!-- xxx TODO, complete this node, see LaTeX-fr (copied & pasted below, -->
+<!-- with accented letter escaped) -->
+
</sect1>
<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">
<title><literal>\fussy</literal> & <literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
@@ -7879,10 +8041,10 @@
spacing.
</para>
<para>The default is <literal>\fussy</literal>. Line breaking in a paragraph is
-controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
-<literal>\par</literal>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
-the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
-the command.
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the end of the
+paragraph, i.e., at the blank line or <literal>\par</literal> or displayed
+equation ending that paragraph. So to affect the line breaks, include
+that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
</para>
@@ -7889,7 +8051,9 @@
<sect2 label="9.6.1" id="sloppypar">
<title><literal>sloppypar</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>sloppypar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>sloppypar</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>sloppypar</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sloppypar environment</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -7939,9 +8103,14 @@
<screen>\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
</screen>
<para>Use lowercase letters. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches
-exactly. Multiple <literal>\hyphenation</literal> commands accumulate.
+exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple <literal>\hyphenation</literal>
+commands accumulate.
</para>
+<!-- xx Re-align on LaTeX-fr which also mentions fontenc, and that -->
+<!-- babel/polyglossia already load hyphenation patterns, and you have to -->
+<!-- declare only non existing words. -->
+
</sect1>
<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
<title><literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
@@ -7962,12 +8131,12 @@
\nolinebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
</screen>
<para>Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional <replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>
-is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
-4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
-or prevent the break. But for instance, <literal>\nolinebreak[1]</literal> is a
-suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
-more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
-(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+is an integer lying between 0 and 4 that allows you to soften the
+instruction. The default is 4, so that without the optional argument
+these commands entirely force or prevent the break. But for instance,
+<literal>\nolinebreak[1]</literal> is a suggestion that another place may be better.
+The higher the number, the more insistent the request. Both commands
+are fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
<para>Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
standard legal text.
@@ -7977,11 +8146,10 @@
underrepresented groups.
</screen>
<para>When you issue <literal>\linebreak</literal>, the spaces in the line are stretched
-out so that it extends to the right margin. See <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>
+out so that the break point reaches the right margin. See <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>
and <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>, to have the spaces not stretched out.
</para>
-
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="10" id="Page-breaking">
@@ -8191,6 +8359,14 @@
occurred while \output is active</literal>’. See <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link>, for a command that
does not have these effects.
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\samepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>samepage environment</primary></indexterm>
+<para>(There is an obsolete declaration <literal>\samepage</literal>, which tries to only
+allow a break between two paragraphs. There is a related environment
+<literal>samepage</literal>, also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For
+more on keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ entry
+<ulink url="https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk">https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk</ulink>.)
+</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
@@ -8271,7 +8447,8 @@
\kern 2pt} % and this 2
</screen>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnotesep</literal>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnotesep"/><para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnotesep"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>strut</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
<literal>\footnotesize</literal> fonts (see <link linkend="Font-sizes">Font sizes</link>), therefore there is no
extra space between footnotes. This is ‘<literal>6.65pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’,
@@ -8314,18 +8491,19 @@
(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
</para>
<para>If you use <literal>\footnotemark</literal> without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <replaceable>number</replaceable>
-then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote.
+increments the <literal>footnote</literal> counter, but if you use the optional
+<replaceable>number</replaceable> then it does not. The next example produces several
+consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote.
</para>
<screen>The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
</screen>
-<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
-common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
-both the first and third authors (<literal>\thanks</literal> is a version of
-<literal>footnote</literal>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of
+the number of the common mark. This example gives the same
+institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors
+(<literal>\thanks</literal> is a version of <literal>\footnote</literal>), by-hand giving the
+number of the footnote.
</para>
<screen>\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
@@ -8351,7 +8529,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <filename>cleveref</filename>.
+<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <literal>cleveref</literal>.
</para>
<!-- from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
<screen>\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
@@ -8364,7 +8542,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>It will work with the package <filename>hyperref</filename>.
+<para>It will work with the package <literal>hyperref</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -8431,7 +8609,7 @@
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{%
- Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ Starting with \textit{HMS Surprise}.}
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
@@ -8465,8 +8643,11 @@
Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
\end{center}
</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tablefootnote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tablefootnote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>For a floating <literal>table</literal> environment (see <link linkend="table">table</link>), use the
-<filename>tablefootnote</filename> package.
+<literal>tablefootnote</literal> package.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
...
@@ -8497,7 +8678,7 @@
<para>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
-<filename>bigfoot</filename> extends &latex;’s default footnote mechanism in many
+<literal>bigfoot</literal> extends &latex;’s default footnote mechanism in many
ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
@@ -8506,7 +8687,7 @@
...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{%
- First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+ Noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
</screen>
</sect1>
@@ -8562,8 +8743,8 @@
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cmd</replaceable>
</term><listitem>
-<para>Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>,
-and must not begin with the four letter string <literal>\end</literal>. For
+<para>Required; <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>,
+and must not begin with the four character string <literal>\end</literal>. For
<literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined. For
<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, this name must already be defined.
</para>
@@ -8602,10 +8783,11 @@
argument and you don’t exercise the option).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
-sequence, as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’. If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command (‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’, and
-another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘<literal>\cmd\ </literal>’).
+<para>&tex; ignores blanks in the source following a control word
+(see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’. If you actually want a
+space there, one solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command
+(‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’, and another solution is to use an explicit control
+space (‘<literal>\cmd\ </literal>’).
</para>
<para>A simple example of defining a new command:
<literal>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</literal> results in <literal>\RS</literal> being
@@ -8618,14 +8800,14 @@
to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</literal>’.
</para>
-<para>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
-one required argument.
+<para>Here the first definition creates a command with no arguments, and the
+second, one with one required argument.
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
</screen>
<para>Use the first as in <literal>I highly recommend \student{} to you</literal>. The
-second has a variable, so that <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
+second has a variable argument, so that <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
<literal>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</literal>, which ultimately expands to
something like ‘<literal>Definition~3.14</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -8664,6 +8846,38 @@
<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.
</para>
+<sect2 label="12.1.1" id="Control-sequences">
+<title>Control sequence, control word and control symbol</title>
+
+<para>When reading input &tex; converts the sequences of read characters into
+a sequence of <firstterm>tokens</firstterm>. When &tex; sees a backslash <literal>\</literal>, it
+will handle the following characters in a special way in order to make a
+<firstterm>control sequence</firstterm> token.
+</para>
+<para>The control sequences fall into two categories:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para><firstterm>control word</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<literal>\</literal> followed by at least one ASCII letter, followed by at least one
+blank. The sequence of at least one ASCII letter is called the
+<firstterm>control sequence name</firstterm>.
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><firstterm>control symbol</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<literal>\</literal> followed by one non-letter character.
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>Blanks after a control word are ignored and do not produce any
+whitespace in the output (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link> and
+<link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Just as the <literal>\relax</literal> command does nothing, the following will print
+‘<literal>Hello!</literal>’:
+</para>
+<screen>Hel\relax <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->
+ <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->lo!
+</screen>
+<para>This is because blanks after <literal>\relax</literal>, including the newline are
+ignored, and blanks at the beginning of a line are also ignored
+(see <link linkend="Leading-blanks">Leading blanks</link>).
+</para>
+</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="12.2" id="_005cprovidecommand">
<title><literal>\providecommand</literal></title>
@@ -8675,12 +8889,12 @@
<para>Synopses, one of:
</para>
-<screen>\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\providecommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
@@ -8692,8 +8906,8 @@
<para>This example
</para>
<screen>\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
-\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
->From \myaffiliation.
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Lyc\'ee Henri IV}
+From \myaffiliation.
</screen>
<para>outputs ‘<literal>From Saint Michael's College</literal>’. Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal>,
the repeated use of <literal>\providecommand</literal> does not give an error.
@@ -8831,11 +9045,11 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xparse</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of
-<literal>\@ifstar</literal>. (1) The <filename>suffix</filename> package allows the
+<literal>\@ifstar</literal>. (1) The <literal>suffix</literal> package allows the
construct <literal>\newcommand\mycommand{<replaceable>unstarred-variant</replaceable>}</literal>
followed by
<literal>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{<replaceable>starred-variant</replaceable>}</literal>.
-(2) &latex; provides the <filename>xparse</filename> package, which allows
+(2) &latex; provides the <literal>xparse</literal> package, which allows
this code:
</para>
<screen>\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
@@ -8905,14 +9119,16 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\newlength{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+<screen>\newlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Allocate a new length register (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). The required argument
-<replaceable>arg</replaceable> must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The new register holds
-rubber lengths such as <literal>72.27pt</literal> or <literal>1in plus.2in minus.1in</literal>
-(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a <literal>skip</literal>
-register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
-<literal>\<replaceable>arg</replaceable></literal> must not be already defined.
+<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control
+sequences</link>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under
+normal circumstances. The new register holds rubber lengths such as
+<literal>72.27pt</literal> or <literal>1in plus.2in minus.1in</literal> (a &latex; length
+register is what plain &tex; calls a <literal>skip</literal> register). The
+initial value is zero. The control sequence <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> must not
+be already defined.
</para>
<para>An example:
</para>
@@ -8919,7 +9135,7 @@
<screen>\newlength{\graphichgt}
</screen>
<para>If you forget the backslash then you get ‘<literal>Missing control sequence
-inserted</literal>’. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+inserted</literal>’. If the control sequence already exists then you get
something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -9351,11 +9567,12 @@
</para>
<screen>\ignorespacesafterend
</screen>
-<para>Both commands cause &latex; to ignore spaces after the end of the
-command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
-from plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
+<para>Both commands cause &latex; to ignore blanks (that is, characters of
+catcode 10 such as space or tabulation) after the end of the
+command up to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a
+command from plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
</para>
-<para>The <literal>ignorespaces</literal> is often used when defining commands via
+<para>The <literal>\ignorespaces</literal> is often used when defining commands via
<literal>\newcommand</literal>, or <literal>\newenvironment</literal>, or <literal>\def</literal>. The
example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
@@ -9373,7 +9590,7 @@
<screen>\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
</screen>
-<para>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+<para>A second example shows blanks being removed from the front of text. The
commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
<literal>\fullname</literal> will reproduce that.
@@ -9394,7 +9611,7 @@
<literal>\begin{newenvironment}{<replaceable>env
name</replaceable>}{... \ignorespaces}{...}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+<para>To strip blanks off the end of an environment use
<literal>\ignorespacesafterend</literal>. An example is that this will show a much
larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
between the second and third.
@@ -9421,6 +9638,9 @@
<title>xspace package</title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\xspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>xspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces, ignore around commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, ignore spaces</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9430,27 +9650,30 @@
...
\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\xspace</literal> macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a
-space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters.
+<para>The <literal>\xspace</literal> macro, when used at the end of a command definition,
+adds a space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation
+characters.
</para>
-<para>After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single character
-command names using non-letters such as <literal>\$</literal>), &tex; gobbles white
-space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has ‘<literal>Vermont</literal>’
-placed snugly against the period, without any intervening space.
+<para>After a command control sequence that is a control word (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control
+sequences</link>, as opposed to control symbols such as <literal>\$</literal>), &tex;
+gobbles blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output
+has ‘<literal>Vermont</literal>’ placed snugly against the period, without any
+intervening space.
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
Our college is in \VT .
The \VT{} summers are nice.
</screen>
-<para>But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy curly
+<para>But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the empty curly
braces or else there would be no space separating ‘<literal>Vermont</literal>’ from
-‘<literal>summers</literal>’. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space
+‘<literal>summers</literal>’. (Many authors instead use a backslash-space
<literal>\ </literal> for this. See <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</link>.)
</para>
-<para>The <filename>xspace</filename> package provides <literal>\xspace</literal>. It is for writing
-commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a
-space after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of
-exceptions. In this example, the dummy braces are not needed.
+<para>The <literal>xspace</literal> package provides <literal>\xspace</literal>. It is for writing
+commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be place
+at the very end of the definition of these commands. It inserts a space
+after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of
+exceptions. In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
Our college is in \VT .
@@ -9459,16 +9682,17 @@
<para>The default exception list contains the characters <literal>,.'/?;:!~-)</literal>,
the open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above,
and the commands <literal>\footnote</literal> or <literal>\footnotemark</literal>. Add to that
-list as with <literal>\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}</literal> and remove
-from that list as with <literal>\xspaceremoveexception{!}</literal>.
+list as with <literal>\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}</literal> which adds
+<literal>\myfni</literal> and <literal>\myfnii</literal> to the list, and remove from that
+list as with <literal>\xspaceremoveexception{!}</literal>.
</para>
<!-- David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/86620/339 -->
<para>A comment: many experts prefer not to use <literal>\xspace</literal>. Putting it in
a definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
-But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because
+But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
<literal>\xspace</literal> will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
command, and so <literal>\xspace</literal> can make editing material harder and more
-error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces.
+error-prone than instead always inserting the empty braces.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -9489,6 +9713,23 @@
<para>Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;’s standard document
classes to control numbering.
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>part counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>chapter counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>section counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>subsection counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>subsubsection counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>paragraph counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>subparagraph counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>page counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>equation counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>figure counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>table counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>footnote counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>mpfootnote counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>enumi counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>enumii counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>enumiii counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>enumiv counter</primary></indexterm>
<screen>part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
section page footnote enumiii
@@ -9554,7 +9795,7 @@
</para>
<para>Here are the symbols:
</para>
-<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="10*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Number</para></entry><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Symbol
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="11*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="29*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Number</para></entry><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Symbol
</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>1</para></entry><entry><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>*<!-- -->
</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>2</para></entry><entry><para>dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>†
</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>3</para></entry><entry><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>‡
@@ -9734,9 +9975,9 @@
<para>&latex; defines the counter <literal>\day</literal> for the day of the month
(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <literal>\month</literal> for the month of
-the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <literal>\year</literal>.
-When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the
-system. The related command <literal>\today</literal> produces a string
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and <literal>\year</literal> for
+the year. When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values
+on the system. The related command <literal>\today</literal> produces a string
representing the current day (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
</para>
<para>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
@@ -9748,7 +9989,9 @@
<para>gives no error or warning and results in the output ‘<literal>-2, -4</literal>’ (the
bogus month value produces no output).
</para>
-
+<para>See <link linkend="Command-line-input">Command line input</link>, to force the date to a given value from the
+command line.
+</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="14" id="Lengths">
@@ -9850,10 +10093,10 @@
\hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
\end{minipage}
</screen>
-<para>&tex; actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
-<literal>fil</literal>, <literal>fill</literal>, and <literal>filll</literal>. The later ones are more
-infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
-the middle one (see <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link> and see <link linkend="_005cvfill">\vfill</link>).
+<para>&tex; has three levels of infinity for glue components: <literal>fil</literal>,
+<literal>fill</literal>, and <literal>filll</literal>. The later ones are more infinite than
+the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one
+(see <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link> and see <link linkend="_005cvfill">\vfill</link>).
</para>
<para>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
that after <literal>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</literal> and
@@ -9870,79 +10113,79 @@
<para>&tex; and &latex; know about these units both inside and outside of
math mode.
</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>pt</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>pt</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>point</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-pt"/><para>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units
-is 1point = 2.845mm = .2845cm.
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>pt</primary></indexterm><literal>pt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>point</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-pt"/><para>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The (approximate) conversion to metric units
+is 1point = .35146mm = .035146cm.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pc</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>pc</primary></indexterm><literal>pc</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pica</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>pc</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="units-of-length-pc"/><para>Pica, 12 pt
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>in</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>in</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>inch</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-in"/><para>Inch, 72.27 pt
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>in</primary></indexterm><literal>in</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>inch</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-in"/><para>Inch, 72.27 pt
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bp</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bp</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>big point</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bp</primary></indexterm><literal>bp</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>big point</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PostScript point</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="units-of-length-bp"/><para>Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cm</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>mm</primary></indexterm><literal>mm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>millimeter</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter, 2.845 pt
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>cm</primary></indexterm><literal>cm</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>centimeter</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>cm</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter, 10 mm
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>mm</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>millimeter</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>mm</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>dd</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dd</primary></indexterm><literal>dd</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>didot point</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>dd</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="units-of-length-dd"/><para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cc</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>cc</primary></indexterm><literal>cc</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>cicero</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>cc</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="units-of-length-cc"/><para>Cicero, 12 dd
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sp</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>sp</primary></indexterm><literal>sp</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>scaled point</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>sp</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="units-of-length-sp"/><para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Three other units are defined according to the current font, rather
+than being an absolute dimension.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm><literal>ex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>x-height</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>x-height</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>m-width</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="Lengths_002fem"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fen"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fex"/><anchor id="units-of-length-em"/><anchor id="units-of-length-en"/><anchor id="units-of-length-ex"/><para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
-the font. The x-height of the current font <firstterm>ex</firstterm>, traditionally the
+<anchor id="Lengths_002fex"/><anchor id="units-of-length-ex"/><para>The x-height of the current font <firstterm>ex</firstterm>, traditionally the
height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
-lengths. Similarly <firstterm>em</firstterm>, traditionally the width of the capital
-letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
-<literal>\enspace</literal>, which is <literal>0.5em</literal>). Use of these can help make a
-definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
-of the vertical space between list items given as
-<literal>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}</literal> is more
-likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
-given in points.
+lengths.
</para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mu, math unit</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>mu</primary></indexterm>
-<para>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
-<firstterm>mu</firstterm> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family. See <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link>.
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>em</primary></indexterm><literal>em</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>m-width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="Lengths_002fem"/><anchor id="units-of-length-em"/><para>Similarly <firstterm>em</firstterm>, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths. This is also often
+the size of the current font, e.g., a nominal 10pt font will
+have 1em = 10pt. &latex; has several commands to produce
+horizontal spaces based on the em (see <link linkend="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">\enspace & \quad & \qquad</link>).
</para>
-
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>mu</primary></indexterm><literal>mu</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>mu, math unit</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-mu"/><para>Finally, in math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms
+of the math unit <firstterm>mu</firstterm>, defined by 1em = 18mu, where the
+em is taken from the current math symbols family. See <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in
+math mode</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Using these units can help make a definition work better across font
+changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between list
+items given as <literal>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus
+0.01ex}</literal> is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed
+than a definition given in points.
+</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.2" id="_005csetlength">
<title><literal>\setlength</literal></title>
@@ -9952,13 +10195,14 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\setlength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+<screen>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable>
-must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The <literal>amount</literal> can be a
-rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
-and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
-length</link>).
+<para>Set the length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> to <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name
+<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control
+sequences</link>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under
+normal circumstances. The <replaceable>amount</replaceable> can be a rubber length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in
+any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>).
</para>
<para>Below, with &latex;’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
while the second will not.
@@ -9968,15 +10212,13 @@
\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
He said stop going to those places.
</screen>
-<para>If you did not declare <replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, for example if
-you mistype the above as
+<para>If you did not declare \<replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, for example if
+you mistype it as in
<literal>\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}</literal>,
then you get an error like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
\sepcindent</literal>’. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
-then you get an error like ‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be
-read again> \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}</literal>’
+then you get an error like ‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero.</literal>’.
</para>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.3" id="_005caddtolength">
<title><literal>\addtolength</literal></title>
@@ -9986,13 +10228,14 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\addtolength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+<screen>\addtolength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Increment the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> by <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name
-<replaceable>len</replaceable> begins with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The <literal>amount</literal> is a
-rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
-and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
-length</link>).
+<para>Increment the length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> by <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name
+<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control
+sequences</link>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under
+normal circumstances. The <replaceable>amount</replaceable> is a rubber length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in
+any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>).
</para>
<para>Below, if <literal>\parskip</literal> starts with the value <literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal>
</para>
@@ -10003,15 +10246,18 @@
</screen>
<para>then it has the value <literal>1pt plus 1pt</literal> for the second paragraph.
</para>
-<para>If you did not declare the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if
-for example you mistype the above as
+<para>If you did not declare \<replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, for example if
+you mistype it as in
+<literal>\newlength{\specparindent}\addtolength{\sepcparindent}{...}</literal>,
+then you get an error like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\sepcindent</literal>’. If the <replaceable>amount</replaceable> uses some length that has not been
+declared, for instance if for example you mistype the above as
<literal>\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}</literal>, then you get
something like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</literal>’.
-If you leave off the backslash at the start of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of \<replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
<literal>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</literal>, then you get something like
‘<literal>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</literal>’.
</para>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.4" id="_005csettodepth">
<title><literal>\settodepth</literal></title>
@@ -10020,22 +10266,23 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\settodepth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\settodepth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
-typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
-begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+<para>Set the length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
+has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under normal circumstances.
</para>
-<para>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+<para>This will print how low the character descenders go.
</para>
<screen>\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetdepth
</screen>
-<para>If you did not set aside the length <replaceable>len</replaceable>, if for example you
+<para>If you did not declare \<replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if for example you
mistype the above as <literal>\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}</literal>,
then you get something like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\aplhabetdepth</literal>’. If you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+\aplhabetdepth</literal>’. If you leave the backslash out of \<replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
<literal>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -10048,23 +10295,24 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\settoheight{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
+<screen>\settoheight{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
</screen>
-<para>Sets the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
-typesetting the <literal>text</literal> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
-begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+<para>Sets the length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <literal>text</literal> argument. The length name <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
+has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under normal circumstances.
</para>
-<para>This will show how high the characters go.
+<para>This will print how high the characters go.
</para>
<screen>\newlength{\alphabetheight}
\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetheight
</screen>
-<para>If no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> has been declared with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if
+<para>If no such length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> has been declared with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if
for example you mistype as
<literal>\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}</literal>, then you get something
like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight</literal>’. If
-you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+you leave the backslash out of \<replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
<literal>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</literal> then you get something like
‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -10077,22 +10325,24 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\settowidth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
-typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
-begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+<para>Set the length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
+has to be a control sequence (see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal> under normal circumstances.
</para>
-<para>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+<para>This prints the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
</para>
<screen>\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetwidth
</screen>
-<para>If no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> has been set aside, if for example you
-mistype the above as <literal>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</literal>,
-then you get something like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\aplhabetwidth</literal>’. If you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<para>If no such length \<replaceable>len</replaceable> has been declared with <literal>\newlength</literal>,
+if for example you mistype the above as
+<literal>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</literal>, then you get something
+like ‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetwidth</literal>’. If
+you leave the backslash out of \<replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
<literal>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -10220,10 +10470,11 @@
<para>&tex; will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
doing register assignment. Thus <literal>\the\numexpr\dimexpr
1pt\relax\relax</literal> will result in ‘<literal>65536</literal>’, which is <literal>1pt</literal>
-converted to scaled points (&tex;’s internal unit) and then coerced
-into an integer. With a <literal>\glueexpr</literal> here, the stretch and shrink
-would be dropped. Going the other way, a <literal>\numexpr</literal> inside a
-<literal>\dimexpr</literal> or <literal>\glueexpr</literal> will need appropriate units, as in
+converted to scaled points (see <link linkend="units-of-length-sp"><literal>sp</literal></link>,
+&tex;’s internal unit) and then coerced into an integer. With a
+<literal>\glueexpr</literal> here, the stretch and shrink would be dropped. Going
+the other way, a <literal>\numexpr</literal> inside a <literal>\dimexpr</literal> or
+<literal>\glueexpr</literal> will need appropriate units, as in
<literal>\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax</literal>, which produces
‘<literal>3.0pt</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -10253,8 +10504,8 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
<para>To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
-paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
-two empty lines.
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, the
+separation of which is made by two empty lines.
</para>
<screen>It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
@@ -10267,15 +10518,33 @@
``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
</screen>
-<para>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
-character, <literal>%</literal>.
+<para>A paragraph separator is made of a sequence of at least one blank
+line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank
+line is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as
+space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a <literal>%</literal> and
+span up to the end of line. In the following example the two columns
+are identical:
</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+\begin{document}
+First paragraph.
+
+Second paragraph.
+\newpage
+First paragraph.
+
+ % separator lines may contain blank characters.
+
+Second paragraph.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
<para>Once &latex; has gathered all of a paragraph’s contents it divides that
content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
(see <link linkend="Line-breaking">Line breaking</link>).
</para>
<para>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don’t put a
-blank line in math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>); here the line before the
+blank line in math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>); here the blank line before the
<literal>\end{equation}</literal>
</para>
<screen>\begin{equation}
@@ -10284,7 +10553,7 @@
\end{equation}
</screen>
<para>will get you the error ‘<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>’. Similarly, the blank
-line in this <literal>section</literal> argument
+line in this <literal>\section</literal> argument
</para>
<screen>\section{aaa
@@ -10302,8 +10571,8 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\par</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph, ending</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex; converts two
-consecutive newlines to a <literal>\par</literal>):
+<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex; converts any sequence
+of one or more blank lines to a <literal>\par</literal>, <link linkend="Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</link>):
</para>
<screen>\par
</screen>
@@ -10317,18 +10586,18 @@
<screen>\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
\whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
</screen>
-<para>In LR mode or a vertical mode the <literal>\par</literal> command does nothing but
-it terminates paragraph mode, switching &latex; to vertical mode
-(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+<para>In LR mode the <literal>\par</literal> command does nothing and is ignored. In
+paragraph mode, the <literal>\par</literal> command terminates paragraph mode,
+switching &latex; to vertical mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
</para>
<para>You cannot use the <literal>\par</literal> command in a math mode. You also cannot
-use it in the argument of many commands, such as the <literal>\section</literal>
-command (see <link linkend="Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</link> and <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &
-\renewcommand</link>).
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the sectioning
+commands, e.g. <literal>\section</literal> (see <link linkend="Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</link> and
+<link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>).
</para>
<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command is not the same as the <literal>\paragraph</literal>
command. The latter is, like <literal>\section</literal> or <literal>\subsection</literal>, a
-sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents
+sectioning command used by the &latex; document standard classes
(see <link linkend="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</link>).
</para>
<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command is not the same as <literal>\newline</literal> or the line
@@ -10440,17 +10709,19 @@
<para>The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead
are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase ‘<literal>x</literal>’.
</para>
-<para>In standard &latex; documents, the default value for <literal>\parindent</literal>
-in one-column documents is <literal>15pt</literal> when the default text size is
-<literal>10pt</literal>, <literal>17pt</literal> for <literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>1.5em</literal> for
-<literal>12pt</literal>. In two-column documents it is <literal>1em</literal>. (These values
-are set before &latex; calls <literal>\normalfont</literal> so <literal>em</literal> is derived
-from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a different font
-then to set <literal>\parindent</literal> in units matching that font, do
-<literal>\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}</literal>.)
+<para>In &latex; standard class documents, the default value for
+<literal>\parindent</literal> in one-column documents is <literal>15pt</literal> when the
+default text size is <literal>10pt</literal>, <literal>17pt</literal> for <literal>11pt</literal>, and
+<literal>1.5em</literal> for <literal>12pt</literal>. In two-column documents it is <literal>1em</literal>.
+(These values are set before &latex; calls <literal>\normalfont</literal> so
+<literal>em</literal> is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use
+a different font then to set <literal>\parindent</literal> to 1em matching
+that font, put
+<literal>\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}</literal> in the
+preamble.)
</para>
<para>The default value for <literal>\parskip</literal> in &latex;’s standard document
-styles is <literal>0pt plus1pt</literal>.
+classes is <literal>0pt plus1pt</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -10593,32 +10864,6 @@
\end{displaymath}</literal>. These environments can only be used in paragraph
mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\displaystyle</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
-One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
-math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
-together.
-</para>
-<para>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
-the inline math mode. For this, the <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declaration
-forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
-<literal>displaymath</literal>. Thus <literal>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
-x_n\)</literal> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
-to it. Another example is that
-</para>
-<screen>\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
- \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
- Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
- &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
- Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
- &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
-\end{tabular}
-</screen>
-<para>because it has no <literal>\displaystyle</literal>, the ‘<literal>Arithmetic</literal>’ line’s
-fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its <literal>\displaystyle</literal>,
-the ‘<literal>Geometric</literal>’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with
-characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
-</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10630,8 +10875,8 @@
<para>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
-<filename>amsmath</filename> and <filename>amssymb</filename> (also be aware of the <filename>mathtools</filename>
-package that is an extension to, and loads, <filename>amsmath</filename>). New
+<literal>amsmath</literal> and <literal>amssymb</literal> (also be aware of the <literal>mathtools</literal>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <literal>amsmath</literal>). New
documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
see their documentation on CTAN.
@@ -10709,7 +10954,7 @@
<para>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as
-<filename>mhchem</filename>; see CTAN.
+<literal>mhchem</literal>; see CTAN.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -10827,7 +11072,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Box</primary></indexterm><literal>\Box</literal>
</term><listitem><para>□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box
-(ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+(ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\bullet</literal>
@@ -10855,7 +11100,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\complement</primary></indexterm><literal>\complement</literal>
</term><listitem><para>∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in
-<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also used:
+<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package. Also used:
<literal>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</literal> or <literal>$\bar{S}$</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cong</primary></indexterm><literal>\cong</literal>
@@ -10885,7 +11130,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>δ Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\Diamond</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamond</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
@@ -11085,7 +11330,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\lhd</literal>
</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
-<filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which is a relation
+<literal>amssymb</literal> and use <literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which is a relation
and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ll</primary></indexterm><literal>\ll</literal>
@@ -11174,7 +11419,7 @@
following operator (relation).
</para>
<para>Many negated operators are available that don’t require <literal>\not</literal>,
-particularly with the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For example, <literal>\notin</literal>
+particularly with the <literal>amssymb</literal> package. For example, <literal>\notin</literal>
is typographically preferable to <literal>\not\in</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\notin</primary></indexterm><literal>\notin</literal>
@@ -11295,11 +11540,11 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Re</primary></indexterm><literal>\Re</literal>
</term><listitem><para>ℜ Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
double-line, or blackboard bold, R <literal>\mathbb{R}</literal>; to access
-this, load the <filename>amsfonts</filename> package.
+this, load the <literal>amsfonts</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restriction</primary></indexterm><literal>\restriction</literal>
</term><listitem><para>↾, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
-<literal>\upharpoonright</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+<literal>\upharpoonright</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\revemptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\revemptyset</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
@@ -11312,7 +11557,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\rhd</literal>
</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
-load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+load <literal>amssymb</literal> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rho</primary></indexterm><literal>\rho</literal>
@@ -11385,7 +11630,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubset</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
-subset <literal>\subset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+subset <literal>\subset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubseteq</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊑ Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
@@ -11393,7 +11638,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupset</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
-superset <literal>\supset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+superset <literal>\supset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupseteq</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
@@ -11463,19 +11708,19 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleleft</literal>
</term><listitem><para>◁ Not-filled triangle pointing left
(binary). Similar: <literal>\lhd</literal>. For the normal subgroup symbol you
-should load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which
+should load <literal>amssymb</literal> and use <literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleright</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleright</literal>
</term><listitem><para>▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right
(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
-<filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+<literal>amssymb</literal> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unlhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unlhd</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
triangle, with a line under (binary). For the
-normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+normal subgroup symbol load <literal>amssymb</literal> and
use <literal>\vartrianglelefteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
better spacing).
</para>
@@ -11482,7 +11727,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unrhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unrhd</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
triangle, with a line under (binary). For the
-normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+normal subgroup symbol load <literal>amssymb</literal> and
use <literal>\vartrianglerighteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
better spacing).
</para>
@@ -11509,7 +11754,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upharpoonright</primary></indexterm><literal>\upharpoonright</literal>
</term><listitem><para>↾, Up harpoon, with barb on right side
(relation). Synonym: <literal>\restriction</literal>.
-Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\uplus</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
@@ -11530,7 +11775,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vanothing</primary></indexterm><literal>\vanothing</literal>
</term><listitem><para>∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: <literal>\emptyset</literal>. Related:
-<literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+<literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <literal>amssymb</literal> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varphi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varphi</literal>
</term><listitem><para>φ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
@@ -11566,13 +11811,13 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\Vert</literal>
</term><listitem><para>‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). See <link linkend="Delimiters">Delimiters</link>,
-for how to use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package to create flexibly-sized
+for how to use the <literal>mathtools</literal> package to create flexibly-sized
norm symbols.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\vert</literal>
</term><listitem><para>| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For “such
that”, as in the definition of a set, use <literal>\mid</literal> because it
-is a relation. See <link linkend="Delimiters">Delimiters</link>, for how to use the <filename>mathtools</filename>
+is a relation. See <link linkend="Delimiters">Delimiters</link>, for how to use the <literal>mathtools</literal>
package to create flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\wedge</literal>
@@ -11631,7 +11876,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>latexsym</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>These are the arrows that come with standard &latex;. The
-<filename>latexsym</filename> and <filename>amsfonts</filename> packages contain many more.
+<literal>latexsym</literal> and <literal>amsfonts</literal> packages contain many more.
</para>
<informaltable><tgroup cols="3"><colspec colwidth="10*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="40*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="50*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Symbol</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>⇓ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Downarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↓ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\downarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↩ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\hookleftarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↪ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\hookrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>← </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\leftarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⇐ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Leftarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⇔ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Leftrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↔ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\leftrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟵ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\longleftarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟸ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Longleftarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟷ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\longleftrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟺ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Longleftrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟼ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\longmapsto</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟹ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Longrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⟶ <!
/para></entry><entry><para><literal>\longrightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↦ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\mapsto</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↗ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\nearrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↖ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\nwarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⇒ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Rightarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>→ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\rightarrow</literal>, or <literal>\to</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↘ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\searrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↙ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\swarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↑ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\uparrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⇑ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Uparrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>↕ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\updownarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row><row><entry><para>⇕ </para></entry><entry><para><literal>\Updownarrow</literal> </para></entry><entry></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
<para>An example of the difference between <literal>\to</literal> and <literal>\mapsto</literal>
@@ -11644,7 +11889,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tikz-cd</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including
-<filename>tikz-cd</filename> and <filename>amscd</filename>.
+<literal>tikz-cd</literal> and <literal>amscd</literal>.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -11691,7 +11936,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are many issues with <literal>\boldmath</literal>. New documents should use
-the <filename>bm</filename> package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete
+the <literal>bm</literal> package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete
description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
</para>
@@ -11797,19 +12042,19 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>mathtools</filename> package allows you to create commands for paired
+<para>The <literal>mathtools</literal> package allows you to create commands for paired
delimiters. For instance, if you put
<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</literal> in your preamble
then you get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work
-in math mode). The starred version, such as
+in math mode). The starred form, such as
<literal>\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}</literal>, has the height of the vertical bars
-match the height of the argument. The unstarred version, such as
+match the height of the argument. The unstarred form, such as
<literal>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</literal>, has the bars fixed at a default height.
-This version accepts an optional argument, as in <literal>\abs[<replaceable>size
+This form accepts an optional argument, as in <literal>\abs[<replaceable>size
command</replaceable>]{\frac{22}{7}}</literal>, where the height of the bars is given in
-<replaceable>size command</replaceable>, such as <literal>\Bigg</literal>. Using <literal>\lVert</literal> and
-<literal>\rVert</literal> as the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same
-behavior.
+<replaceable>size command</replaceable>, such as <literal>\Bigg</literal>. Using instead <literal>\lVert</literal>
+and <literal>\rVert</literal> as the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the
+same behavior.
</para>
@@ -11869,9 +12114,9 @@
\end{equation}
</screen>
<para>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
-backslash, <literal>\{</literal>. (The packages <filename>amsmath</filename> and
-<filename>mathtools</filename> allow you to get the above construct through in a
-<literal>cases</literal> environment.)
+backslash, <literal>\{</literal> (see <link linkend="Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</link>). (The packages
+<literal>amsmath</literal> and <literal>mathtools</literal> allow you to get the above
+construct through in a <literal>cases</literal> environment.)
</para>
<para>The <literal>\left ... \right</literal> pair make a group. One consequence is that
the formula enclosed in the <literal>\left ... \right</literal> pair cannot have
@@ -11910,7 +12155,7 @@
width, with no stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better.
</para>
<para>&tex; scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the
-contained formula. Here &latex; grows the brackets to extend the full
+enclosed formula. Here &latex; grows the brackets to extend the full
height of the integral.
</para>
<screen>\begin{equation}
@@ -11982,8 +12227,8 @@
for displayed equations.
</para>
<para>See <link linkend="Delimiters">Delimiters</link>, for a list of the common delimiters. In the family of
-commands with ‘<literal>l</literal>’ and ‘<literal>r</literal>’, <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> and
-<replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable> need not be the same.
+commands with ‘<literal>l</literal>’ or ‘<literal>r</literal>’, <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable> need not match together.
</para>
<para>The ‘<literal>l</literal>’ and ‘<literal>r</literal>’ commands produce open and close delimiters
that insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the
@@ -12012,7 +12257,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>(many authors would replace <literal>\frac</literal> with the <literal>\tfrac</literal> command
-from the <filename>amsmath</filename> package), and as with this larger slash.
+from the <literal>amsmath</literal> package), and as with this larger slash.
</para>
<screen>\begin{equation}
\lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1
@@ -12019,7 +12264,7 @@
\end{equation}
</screen>
<para>Unlike the <literal>\left...\right</literal> pair (see <link linkend="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left & \right</link>), the
-commands here with ‘<literal>l</literal>’ and ‘<literal>r</literal>’ do not make a group.
+commands here with ‘<literal>l</literal>’ or ‘<literal>r</literal>’ do not make a group.
Strictly speaking they need not be matched so you can write something
like this.
</para>
@@ -12069,7 +12314,7 @@
<anchor id="ellipses-ldots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: <literal>\(
x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</literal>. Another example is the above array example. A
-synonym is <literal>\mathellipsis</literal>. A synonym from the <filename>amsmath</filename>
+synonym is <literal>\mathellipsis</literal>. A synonym from the <literal>amsmath</literal>
package is <literal>\hdots</literal>.
</para>
<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
@@ -12084,7 +12329,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package has the command <literal>\dots</literal> to semantically
+<para>The <literal>amsmath</literal> package has the command <literal>\dots</literal> to semantically
mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs
for the first two uses of the <literal>\dots</literal> command.
</para>
@@ -12145,7 +12390,7 @@
<para>For omicron, if you are using &latex;’s default Computer Modern font
then enter omicron just as ‘<literal>o</literal>’ or ‘<literal>O</literal>’. If you like having the
name or if your font shows a difference then you can use something like
-<literal>\newcommand\omicron{o}</literal>. The package <filename>unicode-math</filename> has
+<literal>\newcommand\omicron{o}</literal>. The package <literal>unicode-math</literal> has
<literal>\upomicron</literal> for upright omicron and <literal>\mitomicron</literal> for math
italic.
</para>
@@ -12273,7 +12518,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+<para>The <literal>amsmath</literal> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
briefly, you can define an identity operator with
<literal>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</literal> that is like the ones
@@ -12374,7 +12619,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>ulem</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>ulem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Note that the package <filename>ulem</filename> does text mode underlining and allows
+<para>Note that the package <literal>ulem</literal> does text mode underlining and allows
line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
documentation on CTAN. See also <link linkend="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill & \dotfill</link> for
producing a line, for such things as a signature.
@@ -12408,7 +12653,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The package <filename>mathtools</filename> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+<para>The package <literal>mathtools</literal> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
</para>
@@ -12440,15 +12685,19 @@
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\;</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\;</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thickspace</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\thickspace</literal>. Normally <literal>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</literal>.
-With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
-used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synonym: <literal>\thickspace</literal>. Normally <literal>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</literal>. With
+the <literal>amsmath</literal> package, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release,
+can be used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode
+only.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\negthickspace</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthickspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Normally <literal>-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.
-With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
-used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+<para>Normally <literal>-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>. With the <literal>amsmath</literal>
+package, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be used in text
+mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode only.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\:</literal>
</term><term><literal>\></literal>
@@ -12455,15 +12704,16 @@
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\:</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medspace</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\medspace</literal>. Normally <literal>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.
-With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
-used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\medspace</literal>. Normally <literal>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus
+4.0mu</literal>. With the <literal>amsmath</literal> package, or as of the 2020-10-01
+&latex; release, can be used in text mode as well as math mode; before
+that, in math mode only.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\negmedspace</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negmedspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Normally <literal>-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.
-With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
-used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+<para>Normally <literal>-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>. With the <literal>amsmath</literal>
+package, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be used in text
+mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\,</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\,</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12486,11 +12736,12 @@
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\!</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space, negative</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace"/><para>A negative thin space. Normally <literal>-3mu</literal>.
-With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
-used in text mode as well as math mode; before that,
-The <literal>\!</literal> command is math mode only but the <literal>\negthinspace</literal>
-command has always worked in text mode (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace & \negthinspace</link>).
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\negthinspace</literal>. A negative thin space. Normally
+<literal>-3mu</literal>. With the <literal>amsmath</literal> package, or as of the 2020-10-01
+&latex; release, can be used in text mode as well as math mode;
+otherwise, the <literal>\!</literal> command is math mode only but the
+<literal>\negthinspace</literal> command has always also worked in text mode
+(see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace & \negthinspace</link>).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\quad</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quad</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12601,10 +12852,12 @@
<para>The <literal>\phantom</literal> command creates a box with the same height, depth,
and width as <replaceable>subformula</replaceable>, but empty. That is, this command causes
&latex; to typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here
-&latex; will put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty.
+&latex; will put a blank line that is the correct width for the answer,
+but will not show that answer.
</para>
-<screen>\fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals.
- --- Mark Twain}}
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ \int x^2\,dx=\mbox{\underline{$\phantom{(1/3)x^3+C}$}}
+\end{displaymath}
</screen>
<para>The <literal>\vphantom</literal> variant produces an invisible box with the same
vertical size as <replaceable>subformula</replaceable>, the same height and depth, but having
@@ -12634,7 +12887,7 @@
convenient, including <literal>\makebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>) as well
as <literal>\settodepth</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csettodepth">\settodepth</link>), <literal>\settoheight</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005csettoheight">\settoheight</link>), and <literal>\settowidth</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csettowidth">\settowidth</link>).
-In addition, the <filename>mathtools</filename> package has many commands that offer
+In addition, the <literal>mathtools</literal> package has many commands that offer
fine-grained control over spacing.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
@@ -12643,7 +12896,7 @@
<para>All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
should give it such a status, for example with the <literal>\operatorname</literal>
-command from the package <filename>amsmath</filename>.
+command from the package <literal>amsmath</literal>.
</para>
<para>While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
contexts. However, they don’t cause &latex; to change into horizontal
@@ -12661,6 +12914,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, spacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>invisible character</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>character, invisible</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>strut, math</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
@@ -12684,7 +12938,88 @@
</sect2>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="16.7" id="Math-miscellany">
+<sect1 label="16.7" id="Math-styles">
+<title>Math styles</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math styles</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&tex;’s rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
+example, inside a displayed equation, the input <literal>\sum_{0\leq
+i<n}k^m=\frac{n^{m+1}}{m+1}+\mbox{lower order terms}</literal> will give
+output with the summation index centered below the summation symbol.
+But if that input is inline then the summation index is off to the right
+rather than below, so it won’t push the lines apart. Similarly, in a
+displayed context, the symbols in the numerator and denominator will be
+larger than for an inline context, and in display math subscripts and
+superscripts are further apart then they are in inline math.
+</para>
+<para>&tex; uses four math styles.
+</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>display style</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Display style is for a formula displayed on a line by itself, such as
+with <literal>\begin{equation} ... \end{equation}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>text style</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Text style is for an inline formula, as with ‘<literal>so we have $ ... $</literal>’.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>script style</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Script style is for parts of a formula in a subscript or superscript.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>scriptscript style</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Scriptscript style is for parts of a formula at a second level (or more)
+of subscript or superscript.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\displaystyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textstyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scriptstyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scriptscriptstyle</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&tex; determines a default math style but you can override it with a
+declaration of <literal>\displaystyle</literal>, or <literal>\textstyle</literal>, or
+<literal>\scriptstyle</literal>, or <literal>\scriptscriptstyle</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, the ‘<literal>Arithmetic</literal>’ line’s fraction will look
+scrunched.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &$a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b)$
+ &$na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}$ \\
+ Geometric &$a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1}$
+ &$\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}$ \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>But because of the <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declaration,
+the ‘<literal>Geometric</literal>’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</para>
+<para>Another example is that, compared to the same input without the
+declaration, the result of
+</para>
+<screen>we get
+$\pi=2\cdot{\displaystyle\int_{x=0}^1 \sqrt{1-x^2}\,dx}$
+</screen>
+<para>will have an integral sign that is much taller. Note that here the
+<literal>\displaystyle</literal> applies to only part of the formula, and it is
+delimited by being inside curly braces, as ‘<literal>{\displaystyle ...}</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The last example is a continued fraction.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+a_0+\frac{1}{
+ \displaystyle a_1+\frac{\mathstrut 1}{
+ \displaystyle a_2+\frac{\mathstrut 1}{
+ \displaystyle a_3}}}
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Without the <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declarations, the denominators would be
+set in script style and scriptscript style. (The <literal>\mathstrut</literal>
+improves the height of the denominators; see <link linkend="_005cmathstrut">\mathstrut</link>.)
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.8" id="Math-miscellany">
<title>Math miscellany</title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math miscellany</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12694,7 +13029,7 @@
</para>
-<sect2 label="16.7.1" id="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">
+<sect2 label="16.8.1" id="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">
<title>Colon character <literal>:</literal> & <literal>\colon</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colon character</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12720,13 +13055,13 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>But the widely-used <filename>amsmath</filename> package defines <literal>\colon</literal> for use
+<para>But the widely-used <literal>amsmath</literal> package defines <literal>\colon</literal> for use
in the definition of functions <literal>f\colon D\to C</literal>. So if you want
the colon character as a punctuation then use <literal>\mathpunct{:}</literal>.
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="16.7.2" id="_005c_002a">
+<sect2 label="16.8.2" id="_005c_002a">
<title><literal>\*</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplication, discretionary</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12751,7 +13086,7 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="16.7.3" id="_005cfrac">
+<sect2 label="16.8.3" id="_005cfrac">
<title><literal>\frac</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fraction</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12768,7 +13103,7 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="16.7.4" id="_005csqrt">
+<sect2 label="16.8.4" id="_005csqrt">
<title><literal>\sqrt</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>square root</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12792,7 +13127,7 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="16.7.5" id="_005cstackrel">
+<sect2 label="16.8.5" id="_005cstackrel">
<title><literal>\stackrel</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stack math</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12822,9 +13157,11 @@
the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
</para>
<itemizedlist><listitem><anchor id="modes-paragraph-mode"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
-<para><firstterm>Paragraph mode</firstterm> is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary
-text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
-pages. This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time.
+<para><firstterm>Paragraph mode</firstterm> (in plain &tex; this is called <firstterm>horizontal
+mode</firstterm>) is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. It breaks
+the input text into lines and finds the positions of line breaks, so that
+in vertical mode page breaks can be done. This is the mode &latex; is
+in most of the time.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-to-right mode</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>LR mode</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12849,13 +13186,15 @@
differs in the two situations.)
</para>
</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="modes-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Vertical mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is building the list of lines and
-other material making the output page. This is the mode &latex; is in
-when it starts a document.
+<anchor id="modes-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Vertical mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is
+building the list of lines and other material making the output page,
+which comprises insertion of page breaks. This is the mode &latex; is
+in when it starts a document.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>internal vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
<anchor id="modes-internal-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Internal vertical mode</firstterm> is in effect when &latex; starts making a
-<literal>\vbox</literal>. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+<literal>\vbox</literal>. It has not such thing as page breaks, and as such is the
+vertical analogue of LR mode.
</para>
</listitem></itemizedlist>
<para>For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with ‘<literal>Let \( x \) be
@@ -12916,7 +13255,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The package <filename>fancyhdr</filename> is very helpful for constructing page
+<para>The package <literal>fancyhdr</literal> is very helpful for constructing page
styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
</para>
@@ -13056,7 +13395,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex; does not output a page number, although it
does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not
-work with the popular package <filename>hyperref</filename> so to have the page number
+work with the popular package <literal>hyperref</literal> so to have the page number
not appear you may want to instead use <literal>\pagestyle{empty}</literal> or
<literal>\thispagestyle{empty}</literal>.)
</para>
@@ -13066,10 +13405,9 @@
main matter of a document uses arabic. See <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter & \mainmatter
& \backmatter</link>.
</para>
-<para>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
-see <link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>. If you want to change the value of page
-number then you will manipulate the <literal>page</literal> counter
-(see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+<para>If you want to change where the page number appears on the page,
+see <link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>. If you want to change the value of the page
+number, then you manipulate the <literal>page</literal> counter (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -13092,7 +13430,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
-<filename>fancyhdr</filename> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+<literal>fancyhdr</literal> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
standard options below should use this package. See its documentation
on CTAN.
@@ -13103,7 +13441,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>empty</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The header and footer is empty.
+</term><listitem><para>The header and footer are both empty.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>headings</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
@@ -13213,11 +13551,9 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>white space</primary></indexterm>
-<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of
-these are best suited to mathematical text; see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in
-math mode</link>. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
-and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
-chapter.
+<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white space, or filled space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; for these
+see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link>.
</para>
@@ -13264,20 +13600,21 @@
<screen>\hspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
\hspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Insert the horizontal space <replaceable>length</replaceable>. The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can be
-positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
-It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <literal>plus</literal> or
-<literal>minus</literal> component, or both (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). Because the space is
-stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <firstterm>glue</firstterm>.
+<para>Insert the amount <replaceable>length</replaceable> of horizontal space. The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can
+be positive, negative, or zero; adding a negative amount of space is
+like backspacing. It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a
+<literal>plus</literal> or <literal>minus</literal> component, or both (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+Because the space is stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called
+<firstterm>glue</firstterm>.
</para>
<para>This makes a line with ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ an inch from the right margin.
</para>
<screen>\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
-More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form inserts horizontal space that is non-discardable. More
+precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
space—glues and kerns—that come at a line break are discarded. The
-<literal>*</literal>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+<literal>*</literal>-form avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space).
</para>
<para>In this example
@@ -13498,8 +13835,9 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="19.5.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing">
-<title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cfrenchspacing"/><!-- old node name -->
+<sect2 label="19.5.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing">
+<title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal> & <literal>\nonfrenchspacing</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonfrenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -13510,10 +13848,11 @@
<screen>\frenchspacing
\nonfrenchspacing
</screen>
-<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences
-in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
-The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
-(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>); this is the default.
+<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to handle spacing between
+sentences in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a
+sentence. The second switches back to the default handling in which
+spacing between sentences stretches or shrinks more
+(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
</para>
<para>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
@@ -13534,7 +13873,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\normalsfcodes
</screen>
-<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default
+<para>Reset the &latex; space factors to the default values
(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
</para>
@@ -13543,16 +13882,17 @@
<sect1 label="19.6" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">
<title>Backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal></title>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\NEWLINE</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\SPACE</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\ (backslash-space)</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\TAB</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\SPACE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\<keycap>NEWLINE</keycap></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\<keycap>SPACE</keycap></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\<keycap>TAB</keycap></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ <!-- /@w --> (backslash-space)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\<keycap>SPACE</keycap></primary></indexterm>
<para>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
-backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+backslash followed by a space.
+Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\
+<screen>\ <!-- /@w -->
</screen>
<para>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
@@ -13560,35 +13900,48 @@
<para>When you type one or more blanks between words, &latex; produces white
space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
</para>
-<screen>\begin{tabular}{l}
-One blank: makes some space \\
-Three blanks: in a row \\
-Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rl}
+One blank:& makes some space \\
+Three blanks:& in a row \\
+Three spaces:&\ \ \ in a row \\
\end{tabular}
</screen>
<para>On the first line &latex; puts some space after the colon. On the
second line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one
whitespace, so you end with the same space after the colon as in the
-first line. &latex; would similarly collapse a blank followed by a
-tab, or a blank and a newline and a blank. However, the bottom line
-asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That is, the
-backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal space.
-(Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all with
-<literal>\hspace</literal>; see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>.)
+first line. &latex; would similarly collapse them to a single
+whitespace if one, two or all of the three blanks were replaced by a
+tab, or by a newline. However, the bottom line asks for three spaces so
+the white area is wider. That is, the backslash-space command creates a
+fixed amount of horizontal space. (Note that you can define a
+horizontal space of any width at all with <literal>\hspace</literal>;
+see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>.)
</para>
<para>The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used after
-control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that follows, as
-in <literal>\TeX\ is nice</literal>. (But using curly parentheses, as in
-<literal>\TeX{} is best</literal>, has the advantage of still working if the next
-character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
-as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in <literal>So
-says Prof.\ Smith</literal> or <literal>Jones et al.\ (1993)</literal> (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+control sequences to keep them from gobbling the blank that follows, as
+after <literal>\TeX</literal> in <literal>\TeX\ (or \LaTeX)</literal>. (But using curly braces
+has the advantage of still working whether the next character is a blank
+or any other non-letter, as in <literal>\TeX{} (or \LaTeX{})</literal> in which
+<literal>{}</literal> can be added after <literal>\LaTeX</literal> as well as after
+<literal>\TeX</literal>.) The other common use is that it marks a period as ending
+an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in <literal>Prof.\ Smith</literal>
+or <literal>Jones et al.\ (1993)</literal> (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
</para>
-<para>Under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and <literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap>
+<para>Under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>TAB</keycap> and <literal>\</literal><keycap>NEWLINE</keycap>
are equivalent to backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal>.
</para>
+<anchor id="Leading-blanks"/><para>Please also note that in order to allow source code indentation, under
+normal circumstances, &tex; ignores leading blanks in a line. So the
+following prints ‘<literal>one word</literal>’:
+</para>
+<screen>one
+ word
+</screen>
+<para>where the white space between ‘<literal>one</literal>’ and ‘<literal>word</literal>’ is produced by
+the newline after ‘<literal>one</literal>’, not by the space before ‘<literal>word</literal>’.
+</para>
<!-- @PkgIndex{xspace} -->
-<!-- Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace}, -->
+<!-- Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @package{xspace}, -->
<!-- package do not follow the standard behavior. -->
@@ -13607,13 +13960,20 @@
</para>
<screen><replaceable>before</replaceable>~<replaceable>after</replaceable>
</screen>
-<para>The tie character, <literal>~</literal>, produces a space between <replaceable>before</replaceable> and
+<para>The <firstterm>tie</firstterm> character, <literal>~</literal>, produces a space between <replaceable>before</replaceable> and
<replaceable>after</replaceable> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus
1.11111pt (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
</para>
-<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words.
+<!-- This paragraph is not translated to French, as the French translation -->
+<!-- uses a term that means ``unbreakable''. -->
+<para>Note that the word ‘<literal>tie</literal>’ has this meaning in the &tex;/Texinfo
+community; this differs from the typographic term “tie”, which
+is a diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a “tie-after” accent
+in <citetitle>The &tex;book</citetitle>.
</para>
+<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words:
+</para>
<screen>Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
</screen>
<para>In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the
@@ -13628,7 +13988,7 @@
among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them
from <citetitle>The &tex;book</citetitle>.
</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Between an enumerator label and number, such as in references:
<literal>Chapter~12</literal>, or <literal>Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}</literal>, or
<literal>Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}</literal>.
</para>
@@ -13639,10 +13999,10 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>siunitx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
</listitem><listitem><para>Between a number and its unit: <literal>$745.7.8$~watts</literal> (the
-<filename>siunitx</filename> package has a special facility for this) or
-<literal>144~eggs</literal>. This includes between a month and a date:
-<literal>October~12</literal> or <literal>12~Oct</literal>. In general, in any expressions
-where numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<literal>siunitx</literal> package has a special facility for this) or
+<literal>144~eggs</literal>. This includes between a month and day number in a date:
+<literal>October~12</literal> or <literal>12~Oct</literal>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
<literal>AD~565</literal>, or <literal>2:50~pm</literal>, or <literal>Boeing~747</literal>, or
<literal>268~Plains Road</literal>, or <literal>\$$1.4$~billion</literal>. Other common
choices here are a thin space (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace & \negthinspace</link>) and
@@ -13701,11 +14061,14 @@
style-specific use is between initials, as in <literal>D.\thinspace E.\
Knuth</literal>.
</para>
-<para>&latex; provides a variety of similar spacing commands
-(see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link>). With <literal>amsmath</literal>, or as of the
-2020-10-01 &latex; release, they can be used in text mode as well as
-math mode, including <literal>\!</literal> for <literal>\negthinspace</literal>; before that,
-they were available only in math mode.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides a variety of similar spacing commands for math mode
+(see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link>). With the <literal>amsmath</literal> package, or as
+of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, they can be used in text mode as
+well as math mode, including <literal>\!</literal> for <literal>\negthinspace</literal>; but
+otherwise, they are available only in math mode.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="19.9" id="_005c_002f">
@@ -13752,8 +14115,8 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontdimen1</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font dimension, slant</primary></indexterm>
<para>Technically, &latex; uses another font-specific value, the so-called
-slant parameter (namely <literal>\fontdimen1</literal>), to determine whether to
-possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to
+<firstterm>slant parameter</firstterm> (namely <literal>\fontdimen1</literal>), to determine whether
+to possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to
particular font commands.
</para>
<para>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing is
@@ -13793,13 +14156,13 @@
here
</para>
<screen>\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
- \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern0pt }
</screen>
<para>which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt.
Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
</para>
<screen>\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
- \leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hbox to 1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern0pt }
</screen>
<para>which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
</para>
@@ -13859,7 +14222,7 @@
<literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>Because each command is a <literal>\vspace</literal>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+<para>Because each command is a <literal>\vspace</literal>, if you use it in mid-paragraph
then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
these are best between paragraphs.
@@ -13913,7 +14276,7 @@
and depth at least <literal>0.3\baselineskip</literal>. Essentially, &latex;
inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
<literal>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005crule">\rule</link>).
-The <literal>\baselineskip</literal> changes with the current font and fontsize.
+The <literal>\baselineskip</literal> changes with the current font or fontsize.
</para>
<para>In this example the <literal>\strut</literal> keeps the box inside the frame from
having zero height.
@@ -13956,10 +14319,10 @@
\end{minipage}%
</screen>
<para>The final two lists use <literal>\fbox</literal> to show what’s happening. The
-third list’s <literal>\parbox</literal> goes only to the bottom of its second
-‘<literal>test</literal>’, which happens not have any characters that descend below
-the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed
-extra below-baseline space.
+first item <literal>\parbox</literal> of the third list goes only to the bottom of
+its second ‘<literal>test</literal>’, which happens not have any characters that
+descend below the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives
+the needed extra below-baseline space.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -13967,7 +14330,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
-<filename>TikZ</filename> or <filename>Asymptote</filename>. For instance, you may have a command
+<literal>TikZ</literal> or <literal>Asymptote</literal>. For instance, you may have a command
such as <literal>\graphnode{<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>}</literal> that fits a circle around
<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>. However, unless you are careful the <replaceable>node-name</replaceable>’s
‘<literal>x</literal>’ and ‘<literal>y</literal>’ will produce different-diameter circles because
@@ -13987,10 +14350,10 @@
\end{tabular}
</screen>
<para>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
-optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won’t work here.
-Changing the first double backslash to something like <literal>\\[2.5ex]</literal>
-will put the room between the header line and the <literal>\hline</literal>, and the
-integral would still hit the line.)
+optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won’t
+solve this issue. Changing the first double backslash to something like
+<literal>\\[2.5ex]</literal> will put more room between the header line and the
+<literal>\hline</literal> rule, and the integral would still hit the rule.)
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -14020,9 +14383,9 @@
<para>(See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</link>, for common inter-paragraph
spaces.)
</para>
-<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form inserts vertical space that is non-discardable. More
precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the
-<literal>*</literal>-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
+<literal>*</literal>-form causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
between the two questions.
</para>
<screen>Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
@@ -14106,10 +14469,11 @@
(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>). The <replaceable>vert-length</replaceable> is a rubber length
(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
</para>
-<para>This example illustrates. The <literal>picture</literal> draws a scale. In a
-standard &latex; article the length <literal>\baselineskip</literal> is 12pt.
-The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the
-<literal>\baselineskip</literal> and the 10pt from the first <literal>addvspace</literal>.
+<para>This example illustrates. The <literal>picture</literal> draws a scale over which
+to rules are placed. In a standard &latex; article the length
+<literal>\baselineskip</literal> is 12pt. As shown by the scale, the two
+rules are 22pt apart: the sum of the <literal>\baselineskip</literal> and the
+10pt from the first <literal>\addvspace</literal>.
</para>
<screen>\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{color}
@@ -14157,7 +14521,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>adjustbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
-One useful adjunct to the commands here is <filename>adjustbox</filename>.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <literal>adjustbox</literal>.
</para>
@@ -14225,7 +14589,11 @@
</term><listitem><para>Flush right.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Stretch the interword space in <replaceable>text</replaceable> across the entire <replaceable>width</replaceable>.
+</term><listitem><!-- xx TODO add a generic node to make clear that some statement may be -->
+<!-- not true for some internationalization or some script. Eg. in Arabic -->
+<!-- script or with microtype package I think that the strech also plays -->
+<!-- on word width -->
+<para>Stretch the interword space in <replaceable>text</replaceable> across the entire <replaceable>width</replaceable>.
The <replaceable>text</replaceable> must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
instance, this could head a press release:
<literal>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
@@ -14247,8 +14615,8 @@
<para>The right edge of the output ‘<literal>10 points </literal>’ (note the ending space
after ‘<literal>points</literal>’) will be just before the ‘<literal>What</literal>’. You can use
-<literal>\makebox</literal> similarly when making graphics, such as in <filename>TikZ</filename>
-or <filename>Asymptote</filename>, where you put the edge of the text at a known
+<literal>\makebox</literal> similarly when making graphics, such as in <literal>TikZ</literal>
+or <literal>Asymptote</literal>, where you put the edge of the text at a known
location, regardless of the length of that text.
</para>
<para>For boxes with frames see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox & \framebox</link>. For colors
@@ -14280,7 +14648,7 @@
\framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
\framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four rules surrounding the <replaceable>text</replaceable>.
These commands are the same as <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal> except
for the frame (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>). The <literal>\fbox</literal> command is
robust, the <literal>\framebox</literal> command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
@@ -14287,8 +14655,8 @@
</para>
<screen>\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
</screen>
-<para>&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
-Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+<para>&latex; puts the text into a box, the text cannot be hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four rules making
a frame.
</para>
<para>The first two command invocations, <literal>\fbox{...}</literal> and
@@ -14300,7 +14668,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> inserts a vertical height of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
+<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> ensures a total height of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>).
</para>
<para>These parameters determine the frame layout.
@@ -14309,7 +14677,7 @@
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame, line width</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame rule width</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+<para>The thickness of the rules around the enclosed box. The default is
0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
<literal>\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>).
</para>
@@ -14321,7 +14689,7 @@
(see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes:
this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
</para>
-<screen>{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+<screen>{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}%
\framebox{%
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
</screen>
@@ -14340,9 +14708,9 @@
</screen>
<para>See <link linkend="Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</link>, for colors other than black and white.
</para>
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has a version of this command where the
-units depend on <literal>picture</literal>’s <literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox
-(picture)</link>).
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has a version of the <literal>\framebox</literal>
+command where the units depend on <literal>picture</literal>’s <literal>\unitlength</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>).
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -14513,7 +14881,8 @@
warning. To fix this use a <literal>\parbox</literal> or <literal>minipage</literal> as here.
</para>
<!-- credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234 -->
-<screen>\savebox{\areg}{%
+<screen>\newsavebox{\areg}
+\savebox{\areg}{%
\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
\begin{enumerate}
\item First item
@@ -14561,8 +14930,8 @@
\end{lrbox}
</screen>
<para>This is the environment form of the <literal>\sbox</literal> and <literal>\savebox</literal>
-commands, and is equivalent to them. for the full description,
-See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox & \savebox</link>.
+commands, and is equivalent to them. See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox & \savebox</link>, for the
+full description.
</para>
<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> inside the environment is saved in the box register
referred to by variable <literal><replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable></literal>. The variable name
@@ -14595,7 +14964,7 @@
</screen>
<para>Produce the box most recently saved in the box register <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> by
the commands <literal>\sbox</literal> or <literal>\savebox</literal>, or the <literal>lrbox</literal>
-environment. For more information and examples, See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &
+environment. For more information and examples, see <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &
\savebox</link>. (Note that the variable name <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> starts with a
backslash, <literal>\</literal>.) This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
@@ -14928,12 +15297,12 @@
</screen>
<para>To use the commands described here your document preamble must contain
either <literal>\usepackage{graphicx}</literal> or
-<literal>\usepackage{graphics}</literal>. Most of the time, <filename>graphicx</filename> is the
+<literal>\usepackage{graphics}</literal>. Most of the time, <literal>graphicx</literal> is the
better choice.
</para>
<para>Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. &latex; can use
both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
-in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph
in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
instructions such as ‘<literal>draw a circle with this radius and that
center</literal>’. An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote
@@ -14972,7 +15341,7 @@
<para>The <literal>graphicx</literal> package has a format for optional arguments to the
<literal>\includegraphics</literal> command that is convenient (it is the key-value
format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
-the <filename>graphics</filename> or <filename>graphicx</filename> package with <literal>\usepackage</literal>
+the <literal>graphics</literal> or <literal>graphicx</literal> package with <literal>\usepackage</literal>
there are two kinds of available options.
</para>
<para>The first is that &latex; does not contain information about different
@@ -15179,7 +15548,7 @@
</screen>
<para>Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in <replaceable>extension</replaceable>.
</para>
-<para>This example declares that all files with names have the form
+<para>This example declares that all files with names of the form
<filename>filename-without-dot.mps</filename> will be treated as output from MetaPost,
meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
input the file.
@@ -15251,8 +15620,8 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, graphics package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>These are the commands available with the <filename>graphics</filename> and
-<filename>graphicx</filename> packages.
+<para>These are the commands available with the <literal>graphics</literal> and
+<literal>graphicx</literal> packages.
</para>
@@ -15270,7 +15639,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PNG files</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includegraphics</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopses for <filename>graphics</filename> package:
+<para>Synopses for <literal>graphics</literal> package:
</para>
<screen>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
\includegraphics[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
@@ -15279,7 +15648,7 @@
\includegraphics*[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
\includegraphics*[<replaceable>llx</replaceable>,<replaceable>lly</replaceable>][<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Synopses for <filename>graphicx</filename> package:
+<para>Synopses for <literal>graphicx</literal> package:
</para>
<screen>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
\includegraphics[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
@@ -15317,7 +15686,7 @@
<para>If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide
them with curly braces, as in
<literal>\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}</literal>. Or, if you use
-the <filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can use the options <literal>type</literal> and
+the <literal>graphicx</literal> package then you can use the options <literal>type</literal> and
<literal>ext</literal>; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled
with the package <filename>grffile</filename>.
</para>
@@ -15358,7 +15727,7 @@
\end{minipage}}
\end{center}
</screen>
-<para>If you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package then the only options involve the
+<para>If you use the <literal>graphics</literal> package then the only options involve the
size of the graphic (but see <link linkend="_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</link> and <link linkend="_005cscalebox">\scalebox</link>).
When one optional argument is present then it is
<literal>[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]</literal> and it gives the coordinates of the top
@@ -15371,7 +15740,7 @@
the graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches
tall and so its origin is at (0,0).
</para>
-<para>The <filename>graphicx</filename> package gives you many more options. Specify them
+<para>The <literal>graphicx</literal> package gives you many more options. Specify them
in a key-value form, as here.
</para>
<screen>\begin{center}
@@ -15600,11 +15969,11 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>rotating text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rotatebox</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopsis if you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package:
+<para>Synopsis if you use the <literal>graphics</literal> package:
</para>
<screen>\rotatebox{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Synopses if you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package:
+<para>Synopses if you use the <literal>graphicx</literal> package:
</para>
<screen>\rotatebox{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
\rotatebox[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
@@ -15634,8 +16003,8 @@
bounding box, in its new position, is what &latex; uses as the box when
typesetting this material.
</para>
-<para>If you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package then the rotation is about the
-reference point of the box. If you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package
+<para>If you use the <literal>graphics</literal> package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the <literal>graphicx</literal> package
then these are the options that can go in the <replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>,
but note that you can get the same effect without needing this
package, except for the <literal>x</literal> and <literal>y</literal> options
@@ -15702,7 +16071,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
</screen>
-<para>If you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can accomplish the same
+<para>If you use the <literal>graphicx</literal> package then you can accomplish the same
thing with optional arguments to <literal>\includegraphics</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</link>).
</para>
@@ -15709,7 +16078,7 @@
<para>The <literal>\reflectbox</literal> command abbreviates
<literal>\scalebox{-1}[1]{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}</literal>. Thus, <literal>Able was
I\reflectbox{Able was I}</literal> will show the phrase ‘<literal>Able was I</literal>’
-immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+immediately followed by its mirror reflection against a vertical axis.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -15742,7 +16111,7 @@
<para>The unstarred form <literal>\resizebox</literal> takes <replaceable>vertical length</replaceable> to be
the box’s height while the starred form <literal>\resizebox*</literal> takes it to
be height+depth. For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a
-quarter inch with <literal>\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This
+quarter-inch with <literal>\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{3.5in}{This
box has both height and depth.}}</literal>.
</para>
<para>You can use <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>, <literal>\totalheight</literal>, and
@@ -15859,7 +16228,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>textcase</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>textcase</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>textcase</filename> package brings some of the missing feature of the
+<para>The <literal>textcase</literal> package brings some of the missing feature of the
standard &latex; commands <literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> and
<literal>\MakeLowerCase</literal>.
</para>
@@ -15867,7 +16236,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mfirstuc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
-<filename>mfirstuc</filename>.
+<literal>mfirstuc</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>expl3</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>expl3</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -16105,7 +16474,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>eurosym</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
</para>
<para>For an alternative glyph design, try the
-<filename>eurosym</filename> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+<literal>eurosym</literal> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</literal>
@@ -16251,7 +16620,7 @@
<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and
languages, provided through the core <literal>babel</literal> package, which
supports pdf&latex;, Xe&latex; and Lua&latex;. The
-<filename>polyglossia</filename> package provides similar support with the latter
+<literal>polyglossia</literal> package provides similar support with the latter
two engines.
</para>
<para>This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core
@@ -16382,8 +16751,9 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtie</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalnewtie</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tie-after accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>oo[ Tie-after accent. The <literal>\newtie</literal> form is centered in
-its box.
+<para>Tie-after accent (used for transliterating from Cyrillic, such as in the
+ALA-LC romanization). It expects that the argument has two characters.
+The <literal>\newtie</literal> form is centered in its box.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\u</literal>
</term><term><literal>\capitalbreve</literal>
@@ -16413,9 +16783,9 @@
<screen>\accent <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>character</replaceable>
</screen>
<para>A &tex; primitive command used to generate accented characters from
-accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by <replaceable>number</replaceable>,
-a numeric argument, followed by a space and then a <replaceable>character</replaceable> argument
-constructs the accented character in the current font.
+accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by <replaceable>number</replaceable>, a
+numeric argument, followed by a space and then a <replaceable>character</replaceable>
+argument to construct the accented character in the current font.
</para>
<para>These are accented ‘<literal>e</literal>’ characters.
</para>
@@ -16425,7 +16795,8 @@
\accent22 e
\accent23 e
</screen>
-<para>The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc.
+<para>The first is a grave, the second a caron, the third a breve, the fourth
+a macron, and the fifth a ring above.
</para>
<para>The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so the
outcome of <literal>\accent</literal> use may differ between fonts. In &latex; it is
@@ -16574,7 +16945,7 @@
called the <firstterm>encoding</firstterm>. There are many different encodings. The
simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough
for most of the world’s languages. For instance, to typeset the
-a-umlaut character ä in an ASCII-encoded &latex; source file, the
+a-umlaut character ‘<literal>ä</literal>’ in an ASCII-encoded &latex; source file, the
sequence <literal>\"a</literal> is used. This would make source files for anything
but English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive
encoding is more convenient.
@@ -16606,7 +16977,8 @@
replace the non-UTF-8 character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a
&latex; equivalent command or character.
</para>
-<para>In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\inputencoding</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cinputencoding"/><para>In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be
necessary. Use the command
<literal>\inputencoding{<replaceable>encoding-name</replaceable>}</literal>. The most common values
@@ -16638,7 +17010,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsthm</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsthm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <filename>amsthm</filename> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+<para>The <literal>amsthm</literal> package includes this command, with a somewhat
different-looking symbol.
</para>
<para>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <replaceable>width</replaceable> and vertical
@@ -16681,7 +17053,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Multilingual packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>, or
+<para>Multilingual packages such as <literal>babel</literal> or <literal>polyglossia</literal>, or
classes such as <filename>lettre</filename>, will localize <literal>\today</literal>. For example,
the following will output ‘<literal>4 juillet 1976</literal>’:
</para>
@@ -16698,7 +17070,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>datetime</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>datetime</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is <filename>datetime</filename> package
+<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is <literal>datetime</literal> package
which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
</para>
<para>The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the
@@ -16890,6 +17262,7 @@
dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘<literal>amo amas amat</literal>’,
this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\space</primary></indexterm>
<screen>\documentclass{book}
\includeonly{
"amo\space amas\space amat"
@@ -16960,6 +17333,7 @@
dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘<literal>amo amas amat</literal>’,
this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\space</primary></indexterm>
<screen>\input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
</screen>
<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
@@ -16973,9 +17347,9 @@
<title>Front/back matter</title>
-
+<!-- no comma in the node name because Texinfo doesn't support that well. -->
<sect1 label="25.1" id="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">
-<title>Table of contents etc.</title>
+<title>Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, creating</primary></indexterm>
@@ -17104,9 +17478,9 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocbibbind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
-and tables (see <link linkend="CTAN">CTAN</link>). The package <filename>tocloft</filename> is convenient for
+and tables (see <link linkend="CTAN">CTAN</link>). The package <literal>tocloft</literal> is convenient for
adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And,
-<filename>tocbibbind</filename> will automatically add the bibliography, index,
+<literal>tocbibbind</literal> will automatically add the bibliography, index,
etc. to the table of contents.
</para>
<para>To change the header for the table of contents page, do something like
@@ -17122,7 +17496,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Internationalization packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>
+<para>Internationalization packages such as <literal>babel</literal> or <literal>polyglossia</literal>
will change these headers depending on the chosen base language.
</para>
@@ -17152,19 +17526,19 @@
<para>In this example, <literal>\@dottedcline</literal> appears to have been given only
three arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up
the final <replaceable>text</replaceable> and <replaceable>pagenumber</replaceable> arguments in the synopsis
-from a call to <literal>\contentsline</literal>.
+from a call to <literal>\contentsline</literal> (see <link linkend="_005ccontentsline">\contentsline</link>).
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>leaders, dots in table of contents</primary></indexterm>
<para>Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin
box, these <literal>\@dottedtocline</literal> commands insert <firstterm>leaders</firstterm>, that
is, evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command
-<literal>\@dotsep</literal>. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which
-are <literal>1/18</literal> em. Change it using <literal>\renewcommand</literal>, as
-in <literal>\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}</literal>.
+<literal>\@dotsep</literal>. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, aka.
+<literal>mu</literal>, which are <literal>1/18</literal> em. Change it using
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, as in <literal>\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>In the default book class, &latex; does not use dotted leaders for
-the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class
-it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
+<para>In the standard <filename>book</filename> class, &latex; does not use dotted leaders
+for the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the standard
+<filename>article</filename> class it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -17188,11 +17562,12 @@
</screen>
<para>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
-where it appears in the input file.
+where the command appears in the input file.
</para>
<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command writes information to the file
-<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename>. It writes that information as the
-text of the command
+<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename>, where <replaceable>root-name</replaceable> is the file name
+of the root file (see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</link>). It writes that
+information as the text of the command
<literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
<literal><replaceable>num</replaceable></literal> is the current value of counter <literal><replaceable>unit</replaceable></literal>
(see <link linkend="_005ccontentsline">\contentsline</link>). The most common case is the table of contents
@@ -17199,18 +17574,20 @@
and there <replaceable>num</replaceable> is the page number of the first page of <replaceable>unit</replaceable>.
</para>
<para>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <literal>\chapter</literal>,
-etc., and also by <literal>\caption</literal> inside a float environment. But it is
-also used by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style
-is to have an unnumbered preface may use the starred <literal>\chapter*</literal>.
-But that command leaves out table of contents information, which can be
-entered manually, as here.
+etc. (see <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link>), and also by <literal>\caption</literal> inside a float
+environment (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>). But it is also directly used by authors.
+For example, an author writing a book whose style is to have an
+unnumbered preface may use the starred <literal>\chapter*</literal>. But that
+command leaves out table of contents information, which can be entered
+manually, as here.
</para>
<screen>\chapter*{Preface}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
</screen>
-<para>In the <filename>.toc</filename> file &latex; will put the line <literal>\contentsline
-{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</literal>; note that the page number
-‘<literal>3</literal>’ is automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.
+<para>In the <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.toc</filename> file &latex; will put the line
+<literal>\contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</literal>; note
+that the page number ‘<literal>3</literal>’ is automatically generated by the system,
+not entered manually.
</para>
<para>All of the arguments for <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> are required.
</para>
@@ -17220,7 +17597,8 @@
tables. The filename extension of the information file.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>unit</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <replaceable>ext</replaceable> argument:
+</term><listitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <replaceable>ext</replaceable> argument, typically
+one of:
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>toc</literal>
</term><listitem><para>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
@@ -17233,8 +17611,8 @@
</term><listitem><para>For the list of tables: <literal>table</literal>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry. You must <literal>\protect</literal> any commands that are
-fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry. You must <literal>\protect</literal> any fragile commands
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>) used in it.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command has an interaction with
<literal>\include</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include & \includeonly</link>). If you use them at
@@ -17243,7 +17621,8 @@
in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution
is to move <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> into the file being included.
</para>
-<para>If you use a <replaceable>unit</replaceable> that &latex; does not recognize, as here
+<para>If you use a <replaceable>unit</replaceable> that &latex; does not recognize, as with the
+typo here
</para>
<screen>\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
</screen>
@@ -17343,7 +17722,7 @@
commands <literal>\chapter</literal>, <literal>\section</literal>, etc. for the table of
contents, or by the <literal>\caption</literal> command inside of a <literal>\figure</literal>
or <literal>\table</literal> environment (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link> and see <link linkend="table">table</link>). Thus,
-where the base file is <filename>thesis.tex</filename>, and contains the declaration
+where the root file is <filename>thesis.tex</filename>, and contains the declaration
<literal>\tableofcontents</literal>, the command <literal>\chapter{Chapter One}</literal>
produces something like this in the file <filename>thesis.toc</filename>.
</para>
@@ -17360,15 +17739,22 @@
where <replaceable>filetype</replaceable> is <literal>toc</literal>, <literal>lof</literal>, or <literal>lot</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</link>).
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tocloft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocloft</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>For manipulating how the <literal>\contentline</literal> material is typeset, see
-the <filename>tocloft</filename> package.
+the <literal>tocloft</literal> package.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>Note that the <literal>hyperref</literal> package changes the definition of
<literal>\contentsline</literal> (and <literal>\addcontentsline</literal>) to add more
arguments, to make hyperlinks. This is the source of the error
-<literal>Argument of \contentsline has an extra }</literal>. Fix this error by
-deleting the <filename>.toc</filename> or <filename>.lof</filename> or <filename>.lot</filename> file, and running
-&latex; again.
+<literal>Argument of \contentsline has an extra }</literal> when one adds/remove
+the use of package <literal>hyperref</literal> and a compilation was already run.
+Fix this error by deleting the <filename>.toc</filename> or <filename>.lof</filename> or <filename>.lot</filename>
+file, and running &latex; again.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -17415,7 +17801,7 @@
<literal>\contentsline</literal> command to typeset the section number
(see <link linkend="_005ccontentsline">\contentsline</link>).
</para>
-<para>For example, this line in a <filename>.toc</filename> file causes the <literal>1</literal> to be
+<para>For example, this line in a <filename>.toc</filename> file causes the <literal>1.1</literal> to be
typeset flush left.
</para>
<screen>\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
@@ -17424,17 +17810,20 @@
<literal>\@tempdima</literal>. That length is set by the commands
<literal>\l at section</literal>, <literal>\l at subsection</literal>, etc. Put section numbers
inside a natural-width box with
-<literal>\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}</literal>.
+<literal>\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}</literal> before
+<literal>\tableofcontents</literal>.
</para>
-<para>This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with
+<para>This command is fragile so you may need to precede it with
<literal>\protect</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>). An example is the use of
-<literal>\protect</literal> in the command
-<literal>\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}</literal>
-to get the <literal>\numberline</literal> into this command in the <filename>.toc</filename> file:
-<literal>\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}</literal> (the
-page number ‘<literal>6</literal>’ is automatically added by &latex;;
-see <link linkend="_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</link>).
+<literal>\protect</literal> in this command,
</para>
+<screen><literal>\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}</literal>
+</screen>
+<para>to get the <literal>\numberline</literal> into the <literal>\contentsline</literal>
+command in the <filename>.toc</filename> file: <literal>\contentsline
+{section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}</literal> (the page number ‘<literal>6</literal>’
+is automatically added by &latex;; see <link linkend="_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</link>).
+</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
@@ -17447,33 +17836,51 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This document has an index.
+<para>If you tell &latex; what terms you want to appear in an index then it
+can produce that index, alphabetized and with the page numbers
+automatically maintained. This illustrates the basics.
</para>
<screen>\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+\usepackage{makeidx} % Provide indexing commands
+ \makeindex
+% \usepackage{showidx} % Show marginal notes of index entries
...
\begin{document}
...
-Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
-a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
-is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+Wilson's Theorem\index{Wilson's Theorem}
+says that a number $n>1$ is prime if and only if the factorial
+of $n-1$ is congruent to $-1$
+modulo~$n$.\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}
...
\printindex
- ...
+\end{document}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal> and <literal>\makeindex</literal> in the preamble
-bring in the relevant commands.
-</para>
-<para>Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
-body you declare index entries with the <literal>\index</literal> command
+<para>As that shows, declare index entries with the <literal>\index</literal> command
(see <link linkend="_005cindex">\index</link>). When you run &latex;, the <literal>\index</literal> writes its
-information to an auxiliary file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.idx</filename>. Next, to
-alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
-typically <command>makeindex</command> or <command>xindy</command> (see <link linkend="makeindex">makeindex</link>).
-These output a file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.ind</filename>. Finally, you bring the
-information back into your document and typeset it with the
-<literal>\printindex</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
+information, such as ‘<literal>Wilson's Theorem</literal>’ and the page number, to an
+auxiliary file whose name ends in <filename>.idx</filename>. Next, to alphabetize and
+do other manipulations, run an external command, typically
+<command>makeindex</command> (see <link linkend="makeindex">makeindex</link>), which writes a file whose name
+ends in <filename>.ind</filename>. Finally, <literal>\printindex</literal> brings this
+manipulated information into the output (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
</para>
+<para>Thus, if the above example is in the file <filename>numth.tex</filename> then running
+‘<literal>pdflatex numth</literal>’ will save index entry and page number information
+to <filename>numth.idx</filename>. Then running ‘<literal>makeindex numth</literal>’ will
+alphabetize and save the results to <filename>numth.ind</filename>. Finally, again
+running ‘<literal>pdflatex numth</literal>’ will show the desired index, at the place
+where the <literal>\printindex</literal> command is in the source file.
+</para>
+<para>There are many options for the output. An example is that the
+exclamation point in <literal>\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}</literal>
+produces a main entry of ‘<literal>congruence</literal>’ with a subentry of ‘<literal>and
+Wilson's Theorem</literal>’. For more, see <link linkend="makeindex">makeindex</link>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\makeindex</literal> and <literal>\printindex</literal> commands are independent.
+Leaving out the <literal>\makeindex</literal> will stop &latex; from saving the
+index entries to the auxiliary file. Leaving out the <literal>\printindex</literal>
+will cause &latex; to not show the index in the document output.
+</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>showidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -17484,7 +17891,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiple indexes</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are many packages in the area of indexing. The <literal>showidx</literal>
package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the
-page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index.
+page where the <literal>\index</literal> appears. This can help in preparing the index.
The <literal>multind</literal> package, among others, supports multiple indexes.
See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
<ulink url="https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind">https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind</ulink>, and the CTAN topic,
@@ -17492,7 +17899,48 @@
</para>
-<sect2 label="25.2.1" id="_005cindex">
+<sect2 label="25.2.1" id="Produce-the-index-manually">
+<title>Produce the index manually</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, producing manually</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>theindex</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Documents that are small and static can have a manually produced index.
+This will make a separate page labeled ‘<literal>Index</literal>’, in twocolumn
+format.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>theindex</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>theindex</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{theindex}
+\item acorn squash, 1
+\subitem maple baked, 2
+\indexspace
+\item bacon, 3
+\subitem maple baked, 4
+\end{theindex}
+</screen>
+<para>Note that the author must enter the page numbers, which is tedious and
+which will result in wrong numbers if the document changes. This is why
+in most cases automated methods such as <command>makeindex</command> are best.
+See <link linkend="Indexes">Indexes</link>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subitem</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubitem</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
+<para>However we cover the commands for completeness, and because the
+automated methods are based on these commands. There are three levels
+of entries. As the example shows, a main entry uses <literal>\item</literal>,
+subentries use <literal>\subitem</literal>, and the lowest level uses
+<literal>\subsubitem</literal>. Blank lines between entries have no effect. The
+example above includes <literal>\indexspace</literal> to produce vertical space in
+the output that some index styles use before the first entry starting
+with a new letter.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.2.2" id="_005cindex">
<title><literal>\index</literal></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entry</primary></indexterm>
@@ -17510,12 +17958,15 @@
process the index entries with <literal>makeindex test</literal>, and then compile
again with <literal>pdflatex test</literal>.
</para>
-<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+<screen>% file test.tex
...
+W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
...
rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entries, subentries</primary></indexterm>
<para>All three index entries will get a page number, such as ‘<literal>Ackermann,
22</literal>’. &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
@@ -17522,7 +17973,8 @@
Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
<literal>\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}</literal> then
<command>makeindex</command> says ‘<literal>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
-entries accepted, 1 rejected)</literal>’ and nothing appears in the index).
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</literal>’ and the fourth level is silently missing
+from the index.)
</para>
<para>If you enter a second <literal>\index</literal> with the same
<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> then you will get a single index entry with two
@@ -17538,12 +17990,12 @@
</para>
<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
...
-D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert|(}
...
-disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert|)}
</screen>
<para>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
-just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+just gives a single page number, not a range.
</para>
<para>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
<literal>\index{Jones!program}</literal> and <literal>\index{Jones!results}</literal>, then
@@ -17561,16 +18013,15 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Generate a index entry that says ‘<literal>See</literal>’ by using a vertical bar
+<para>Generate a index entry that says ‘<literal>see</literal>’ by using a vertical bar
character: <literal>\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's
-function}}</literal>. You can instead get ‘<literal>See also</literal>’ with <literal>seealso</literal>.
-(The text ‘<literal>See</literal>’ is defined by <literal>\seename</literal>, and ‘<literal>See also</literal>’
+function}}</literal>. You can instead get ‘<literal>see also</literal>’ with <literal>seealso</literal>.
+(The text ‘<literal>see</literal>’ is defined by <literal>\seename</literal>, and ‘<literal>see also</literal>’
by <literal>\alsoname</literal>. You can redefine these either by using an
-internationalization package such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>,
-or directly as with <literal>\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
-#1}</literal>.)
+internationalization package such as <literal>babel</literal> or <literal>polyglossia</literal>,
+or directly as with <literal>\renewcommand{\alsoname}{Also see}</literal>.)
</para>
-<para>The ‘<literal>See</literal>’ feature is part of a more general functionality. After
+<para>The ‘<literal>see</literal>’ feature is part of a more general functionality. After
the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
<literal>\index{group|textit}</literal> (note the missing backslash on the
<literal>\textit</literal> command) and the system will apply that command to the
@@ -17606,15 +18057,15 @@
‘<literal>SMC</literal>’ alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
would naturally give it.
</para>
-<para>To put a <literal>!</literal>, or <literal>@</literal>, or <literal>|</literal> character in an index
-entry, preceding it with a double quote, <literal>"</literal>. (The double quote
-gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+<para>To put a <literal>!</literal>, or <literal>@</literal>, or <literal>|</literal>, or <literal>"</literal> character in
+an index entry, escape it by preceding it with a double quote, <literal>"</literal>.
+(The double quote gets deleted before alphabetization.)
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>index</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>index</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
-provided by <filename>makeidx</filename>. One is <filename>index</filename>, which allows for
+provided by <literal>makeidx</literal>. One is <literal>index</literal>, which allows for
multiple indices and contains a command
<literal>\index*{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}</literal> that prints the
<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> as well as indexing it.
@@ -17637,11 +18088,11 @@
</screen>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="25.2.2" id="makeindex">
+<sect2 label="25.2.3" id="makeindex">
<title><command>makeindex</command></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, processing</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex, program</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>makeindex</command> program</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.ind</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
@@ -17687,7 +18138,7 @@
</para>
<para>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <replaceable>specifier</replaceable> and
<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the
-<replaceable>attributes</replaceable> are strings, except where noted. Strings are
+<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>s are strings, except where noted. Strings are
surrounded with double quotes, <literal>"</literal>, and the maximum length of a
string is 144 characters. The <literal>\n</literal> is for a newline and <literal>\t</literal>
is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
@@ -17695,19 +18146,19 @@
comment.
</para>
<variablelist><anchor id="makeindex-preamble"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>preamble</primary></indexterm><literal>preamble</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+</term><listitem><para>Preamble of the output index file. Defines the context in which the index is
formatted. Default: <literal>"\\begin{theindex}\n"</literal>.
</para>
<anchor id="makeindex-postamble"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>postamble</primary></indexterm><literal>postamble</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Postamble of the output file. Default: <literal>"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>Postamble of the output index file. Default: <literal>"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</literal>.
</para>
<anchor id="makeindex-group-skip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>group_skip</primary></indexterm><literal>group_skip</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
<para>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
-entries starting with ‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc. This specifier gives what is
-inserted when a new group begins. Default: <literal>"\n\n \\indexspace\n"</literal>
-(<literal>\indexspace</literal> is a command inserting a rubber length, by default
-<literal>10pt plus5pt minus3pt</literal>).
+entries starting with letter ‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc. This specifier gives what
+is inserted when a new group begins. Default: <literal>"\n\n
+\\indexspace\n"</literal> (<literal>\indexspace</literal> is a command inserting a rubber
+length, by default <literal>10pt plus5pt minus3pt</literal>).
</para>
<anchor id="makeindex-letheadflag"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_flag</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_flag</literal>
</term><listitem><para>An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If
@@ -17801,7 +18252,7 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>xindy program</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are a number of other programs that do the job
<command>makeindex</command> does. One is <command>xindy</command>
-(https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does internationalization and can
+(<ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy">https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy</ulink>), which does internationalization and can
process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of
other languages. It is written in Lisp, highly configurable, both in
markup terms and in terms of the collating order of the text, as
@@ -17813,7 +18264,7 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<sect2 label="25.2.3" id="_005cprintindex">
+<sect2 label="25.2.4" id="_005cprintindex">
<title><command>\printindex</command></title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, printing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -17823,9 +18274,11 @@
</para>
<screen>\printindex
</screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
<para>Place the index into the output.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>makeidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>makeidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>To get an index you must first include
<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex</literal> in the document preamble and
compile the document, then run the system command <command>makeindex</command>,
@@ -18389,9 +18842,9 @@
</para>
<screen>\openout <replaceable>number</replaceable>=<replaceable>filename</replaceable>
</screen>
-<para>Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The <replaceable>number</replaceable>
-must be between 0 and 15, as in <literal>\openin3</literal> (in Lua&latex;
-<replaceable>number</replaceable> can be between 0 and 255).
+<para>Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. In most engines,
+the <replaceable>number</replaceable> must be between 0 and 15, as in <literal>\openin3</literal>; in
+Lua&latex;, <replaceable>number</replaceable> can be between 0 and 127.
</para>
<para>Here &tex; opens the file <filename>presidents.tex</filename> for reading.
</para>
@@ -18487,7 +18940,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mail merges</primary></indexterm>
<para>A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail merges.
-CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is <filename>datatool</filename>.
+CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is <literal>datatool</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -18561,11 +19014,12 @@
<literal>\renewcommand</literal> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
before being printed.
</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\space</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex;’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <literal>msg</literal>. As above,
-use the command <literal>\space</literal> to get a single space, independent of
-surrounding spaces. Use <literal>^^J</literal> to get a newline. Get a percent
-character with <literal>\csname @percentchar\endcsname</literal>.
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <literal>msg</literal>. Use the
+command <literal>\space</literal> to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+spaces. Use <literal>^^J</literal> to get a newline. Get a percent character with
+<literal>\csname @percentchar\endcsname</literal>.
</para>
<para>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
</para>
@@ -18709,7 +19163,7 @@
<para>A common case where authors need to write their own file is for
answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write
out verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of
-packages for this; one is <filename>answers</filename>.
+packages for this; one is <literal>answers</literal>.
</para>
@@ -18860,7 +19314,7 @@
</para>
<para>You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information
that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files
-in the current directory (but see <filename>texosquery</filename> below):
+in the current directory (but see <literal>texosquery</literal> below):
</para>
<screen>\immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat}
\input{tmp.dat}
@@ -18906,7 +19360,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>directory listings, from system</primary></indexterm>
<para>If what you need is system information, such as the operating system
name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the
-<filename>texosquery</filename> package, which provides a convenient and secure
+<literal>texosquery</literal> package, which provides a convenient and secure
interface for this, unlike the above examples using the raw
<literal>\write18</literal>: <ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery">https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery</ulink>.
</para>
@@ -19112,7 +19566,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>For example, this file (which uses the
-<filename>hyperref</filename> package for hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of
+<literal>hyperref</literal> package for hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of
output, one to be read on physical paper and one to be read online.
</para>
<screen>\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
@@ -19145,18 +19599,28 @@
pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
</screen>
<para>The <literal>jobname</literal> option is there because otherwise both files would be
-called <filename>main.pdf</filename> and the second would overwrite the first. (See
-the next section.)
+called <filename>main.pdf</filename> and the second would overwrite the
+first. (see <link linkend="Jobname">Jobname</link>.)
</para>
-<para>In this example, we pass the <literal>draft</literal> option to the
-<filename>graphicx</filename> package:
+<para>In this example we use the command line to select which parts of a
+document to include. For a book named <filename>mybook.tex</filename> and structured
+like this.
</para>
-<screen>pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\begin{document}
+ ...
+\include{chap1}
+\include{chap2}
+ ...
+\end{document}
</screen>
-<para>so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information
-but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only
-the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink.
+<para>the command line
</para>
+<screen>pdflatex "\includeonly{chap1}\input{mybook}"
+</screen>
+<para>will give output that has the first chapter but no other
+chapter. See <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</link>.
+</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="28.3" id="Jobname">
@@ -19166,6 +19630,8 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>jobname</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document root name</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>name of document root</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>root file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>file, root</primary></indexterm>
<para>Running &latex; creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or
DVI) output but also including others. These files are named with the
@@ -19177,13 +19643,14 @@
<para>In general, &latex; is invoked as <literal><replaceable>latex-engine</replaceable>
<replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>argument</replaceable></literal>, where <replaceable>latex-engine</replaceable> is
<command>pdflatex</command>, <command>lualatex</command>, etc. (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>).
-If <replaceable>argument</replaceable> does not start with a backslash, as is the case
-above with <literal>thesis</literal>, then &tex; considers it to be the name of
-the file to input as the main document. The name of that root file,
-without the <filename>.tex</filename> extension, is the jobname. If <replaceable>argument</replaceable>
-does start with a backslash, or if &tex; is in interactive mode, then
-it waits for the first <literal>\input</literal> command, and the jobname is the
-argument to <literal>\input</literal>.
+If <replaceable>argument</replaceable> does not start with a backslash, as is the case above
+with <literal>thesis</literal>, then &tex; considers it to be the name of the file
+to input as the main document. This file is referred to as the <firstterm>root
+file</firstterm> (see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</link>, and <link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link>). The name of
+that root file, without the <filename>.tex</filename> extension if any, is the
+jobname. If <replaceable>argument</replaceable> does start with a backslash, or if &tex; is
+in interactive mode, then it waits for the first <literal>\input</literal> command,
+and the jobname is the argument to <literal>\input</literal>.
</para>
<para>There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly
specified with the <literal>-jobname</literal> option, as in <literal>pdflatex
@@ -19192,10 +19659,10 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>texput, jobname default</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fallback jobname</primary></indexterm>
<para>The final possibility is <filename>texput</filename>, which is the final fallback
-default if no other name is available to &tex;. For example, if no
+default if no other name is available to &tex;. That is, if no
<literal>-jobname</literal> option was specified, and the compilation stops before
-there is any output, then the log file will be named
-<filename>texput.log</filename>.
+any input file is met, then the log file will be named
+<filename>texput.log</filename>.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\documentclass, and <literal>texput</literal> jobname</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackage, and <literal>texput</literal> jobname</primary></indexterm>
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2022-01-26 21:09:26 UTC (rev 61749)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2022-01-26 21:10:01 UTC (rev 61750)
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
<html>
+<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.8, https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
<!-- This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a
-document preparation system, version of July 2021.
+document preparation system, version of January 2022.
This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -18,7 +21,7 @@
text was directly copied.)
Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021, 2022 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
@@ -36,20 +39,20 @@
Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -->
-<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.7, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
-<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)</title>
+<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</title>
-<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)">
-<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)">
+<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)">
+<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)">
<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
<meta name="distribution" content="global">
<meta name="Generator" content="makeinfo">
+<meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width,initial-scale=1">
+
<link href="#Top" rel="start" title="Top">
<link href="#Index" rel="index" title="Index">
<link href="#SEC_Contents" rel="contents" title="Table of Contents">
<link href="https://tug.org/texinfohtml/" rel="up" title="(dir)">
+<link href="#About-this-document" rel="next" title="About this document">
<style type="text/css">
<!--
/* $Id: latex2e.css 935 2021-07-23 17:48:15Z jimhefferon $
@@ -57,11 +60,11 @@
Originally written by Jim Hefferon and Karl Berry, 2018. */
+a.copiable-anchor {visibility: hidden; text-decoration: none; line-height: 0em}
a.summary-letter {text-decoration: none}
blockquote.indentedblock {margin-right: 0em}
div.display {margin-left: 3.2em}
div.example {margin-left: 3.2em}
-div.lisp {margin-left: 3.2em}
kbd {font-style: oblique}
pre.display {font-family: inherit}
pre.format {font-family: inherit}
@@ -70,6 +73,7 @@
span.nolinebreak {white-space: nowrap}
span.roman {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal}
span.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: normal}
+span:hover a.copiable-anchor {visibility: visible}
ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
BODY {
margin-top: 1em;
@@ -98,7 +102,7 @@
</head>
<body lang="en">
-<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)</h1>
+<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</h1>
@@ -115,8 +119,10 @@
<p>This manual has two versions. One has <a
href="https://latexref.xyz/">separate web pages for each section or
subsection</a>. It's also available as a <a
-href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html">single web page</a> and
-as a <a href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.pdf">pdf</a>.</p>
+href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html">single web page</a> and as
+a <a href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.pdf">pdf</a>. Note that
+there is also a separately-maintained <a
+href="https://latexref.xyz/fr/">French edition</a>.</p>
<p> This document is not official. It has not been reviewed by the
LaTeX maintainers. Our goal is to cover all (non-private) LaTeX
@@ -131,45 +137,21 @@
<!-- End of opening header -->
-<span id="SEC_Overview"></span>
-<h2 class="shortcontents-heading">Short Table of Contents</h2>
-<div class="shortcontents">
-<ul class="no-bullet">
-<li><a id="stoc-About-this-document-1" href="#toc-About-this-document-1">1 About this document</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#toc-Overview-of-LaTeX">2 Overview of LaTeX</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Document-classes-1" href="#toc-Document-classes-1">3 Document classes</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Fonts-1" href="#toc-Fonts-1">4 Fonts</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Layout-1" href="#toc-Layout-1">5 Layout</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Sectioning-1" href="#toc-Sectioning-1">6 Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Cross-references-1" href="#toc-Cross-references-1">7 Cross references</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Environments-1" href="#toc-Environments-1">8 Environments</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Line-breaking-1" href="#toc-Line-breaking-1">9 Line breaking</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Page-breaking-1" href="#toc-Page-breaking-1">10 Page breaking</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Footnotes-1" href="#toc-Footnotes-1">11 Footnotes</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Definitions-1" href="#toc-Definitions-1">12 Definitions</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Counters-1" href="#toc-Counters-1">13 Counters</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Lengths-1" href="#toc-Lengths-1">14 Lengths</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Making-paragraphs-1" href="#toc-Making-paragraphs-1">15 Making paragraphs</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Math-formulas-1" href="#toc-Math-formulas-1">16 Math formulas</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Modes-1" href="#toc-Modes-1">17 Modes</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Page-styles-1" href="#toc-Page-styles-1">18 Page styles</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Spaces-1" href="#toc-Spaces-1">19 Spaces</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Boxes-1" href="#toc-Boxes-1">20 Boxes</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Color-1" href="#toc-Color-1">21 Color</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Graphics-1" href="#toc-Graphics-1">22 Graphics</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Special-insertions-1" href="#toc-Special-insertions-1">23 Special insertions</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#toc-Splitting-the-input-1">24 Splitting the input</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#toc-Front_002fback-matter-1">25 Front/back matter</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Letters-1" href="#toc-Letters-1">26 Letters</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Input_002foutput-1" href="#toc-Input_002foutput-1">27 Input/output</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Command-line-interface-1" href="#toc-Command-line-interface-1">28 Command line interface</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Document-templates-1" href="#toc-Document-templates-1">Appendix A Document templates</a></li>
-<li><a id="stoc-Index-1" href="#toc-Index-1" rel="index">Index</a></li>
-</ul>
+
+
+<div class="top" id="Top">
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="n" rel="next">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="https://tug.org/texinfohtml/" accesskey="u" rel="up">(dir)</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
+<span id="LaTeX2e_003a-An-unofficial-reference-manual"></span><h1 class="top">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
-<span id="SEC_Contents"></span>
+<p>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
+January 2022) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+</p>
+
+<div class="Contents_element" id="SEC_Contents">
<h2 class="contents-heading">Table of Contents</h2>
<div class="contents">
@@ -223,7 +205,10 @@
<li><a id="toc-_005craggedbottom-1" href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">5.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Page-layout-parameters-1" href="#Page-layout-parameters">5.5 Page layout parameters</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch-1" href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">5.6 <code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-Floats-1" href="#Floats">5.7 Floats</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Floats-1" href="#Floats">5.7 Floats</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccaption-1" href="#g_t_005ccaption">5.7.1 <code>\caption</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Sectioning-1" href="#Sectioning">6 Sectioning</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
@@ -314,7 +299,10 @@
<li><a id="toc-_005cbibitem-1" href="#g_t_005cbibitem">8.24.1 <code>\bibitem</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005ccite-1" href="#g_t_005ccite">8.24.2 <code>\cite</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cnocite-1" href="#g_t_005cnocite">8.24.3 <code>\nocite</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-Using-BibTeX-1" href="#Using-BibTeX">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Using-BibTeX-1" href="#Using-BibTeX">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a id="toc-BibTeX-error-messages-1" href="#BibTeX-error-messages">8.24.4.1 BibTeX error messages</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-theorem-1" href="#theorem">8.25 <code>theorem</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-titlepage-1" href="#titlepage">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></a></li>
@@ -356,7 +344,10 @@
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Definitions-1" href="#Definitions">12 Definitions</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a id="toc-Control-sequence_002c-control-word-and-control-symbol" href="#Control-sequences">12.1.1 Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cprovidecommand-1" href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">12.2 <code>\providecommand</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1" href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">12.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">12.4 <code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
@@ -425,13 +416,14 @@
<li><a id="toc-_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom-1" href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">16.6.2 <code>\phantom</code> & <code>\vphantom</code> & <code>\hphantom</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cmathstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cmathstrut">16.6.3 <code>\mathstrut</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-Math-miscellany-1" href="#Math-miscellany">16.7 Math miscellany</a>
+ <li><a id="toc-Math-styles-1" href="#Math-styles">16.7 Math styles</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Math-miscellany-1" href="#Math-miscellany">16.8 Math miscellany</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon" href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">16.7.1 Colon character <code>:</code> & <code>\colon</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_002a-1" href="#g_t_005c_002a">16.7.2 <code>\*</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfrac-1" href="#g_t_005cfrac">16.7.3 <code>\frac</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csqrt-1" href="#g_t_005csqrt">16.7.4 <code>\sqrt</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cstackrel-1" href="#g_t_005cstackrel">16.7.5 <code>\stackrel</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon" href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">16.8.1 Colon character <code>:</code> & <code>\colon</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_002a-1" href="#g_t_005c_002a">16.8.2 <code>\*</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfrac-1" href="#g_t_005cfrac">16.8.3 <code>\frac</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csqrt-1" href="#g_t_005csqrt">16.8.4 <code>\sqrt</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cstackrel-1" href="#g_t_005cstackrel">16.8.5 <code>\stackrel</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Modes-1" href="#Modes">17 Modes</a>
@@ -454,7 +446,7 @@
<li><a id="toc-_005cspacefactor-1" href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">19.5 <code>\spacefactor</code></a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a id="toc-_005c_0040-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040">19.5.1 <code>\@</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">19.5.2 <code>\frenchspacing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing">19.5.2 <code>\frenchspacing</code> & <code>\nonfrenchspacing</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005cnormalsfcodes-1" href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">19.5.3 <code>\normalsfcodes</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Backslash_002dspace_002c-_005c-" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">19.6 Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></a></li>
@@ -531,7 +523,7 @@
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#Front_002fback-matter">25 Front/back matter</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-Table-of-contents-etc_002e-1" href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">25.1 Table of contents etc.</a>
+ <li><a id="toc-Table-of-contents_002c-list-of-figures_002c-list-of-tables" href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">25.1 Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a id="toc-_005c_0040dottedtocline-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040dottedtocline">25.1.1 <code>\@dottedtocline</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-_005caddcontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">25.1.2 <code>\addcontentsline</code></a></li>
@@ -542,9 +534,10 @@
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Indexes-1" href="#Indexes">25.2 Indexes</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cindex-1" href="#g_t_005cindex">25.2.1 <code>\index</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-makeindex-1" href="#makeindex">25.2.2 <code>makeindex</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cprintindex-1" href="#g_t_005cprintindex">25.2.3 <code>\printindex</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Produce-the-index-manually-1" href="#Produce-the-index-manually">25.2.1 Produce the index manually</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cindex-1" href="#g_t_005cindex">25.2.2 <code>\index</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-makeindex-1" href="#makeindex">25.2.3 <code>makeindex</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cprintindex-1" href="#g_t_005cprintindex">25.2.4 <code>\printindex</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Glossaries-1" href="#Glossaries">25.3 Glossaries</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
@@ -597,86 +590,50 @@
<li><a id="toc-Index-1" href="#Index" rel="index">Index</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
+</div>
+<div class="Overview_element" id="SEC_Overview">
+<h2 class="shortcontents-heading">Short Table of Contents</h2>
-
-
-
-<span id="Top"></span><div class="header">
-<p>
-Next: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="n" rel="next">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="https://tug.org/texinfohtml/" accesskey="u" rel="up">(dir)</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+<div class="shortcontents">
+<ul class="no-bullet">
+<li><a id="stoc-About-this-document-1" href="#toc-About-this-document-1">1 About this document</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#toc-Overview-of-LaTeX">2 Overview of LaTeX</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Document-classes-1" href="#toc-Document-classes-1">3 Document classes</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Fonts-1" href="#toc-Fonts-1">4 Fonts</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Layout-1" href="#toc-Layout-1">5 Layout</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Sectioning-1" href="#toc-Sectioning-1">6 Sectioning</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Cross-references-1" href="#toc-Cross-references-1">7 Cross references</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Environments-1" href="#toc-Environments-1">8 Environments</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Line-breaking-1" href="#toc-Line-breaking-1">9 Line breaking</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Page-breaking-1" href="#toc-Page-breaking-1">10 Page breaking</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Footnotes-1" href="#toc-Footnotes-1">11 Footnotes</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Definitions-1" href="#toc-Definitions-1">12 Definitions</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Counters-1" href="#toc-Counters-1">13 Counters</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Lengths-1" href="#toc-Lengths-1">14 Lengths</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Making-paragraphs-1" href="#toc-Making-paragraphs-1">15 Making paragraphs</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Math-formulas-1" href="#toc-Math-formulas-1">16 Math formulas</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Modes-1" href="#toc-Modes-1">17 Modes</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Page-styles-1" href="#toc-Page-styles-1">18 Page styles</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Spaces-1" href="#toc-Spaces-1">19 Spaces</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Boxes-1" href="#toc-Boxes-1">20 Boxes</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Color-1" href="#toc-Color-1">21 Color</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Graphics-1" href="#toc-Graphics-1">22 Graphics</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Special-insertions-1" href="#toc-Special-insertions-1">23 Special insertions</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#toc-Splitting-the-input-1">24 Splitting the input</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#toc-Front_002fback-matter-1">25 Front/back matter</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Letters-1" href="#toc-Letters-1">26 Letters</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Input_002foutput-1" href="#toc-Input_002foutput-1">27 Input/output</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Command-line-interface-1" href="#toc-Command-line-interface-1">28 Command line interface</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Document-templates-1" href="#toc-Document-templates-1">Appendix A Document templates</a></li>
+<li><a id="stoc-Index-1" href="#toc-Index-1" rel="index">Index</a></li>
+</ul>
</div>
-<span id="LaTeX2e_003a-An-unofficial-reference-manual"></span><h1 class="top">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
-
-<p>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-July 2021) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
-</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="1">About this document</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bug reporting, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Overview" accesskey="2">Overview</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">What is LaTeX?
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="3">Document classes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Some of the various classes available.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="4">Fonts</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Layout" accesskey="5">Layout</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Controlling the page layout.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="6">Sectioning</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="7">Cross references</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Automatic referencing.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Environments" accesskey="8">Environments</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Such as enumerate & itemize.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="9">Line breaking</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Influencing line breaks.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Influencing page breaks.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">How to produce footnotes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Definitions">Definitions</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define your own commands, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Internal counters used by LaTeX.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The length commands.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Paragraph commands.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">How to create mathematical formulas.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Various styles of page layout.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Spaces">Spaces</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Horizontal and vertical space.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Making boxes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Color">Color</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Defining and using colors.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Importing graphics from outside LaTeX.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Special-insertions">Special insertions</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting reserved and special characters.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Dealing with big files by splitting.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The <code>letter</code> class.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Input_002foutput">Input/output</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">User interaction.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Command-line-interface">Command line interface</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Common command-line options.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Document-templates">Document templates</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Starter templates for various document classes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Index" rel="index">Index</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">General index.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
-
+</div>
<hr>
-<span id="About-this-document"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="chapter" id="About-this-document">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="n" rel="next">Overview</a>, Previous: <a href="#Top" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Top</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="n" rel="next">Overview of LaTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#Top" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="About-this-document-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">1 About this document</h2>
@@ -683,7 +640,7 @@
<span id="index-home-page-for-manual"></span>
<p>This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX
-typesetting program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>).
+typesetting program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>).
</p>
<p>This document’s home page is <a href="https://latexref.xyz">https://latexref.xyz</a>; it has
separate web pages for each topic. Alternatively.
@@ -714,22 +671,19 @@
are a few introductions.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document"></span>
-<p>Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+<dt id='index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a><a href='#index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document"></span>
-<p>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+<dt id='index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a><a href='#index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-lshort-document"></span>
-<p>A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
+<dt id='index-lshort-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a><a href='#index-lshort-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><a href="https://tug.org/begin.html">https://tug.org/begin.html</a></dt>
+<dt><span><a href="https://tug.org/begin.html">https://tug.org/begin.html</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
references.
</p>
@@ -738,9 +692,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="Overview"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Overview">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Document classes</a>, Previous: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Document classes</a>, Previous: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Overview-of-LaTeX"></span><h2 class="chapter">2 Overview of LaTeX</h2>
@@ -779,26 +735,21 @@
produce the logo with <code>\LaTeX</code>. Where use of the logo is not
sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘<samp>LaTeX</samp>’.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="1">Starting and ending</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The standard beginning and end of a document.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="2">Output files</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Files produced.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="3">TeX engines</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Programs that can compile TeX and LaTeX.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="4">LaTeX command syntax</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">General syntax of LaTeX commands.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Environment" accesskey="5">Environment</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">An area of the source with distinct behavior.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="6">CTAN</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Our repository.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="1">Starting and ending</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Output-files" accesskey="2">Output files</a></li>
+<li><a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="3">TeX engines</a></li>
+<li><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="4">LaTeX command syntax</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Environment" accesskey="5">Environment</a></li>
+<li><a href="#CTAN" accesskey="6">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Starting-and-ending"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="Starting-and-ending">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="n" rel="next">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="n" rel="next">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Starting-and-ending-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.1 Starting and ending</h3>
@@ -833,10 +784,10 @@
<p>The <code>\begin{document}</code>, <code>\end{document}</code> pair defines an
<span id="index-environment"></span>
<em>environment</em>; the ‘<samp>document</samp>’ environment (and no others) is
-required in all LaTeX documents (see <a href="#document">document</a>). LaTeX make
+required in all LaTeX documents (see <a href="#document"><code>document</code></a>). LaTeX make
available to you many environments that are documented here
(see <a href="#Environments">Environments</a>). Many more are available to you from external
-packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a>).
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>).
</p>
<p>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
a LaTeX input file.
@@ -843,9 +794,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Output-files"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Output-files">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="n" rel="next">TeX engines</a>, Previous: <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Starting and ending</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="n" rel="next">TeX engines</a>, Previous: <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Starting and ending</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Output-files-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.2 Output files</h3>
@@ -853,9 +806,8 @@
The main output file’s name ends in either <samp>.dvi</samp> or <samp>.pdf</samp>.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>.dvi</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_002edvi-file"></span>
-<span id="index-latex-command"></span>
+<dt id='index-_002edvi-file'><span><code>.dvi</code><a href='#index-_002edvi-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-latex-command"></span>
<span id="index-xdvi-command"></span>
<span id="index-dvips-command"></span>
<span id="index-dvipdfmx-command"></span>
@@ -870,9 +822,8 @@
available (<a href="https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>.pdf</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_002epdf-file"></span>
-<span id="index-pdfTeX"></span>
+<dt id='index-_002epdf-file'><span><code>.pdf</code><a href='#index-_002epdf-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-pdfTeX"></span>
<span id="index-pdflatex-command"></span>
<span id="output-files-pdf"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>pdflatex</code>,
among other commands (see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), then the main output is
@@ -885,9 +836,8 @@
<p>LaTeX always produces at least two additional files.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>.log</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-transcript-file"></span>
-<span id="index-log-file"></span>
+<dt id='index-transcript-file'><span><code>.log</code><a href='#index-transcript-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-log-file"></span>
<span id="index-_002elog-file"></span>
<span id="output-files-log"></span><p>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
@@ -894,9 +844,8 @@
additional information for any errors.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>.aux</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-auxiliary-file"></span>
-<span id="index-_002eaux-file"></span>
+<dt id='index-auxiliary-file'><span><code>.aux</code><a href='#index-auxiliary-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_002eaux-file"></span>
<span id="index-cross-references_002c-resolving"></span>
<span id="index-forward-references_002c-resolving"></span>
<span id="index-references_002c-resolving-forward"></span>
@@ -924,14 +873,16 @@
<p>LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
ending. These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
-<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). A particular class may create others; the list is
+<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>). A particular class may create others; the list is
open-ended.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="TeX-engines"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="TeX-engines">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="n" rel="next">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Previous: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="n" rel="next">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Previous: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="TeX-engines-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.3 TeX engines</h3>
@@ -947,7 +898,7 @@
<span id="index-format-files_002c-TeX"></span>
<span id="index-_002efmt-file"></span>
<p>LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX
-program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>). Such a set of commands is called a
+program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>). Such a set of commands is called a
<em>format</em>, and is embodied in a binary <code>.fmt</code> file, which can
be read much more quickly than the corresponding TeX source.
</p>
@@ -955,12 +906,8 @@
commonly available (see also <a href="#Command-line-interface">Command line interface</a>).
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>latex</code>
-<span id="index-latex"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>pdflatex</code>
-<span id="index-pdflatex"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-latex'><span><code>latex</code><a href='#index-latex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-pdflatex'><span><code>pdflatex</code><a href='#index-pdflatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-etex-command"></span>
<span id="index-pdfTeX-engine"></span>
<span id="index-e_002dTeX"></span>
@@ -982,9 +929,7 @@
assumed to be available in LaTeX.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>lualatex</code>
-<span id="index-lualatex"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-lualatex'><span><code>lualatex</code><a href='#index-lualatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-LuaTeX"></span>
<span id="tex-engines-lualatex"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>lualatex</code>, the
LuaTeX engine is run (<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</a>). This
@@ -995,9 +940,7 @@
There is also <code>dvilualatex</code> to produce a <samp>.dvi</samp> file.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>xelatex</code>
-<span id="index-xelatex"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-xelatex'><span><code>xelatex</code><a href='#index-xelatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-XeTeX"></span>
<span id="index-_002exdv-file"></span>
<span id="index-xdvipdfmx"></span>
@@ -1014,12 +957,8 @@
useful for debugging.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>platex</code>
-<span id="index-platex"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>uplatex</code>
-<span id="index-uplatex"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-platex'><span><code>platex</code><a href='#index-platex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-uplatex'><span><code>uplatex</code><a href='#index-uplatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese and
other languages; the <code>u</code> variant supports Unicode. See
<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</a> and <a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</a>.
@@ -1030,27 +969,13 @@
all of the above:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>dvilualatex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-dvilualatex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>latex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-latex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>lualatex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-lualatex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>pdflatex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-pdflatex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>platex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-platex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>uplatex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-uplatex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>xelatex-dev</code>
-<span id="index-xelatex_002ddev"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-dvilualatex_002ddev'><span><code>dvilualatex-dev</code><a href='#index-dvilualatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-latex_002ddev'><span><code>latex-dev</code><a href='#index-latex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-lualatex_002ddev'><span><code>lualatex-dev</code><a href='#index-lualatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-pdflatex_002ddev'><span><code>pdflatex-dev</code><a href='#index-pdflatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-platex_002ddev'><span><code>platex-dev</code><a href='#index-platex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-uplatex_002ddev'><span><code>uplatex-dev</code><a href='#index-uplatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-xelatex_002ddev'><span><code>xelatex-dev</code><a href='#index-xelatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-release-candidates"></span>
<span id="index-prerelease-testing"></span>
<p>These are candidates for an upcoming LaTeX release. The main
@@ -1076,9 +1001,11 @@
</dl>
<hr>
-<span id="LaTeX-command-syntax"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="LaTeX-command-syntax">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environment</a>, Previous: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">TeX engines</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environment</a>, Previous: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">TeX engines</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="LaTeX-command-syntax-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</h3>
@@ -1131,9 +1058,11 @@
package documentation and other LaTeX manuals.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Environment"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Environment">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="n" rel="next">CTAN</a>, Previous: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="n" rel="next">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>, Previous: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Environment-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.5 Environment</h3>
@@ -1178,9 +1107,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="CTAN"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="CTAN">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="CTAN_003a-The-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network"></span><h3 class="section">2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</h3>
@@ -1216,9 +1147,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Document-classes"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Document-classes">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="n" rel="next">Fonts</a>, Previous: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Overview</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="n" rel="next">Fonts</a>, Previous: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Overview of LaTeX</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Document-classes-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">3 Document classes</h2>
@@ -1240,33 +1174,33 @@
<span id="index-slides-class"></span>
<p>The following document <var>class</var> names are built into LaTeX.
(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
-see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>.)
+see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>.)
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>article</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>article</code></span></dt>
<dd><span id="document-classes-article"></span><p>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>book</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>book</code></span></dt>
<dd><span id="document-classes-book"></span><p>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
(see <a href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>letter</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>letter</code></span></dt>
<dd><span id="document-classes-letter"></span><p>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
(see <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>report</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>report</code></span></dt>
<dd><span id="document-classes-report"></span><p>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>slides</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>slides</code></span></dt>
<dd><span id="document-classes-slides"></span><p>For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The
<code>beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent
-(<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer">https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer</a>). See <a href="#beamer-template">beamer template</a>, for a
+(<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer">https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer</a>). See <a href="#beamer-template"><code>beamer</code> template</a>, for a
small template for a beamer document.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -1274,18 +1208,16 @@
<p>Standard <var>options</var> are described in the next section.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="1">Document class options</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Global options.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="2">Additional packages</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bring in packages.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="3">Class and package construction</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Create new classes and packages.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="1">Document class options</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="2">Additional packages</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="3">Class and package construction</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Document-class-options"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="Document-class-options">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -1326,27 +1258,27 @@
size (these show height by width):
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>a4paper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>a4paper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>a5paper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>a5paper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>b5paper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>b5paper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>executivepaper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>executivepaper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>7.25 by 10.5 inches
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>legalpaper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>legalpaper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>8.5 by 14 inches
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>letterpaper</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>letterpaper</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -1378,42 +1310,36 @@
<p>Miscellaneous other options:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>draft</code></dt>
-<dt><code>final</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-black-boxes_002c-omitting"></span>
-<p>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
+<dt id='index-black-boxes_002c-omitting'><span><code>draft</code><a href='#index-black-boxes_002c-omitting' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>final</code></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
black box in the margin; default is <code>final</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>fleqn</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-flush-left-equations"></span>
-<span id="index-centered-equations"></span>
+<dt id='index-flush-left-equations'><span><code>fleqn</code><a href='#index-flush-left-equations' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-centered-equations"></span>
<span id="index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered"></span>
<p>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>landscape</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-landscape-orientation"></span>
-<span id="index-portrait-orientation"></span>
+<dt id='index-landscape-orientation'><span><code>landscape</code><a href='#index-landscape-orientation' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-portrait-orientation"></span>
<p>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>leqno</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers"></span>
-<span id="index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers"></span>
+<dt id='index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers'><span><code>leqno</code><a href='#index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers"></span>
<span id="index-equation-numbers_002c-left-vs_002e-right"></span>
<p>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>openbib</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-bibliography-format_002c-open"></span>
-<p>Use “open” bibliography format.
+<dt id='index-bibliography-format_002c-open'><span><code>openbib</code><a href='#index-bibliography-format_002c-open' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Use “open” bibliography format.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>titlepage</code></dt>
-<dt><code>notitlepage</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din"></span>
-<p>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+<dt id='index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din'><span><code>titlepage</code><a href='#index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>notitlepage</code></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
<code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
<code>notitlepage</code>.
@@ -1429,15 +1355,14 @@
<span id="index-openright-option"></span>
<span id="index-openany-option"></span>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>onecolumn</code></dt>
-<dt><code>twocolumn</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>onecolumn</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>twocolumn</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <code>onecolumn</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>oneside</code></dt>
-<dt><code>twoside</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cevensidemargin"></span>
-<span id="index-_005coddsidemargin"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005cevensidemargin'><span><code>oneside</code><a href='#index-_005cevensidemargin' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>twoside</code></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005coddsidemargin"></span>
<p>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code>oneside</code>, except
that in the <code>book</code> class the default is <code>twoside</code>.
</p>
@@ -1449,8 +1374,8 @@
<code>\textwidth</code>, and <code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>openright</code></dt>
-<dt><code>openany</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>openright</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>openany</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is
<code>openright</code> for <code>book</code>, and <code>openany</code> for <code>report</code>.
</p></dd>
@@ -1462,7 +1387,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Additional-packages"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Additional-packages">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package construction</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document class options</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -1491,7 +1418,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Class-and-package-construction"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Class-and-package-construction">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Previous: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -1518,7 +1447,7 @@
<p>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <code>@</code> as a
character in command names without having to surround the code
containing that command with <code>\makeatletter</code> and
-<code>\makeatother</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>. This allow
+<code>\makeatother</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>. This allow
you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
@@ -1526,16 +1455,15 @@
<code>\smc at tolist</code>, <code>\smc at fromlist</code>, etc.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="1">Class and package structure</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Layout of the file.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="2">Class and package commands</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">List of commands.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="1">Class and package structure</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="2">Class and package commands</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Class-and-package-structure"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="Class-and-package-structure">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package commands</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -1601,7 +1529,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Class-and-package-commands"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="Class-and-package-commands">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Previous: <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Class and package structure</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -1612,28 +1542,25 @@
<p>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cAtBeginDvi"></span>
-<p>Save in a box register things that are written to the <samp>.dvi</samp> file
+<dt id='index-_005cAtBeginDvi'><span><code>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</code><a href='#index-_005cAtBeginDvi' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Save in a box register things that are written to the <samp>.dvi</samp> file
at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\AtEndOfClass{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\AtEndOfPackage{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cAtEndOfClass"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\AtEndOfClass{<var>code</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cAtEndOfClass'><span><code>\AtEndOfPackage{<var>code</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cAtEndOfClass' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"></span>
<p>Hook to insert <var>code</var> to be executed when LaTeX finishes
processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
multiple times; the <code>code</code> will be executed in the order that you
-called it. See also <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a>.
+called it. See also <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument"><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\CheckCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\CheckCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cCheckCommand"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\CheckCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cCheckCommand'><span><code>\CheckCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cCheckCommand' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"></span>
<span id="index-new-command_002c-check"></span>
-<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) but does
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>) but does
not define <var>cmd</var>; instead it checks that the current definition of
<var>cmd</var> is exactly as given by <var>definition</var> and is or is not
<span id="index-long-command"></span>
@@ -1645,18 +1572,17 @@
redefined this command.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ClassError{<var>class name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PackageError{<var>package name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ClassWarning{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PackageWarning{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ClassWarningNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PackageWarningNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ClassInfo{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PackageInfo{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ClassInfoNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PackageInfoNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cClassError"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cPackageError"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\ClassError{<var>class name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\PackageError{<var>package name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ClassWarning{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\PackageWarning{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ClassWarningNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\PackageWarningNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ClassInfo{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\PackageInfo{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ClassInfoNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cClassError'><span><code>\PackageInfoNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cClassError' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cPackageError"></span>
<span id="index-_005cClassWarning"></span>
<span id="index-_005cPackageWarning"></span>
<span id="index-_005cClassWarningNoLine"></span>
@@ -1685,17 +1611,15 @@
appends a period to the messages.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\CurrentOption</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cCurrentOption"></span>
-<p>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+<dt id='index-_005cCurrentOption'><span><code>\CurrentOption</code><a href='#index-_005cCurrentOption' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
be used within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code>
or <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\DeclareOption{<var>option</var>}{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cDeclareOption"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\DeclareOption{<var>option</var>}{<var>code</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cDeclareOption'><span><code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cDeclareOption' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"></span>
<span id="index-class-options-2"></span>
<span id="index-package-options-1"></span>
<span id="index-options_002c-class"></span>
@@ -1733,14 +1657,13 @@
</pre></div>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\DeclareRobustCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand'><span><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"></span>
<span id="index-new-command_002c-definition"></span>
-<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
within the <var>definition</var> is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
-fragile commands see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>.) Use this command to define new
+fragile commands see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>.) Use this command to define new
robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
robust. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code> these do not give an error if macro
<var>cmd</var> already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
@@ -1752,7 +1675,7 @@
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-etoolbox"></span>
<span id="index-etoolbox-package"></span>
-<p>The <samp>etoolbox</samp> package offers the commands
+<p>The <code>etoolbox</code> package offers the commands
<code>\newrobustcmd</code>, <code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, as well as the commands
<code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>, and the commands
<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code>. These are
@@ -1773,10 +1696,9 @@
</dd>
-<dt><code>\IfFileExists{<var>filename</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\InputIfFileExists{<var>filename</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cIfFileExists"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cInputIfFileExists"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\IfFileExists{<var>filename</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cIfFileExists'><span><code>\InputIfFileExists{<var>filename</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cIfFileExists' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cInputIfFileExists"></span>
<p>Execute <var>true code</var> if LaTeX finds the file <samp><var>file
name</var></samp> or <var>false code</var> otherwise. In the first case it executing
<var>true code</var> and then inputs the file. Thus the command
@@ -1795,13 +1717,12 @@
code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code>. If you ask for a filename without a
<code>.tex</code> extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by
appending the <code>.tex</code>; for more on how LaTeX handles file
-extensions see <a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a>.
+extensions see <a href="#g_t_005cinput"><code>\input</code></a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\LoadClassWithOptions{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cLoadClass"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cLoadClass'><span><code>\LoadClassWithOptions{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code><a href='#index-_005cLoadClass' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"></span>
<p>Load a class, as with <code>\documentclass[<var>options
list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release info</var>]</code>. An example is
<code>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</code>.
@@ -1827,9 +1748,8 @@
<code>article</code> class, without having to track which options were passed.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ExecuteOptions{<var>options-list</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cExecuteOptions"></span>
-<p>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
+<dt id='index-_005cExecuteOptions'><span><code>\ExecuteOptions{<var>options-list</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cExecuteOptions' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
executes the command <code>\ds@<var>option</var></code>. If this command is not
defined then that option is silently ignored.
</p>
@@ -1839,9 +1759,8 @@
<code>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\NeedsTeXFormat{<var>format</var>}[<var>format date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat"></span>
-<p>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+<dt id='index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat'><span><code>\NeedsTeXFormat{<var>format</var>}[<var>format date</var>]</code><a href='#index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
<code>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</code>. When a document using that class is
processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
@@ -1861,18 +1780,16 @@
</pre></div>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\OptionNotUsed</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cOptionNotUsed"></span>
-<p>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+<dt id='index-_005cOptionNotUsed'><span><code>\OptionNotUsed</code><a href='#index-_005cOptionNotUsed' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code> or
<code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\PassOptionsToClass{<var>option list</var>}{<var>class name</var>}</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>option list</var>}{<var>package name</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cPassOptionsToClass"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\PassOptionsToClass{<var>option list</var>}{<var>class name</var>}</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cPassOptionsToClass'><span><code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>option list</var>}{<var>package name</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cPassOptionsToClass' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"></span>
<p>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <var>option list</var> to the
options used by any future <code>\RequirePackage</code> or <code>\usepackage</code>
command for package <var>package name</var> or the class <var>class name</var>.
@@ -1911,10 +1828,9 @@
<code>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ProcessOptions</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ProcessOptions*<var>\@options</var></code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cProcessOptions"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\ProcessOptions</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cProcessOptions'><span><code>\ProcessOptions*<var>\@options</var></code><a href='#index-_005cProcessOptions' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"></span>
<p>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
in the class file as <code>\ProcessOptions\relax</code> (because of the
existence of the starred command).
@@ -1953,12 +1869,11 @@
means that the global options are processed first.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cProvidesClass"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cProvidesPackage"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cProvidesClass'><span><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code><a href='#index-_005cProvidesClass' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cProvidesPackage"></span>
<p>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
the log file.
</p>
@@ -1991,9 +1906,8 @@
include a date, and class users almost never do.)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ProvidesFile{<var>filename</var>}[<var>additional information</var>]</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cProvidesFile"></span>
-<p>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+<dt id='index-_005cProvidesFile'><span><code>\ProvidesFile{<var>filename</var>}[<var>additional information</var>]</code><a href='#index-_005cProvidesFile' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
file and you get in the log a string like <code>File: test.config
2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</code> for <var>filename</var> equal to
@@ -2001,10 +1915,9 @@
‘<samp>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dt><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cRequirePackage"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"></span>
+<dt><span><code>\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cRequirePackage'><span><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code><a href='#index-_005cRequirePackage' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"></span>
<p>Load a package, like the command <code>\usepackage</code> (see <a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a>). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
these commands over Plain TeX’s <code>\input</code>; see the Class
Guide. An example is
@@ -2034,9 +1947,13 @@
<hr>
-<span id="Fonts"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Fonts">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="n" rel="next">Layout</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document classes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="n" rel="next">Layout</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document classes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Fonts-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">4 Fonts</h2>
<span id="Typefaces"></span>
@@ -2079,20 +1996,17 @@
<p>More information is also available from the TeX Users Group, at
<a href="https://www.tug.org/fonts/">https://www.tug.org/fonts/</a>.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="1">fontenc package</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Encoding of the font.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="2">Font styles</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Select roman, italics, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="3">Font sizes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Select point size.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands" accesskey="4">Low-level font commands</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Select encoding, family, series, shape.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="1"><code>fontenc</code> package</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="2">Font styles</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="3">Font sizes</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands" accesskey="4">Low-level font commands</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="fontenc-package"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="fontenc-package">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="n" rel="next">Font styles</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -2119,16 +2033,19 @@
<p>Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the
character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.
</p>
+<span id="index-package_002c-fontspec"></span>
+<span id="index-fontspec-package"></span>
+
<p>This package only applies if you use the <code>pdflatex</code> engine
(see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>). If you use the <code>xelatex</code> or
-<code>lualatex</code> engine then instead use the <samp>fontspec</samp> package.
+<code>lualatex</code> engine then instead use the <code>fontspec</code> package.
</p>
<p>TeX’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use
-<code>\accent</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005caccent">\accent</a>) but this disables hyphenation. TeX
+<code>\accent</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005caccent"><code>\accent</code></a>) but this disables hyphenation. TeX
users have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using
-<code>pdflatex</code> then this in the preamble
+<code>pdflatex</code> then put this in the preamble
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -2148,7 +2065,7 @@
<p>If you are using an encoding such as <code>T1</code> and the characters appear
blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped,
sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a
-package such as <samp>lmodern</samp> or <samp>cm-super</samp> to get a font that
+package such as <code>lmodern</code> or <code>cm-super</code> to get a font that
extends LaTeX’s default using vector fonts.
</p>
<p>For each <var>font_encoding</var> given as an option but not already
@@ -2159,21 +2076,21 @@
<p>These are the common values for <var>font_encoding</var>.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>OT1</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>OT1</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>The original encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English characters.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>OMS, OML</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>OMS, OML</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Math symbols and math letters encoding.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>T1</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>T1</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>TeX text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the Users
Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most European
accented characters. The most common option for this package.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>TS1</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>TS1</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Text Companion encoding.
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -2202,36 +2119,26 @@
for one encoding but the current encoding is different then the command
is not in effect.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding" accesskey="1">\DeclareFontEncoding</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define an encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="2">\DeclareTextAccent</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define an accent in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="3">\DeclareTextAccentDefault</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Fallback for using an accent in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="4">\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">New encoding-specific command.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="5">\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Fallback for encoding-specific commands.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="6">\DeclareTextComposite</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Directly access an accented glyph, in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="7">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Run code in slot, in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="8">\DeclareTextSymbol</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a symbol in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="9">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Fallback for a symbol in the encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding">\LastDeclaredEncoding</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Save most recently declared encoding.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Temporarily switch to another encoding.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding" accesskey="1"><code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="2"><code>\DeclareTextAccent</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="3"><code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="4"><code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="5"><code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="6"><code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="7"><code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="8"><code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="9"><code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding"><code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent"><code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextAccent</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextAccent</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.1 <code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code></h4>
@@ -2248,7 +2155,7 @@
<p>Declare the font encoding <var>encoding</var>. It also saves the value of
<var>encoding</var> in <code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding">\LastDeclaredEncoding</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding"><code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The file <samp>t1enc.def</samp> contains this line (followed by many others).
</p>
@@ -2258,7 +2165,7 @@
<p>The <var>text-settings</var> are the commands that LaTeX will run every
time it switches from one encoding to another with the
-<code>\selectfont</code> or <code>\fontencoding</code> command. The
+<code>\selectfont</code> and <code>\fontencoding</code> commands. The
<var>math-settings</var> are the commands that LaTeX will use whenever the
font is accessed as a math alphabet.
</p>
@@ -2279,9 +2186,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextAccentDefault</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareFontEncoding</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.2 <code>\DeclareTextAccent</code></h4>
@@ -2298,12 +2207,15 @@
<p>Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding
<var>encoding</var> at the location <var>slot</var>.
</p>
+<span id="index-slot_002c-font"></span>
+<p>A <em>slot</em> is the number identifying a glyph within a font.
+</p>
<p>This line from <samp>t1enc.def</samp> declares that to make a circumflex
accent as in <code>\^A</code>, the system will put the accent in slot 2
over the ‘<samp>A</samp>’ character, which is represented in ASCII as 65.
(This holds unless there is a relevant <code>DeclareTextComposite</code> or
<code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code> declaration;
-see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite">\DeclareTextComposite</a>.)
+see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite"><code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></a>.)
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}
@@ -2315,9 +2227,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextAccent</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextAccent</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.3 <code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></h4>
@@ -2328,10 +2242,10 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextAccentDefault{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>If there is an encoding-specific accent command <var>cmd</var> but there is
+<p>If there is an encoding-specific accent command \<var>cmd</var> but there is
no associated <code>\DeclareTextAccent</code> for that encoding then this
command will pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for
<var>encoding</var>.
@@ -2347,11 +2261,11 @@
definition for that accent then LaTeX will use the definition from
<code>OT1</code>
</p>
-<p>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent</a>).
+<p>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent"><code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{<var>cmd</var>}
- {\UseTextAccent{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>cmd</var>}{#1}}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{\<var>cmd</var>}
+ {\UseTextAccent{<var>encoding</var>}{\<var>cmd</var>}{#1}}
</pre></div>
<p>Note that <code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code> works for any one-argument
@@ -2359,37 +2273,38 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextAccentDefault</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.4 <code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></h4>
<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextCommand"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault"></span>
<span id="index-_005cProvideTextCommand"></span>
<p>Synopsis, one of:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
-\DeclareTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn}</var>
-\DeclareTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn}</var>
+\DeclareTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>or one of:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\ProvideTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
-\ProvideTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\ProvideTextCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example">\ProvideTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Define the command <var>cmd</var>, which will be specific to one encoding.
-The command name <var>cmd</var> must begin with a backslash, \. These
-commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining <code>cmd</code> does
-not cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code
-in <var>defn</var> is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<p>Define the command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>, which will be specific to one
+encoding. The command name <var>cmd</var> must be preceded by a backslash,
+<code>\</code>. These commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining
+\<var>cmd</var> does not cause an error. The defined command will be robust
+even if the code in <var>defn</var> is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>For example, the file <samp>t1enc.def</samp> contains this line.
</p>
@@ -2409,32 +2324,35 @@
‘<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding
OT1</samp>’.
</p>
+<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbol"></span>
<p>The <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code> variant does the same, except that it
-does nothing if <var>cmd</var> is already defined. The
+does nothing if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is already defined. The
<code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code> command is faster than this one for simple
-slot-to-glyph association (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol">\DeclareTextSymbol</a>)
+slot-to-glyph association (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol"><code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a>)
</p>
-<p>The optional <var>nargs</var> and <var>optargsdefault</var> arguments play the
-same role here as in <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>). Briefly, <var>nargs</var> is an integer from 0 to 9
-specifying the number of arguments that the defined command <code>cmd</code>
-takes. This number includes any optional argument. Omitting this
-argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that <var>cmd</var> will have
-no arguments. And, if <var>optargsdefault</var> is present then the first
-argument of <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value
-<var>optargdefault</var> (which may be the empty string). If
-<var>optargsdefault</var> is not present then <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not take
-an optional argument.
+<p>The optional <var>nargs</var> and <var>optargdefault</var> arguments play the same
+role here as in <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>). Briefly, <var>nargs</var> is an integer from 0 to 9
+specifying the number of arguments that the defined command
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> takes. This number includes any optional argument.
+Omitting this argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> will have no arguments. And, if <var>optargdefault</var>
+is present then the first argument of <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional,
+with default value <var>optargdefault</var> (which may be the empty string).
+If <var>optargdefault</var> is not present then <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not
+take an optional argument.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextComposite</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault-"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.5 <code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></h4>
<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextCommand-1"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-1"></span>
+<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault"></span>
<span id="index-_005cProvideTextCommand-1"></span>
<span id="index-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault"></span>
@@ -2441,18 +2359,18 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>or:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\ProvideTextCommandDefault{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example">\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Give a default definition for <var>cmd</var>, for when that command is not
-defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only use
-encodings known to be available.
+<p>Give a default definition for <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>, for when that command
+is not defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should
+only use encodings known to be available.
</p>
<p>This makes <code>\copyright</code> available.
</p>
@@ -2469,14 +2387,16 @@
<p>As with the related non-default commands, the
<code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault</code> has exactly the same behavior as
<code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> except that it does nothing if
-<var>cmd</var> is already defined (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand</a>). So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is already defined (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand"><code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a>). So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks
that other packages can improve upon.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.6 <code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></h4>
@@ -2486,7 +2406,7 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextComposite{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>simple_object</var>}{<var>slot</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextComposite{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>simple_object</var>}{<var>slot</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an
@@ -2494,17 +2414,17 @@
</p>
<p>This line from <samp>t1enc.def</samp> means that <code>\^o</code> will cause
LaTeX to typeset lowercase ‘<samp>o</samp>’ by taking the character
-directly from location 224 in the font.
+directly from slot 224 in the font.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
</pre></div>
-<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package">fontenc package</a>, for a list of common encodings. The
+<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package"><code>fontenc</code> package</a>, for a list of common encodings. The
<var>simple_object</var> should be a single character or a single command.
The <var>slot</var> argument is usually a positive integer represented in
decimal (although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally
-<var>cmd</var> has already been declared for this encoding, either with
+\<var>cmd</var> has already been declared for this encoding, either with
<code>\DeclareTextAccent</code> or with a one-argument
<code>\DeclareTextCommand</code>. In <samp>t1enc.def</samp>, the above line follows
the <code>\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}</code> command.
@@ -2511,9 +2431,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextSymbol</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextComposite</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.7 <code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></h4>
@@ -2523,11 +2445,11 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>arg</var>}{<var>code</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>arg</var>}{<var>code</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>A more general version of <code>\DeclareTextComposite</code> that runs
-arbitrary code with <var>cmd</var>.
+arbitrary code with <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>.
</p>
<p>This allows accents on ‘<samp>i</samp>’ to act like accents on dotless i,
<code>\i</code>.
@@ -2536,25 +2458,27 @@
<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
</pre></div>
-<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package">fontenc package</a>, for a list of common encodings. Normally
-<var>cmd</var> will have already been declared with <code>\DeclareTextAccent</code>
+<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package"><code>fontenc</code> package</a>, for a list of common encodings. Normally
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> will have already been declared with <code>\DeclareTextAccent</code>
or as a one argument <code>\DeclareTextCommand</code>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.8 <code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></h4>
<span id="index-symbol_002c-defining"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbol"></span>
+<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbol-1"></span>
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextSymbol{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>slot</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextSymbol{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>slot</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Define a symbol in the encoding <var>encoding</var> at the location
@@ -2569,39 +2493,41 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The command <code>\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char
-19}</code> has the same effect but is slower (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">\DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand</a>).
+19}</code> has the same effect but is slower (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand"><code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a>).
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package">fontenc package</a>, for a list of common encodings. The <var>slot</var>
+<p>See <a href="#fontenc-package"><code>fontenc</code> package</a>, for a list of common encodings. The <var>slot</var>
can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in <code>'023</code>), or
hexadecimal (as in <code>"13</code>), although decimal has the advantage that
single quote or double quote could be redefined by another package.
</p>
-<p>If <var>cmd</var> has already been defined then <code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code>
-does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the
-transcript file.
+<p>If <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> has already been defined then
+<code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code> does not give an error but it does log the
+redefinition in the transcript file.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding" accesskey="n" rel="next">\LastDeclaredEncoding</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextSymbol</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.9 <code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></h4>
<span id="index-accents_002c-defining-5"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbol-1"></span>
+<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbol-2"></span>
<span id="index-_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault"></span>
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>encoding</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>If there is an encoding-specific symbol command <var>cmd</var> but there is no
-associated <code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code> for that encoding, then this command
-will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for
-<var>encoding</var>.
+<p>If there is an encoding-specific symbol command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> but
+there is no associated <code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code> for that encoding, then
+this command will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as
+described for <var>encoding</var>.
</p>
<p>For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning for
<code>\textdollar</code> then use the one from <code>OT1</code>, declare this.
@@ -2610,11 +2536,11 @@
<pre class="example">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1}
</pre></div>
-<p>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent</a>).
+<p>That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent"><code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault{<var>cmd</var>}
- {\UseTextSymbol{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>cmd</var>}}
+<pre class="example">\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\<var>cmd</var>}
+ {\UseTextSymbol{<var>encoding</var>}{\<var>cmd</var>}}
</pre></div>
<p>Note that <code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code> can be used to define a
@@ -2622,9 +2548,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent" accesskey="n" rel="next">\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.10 <code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></h4>
@@ -2638,7 +2566,7 @@
<p>Get the name of the most recently declared encoding. The
<code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code> command stores the name so that it can be
-retrieved with this command (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding">\DeclareFontEncoding</a>).
+retrieved with this command (see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding"><code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This relies on <code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code> rather than give the
name of the encoding explicitly.
@@ -2650,9 +2578,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\LastDeclaredEncoding</a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up">fontenc package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a>, Up: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>fontenc</code> package</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">4.1.11 <code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></h4>
@@ -2662,13 +2592,13 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\UseTextSymbol{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>cmd</var>}
+<pre class="example">\UseTextSymbol{<var>encoding</var>}{\<var>cmd</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>or:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\UseTextAccent{<var>encoding</var>}{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre class="example">\UseTextAccent{<var>encoding</var>}{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding.
@@ -2707,9 +2637,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Font-styles"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Font-styles">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Font sizes</a>, Previous: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="p" rel="prev">fontenc package</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Font sizes</a>, Previous: <a href="#fontenc-package" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>fontenc</code> package</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Font-styles-1"></span><h3 class="section">4.2 Font styles</h3>
@@ -2737,7 +2670,7 @@
<span id="index-_005cnocorrlist"></span>
<span id="index-_005cnocorr"></span>
<p>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
-corrections if needed (see <a href="#g_t_005c_002f">\/</a>). Specifically, they insert the
+corrections if needed (see <a href="#g_t_005c_002f"><code>\/</code></a>). Specifically, they insert the
italic correction unless the following character is in the list
<code>\nocorrlist</code>, which by default consists of period and comma.
To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
@@ -2745,63 +2678,53 @@
<code>\textit{\nocorr text}</code> or <code>\textsc{text \nocorr}</code>.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextrm"></span>
-<span id="index-_005crmfamily"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextrm'><span><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextrm' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005crmfamily"></span>
<p>Roman.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextit"></span>
-<span id="index-_005citshape"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextit'><span><code>\textit (\itshape)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextit' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005citshape"></span>
<p>Italics.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextmd"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cmdseries"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextmd'><span><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextmd' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cmdseries"></span>
<p>Medium weight (default).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextbf"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cbfseries"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextbf'><span><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextbf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cbfseries"></span>
<p>Boldface.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextup"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cupshape"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextup'><span><code>\textup (\upshape)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextup' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cupshape"></span>
<p>Upright (default).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextsl"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cslshape"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextsl'><span><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextsl' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cslshape"></span>
<p>Slanted.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextsf"></span>
-<span id="index-_005csffamily"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextsf'><span><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextsf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005csffamily"></span>
<p>Sans serif.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextsc"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cscshape"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextsc'><span><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextsc' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cscshape"></span>
<p>Small caps.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctexttt"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cttfamily"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctexttt'><span><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code><a href='#index-_005ctexttt' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cttfamily"></span>
<p>Typewriter.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005ctextnormal"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cnormalfont"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextnormal'><span><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code><a href='#index-_005ctextnormal' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cnormalfont"></span>
<p>Main document font.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -2827,60 +2750,44 @@
needed.)
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\bf</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbf"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbf'><span><code>\bf</code><a href='#index-_005cbf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-bold-font"></span>
<p>Switch to bold face.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\cal</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccal"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccal'><span><code>\cal</code><a href='#index-_005ccal' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-script-letters-for-math"></span>
<span id="index-calligraphic-letters-for-math"></span>
<p>Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\it</code>
-<span id="index-_005cit"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cit'><span><code>\it</code><a href='#index-_005cit' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-italic-font"></span>
<p>Italics.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\rm</code>
-<span id="index-_005crm"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005crm'><span><code>\rm</code><a href='#index-_005crm' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-roman-font"></span>
<p>Roman.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\sc</code>
-<span id="index-_005csc"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005csc'><span><code>\sc</code><a href='#index-_005csc' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-small-caps-font"></span>
<p>Small caps.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\sf</code>
-<span id="index-_005csf"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005csf'><span><code>\sf</code><a href='#index-_005csf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-sans-serif-font"></span>
<p>Sans serif.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\sl</code>
-<span id="index-_005csl"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005csl'><span><code>\sl</code><a href='#index-_005csl' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-slanted-font"></span>
<span id="index-oblique-font"></span>
<p>Slanted (oblique).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\tt</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctt"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctt'><span><code>\tt</code><a href='#index-_005ctt' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-typewriter-font"></span>
<span id="index-monospace-font"></span>
<span id="index-fixed_002dwidth-font"></span>
@@ -2898,39 +2805,33 @@
typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\mathrm</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathrm"></span>
-<p>Roman, for use in math mode.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathrm'><span><code>\mathrm</code><a href='#index-_005cmathrm' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Roman, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathbf</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathbf"></span>
-<p>Boldface, for use in math mode.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathbf'><span><code>\mathbf</code><a href='#index-_005cmathbf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Boldface, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathsf</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathsf"></span>
-<p>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathsf'><span><code>\mathsf</code><a href='#index-_005cmathsf' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathtt</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathtt"></span>
-<p>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathtt'><span><code>\mathtt</code><a href='#index-_005cmathtt' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathit</code></dt>
-<dt><code>(\mit)</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>\mathit</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>(\mit)</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Italics, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathnormal</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathnormal"></span>
-<p>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathnormal'><span><code>\mathnormal</code><a href='#index-_005cmathnormal' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\mathcal</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cmathcal"></span>
-<p>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+<dt id='index-_005cmathcal'><span><code>\mathcal</code><a href='#index-_005cmathcal' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -2958,7 +2859,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Font-sizes"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Font-sizes">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands" accesskey="n" rel="next">Low-level font commands</a>, Previous: <a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Font styles</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -3013,6 +2916,18 @@
style command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it
in curly braces <code>{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}</code>.
</p>
+<p>Trying to use these commands in math, as with <code>$\small mv^2/2$</code>,
+results in ‘<samp>LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small
+invalid in math mode</samp>’, and the font size doesn’t
+change. To work with a too-large formula, often the best option is to
+use the <code>displaymath</code> environment (see <a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a>), or
+one of the environments from the <code>amsmath</code> package. For inline
+mathematics, such as in a table of formulas, an alternative is something
+like <code>{\small $mv^2/2$}</code>. (Sometimes <code>\scriptsize</code> and
+<code>\scriptstyle</code> are confused. Both change the font size, but the
+latter also changes a number of other aspects of how mathematics is
+typeset. See <a href="#Math-styles">Math styles</a>.)
+</p>
<span id="index-environment-form-of-font-size-commands"></span>
<p>An <em>environment form</em> of each of these commands is also defined; for
instance, <code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>. However, in practice
@@ -3029,7 +2944,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Low_002dlevel-font-commands">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Previous: <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Font sizes</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -3044,9 +2961,8 @@
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dd><span id="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\fontencoding{<var>encoding</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cfontencoding"></span>
-<p>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
+<dt id='index-_005cfontencoding'><span><code>\fontencoding{<var>encoding</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfontencoding' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
large number of valid encodings. The most common are <code>OT1</code>,
Knuth’s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
<code>T1</code>, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
@@ -3056,9 +2972,8 @@
<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide">https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</a>.
</p>
<span id="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\fontfamily{<var>family</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cfontfamily"></span>
-<span id="index-families_002c-of-fonts"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005cfontfamily'><span><code>\fontfamily{<var>family</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfontfamily' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-families_002c-of-fonts"></span>
<span id="index-font-catalogue"></span>
<p>Select the font family. The web page
<a href="https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/">https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/</a> provides one way to browse
@@ -3090,9 +3005,8 @@
<span id="low-level-font-commands-fontseries"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\fontseries{<var>series</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cfontseries"></span>
-<span id="index-series_002c-of-fonts"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005cfontseries'><span><code>\fontseries{<var>series</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfontseries' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-series_002c-of-fonts"></span>
<p>Select the font series. A <em>series</em> combines a <em>weight</em> and a
<em>width</em>. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
combinations. Some common combined series values include:
@@ -3141,11 +3055,10 @@
weight and width are <code>m</code>, in which case use just one
(‘<samp><code>m</code></samp>’).
</p>
-</dd>
-<dt><code>\fontshape{<var>shape</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cfontshape"></span>
-<span id="index-shapes_002c-of-fonts"></span>
-<span id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"></span><p>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+<span id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"></span></dd>
+<dt id='index-_005cfontshape'><span><code>\fontshape{<var>shape</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfontshape' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-shapes_002c-of-fonts"></span>
+<p>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
</p>
<table>
<tr><td><code>n</code></td><td>Upright (normal)</td></tr>
@@ -3160,9 +3073,8 @@
small caps are often missing as well.
</p>
<span id="low-level-font-commands-fontsize"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\fontsize{<var>size</var>}{<var>skip</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cfontsize"></span>
-<span id="index-font-size"></span>
+<dt id='index-_005cfontsize'><span><code>\fontsize{<var>size</var>}{<var>skip</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfontsize' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-font-size"></span>
<span id="index-_005cbaselineskip"></span>
<p>Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters
defaults to points (<code>pt</code>). The line spacing is the nominal
@@ -3171,31 +3083,26 @@
the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the <code>\fontsize</code>.
Changing <code>\baselineskip</code> directly is inadvisable since its value is
reset every time a size change happens; instead use
-<code>\baselinestretch</code>. (see <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">\baselineskip & \baselinestretch</a>).
+<code>\baselinestretch</code>. (see <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch"><code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a>).
</p>
<span id="low-level-font-commands-linespread"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\linespread{<var>factor</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005clinespread"></span>
-<p>Equivalent to
-<code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code>, and
-therefore must be followed by <code>\selectfont</code> to have any effect.
-Best specified in the preamble, or use the <code>setspace</code> package, as
-just described.
+<dt id='index-_005clinespread'><span><code>\linespread{<var>factor</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005clinespread' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Equivalent to <code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code>,
+and therefore must be followed by <code>\selectfont</code> to have any
+effect. Best specified in the preamble. See <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch"><code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a>, for using <code>setspace</code> package instead.
</p>
<span id="low-level-font-commands-selectfont"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\selectfont</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cselectfont"></span>
-<p>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
+<dt id='index-_005cselectfont'><span><code>\selectfont</code><a href='#index-_005cselectfont' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
<code>\selectfont</code> is called, as in
<code>\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont</code>. It is often useful
to put this in a macro:<br>
<code>\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont}</code><br>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>).
</p>
<span id="low-level-font-commands-usefont"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\usefont{<var>enc</var>}{<var>family</var>}{<var>series</var>}{<var>shape</var>}</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cusefont"></span>
-<p>The same as invoking <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
+<dt id='index-_005cusefont'><span><code>\usefont{<var>enc</var>}{<var>family</var>}{<var>series</var>}{<var>shape</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cusefont' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>The same as invoking <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters,
followed by <code>\selectfont</code>. For example:
</p>
@@ -3208,9 +3115,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="Layout"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Layout">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="n" rel="next">Sectioning</a>, Previous: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Fonts</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="n" rel="next">Sectioning</a>, Previous: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Fonts</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Layout-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">5 Layout</h2>
@@ -3218,28 +3128,22 @@
<p>Commands for controlling the general page layout.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="1">\onecolumn</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use one-column layout.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="2">\twocolumn</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use two-column layout.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="3">\flushbottom</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make all text pages the same height.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="4">\raggedbottom</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Allow text pages of differing height.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="5">Page layout parameters</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top"><code>\headheight</code> <code>\footskip</code>.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="6">\baselineskip & \baselinestretch</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Space between lines.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Floats" accesskey="7">Floats</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Figures, tables, etc.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="1"><code>\onecolumn</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="2"><code>\twocolumn</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="3"><code>\flushbottom</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="4"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="5">Page layout parameters</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="6"><code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Floats" accesskey="7">Floats</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005conecolumn"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005conecolumn">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="n" rel="next">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005conecolumn-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></h3>
@@ -3255,13 +3159,15 @@
<p>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
given the class option <code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default
behavior (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>). This command is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005ctwocolumn"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005ctwocolumn">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\flushbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\onecolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005ctwocolumn-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></h3>
@@ -3279,7 +3185,7 @@
<p>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
the class option <code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default
(see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>). This command is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>If the optional <var>prelim one column text</var> argument
is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
@@ -3288,9 +3194,7 @@
<p>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\columnsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnsep'><span><code>\columnsep</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-columnsep"></span><p>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a
command such as <code>\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}</code>. You must change
it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good
@@ -3297,9 +3201,7 @@
place.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\columnseprule</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnseprule"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnseprule'><span><code>\columnseprule</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnseprule' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-columnseprule"></span><p>The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that
there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between the two
columns. Change it with a command such as
@@ -3307,9 +3209,7 @@
mode starts.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\columnwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnwidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnwidth'><span><code>\columnwidth</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnwidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-columnwidth"></span><p>The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
<code>\textwidth</code>. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the
width of each of the two columns, <code>\columnwidth</code>, to be half of
@@ -3320,15 +3220,13 @@
<p>In a two-column document, the starred environments <code>table*</code> and
<code>figure*</code> are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
-<code>table</code> and <code>figure</code> take up only one column (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>
-and see <a href="#table">table</a>). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page.
+<code>table</code> and <code>figure</code> take up only one column (see <a href="#figure"><code>figure</code></a>
+and see <a href="#table"><code>table</code></a>). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page.
The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dd><span id="twocolumn-dbltopfraction"></span></dd>
-<dt><code>\dbltopfraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdbltopfraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdbltopfraction'><span><code>\dbltopfraction</code><a href='#index-_005cdbltopfraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
the height of a <code>table*</code> or <code>figure*</code> environment must not
@@ -3351,17 +3249,13 @@
<code>\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction'><span><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code><a href='#index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction"></span><p>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
LaTeX’s default is <code>0.5</code>. Change it with <code>\renewcommand</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\dblfloatsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdblfloatsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdblfloatsep'><span><code>\dblfloatsep</code><a href='#index-_005cdblfloatsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-dblfloatsep"></span><p>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is
<code>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> for a document set at <code>10pt</code> or
@@ -3369,17 +3263,13 @@
<code>12pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdbltextfloatsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdbltextfloatsep'><span><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code><a href='#index-_005cdbltextfloatsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep"></span><p>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
bottom of a page and the main text. The default is <code>20pt plus2pt
minus4pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\dbltopnumber</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdbltopnumber"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdbltopnumber'><span><code>\dbltopnumber</code><a href='#index-_005cdbltopnumber' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="twocolumn-dbltopnumber"></span><p>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
default is <code>2</code>.
@@ -3412,9 +3302,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cflushbottom"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cflushbottom">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\raggedbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cflushbottom-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></h3>
@@ -3428,12 +3320,12 @@
<p>If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like ‘<samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
occurred while \output is active</samp>’. If you get that, one option is to
-change to <code>\raggedbottom</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>). Alternatively,
+change to <code>\raggedbottom</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>). Alternatively,
you can adjust the <code>textheight</code> to make compatible pages, or you
can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
as in <code>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</code>. Your last option
is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>\flushbottom</code> state is the default only if you select the
<code>twoside</code> document class option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
@@ -3440,9 +3332,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005craggedbottom"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005craggedbottom">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page layout parameters</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\flushbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page layout parameters</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005craggedbottom-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></h3>
@@ -3452,7 +3346,7 @@
<p>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
-at any point in the document body. See <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>.
+at any point in the document body. See <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>.
</p>
<p>This is the default unless you select the <code>twoside</code> document class
option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
@@ -3459,9 +3353,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Page-layout-parameters"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Page-layout-parameters">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="n" rel="next">\baselineskip & \baselinestretch</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\raggedbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Page-layout-parameters-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.5 Page layout parameters</h3>
@@ -3473,15 +3369,9 @@
<span id="index-running-header-and-footer"></span>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\columnsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnsep-1"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>\columnseprule</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnseprule-1"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>\columnwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005ccolumnwidth-1"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnsep-1'><span><code>\columnsep</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnsep-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnseprule-1'><span><code>\columnseprule</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnseprule-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ccolumnwidth-1'><span><code>\columnwidth</code><a href='#index-_005ccolumnwidth-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ccolumnsep-2"></span>
<span id="index-_005ccolumnseprule-2"></span>
<span id="index-_005ccolumnwidth-2"></span>
@@ -3488,12 +3378,10 @@
<span id="page-layout-parameters-columnsep"></span><span id="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule"></span><span id="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth"></span><p>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
<code>twocolumn</code> is in effect (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
-See <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>.
+See <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\headheight</code>
-<span id="index-_005cheadheight"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cheadheight'><span><code>\headheight</code><a href='#index-_005cheadheight' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cheadheight-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-headheight"></span><p>Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the
<code>article</code>, <code>report</code>, and <code>book</code> classes is ‘<samp>12pt</samp>’,
@@ -3500,9 +3388,7 @@
at all type sizes.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\headsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cheadsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cheadsep'><span><code>\headsep</code><a href='#index-_005cheadsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cheadsep-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-headsep"></span><p>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
the main text. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
@@ -3511,9 +3397,7 @@
it is ‘<samp>0.275in</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\footskip</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfootskip"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cfootskip'><span><code>\footskip</code><a href='#index-_005cfootskip' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cfootskip-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-footskip"></span><p>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
the page footer. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
@@ -3522,26 +3406,18 @@
‘<samp>0.38in</samp>’, and at 12pt it is ‘<samp>30pt</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\linewidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005clinewidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005clinewidth'><span><code>\linewidth</code><a href='#index-_005clinewidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005clinewidth-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-linewidth"></span><p>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <code>list</code>
-(see <a href="#list">list</a>). That is, the nominal value for <code>\linewidth</code> is to
+(see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>). That is, the nominal value for <code>\linewidth</code> is to
equal <code>\textwidth</code> but for each nested list the <code>\linewidth</code>
is decreased by the sum of that list’s <code>\leftmargin</code> and
-<code>\rightmargin</code> (see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>).
+<code>\rightmargin</code> (see <a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\marginparpush</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginparpush"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>\marginsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginsep"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>\marginparwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginparwidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginparpush'><span><code>\marginparpush</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginparpush' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginsep'><span><code>\marginsep</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginparwidth'><span><code>\marginparwidth</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginparwidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cmarginparpush-1"></span>
<span id="index-_005cmarginsep-1"></span>
<span id="index-_005cmarginparwidth-1"></span>
@@ -3570,12 +3446,8 @@
distance.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\oddsidemargin</code>
-<span id="index-_005coddsidemargin-1"></span>
-</dt>
-<dt><code>\evensidemargin</code>
-<span id="index-_005cevensidemargin-1"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005coddsidemargin-1'><span><code>\oddsidemargin</code><a href='#index-_005coddsidemargin-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cevensidemargin-1'><span><code>\evensidemargin</code><a href='#index-_005cevensidemargin-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005coddsidemargin-2"></span>
<span id="index-_005cevensidemargin-2"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin"></span><span id="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin"></span><p>The <code>\oddsidemargin</code> length is the extra distance between the left side of
@@ -3590,9 +3462,7 @@
<code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\paperheight</code>
-<span id="index-_005cpaperheight"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cpaperheight'><span><code>\paperheight</code><a href='#index-_005cpaperheight' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cpaperheight-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-paperheight"></span><p>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
Normally set with a document class option, as in
@@ -3599,9 +3469,7 @@
<code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\paperwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005cpaperwidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cpaperwidth'><span><code>\paperwidth</code><a href='#index-_005cpaperwidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cpaperwidth-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth"></span><p>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
Normally set with a document class option, as in
@@ -3608,9 +3476,7 @@
<code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textheight</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctextheight"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextheight'><span><code>\textheight</code><a href='#index-_005ctextheight' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctextheight-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-textheight"></span><p>The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at
a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <code>article</code> or <code>report</code>
@@ -3620,9 +3486,7 @@
‘<samp>36\baselineskip</samp>’ for all classes.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctextwidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextwidth'><span><code>\textwidth</code><a href='#index-_005ctextwidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctextwidth-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-textwidth"></span><p>The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
<code>article</code> or <code>report</code> document, the default is ‘<samp>345pt</samp>’
@@ -3632,21 +3496,19 @@
</p>
<p>In multi-column output, <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
entire page body, while <code>\columnwidth</code> is the width of one column
-(see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>).
</p>
-<p>In lists (see <a href="#list">list</a>), <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
+<p>In lists (see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>), <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
entire page body (and <code>\columnwidth</code> the width of the entire
column), while <code>\linewidth</code> may decrease for nested lists.
</p>
-<p>Inside a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>) or <code>\parbox</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+<p>Inside a minipage (see <a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a>) or <code>\parbox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox"><code>\parbox</code></a>), all the width-related parameters are set to the
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
<code>minipage</code> or <code>\parbox</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\hsize</code>
-<span id="index-_005chsize"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005chsize'><span><code>\hsize</code><a href='#index-_005chsize' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005chsize-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-hsize"></span><p>This entry is included for completeness: <code>\hsize</code> is the TeX
primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not
@@ -3653,9 +3515,7 @@
be used in normal LaTeX documents.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\topmargin</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctopmargin"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctopmargin'><span><code>\topmargin</code><a href='#index-_005ctopmargin' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-topmargin"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-topmargin"></span><p>Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed
@@ -3664,9 +3524,7 @@
and then divided by two.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\topskip</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctopskip"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctopskip'><span><code>\topskip</code><a href='#index-_005ctopskip' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctopskip-1"></span>
<span id="page-layout-parameters-topskip"></span><p>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the
@@ -3677,7 +3535,9 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Floats" accesskey="n" rel="next">Floats</a>, Previous: <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page layout parameters</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -3692,7 +3552,7 @@
<span id="index-double-spacing"></span>
<p>The <code>\baselineskip</code> is a rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It gives
-the leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
+the <em>leading</em>, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
baseline to baseline.
</p>
<p>Ordinarily document authors do not directly change <code>\baselineskip</code>
@@ -3717,7 +3577,7 @@
such as a single <code>{\Huge Q}</code>, will be squashed into its line.
TeX will make sure it doesn’t scrape up against the line above but
won’t change the <code>\baselineskip</code> for that one line to make extra
-room above. For the fix, use a <code>\strut</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a>).
+room above. For the fix, use a <code>\strut</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut"><code>\strut</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The value of <code>\baselineskip</code> that TeX uses for the paragraph is
the value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph
@@ -3743,9 +3603,9 @@
then TeX instead uses <code>\lineskip</code> as the interline glue. The
second is that TeX doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous
line. Instead it uses <code>\prevdepth</code>, which usually contains that
-depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list)
-or just after a rule, <code>\prevdepth</code> has the value -1000pt and this
-special value tells TeX not to insert any interline glue at the
+depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list) or
+just after a rule, <code>\prevdepth</code> has the value -1000pt and
+this special value tells TeX not to insert any interline glue at the
paragraph start.
</p>
<p>In the standard classes <code>\lineskiplimit</code> is 0pt and
@@ -3765,7 +3625,7 @@
For double spacing, take <var>factor</var> to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half
spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the
<code>\baselineskip</code> is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by
-1.6 gives a font size to baseline ratio of about 2. (The
+1.6 gives a baseline skip to font size ratio of about 2. (The
<code>\linespread</code> command is defined as
<code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code> so it won’t
take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at
@@ -3775,7 +3635,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-setspace"></span>
<span id="index-setspace-package"></span>
-<p>A simpler approach is the <samp>setspace</samp> package. The basic example:
+<p>A simpler approach is the <code>setspace</code> package. The basic example:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{setspace}
@@ -3791,12 +3651,16 @@
... \end{doublespace}</code>. The package also has commands to do
arbitrary spacing: <code>\setstretch{<var>factor</var>}</code> and
<code>\begin{spacing}{<var>factor</var>} ... \end{spacing}</code>.
+This package also keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
</p>
-
<hr>
-<span id="Floats"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Floats">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\baselineskip & \baselinestretch</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Floats-1"></span><h3 class="section">5.7 Floats</h3>
@@ -3805,9 +3669,9 @@
for instance floating to the top of a later page.
</p>
<p>LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
-The default is the two classes, <code>figure</code> (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>) and
-<code>table</code> (see <a href="#table">table</a>), but you can create a new class with the
-package <samp>float</samp>.
+The default is the two classes, <code>figure</code> (see <a href="#figure"><code>figure</code></a>) and
+<code>table</code> (see <a href="#table"><code>table</code></a>), but you can create a new class with the
+package <code>float</code>.
</p>
<p>Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
@@ -3834,11 +3698,11 @@
both <code>article</code> and <code>book</code> classes, is <code>tbp</code>.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>t</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>(Top)—at the top of a text page.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>b</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. (However, <code>b</code> is not
allowed for full-width floats (<code>figure*</code>) with double-column
output. To ameliorate this, use the <samp>stfloats</samp> or
@@ -3846,7 +3710,7 @@
FAQ: <a href="https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat">https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat</a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>h</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>h</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>(Here)—at the position in the text where the <code>figure</code> environment
appears. However, <code>h</code> is not allowed by itself; <code>t</code> is
automatically added.
@@ -3861,13 +3725,12 @@
<a href="https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere">https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere</a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>p</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-float-page"></span>
-<p>(Page of floats)—on a separate <em>float page</em>, which is a page
+<dt id='index-float-page'><span><code>p</code><a href='#index-float-page' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>(Page of floats)—on a separate <em>float page</em>, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>!</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>!</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
@@ -3900,7 +3763,7 @@
the <var>placement</var> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
the <code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
-the <samp>flafter</samp> package or using the command
+the <code>flafter</code> package or using the command
<span id="index-_005csuppressfloats"></span>
<code>\suppressfloats[t]</code>, which causes floats for the top position on
this page to moved to the next page.
@@ -3910,25 +3773,19 @@
<code>\renewcommand{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>decimal between 0 and 1</var>}</code>):
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\bottomfraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbottomfraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbottomfraction'><span><code>\bottomfraction</code><a href='#index-_005cbottomfraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cbottomfraction-1"></span>
<span id="floats-bottomfraction"></span><p>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
the bottom; default ‘<samp>.3</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\floatpagefraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfloatpagefraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cfloatpagefraction'><span><code>\floatpagefraction</code><a href='#index-_005cfloatpagefraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cfloatpagefraction-1"></span>
<span id="floats-floatpagefraction"></span><p>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
default ‘<samp>.5</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textfraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctextfraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextfraction'><span><code>\textfraction</code><a href='#index-_005ctextfraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctextfraction-1"></span>
<span id="floats-textfraction"></span><p>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
@@ -3935,9 +3792,7 @@
different page. The default is ‘<samp>.2</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\topfraction</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctopfraction"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctopfraction'><span><code>\topfraction</code><a href='#index-_005ctopfraction' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctopfraction-1"></span>
<span id="floats-topfraction"></span><p>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
floats; default ‘<samp>.7</samp>’.
@@ -3949,17 +3804,13 @@
expression</var>}</code>):
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\floatsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfloatsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cfloatsep'><span><code>\floatsep</code><a href='#index-_005cfloatsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cfloatsep-1"></span>
<span id="floats-floatsep"></span><p>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
‘<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\intextsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cintextsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cintextsep'><span><code>\intextsep</code><a href='#index-_005cintextsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cintextsep-1"></span>
<span id="floats-intextsep"></span><p>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
‘<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>’ for 10 point and 11 point documents,
@@ -3966,9 +3817,7 @@
and ‘<samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp>’ for 12 point documents.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textfloatsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctextfloatsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctextfloatsep'><span><code>\textfloatsep</code><a href='#index-_005ctextfloatsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ctextfloatsep-1"></span>
<span id="floats-textfloatsep"></span><p>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
default ‘<samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>’.
@@ -3980,33 +3829,25 @@
number</var>}</code>):
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>bottomnumber</code>
-<span id="index-bottomnumber"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-bottomnumber'><span><code>bottomnumber</code><a href='#index-bottomnumber' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-bottomnumber-1"></span>
<span id="floats-bottomnumber"></span><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
default 1.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>dbltopnumber</code>
-<span id="index-dbltopnumber"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-dbltopnumber'><span><code>dbltopnumber</code><a href='#index-dbltopnumber' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-dbltopnumber-1"></span>
<span id="floats-dbltopnumber"></span><p>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
two-column page; default 2.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>topnumber</code>
-<span id="index-topnumber"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-topnumber'><span><code>topnumber</code><a href='#index-topnumber' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-topnumber-1"></span>
<span id="floats-topnumber"></span><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
default 2.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>totalnumber</code>
-<span id="index-totalnumber"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-totalnumber'><span><code>totalnumber</code><a href='#index-totalnumber' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-totalnumber-1"></span>
<span id="floats-totalnumber"></span><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
</p></dd>
@@ -4022,11 +3863,116 @@
(<a href="https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf">https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf</a>).
</p>
+
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ccaption" accesskey="1"><code>\caption</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Sectioning"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005ccaption">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="n" rel="next">Cross references</a>, Previous: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Layout</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#Floats" accesskey="u" rel="up">Floats</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
+<span id="g_t_005ccaption-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">5.7.1 <code>\caption</code></h4>
+
+<span id="index-_005ccaption"></span>
+<span id="index-captions"></span>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\caption{<var>caption-text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\caption[<var>short-caption-text</var>]{<var>caption-text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make a caption for a floating environment, such as a <code>figure</code> or
+<code>table</code> environment (see <a href="#figure"><code>figure</code></a> or <a href="#table"><code>table</code></a>).
+</p>
+<p>In this example, LaTeX places a caption below the vertical blank
+space that is left by the author for the later inclusion of a picture.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure}
+ \vspace*{1cm}
+ \caption{Alonzo Cushing, Battery A, 4th US Artillery.}
+ \label{fig:CushingPic}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\caption</code> command will label the <var>caption-text</var> with
+something like ‘<samp>Figure 1:</samp>’ for an article or
+‘<samp>Figure 1.1:</samp>’ for a book. The text is centered if it is
+shorter than the text width, or set as an unindented paragraph if it
+takes more than one line.
+</p>
+<p>In addition to placing the <var>caption-text</var> in the output, the
+<code>\caption</code> command also saves that information for use in a list of
+figures or list of tables (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here the <code>\caption</code> command uses the optional
+<var>short-caption-text</var>, so that the shorter text appears in the list
+of tables, rather than the longer <var>caption-text</var>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{|*{3}{c}|}
+ \hline
+ 4 &9 &2 \\
+ 3 &5 &7 \\
+ 8 &1 &6 \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption[\textit{Lo Shu} magic square]{%
+ The \textit{Lo Shu} magic square, which is unique among
+ squares of order three up to rotation and reflection.}
+ \label{tab:LoShu}
+\end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX will label the <var>caption-text</var> with something like
+‘<samp>Table 1:</samp>’ for an article or ‘<samp>Table 1.1:</samp>’ for a
+book.
+</p>
+<p>The caption can appear at the top of the <code>figure</code> or <code>table</code>.
+For instance, that would happen in the prior example by putting the
+<code>\caption</code> between the <code>\centering</code> and the
+<code>\begin{tabular}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Different floating environments are numbered separately, by default. It
+is <code>\caption</code> that updates the counter, and so any <code>\label</code>
+must come after the <code>\caption</code>. The counter for the <code>figure</code>
+environment is named <code>figure</code>, and similarly the counter for the
+<code>table</code> environment is <code>table</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The text that will be put in the list of figures or list of tables is
+moving argument. If you get the LaTeX error ‘<samp>! Argument of
+\@caption has an extra }</samp>’ then you must put <code>\protect</code> in front
+of any fragile commands. See <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>.
+</p>
+<span id="index-package_002c-caption"></span>
+<span id="index-caption-package"></span>
+
+<p>The <code>caption</code> package has many options to adjust how the caption
+appears, for example changing the font size, making the caption be
+hanging text rather than set as a paragraph, or making the caption
+always set as a paragraph rather than centered when it is short.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Sectioning">
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="n" rel="next">Cross references</a>, Previous: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Layout</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
<span id="Sectioning-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">6 Sectioning</h2>
<span id="index-sectioning-commands"></span>
@@ -4078,7 +4024,7 @@
but does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
An example of using this is for an appendix in an <code>article</code>. The
input <code>\appendix\section{Appendix}</code> gives the output ‘<samp>A
-Appendix</samp>’ (see <a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a>). You can lose the numbering ‘<samp>A</samp>’
+Appendix</samp>’ (see <a href="#g_t_005cappendix"><code>\appendix</code></a>). You can lose the numbering ‘<samp>A</samp>’
by instead entering <code>\section*{Appendix}</code> (articles often omit a
table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
from the <code>\section</code> command may not matter).
@@ -4109,22 +4055,20 @@
<p>LaTeX lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a
simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case
letters with <code>\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}</code> in the
-preamble (see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>). CTAN
+preamble (see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>). CTAN
has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably
-<samp>titlesec</samp>.
+<code>titlesec</code>.
</p>
<p>Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning commands.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>secnumdepth</code>
-<span id="index-secnumdepth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-secnumdepth'><span><code>secnumdepth</code><a href='#index-secnumdepth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-secnumdepth-counter"></span>
<span id="index-section-numbers_002c-printing"></span>
<span id="sectioning-secnumdepth"></span><span id="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"></span><p>Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter with
<code>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code> will suppress
numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than <var>level</var>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>). See the above table for the level numbers.
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter"><code>\setcounter</code></a>). See the above table for the level numbers.
For instance, if the <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then
a <code>\section{Introduction}</code> command will produce output like
‘<samp>1 Introduction</samp>’ while <code>\subsection{Discussion}</code> will
@@ -4133,15 +4077,13 @@
2 in the <samp>book</samp> and <samp>report</samp> classes.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>tocdepth</code>
-<span id="index-tocdepth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-tocdepth'><span><code>tocdepth</code><a href='#index-tocdepth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-tocdepth-counter"></span>
<span id="index-table-of-contents_002c-sectioning-numbers-printed"></span>
<span id="sectioning-tocdepth"></span><span id="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"></span><p>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
The setting <code>\setcounter{tocdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code> makes the
sectioning units at <var>level</var> be the smallest ones listed
-(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter"><code>\setcounter</code></a>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
instance, if <code>tocdepth</code> is 1 then the table of contents will
list sections but not subsections. LaTeX’s default
<code>tocdepth</code> is 3 in <samp>article</samp> class and 2 in the
@@ -4150,30 +4092,23 @@
</dd>
</dl>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="1">\part</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a part.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="2">\chapter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a chapter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="3">\section</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a section.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="4">\subsection</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a subsection.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="5">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Lower divisions.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="6">\appendix</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start appendices.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="7">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The three parts of a book.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="8">\@startsection</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Sectional unit headings.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="1"><code>\part</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="2"><code>\chapter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="3"><code>\section</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="4"><code>\subsection</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="5"><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="6"><code>\appendix</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="7"><code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="8"><code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cpart"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cpart">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\chapter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\chapter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cpart-1"></span><h3 class="section">6.1 <code>\part</code></h3>
@@ -4218,10 +4153,10 @@
<code>part</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the part title in
-the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in running
+the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>) and in running
headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then <var>title</var>
-will be there. This example puts a line break in <var>title</var> but leaves
-out the break in the table of contents.
+will be there. This example puts a line break in <var>title</var> but omits
+the break in the table of contents.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
@@ -4236,19 +4171,21 @@
<p>In the class <code>article</code>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
-<samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+<code>indentfirst</code>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-titlesec-1"></span>
<span id="index-titlesec-package-1"></span>
-<p>One package to change the behavior of <code>\part</code> is <samp>titlesec</samp>.
+<p>One package to change the behavior of <code>\part</code> is <code>titlesec</code>.
See its documentation on CTAN.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cchapter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cchapter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\section</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\part</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\section</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\part</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cchapter-1"></span><h3 class="section">6.2 <code>\chapter</code></h3>
@@ -4283,7 +4220,7 @@
<code>\huge</code>). It then puts <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface
type that is still larger (size <code>\Huge</code>). It also increments the
<code>chapter</code> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
-(see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>), and sets the running header
+(see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>), and sets the running header
information (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface.
@@ -4298,7 +4235,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the chapter title
-in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>) and in
running headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then
<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter
title,
@@ -4324,12 +4261,12 @@
<p>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
-<samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+<code>indentfirst</code>.
</p>
<p>You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
something like ‘<samp>Lecture 1</samp>’, put in the preamble either
<code>\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}</code> or this
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\makeatletter
@@ -4341,12 +4278,12 @@
<span id="index-babel-package"></span>
<p>To make this change because of the primary language for
-the document, see the package <samp>babel</samp>.
+the document, see the package <code>babel</code>.
</p>
<p>In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
running headers. To make that page completely blank,
-see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</a>.
+see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-titlesec-2"></span>
<span id="index-titlesec-package-2"></span>
@@ -4354,7 +4291,7 @@
<p>To change the behavior of the <code>\chapter</code> command, you can copy its
definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But
there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
-<samp>titlesec</samp>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+<code>titlesec</code>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
sense of what it can do.
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -4372,9 +4309,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csection"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csection">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\subsection</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\chapter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\subsection</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\chapter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csection-1"></span><h3 class="section">6.3 <code>\section</code></h3>
@@ -4421,10 +4360,10 @@
prior section.)
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
-in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>) and in
running headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then
<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
-section,
+section:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
@@ -4451,7 +4390,7 @@
<p>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+package <code>indentfirst</code>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-titlesec-3"></span>
<span id="index-titlesec-package-3"></span>
@@ -4458,8 +4397,8 @@
<p>In general, to change the behavior of the <code>\section</code> command, there
are a number of options. One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
-address this, including <samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation but the
+(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection"><code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <code>titlesec</code>. See the documentation but the
example below gives a sense of what they can do.
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -4477,9 +4416,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csubsection"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csubsection">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="n" rel="next">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\section</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\section</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csubsection-1"></span><h3 class="section">6.4 <code>\subsection</code></h3>
@@ -4520,9 +4461,9 @@
<code>subsection</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the subsection title
-in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). If it is
-not present then <var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full text in
-the title of the subsection,
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>). If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there. This
+shows the full text in the title of the subsection:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
@@ -4541,7 +4482,7 @@
<p>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+package <code>indentfirst</code>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-titlesec-4"></span>
<span id="index-titlesec-package-4"></span>
@@ -4548,8 +4489,8 @@
<p>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
<code>\subsection</code> command. One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
-address this, including <samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation but the
+(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection"><code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <code>titlesec</code>. See the documentation but the
example below gives a sense of what they can do.
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -4566,9 +4507,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="n" rel="next">\appendix</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\subsection</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\appendix</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\subsection</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csubsubsection_002c-_005cparagraph_002c-_005csubparagraph"></span><h3 class="section">6.5 <code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></h3>
@@ -4634,7 +4577,7 @@
show the number for <code>\subsubsection</code>).
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the division title
-in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). If it is
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>). If it is
not present then <var>title</var> will be there.
</p>
<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
@@ -4647,21 +4590,23 @@
<p>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+package <code>indentfirst</code>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-titlesec-5"></span>
<span id="index-titlesec-package-5"></span>
<p>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
-One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>).
+One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection"><code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a>).
There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
-<samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation on CTAN.
+<code>titlesec</code>. See the documentation on CTAN.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cappendix"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cappendix">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cappendix-1"></span><h3 class="section">6.6 <code>\appendix</code></h3>
@@ -4696,13 +4641,13 @@
<p>the first two will generate output numbered ‘<samp>Chapter 1</samp>’ and
‘<samp>Chapter 2</samp>’. After the <code>\appendix</code> the numbering will be
-‘<samp>Appendix A</samp>’ and ‘<samp>Appendix B</samp>’. See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a>,
+‘<samp>Appendix A</samp>’ and ‘<samp>Appendix B</samp>’. See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger <code>book</code> template</a>,
for another example.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-appendix"></span>
<span id="index-appendix-package"></span>
-<p>The <samp>appendix</samp> package adds the command
+<p>The <code>appendix</code> package adds the command
<code>\appendixpage</code> to put a separate ‘<samp>Appendices</samp>’ in the document
body before the first appendix, and the command <code>\addappheadtotoc</code>
to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
@@ -4712,9 +4657,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\@startsection</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\appendix</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\appendix</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cfrontmatter_002c-_005cmainmatter_002c-_005cbackmatter"></span><h3 class="section">6.7 <code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></h3>
@@ -4762,13 +4709,15 @@
<p>The <code>\backmatter</code> command leaves the page numbering alone but
switches the chapters back to being not numbered.
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a>, for an example using these three commands.
+<p>See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger <code>book</code> template</a>, for an example using these three commands.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005c_0040startsection">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002c-typesetting-sectional-unit-headings"></span><h3 class="section">6.8 <code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</h3>
@@ -4784,7 +4733,7 @@
<p>Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
divisions such as <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>.
</p>
-<p>Note that the <samp>titlesec</samp> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+<p>Note that the <code>titlesec</code> package makes manipulation of sectioning
easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
satisfied with <code>\@startsection</code>, some cannot. For instance, in
the standard LaTeX <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes the commands
@@ -4822,7 +4771,7 @@
examples below.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>name</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>name</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-name"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"></span><p>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter
must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or <code>paragraph</code>. Although in
@@ -4834,7 +4783,7 @@
example below.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>level</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>level</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-level"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"></span><p>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
See <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>, for the list of standard level numbers.
</p>
@@ -4853,7 +4802,7 @@
list sections but not subsections.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>indent</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>indent</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-indent"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"></span><p>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use
<code>0pt</code>. A negative indentation such as <code>-\parindent</code> will move
@@ -4860,7 +4809,7 @@
the title into the left margin.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>beforeskip</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>beforeskip</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-beforeskip"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"></span><p>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space will be
discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the beginning of a
@@ -4887,7 +4836,7 @@
page.)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>afterskip</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>afterskip</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-afterskip"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"></span><p>This is a length. If <var>afterskip</var> is non-negative then this is the
vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header. If it
is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
@@ -4911,7 +4860,7 @@
<code>afterskip</code> to cancel part of the <code>\parskip</code>.)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>style</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>style</var></span></dt>
<dd><span id="startsection-style"></span><span id="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"></span><p>Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical
commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>,
<code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or <code>\newpage</code>. The last command
@@ -4949,7 +4898,7 @@
must go between a <code>\makeatletter</code> command and a
<code>\makeatother</code>. (Probably the error message <code>You can't use
`\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</code> means that you forgot this.)
-See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>.
</p>
<p>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says
<code>\renewcommand</code> because LaTeX’s standard classes have already
@@ -5003,9 +4952,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="Cross-references"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Cross-references">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environments</a>, Previous: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Sectioning</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environments</a>, Previous: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Sectioning</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Cross-references-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">7 Cross references</h2>
@@ -5056,22 +5008,19 @@
<code>\cref{th:Nerode}</code> will output ‘<samp>Theorem 3.21</samp>’, without you
having to enter the “Theorem.”
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="1">\label</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="2">\pageref</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a page number.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="3">\ref</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a section, figure or similar.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#xr-package" accesskey="4">xr package</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">References from another document.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="1"><code>\label</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="2"><code>\pageref</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="3"><code>\ref</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#xr-package" accesskey="4"><code>xr</code> package</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005clabel"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005clabel">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\pageref</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005clabel-1"></span><h3 class="section">7.1 <code>\label</code></h3>
@@ -5089,7 +5038,7 @@
<code>table</code> or <code>theorem</code> environment, <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code>
assigns to <var>key</var> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
assigned number with the <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>).
</p>
<p>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
@@ -5102,24 +5051,24 @@
source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>ch</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>ch</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>for chapters
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>sec</code></dt>
-<dt><code>subsec</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>sec</code></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>subsec</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>for lower-level sectioning commands
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>fig</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>fig</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>for figures
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>tab</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>tab</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>for tables
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>eq</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>eq</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>for equations
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -5149,9 +5098,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cpageref"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cpageref">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ref</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\label</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\ref</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\label</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cpageref-1"></span><h3 class="section">7.2 <code>\pageref</code></h3>
@@ -5187,9 +5138,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cref"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cref">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#xr-package" accesskey="n" rel="next">xr package</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#xr-package" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>xr</code> package</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\pageref</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cref-1"></span><h3 class="section">7.3 <code>\ref</code></h3>
@@ -5208,7 +5161,7 @@
<p>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding
-<code>\label</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a>). It does not produce any text,
+<code>\label</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005clabel"><code>\label</code></a>). It does not produce any text,
such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself.
</p>
<p>If there is no <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> then you get something like
@@ -5231,19 +5184,25 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-cleveref-1"></span>
<span id="index-cleveref-package-1"></span>
-<p>The <samp>cleveref</samp> package includes text such as ‘<samp>Theorem</samp>’ in the
+<p>The <code>cleveref</code> package includes text such as ‘<samp>Theorem</samp>’ in the
reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="xr-package"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="xr-package">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\ref</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\ref</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="xr-package-1"></span><h3 class="section">7.4 <code>xr</code> package</h3>
+<span id="index-package_002c-xr"></span>
<span id="index-xr-package"></span>
+
+<span id="index-package_002c-xr_002dhyper"></span>
<span id="index-xr_002dhyper-package"></span>
+
<span id="index-_005cexternaldocument"></span>
<span id="index-cross-referencing_002c-across-documents"></span>
@@ -5262,9 +5221,9 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Make cross references to the external document
-<code><var>document-basename</var>.tex</code>.
+<samp><var>document-basename</var>.tex</samp>.
</p>
-<p>Here is an example. If <code>lectures.tex</code> has this in the preamble
+<p>Here is an example. If <samp>lectures.tex</samp> has this in the preamble
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{xr}
@@ -5274,7 +5233,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents.
-Suppose that <code>exercises.tex</code> has an enumerated list containing
+Suppose that <samp>exercises.tex</samp> has an enumerated list containing
this,
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -5281,13 +5240,13 @@
<pre class="example">\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
</pre></div>
-<p>and <code>hints.tex</code> has an enumerated list with this,
+<p>and <samp>hints.tex</samp> has an enumerated list with this,
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
</pre></div>
-<p>and <code>answers.tex</code> has an enumerated list with this.
+<p>and <samp>answers.tex</samp> has an enumerated list with this,
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
@@ -5295,7 +5254,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering
-this in the body of <code>lectures.tex</code> will result in the lectures
+this in the body of <samp>lectures.tex</samp> will result in the lectures
getting the reference numbers used in the other documents.
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -5315,9 +5274,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Environments"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Environments">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Line breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cross references</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Line breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cross references</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Environments-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">8 Environments</h2>
@@ -5344,70 +5306,43 @@
<span id="index-group_002c-and-environments"></span>
<p>Environments are executed within a group.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#abstract" accesskey="1">abstract</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Produce an abstract.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#array" accesskey="2">array</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Math arrays.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#center" accesskey="3">center</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Centered lines.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#description" accesskey="4">description</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Labelled lists.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="5">displaymath</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Formulas that appear on their own line.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#document" accesskey="6">document</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Enclose the whole document.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="7">enumerate</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Numbered lists.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="8">eqnarray</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Sequences of aligned equations.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#equation" accesskey="9">equation</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Displayed equation.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#figure">figure</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Floating figures.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Writing multiple files from the source.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Flushed left lines.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Flushed right lines.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bulleted lists.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#letter">letter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Letters.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#list">list</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Generic list environment.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#math">math</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">In-line math.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Miniature page.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#picture">picture</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation & quote</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Include a quotation.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Align text arbitrarily.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#table">table</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Floating tables.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Align text in columns.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bibliography or reference list.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Theorems, lemmas, etc.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">For hand crafted title pages.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Simulating typed input.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#verse">verse</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">For poetry and other things.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#abstract" accesskey="1"><code>abstract</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#array" accesskey="2"><code>array</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#center" accesskey="3"><code>center</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#description" accesskey="4"><code>description</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#displaymath" accesskey="5"><code>displaymath</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#document" accesskey="6"><code>document</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#enumerate" accesskey="7"><code>enumerate</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="8"><code>eqnarray</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#equation" accesskey="9"><code>equation</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#figure"><code>figure</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#filecontents"><code>filecontents</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#flushleft"><code>flushleft</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#flushright"><code>flushright</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#letter"><code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a></li>
+<li><a href="#list"><code>list</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#math"><code>math</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote"><code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#tabbing"><code>tabbing</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#table"><code>table</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#thebibliography"><code>thebibliography</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#theorem"><code>theorem</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#titlepage"><code>titlepage</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#verbatim"><code>verbatim</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#verse"><code>verse</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="abstract"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="abstract">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#array" accesskey="n" rel="next">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#array" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>array</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="abstract-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.1 <code>abstract</code></h3>
@@ -5470,9 +5405,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="array"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="array">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#center" accesskey="n" rel="next">center</a>, Previous: <a href="#abstract" accesskey="p" rel="prev">abstract</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#center" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>center</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#abstract" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>abstract</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="array-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.2 <code>array</code></h3>
@@ -5500,10 +5437,10 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
-mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
-such as <code>equation</code> (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>). Inside of each row the
-column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<code>&</code>). Rows are
-terminated with double-backslashes (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>), and normally appears within a displayed
+mathematics environment such as <code>equation</code> (see <a href="#equation"><code>equation</code></a>).
+Inside of each row the column entries are separated by an ampersand,
+(<code>&</code>). Rows are terminated with double-backslashes (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c"><code>\\</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This example shows a three by three array.
</p>
@@ -5524,13 +5461,13 @@
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
<code>\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}</code> gives three columns: the
first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See
-<a href="#tabular">tabular</a> for the complete description of <var>cols</var> and of the
+<a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a> for the complete description of <var>cols</var> and of the
other common features of the two environments, including the optional
<var>pos</var> argument.
</p>
<p>There are two ways that <code>array</code> diverges from <code>tabular</code>. The
first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in math mode, in
-textstyle (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies
+textstyle (see <a href="#Math-styles">Math styles</a>) except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies
the column with <code>p{...}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
text mode. The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>’s parameter
<code>\tabcolsep</code>, LaTeX’s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is
@@ -5543,7 +5480,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-amsmath"></span>
<span id="index-amsmath-package"></span>
-<p>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <samp>amsmath</samp>
+<p>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <code>amsmath</code>
package. It comes with environments <code>pmatrix</code> for an array
surrounded by parentheses <code>(...)</code>, <code>bmatrix</code> for an array
surrounded by square brackets <code>[...]</code>, <code>Bmatrix</code> for an
@@ -5555,7 +5492,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-amsmath-1"></span>
<span id="index-amsmath-package-1"></span>
-<p>The next example uses the <samp>amsmath</samp> package.
+<p>The next example uses the <code>amsmath</code> package.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
@@ -5568,22 +5505,24 @@
\end{equation}
</pre></div>
-<span id="index-package_002c-array-_0028package_0029"></span>
-<span id="index-array-_0028package_0029-package"></span>
+<span id="index-package_002c-array"></span>
+<span id="index-array-package"></span>
<span id="index-package_002c-dcolumn"></span>
<span id="index-dcolumn-package"></span>
-<p>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <samp>array</samp> package has
-many useful extensions, including more column types. The <samp>dcolumn</samp>
+<p>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <code>array</code> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The <code>dcolumn</code>
package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
the documentation on CTAN.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="center"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="center">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#description" accesskey="n" rel="next">description</a>, Previous: <a href="#array" accesskey="p" rel="prev">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#description" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>description</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#array" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>array</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="center-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.3 <code>center</code></h3>
@@ -5604,7 +5543,7 @@
<p>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
centered within the left and right margins. Use
-double-backslash, <code>\\</code>, to get a line break (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+double-backslash, <code>\\</code>, to get a line break (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c"><code>\\</code></a>).
<span id="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-center_0029"></span>
If some text is too long to fit on a line then LaTeX will insert line
breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
@@ -5611,7 +5550,7 @@
interword space.
</p>
<p>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
-<a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
+<a href="#g_t_005ccentering"><code>\centering</code></a> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
environment.
</p>
<p>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
@@ -5645,16 +5584,16 @@
<p>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
entire page.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ccentering" accesskey="1">\centering</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ccentering" accesskey="1"><code>\centering</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005ccentering"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005ccentering">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#center" accesskey="u" rel="up">center</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#center" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>center</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005ccentering-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.3.1 <code>\centering</code></h4>
@@ -5661,7 +5600,6 @@
<span id="index-_005ccentering"></span>
<span id="index-centering-text_002c-declaration-for"></span>
-
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -5710,9 +5648,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="description"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="description">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="n" rel="next">displaymath</a>, Previous: <a href="#center" accesskey="p" rel="prev">center</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>displaymath</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#center" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>center</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="description-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.4 <code>description</code></h3>
@@ -5751,7 +5692,7 @@
left edge on the left margin.
</p>
<span id="index-_005citem"></span>
-<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). Use the
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>). Use the
optional labels, as in <code>\item[Main point]</code>, because there is
no sensible default. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which
may contain multiple paragraphs.
@@ -5767,14 +5708,14 @@
<code>\item[{\tt label text}]</code>. Similarly, get the standard roman
font with <code>\item[{\rm label text}]</code>.
</p>
-<p>For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>
-and <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>. Unlike those environments, nesting
+<p>For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see <a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a>
+and <a href="#enumerate"><code>enumerate</code></a>. Unlike those environments, nesting
<code>description</code> environments does not change the default label; it is
boldface and flush left at all levels.
</p>
<p>For information about list layout parameters, including the default
values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
-<a href="#list">list</a>. The package <samp>enumitem</samp> is useful for customizing
+<a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>. The package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing
lists.
</p>
<p>This example changes the description labels to small caps.
@@ -5786,9 +5727,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="displaymath"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="displaymath">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#document" accesskey="n" rel="next">document</a>, Previous: <a href="#description" accesskey="p" rel="prev">description</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#document" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>document</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#description" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>description</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="displaymath-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.5 <code>displaymath</code></h3>
@@ -5810,7 +5753,7 @@
</p>
<p>In the <code>displaymath</code> environment no equation number is added to the
math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
-<code>equation</code> environment (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>).
+<code>equation</code> environment (see <a href="#equation"><code>equation</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX will not break the <var>math text</var> across lines.
</p>
@@ -5817,7 +5760,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-amsmath-2"></span>
<span id="index-amsmath-package-2"></span>
-<p>Note that the <samp>amsmath</samp> package has significantly more extensive
+<p>Note that the <code>amsmath</code> package has significantly more extensive
displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
</p>
@@ -5848,9 +5791,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="document"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="document">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="n" rel="next">enumerate</a>, Previous: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="p" rel="prev">displaymath</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>enumerate</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>displaymath</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="document-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.6 <code>document</code></h3>
@@ -5861,18 +5806,17 @@
<p>The <code>document</code> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
It is required in every LaTeX document. See <a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a>.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="1">\AtBeginDocument</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Hook for commands at the start of the document.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="2">\AtEndDocument</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Hook for commands at the end of the document.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="1"><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="2"><code>\AtEndDocument</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cAtBeginDocument"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="n" rel="next">\AtEndDocument</a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up">document</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\AtEndDocument</code></a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>document</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cAtBeginDocument-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.6.1 <code>\AtBeginDocument</code></h4>
@@ -5896,9 +5840,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cAtEndDocument"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cAtEndDocument">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\AtBeginDocument</a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up">document</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>document</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cAtEndDocument-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.6.2 <code>\AtEndDocument</code></h4>
@@ -5923,9 +5869,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="enumerate"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="enumerate">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="n" rel="next">eqnarray</a>, Previous: <a href="#document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">document</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>eqnarray</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#document" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>document</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="enumerate-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.7 <code>enumerate</code></h3>
@@ -5963,10 +5912,10 @@
</pre></div>
<span id="index-_005citem-1"></span>
-<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). If you
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>). If you
give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
brackets, as in <code>\item[Interstitial label]</code>, then the next item
-will continue the interrupted sequence (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). That is, you
+will continue the interrupted sequence (see <a href="#g_t_005citem"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>). That is, you
will get labels like ‘<samp>1.</samp>’, then ‘<samp>Interstitial label</samp>’, then
‘<samp>2.</samp>’. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
contain multiple paragraphs.
@@ -5973,7 +5922,7 @@
</p>
<p>Enumerations may be nested within other <code>enumerate</code> environments,
or within any paragraph-making environment such as <code>itemize</code>
-(see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX’s
+(see <a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a>), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX’s
default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level,
the outermost level.
</p>
@@ -5992,9 +5941,9 @@
<code>\enumiv</code> (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>).
</p>
<p>For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see
-<a href="#description">description</a> and <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>. For information about list layout
+<a href="#description"><code>description</code></a> and <a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a>. For information about list layout
parameters, including the default values, and for information about
-customizing list layout, see <a href="#list">list</a>. The package <samp>enumitem</samp> is
+customizing list layout, see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>. The package <code>enumitem</code> is
useful for customizing lists.
</p>
<span id="index-_005clabelenumi"></span>
@@ -6002,7 +5951,7 @@
<span id="index-_005clabelenumiii"></span>
<span id="index-_005clabelenumiv"></span>
<span id="enumerate-labelenumi"></span><span id="enumerate-labelenumii"></span><span id="enumerate-labelenumiii"></span><span id="enumerate-labelenumiv"></span><p>To change the format of the label use <code>\renewcommand</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) on the commands <code>\labelenumi</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>) on the commands <code>\labelenumi</code>
through <code>\labelenumiv</code>. For instance, this first level list will be
labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
period.
@@ -6016,13 +5965,15 @@
\end{enumerate}
</pre></div>
-<p>For a list of counter-labeling commands see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>.
+<p>For a list of counter-labeling commands see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="eqnarray"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="eqnarray">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#equation" accesskey="n" rel="next">equation</a>, Previous: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="p" rel="prev">enumerate</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#equation" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>equation</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>enumerate</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="eqnarray-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.8 <code>eqnarray</code></h3>
@@ -6039,7 +5990,7 @@
including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
(See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
<a href="https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf">https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</a>). New documents
-should include the <samp>amsmath</samp> package and use the displayed
+should include the <code>amsmath</code> package and use the displayed
mathematics environments provided there, such as the <code>align</code>
environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
working with old documents.
@@ -6072,7 +6023,7 @@
separated by double backslash <code>\\</code>).
<span id="index-_005c_005c_002a-_0028for-eqnarray_0029"></span>
The starred form of line break (<code>\\*</code>) can also be used to separate
-equations, and will disallow a page break there (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+equations, and will disallow a page break there (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c"><code>\\</code></a>).
</p>
<span id="index-_005cnonumber"></span>
<span id="index-equation-numbers_002c-omitting"></span>
@@ -6099,9 +6050,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="equation"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="equation">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#figure" accesskey="n" rel="next">figure</a>, Previous: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="p" rel="prev">eqnarray</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#figure" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>figure</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>eqnarray</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="equation-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.9 <code>equation</code></h3>
@@ -6119,7 +6072,7 @@
\end{equation}
</pre></div>
-<p>The same as a <code>displaymath</code> environment (see <a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a>)
+<p>The same as a <code>displaymath</code> environment (see <a href="#displaymath"><code>displaymath</code></a>)
except that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
The equation number is generated using the <code>equation</code> counter.
</p>
@@ -6130,14 +6083,16 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-amsmath-3"></span>
<span id="index-amsmath-package-3"></span>
-<p>The package <samp>amsmath</samp> package has extensive displayed equation
+<p>The package <code>amsmath</code> package has extensive displayed equation
facilities. New documents should include this package.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="figure"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="figure">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="n" rel="next">filecontents</a>, Previous: <a href="#equation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">equation</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>filecontents</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#equation" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>equation</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="figure-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.10 <code>figure</code></h3>
@@ -6183,16 +6138,16 @@
the float placement algorithm, see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
</p>
<p>The starred form <code>figure*</code> is used when a document is in
-double-column mode (see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>). It produces a figure that
+double-column mode (see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>). It produces a figure that
spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <var>placement</var> <code>b</code>
in <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
</p>
-<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
-<span id="index-_005ccaption"></span>
-The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
-figure. By default it is numbered. If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is
-used in the list of figures instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>).
+<span id="index-_005ccaption-1"></span>
+<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>). The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption
+text for the figure (see <a href="#g_t_005ccaption"><code>\caption</code></a>). By default it is numbered.
+If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is used in the list of figures
+instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>).
</p>
<p>This example makes a figure out of a graphic. LaTeX will place that
graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
@@ -6210,9 +6165,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="filecontents"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="filecontents">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushleft</a>, Previous: <a href="#figure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">figure</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>flushleft</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#figure" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>figure</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="filecontents-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.11 <code>filecontents</code></h3>
@@ -6253,21 +6210,18 @@
<p>The possible options are:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>force</code></dt>
-<dt><code>overwrite</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-force-option-for-filecontents"></span>
-<span id="index-overwrite-option-for-filecontents"></span>
+<dt id='index-force-option-for-filecontents'><span><code>force</code><a href='#index-force-option-for-filecontents' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span><code>overwrite</code></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-overwrite-option-for-filecontents"></span>
<p>Overwrite an existing file.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>noheader</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-noheader-option-for-filecontents"></span>
-<p>Omit the header. Equivalent to using <code>filecontents*</code>.
+<dt id='index-noheader-option-for-filecontents'><span><code>noheader</code><a href='#index-noheader-option-for-filecontents' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Omit the header. Equivalent to using <code>filecontents*</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>nosearch</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-nosearch-option-for-filecontents"></span>
-<p>Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if
+<dt id='index-nosearch-option-for-filecontents'><span><code>nosearch</code><a href='#index-nosearch-option-for-filecontents' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if
specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -6309,9 +6263,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="flushleft"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="flushleft">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushright</a>, Previous: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">filecontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>flushright</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>filecontents</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="flushleft-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.12 <code>flushleft</code></h3>
@@ -6337,7 +6293,7 @@
then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a double
backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
-see <a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>.
+see <a href="#g_t_005craggedright"><code>\raggedright</code></a>.
</p>
<p>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
flush left and ragged right.
@@ -6353,16 +6309,16 @@
</pre></div>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005craggedright" accesskey="1">\raggedright</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005craggedright" accesskey="1"><code>\raggedright</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005craggedright"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005craggedright">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushleft</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>flushleft</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005craggedright-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></h4>
@@ -6388,7 +6344,7 @@
<p>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
ragged right. It can be used inside an <var>environment</var> such as <code>quote</code>
or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
-see <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>.
+see <a href="#flushleft"><code>flushleft</code></a>.
</p>
<p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code>
command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX
@@ -6411,9 +6367,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="flushright"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="flushright">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="n" rel="next">itemize</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushleft</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>itemize</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>flushleft</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="flushright-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.13 <code>flushright</code></h3>
@@ -6437,22 +6396,22 @@
to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that
avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a new
line use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
-see <a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>.
+see <a href="#g_t_005craggedleft"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>.
</p>
-<p>For an example related to this environment, see <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>,
+<p>For an example related to this environment, see <a href="#flushleft"><code>flushleft</code></a>,
where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace <code>flushleft</code> by
<code>flushright</code>.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005craggedleft" accesskey="1">\raggedleft</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft" accesskey="1"><code>\raggedleft</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005craggedleft"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005craggedleft">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushright</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>flushright</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005craggedleft-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></h4>
@@ -6478,7 +6437,7 @@
<p>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
ragged left. It can be used inside an <var>environment</var> such as <code>quote</code>
or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
-see <a href="#flushright">flushright</a>.
+see <a href="#flushright"><code>flushright</code></a>.
</p>
<p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code>
command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX
@@ -6486,15 +6445,18 @@
scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
command that ends the paragraph unit.
</p>
-<p>For an example related to this environment, see <a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>,
+<p>For an example related to this environment, see <a href="#g_t_005craggedright"><code>\raggedright</code></a>,
where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace <code>\raggedright</code> by
<code>\raggedleft</code>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="itemize"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="itemize">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#letter" accesskey="n" rel="next">letter</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushright</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#letter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>flushright</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="itemize-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.14 <code>itemize</code></h3>
@@ -6530,23 +6492,23 @@
\end{itemize}
</pre></div>
-<p>With the default locale—without loading e.g. <samp>babel</samp> package
+<p>With the default locale—without loading e.g. <code>babel</code> package
with another language than USenglish—as a top-level list each label
would come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling
depends on the nesting level; see below.
</p>
<span id="index-_005citem-3"></span>
-<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). If you
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>). If you
give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
brackets, as in <code>\item[<var>Optional label</var>]</code>, then by default
<var>Optional label</var> will appear in bold and be flush right, so it could
extend into the left margin. For labels that are flush left see the
-<a href="#description">description</a> environment. Following the <code>\item</code> is the text of
+<a href="#description"><code>description</code></a> environment. Following the <code>\item</code> is the text of
the item, which may be empty or contain multiple paragraphs.
</p>
<p>Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
-as <code>enumerate</code> (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
+as <code>enumerate</code> (see <a href="#enumerate"><code>enumerate</code></a>).
</p>
<span id="index-_005clabelitemi"></span>
<span id="index-_005clabelitemii"></span>
@@ -6592,11 +6554,11 @@
<span id="index-enumitem-package"></span>
<p>For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see
-<a href="#description">description</a> and <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>. The <code>itemize</code>,
+<a href="#description"><code>description</code></a> and <a href="#enumerate"><code>enumerate</code></a>. The <code>itemize</code>,
<code>enumerate</code> and <code>description</code> environment use the same list
layout parameters. For a description, including the default values, and
-for information about customizing list layout, see <a href="#list">list</a>. The
-package <samp>enumitem</samp> is useful for customizing lists.
+for information about customizing list layout, see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>. The
+package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing lists.
</p>
<p>This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
lists.
@@ -6610,7 +6572,7 @@
space between items. Here is an example defining an <code>itemize*</code>
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
within a single item (<code>\parskip</code> is not list-specific,
-see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</a>):
+see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>):
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newenvironment{itemize*}%
@@ -6623,9 +6585,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="letter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="letter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#list" accesskey="n" rel="next">list</a>, Previous: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="p" rel="prev">itemize</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#list" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>list</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>itemize</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="letter-environment_003a-writing-letters"></span><h3 class="section">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</h3>
@@ -6637,9 +6601,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="list"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="list">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#math" accesskey="n" rel="next">math</a>, Previous: <a href="#letter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">letter</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#math" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>math</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#letter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="list-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.16 <code>list</code></h3>
@@ -6663,12 +6629,12 @@
<p>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
body. Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
standard: the <code>description</code>, <code>enumerate</code>, and <code>itemize</code>
-environments (see <a href="#description">description</a>, <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, and <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>).
+environments (see <a href="#description"><code>description</code></a>, <a href="#enumerate"><code>enumerate</code></a>, and <a href="#itemize"><code>itemize</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Instead, the <code>list</code> environment is most often used in macros. For
example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately
appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <code>list</code>, including
-<code>quotation</code>, <code>quote</code>, and <code>center</code> (see <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation & quote</a>, see <a href="#center">center</a>).
+<code>quotation</code>, <code>quote</code>, and <code>center</code> (see <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote"><code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></a>, see <a href="#center"><code>center</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This uses the <code>list</code> environment to define a new custom
environment.
@@ -6698,11 +6664,11 @@
additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a
<code>list</code> you can override the default labeling by giving <code>\item</code> an
optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
-above <code>\item[Special label.]</code>; see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>.
+above <code>\item[Special label.]</code>; see <a href="#g_t_005citem"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>.
</p>
<p>The mandatory second argument <var>spacing</var> has a list of commands.
This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
-<code>\usecounter{<var>countername</var>}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>). Use this
+<code>\usecounter{<var>countername</var>}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter"><code>\usecounter</code></a>). Use this
to tell LaTeX to number the items using the given counter. The
counter will be reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment,
and the counter is incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an
@@ -6734,16 +6700,12 @@
For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\itemindent</code>
-<span id="index-_005citemindent"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005citemindent'><span><code>\itemindent</code><a href='#index-_005citemindent' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-itemindent"></span><p>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <code>leftmargin</code>, of the
first line each item. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\itemsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005citemsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005citemsep'><span><code>\itemsep</code><a href='#index-_005citemsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-itemsep"></span><p>Vertical space between items, beyond the <code>\parsep</code>. The defaults
for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘<samp>article</samp>’, ‘<samp>book</samp>’,
and ‘<samp>report</samp>’ classes at 10 point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt
@@ -6756,17 +6718,13 @@
<code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\labelsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005clabelsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005clabelsep'><span><code>\labelsep</code><a href='#index-_005clabelsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-labelsep"></span><p>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
The default for LaTeX’s ‘<samp>article</samp>’, ‘<samp>book</samp>’,
and ‘<samp>report</samp>’ classes is <code>0.5em</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\labelwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005clabelwidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005clabelwidth'><span><code>\labelwidth</code><a href='#index-_005clabelwidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-labelwidth"></span><p>Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text that is wider than this then the first
line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
@@ -6788,9 +6746,7 @@
environment.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\leftmargin</code>
-<span id="index-_005cleftmargin-1"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cleftmargin-1'><span><code>\leftmargin</code><a href='#index-_005cleftmargin-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-leftmargin"></span><p>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
(or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
@@ -6808,9 +6764,7 @@
<code>2.2em</code>, and <code>\leftmarginiii</code> is <code>1.87em</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\listparindent</code>
-<span id="index-_005clistparindent"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005clistparindent'><span><code>\listparindent</code><a href='#index-_005clistparindent' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-listparindent"></span><p>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
<code>\leftmargin</code>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value
@@ -6817,9 +6771,7 @@
is <code>0pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\parsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cparsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cparsep'><span><code>\parsep</code><a href='#index-_005cparsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-parsep"></span><p>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.
The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘<samp>article</samp>’,
‘<samp>book</samp>’, and ‘<samp>report</samp>’ classes at 10 point size are: <code>4pt
@@ -6830,9 +6782,7 @@
minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\partopsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cpartopsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cpartopsep'><span><code>\partopsep</code><a href='#index-_005cpartopsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-partopsep"></span><p>Vertical space added, beyond <code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>, to the top
and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
@@ -6848,19 +6798,15 @@
minus2pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\rightmargin</code>
-<span id="index-_005crightmargin"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005crightmargin'><span><code>\rightmargin</code><a href='#index-_005crightmargin' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-rightmargin"></span><p>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
It must be non-negative.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\topsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctopsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctopsep'><span><code>\topsep</code><a href='#index-_005ctopsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-topsep"></span><p>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
-to <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</a>). The defaults for
+to <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>). The defaults for
the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘<samp>article</samp>’, ‘<samp>book</samp>’, and
‘<samp>report</samp>’ classes at 10 point size are: <code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code>,
<code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>. The
@@ -6883,47 +6829,47 @@
<var>h3</var>+<var>h4</var>-(<var>h0</var>+<var>h1</var>).
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>v0</var></dt>
-<dd><p><em><code>\topsep</code> + <code>\parskip</code></em> if
+<dt><span><var>v0</var></span></dt>
+<dd><p><em class='math'><code>\topsep</code> + <code>\parskip</code></em> if
the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and
<code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>+<code>\partopsep</code> if it does
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>v1</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>v1</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\parsep</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>v2</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>v2</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\itemsep</code>+<code>\parsep</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>v3</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>v3</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Same as <var>v0</var>. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h0</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h0</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\labelwidth</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h1</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h1</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\labelsep</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h2</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h2</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\listparindent</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h3</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h3</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\leftmargin</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h4</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h4</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\itemindent</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>h5</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>h5</var></span></dt>
<dd><p><code>\rightmargin</code>
</p>
</dd>
@@ -6945,21 +6891,15 @@
page break.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\@beginparpenalty</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_0040beginparpenalty"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_0040beginparpenalty'><span><code>\@beginparpenalty</code><a href='#index-_005c_0040beginparpenalty' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-beginparpenalty"></span><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <code>-51</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\@itempenalty</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_0040itempenalty"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_0040itempenalty'><span><code>\@itempenalty</code><a href='#index-_005c_0040itempenalty' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-itempenalty"></span><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <code>-51</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\@endparpenalty</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_0040endparpenalty"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_0040endparpenalty'><span><code>\@endparpenalty</code><a href='#index-_005c_0040endparpenalty' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="list-endparpenalty"></span><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <code>-51</code>).
</p>
</dd>
@@ -6972,7 +6912,7 @@
</p>
<p>This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
-See <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter"><code>\usecounter</code></a>.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{color}
@@ -6992,18 +6932,17 @@
{\end{list}}
</pre></div>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="1">\item</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">An entry in a list.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#trivlist" accesskey="2">trivlist</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">A restricted form of <code>list</code>.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="1"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a></li>
+<li><a href="#trivlist" accesskey="2"><code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005citem"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005citem">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#trivlist" accesskey="n" rel="next">trivlist</a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up">list</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#trivlist" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>list</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</h4>
@@ -7050,9 +6989,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="trivlist"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="trivlist">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\item</a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up">list</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>list</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="trivlist_003a-A-restricted-form-of-list"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.16.2 <code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></h4>
@@ -7085,7 +7026,7 @@
environments.
</p>
<p>Specifically, <code>trivlist</code> uses the current values of the list
-parameters (see <a href="#list">list</a>), except that <code>\parsep</code> is set to the
+parameters (see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>), except that <code>\parsep</code> is set to the
value of <code>\parskip</code>, and <code>\leftmargin</code>, <code>\labelwidth</code>,
and <code>\itemindent</code> are set to zero.
</p>
@@ -7101,9 +7042,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="math"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="math">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="n" rel="next">minipage</a>, Previous: <a href="#list" accesskey="p" rel="prev">list</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>minipage</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#list" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>list</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="math-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.17 <code>math</code></h3>
@@ -7128,9 +7072,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="minipage"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="minipage">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#picture" accesskey="n" rel="next">picture</a>, Previous: <a href="#math" accesskey="p" rel="prev">math</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#picture" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>picture</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#math" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>math</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="minipage-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.18 <code>minipage</code></h3>
@@ -7159,7 +7105,7 @@
small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So <code>minipage</code>
-is similar to <code>\parbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>) but here you can have
+is similar to <code>\parbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox"><code>\parbox</code></a>) but here you can have
paragraphs.
</p>
<p>This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
@@ -7191,21 +7137,19 @@
vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>c</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>(synonym <code>m</code>) Default. Positions the <code>minipage</code> so its
vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>t</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cvtop-plain-TeX"></span>
-<p>Match the top line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
-surrounding text (plain TeX’s <code>\vtop</code>).
+<dt id='index-_005cvtop-plain-TeX'><span><code>t</code><a href='#index-_005cvtop-plain-TeX' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Align the baseline of the top line in the <code>minipage</code> with the
+baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s <code>\vtop</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>b</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005cvbox-plain-TeX"></span>
-<p>Match the bottom line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
-surrounding text (plain TeX’s <code>\vbox</code>).
+<dt id='index-_005cvbox-_0028plain-TeX_0029'><span><code>b</code><a href='#index-_005cvbox-_0028plain-TeX_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><p>Align the baseline of the bottom line in the <code>minipage</code> with the
+baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s <code>\vbox</code>).
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -7230,19 +7174,19 @@
default is the value of <var>position</var>).
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>t</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Place <var>contents</var> at the top of the box.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>c</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Place it in the vertical center.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>b</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Place it at the box bottom.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>s</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>s</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Stretch <var>contents</var> out vertically; it must contain vertically
stretchable space.
</p>
@@ -7336,9 +7280,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="picture"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="picture">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="n" rel="next">quotation & quote</a>, Previous: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">minipage</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>minipage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="picture-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.19 <code>picture</code></h3>
@@ -7427,7 +7373,7 @@
</p>
<p>LaTeX’s default for <code>\unitlength</code> is <code>1pt</code>. It is a rigid
length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). Change it with the <code>\setlength</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a>). Make this change only outside of a <code>picture</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetlength"><code>\setlength</code></a>). Make this change only outside of a <code>picture</code>
environment.
</p>
<p>The <code>picture</code> environment supports using standard arithmetic
@@ -7438,7 +7384,7 @@
as an argument, as with <code>\put(1,2){...}</code>, it is not enclosed in
braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
-further up the page, for example, <em>y = 1</em> is <em>above</em> <em>y = 0</em>.
+further up the page, for example, <em class='math'>y = 1</em> is <em>above</em> <em class='math'>y = 0</em>.
</p>
<p>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <code>\put</code>,
<code>\multiput</code>, <code>\qbezier</code>, and <code>\graphpaper</code>. The most
@@ -7449,11 +7395,11 @@
</pre></div>
<p>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
-<em>(11.3,-0.3)</em>. The reference points for various objects will be
+<em class='math'>(11.3,-0.3)</em>. The reference points for various objects will be
described below.
<span id="index-LR-box"></span>
The <code>\put</code> command creates an <em>LR box</em> (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
-Anything that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</a>) can
+Anything that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><code>\mbox</code> & <code>\makebox</code></a>) can
go in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command. The reference point
will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture
</p>
@@ -7493,46 +7439,31 @@
picture. Another example of this usage is to put similar code in the
page header to get repeat material on each of a document’s pages.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="1">\put</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Place an object at a specified place.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="2">\multiput</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw multiple instances of an object.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="3">\qbezier</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a quadratic Bézier curve.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="4">\graphpaper</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw graph paper.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="5">\line</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a straight line.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="6">\linethickness</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="7">\thinlines</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The default line thickness.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="8">\thicklines</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">A heavier line thickness.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="9">\circle</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a circle.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw an oval.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make a stack of objects.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a line with an arrow.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a box of the specified size.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a box with a frame around it.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a frame around an object.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a dashed box.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="1"><code>\put</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="2"><code>\multiput</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="3"><code>\qbezier</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="4"><code>\graphpaper</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="5"><code>\line</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="6"><code>\linethickness</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="7"><code>\thinlines</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="8"><code>\thicklines</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="9"><code>\circle</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005coval"><code>\oval</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cshortstack"><code>\shortstack</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cvector"><code>\vector</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cframe"><code>\frame</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cdashbox"><code>\dashbox</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cput"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cput">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\multiput</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\multiput</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cput-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.1 <code>\put</code></h4>
@@ -7545,7 +7476,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Place <var>content</var> at the coordinate (<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>). See
-the discussion of coordinates and <code>\unitlength</code> in <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+the discussion of coordinates and <code>\unitlength</code> in <a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a>.
The <var>content</var> is processed in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) so it cannot
contain line breaks.
</p>
@@ -7560,9 +7491,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cmultiput"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cmultiput">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="n" rel="next">\qbezier</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\put</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\qbezier</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\put</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cmultiput-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.2 <code>\multiput</code></h4>
@@ -7576,10 +7509,10 @@
<p>Copy <var>obj</var> a total of <var>num-copies</var> times, with an increment of
<var>delta_x,delta_y</var>. The <var>obj</var> first appears at position
-<em>(x,y)</em>, then at <em>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</em>, and so on.
+<em class='math'>(x,y)</em>, then at <em class='math'>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</em>, and so on.
</p>
<p>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
-<a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">\graphpaper</a>).
+<a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper"><code>\graphpaper</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(10,10)
@@ -7594,9 +7527,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cqbezier"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cqbezier">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="n" rel="next">\graphpaper</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multiput</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\graphpaper</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\multiput</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cqbezier-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.3 <code>\qbezier</code></h4>
@@ -7648,9 +7583,11 @@
</pre></div>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cgraphpaper"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cgraphpaper">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\line</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\qbezier</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\line</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\qbezier</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cgraphpaper-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.4 <code>\graphpaper</code></h4>
@@ -7665,7 +7602,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-graphpap"></span>
<span id="index-graphpap-package"></span>
-<p>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <samp>graphpap</samp> package.
+<p>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <code>graphpap</code> package.
The grid’s origin is <code>(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)</code>.
Grid lines come every <var>spacing</var> units (the default is 10).
The grid extends <var>x_dimen</var> units to the right and <var>y_dimen</var> units up.
@@ -7685,9 +7622,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cline"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cline">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linethickness</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\graphpaper</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\linethickness</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\graphpaper</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cline-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.5 <code>\line</code></h4>
@@ -7702,9 +7641,9 @@
<p>Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for
every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The <var>travel</var> is the total horizontal
change—it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
-<em>x</em>. In the special case of vertical lines, where
+<em class='math'>x</em>. In the special case of vertical lines, where
(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), the <var>travel</var> gives the change in
-<em>y</em>.
+<em class='math'>y</em>.
</p>
<p>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
</p>
@@ -7714,9 +7653,9 @@
<p>For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because <var>travel</var>
specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up 10. Thus its
-endpoint is <em>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</em>. In particular, note that
-<em><var>travel</var>=4</em> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
-<em>x</em>.
+endpoint is <em class='math'>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</em>. In particular, note that
+<em class='math'><var>travel</var>=4</em> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<em class='math'>x</em>.
</p>
<p>The arguments <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are integers that can be
positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the
@@ -7730,10 +7669,9 @@
<p>If <var>travel</var> is negative then you get <code>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
\vector argument.</code>
</p>
-<span id="index-pict2e-package"></span>
<span id="index-graphics-packages"></span>
<span id="index-package_002c-pict2e"></span>
-<span id="index-pict2e-package-1"></span>
+<span id="index-pict2e-package"></span>
<span id="index-package_002c-TikZ"></span>
<span id="index-TikZ-package"></span>
@@ -7755,7 +7693,7 @@
(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
-<code>picture</code>, see the package <samp>pict2e</samp>
+<code>picture</code>, see the package <code>pict2e</code>
(<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e">https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e</a>). Another solution
is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks,
MetaPost, or Asymptote.
@@ -7762,9 +7700,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005clinethickness"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005clinethickness">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinlines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\line</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\thinlines</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\line</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005clinethickness-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.6 <code>\linethickness</code></h4>
@@ -7780,13 +7720,15 @@
picture to be <var>dim</var>, which must be a positive length
(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It differs from <code>\thinlines</code> and
<code>\thicklines</code> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
-lines, circles, or ovals.
+lines, circles, or ovals (see <a href="#g_t_005coval"><code>\oval</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cthinlines"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cthinlines">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thicklines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\linethickness</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\thicklines</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\linethickness</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cthinlines-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.7 <code>\thinlines</code></h4>
@@ -7795,13 +7737,15 @@
<p>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default
thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
-changed with either <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> or <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a>.
+changed with either <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness"><code>\linethickness</code></a> or <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines"><code>\thicklines</code></a>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cthicklines"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cthicklines">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\circle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thinlines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\circle</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\thinlines</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cthicklines-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></h4>
@@ -7809,14 +7753,16 @@
<p>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also
-<a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> and <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines">\thinlines</a>. This command is illustrated
-in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+<a href="#g_t_005clinethickness"><code>\linethickness</code></a> and <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines"><code>\thinlines</code></a>. This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier"><code>\qbezier</code></a>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005ccircle"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005ccircle">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="n" rel="next">\oval</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thicklines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\oval</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\thicklines</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005ccircle-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.9 <code>\circle</code></h4>
@@ -7844,9 +7790,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005coval"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005coval">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="n" rel="next">\shortstack</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\circle</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\shortstack</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\circle</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005coval-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.10 <code>\oval</code></h4>
@@ -7859,21 +7807,22 @@
\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>portion</var>]
</pre></div>
-<p>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
-<var>portion</var> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
-For half an oval take <var>portion</var> to be one of these.
+<p>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners, hereinafter referred to as an
+<em>oval</em>. The optional argument <var>portion</var> allows you to produce
+only half or a quarter of the oval. For half an oval take <var>portion</var>
+to be one of these.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>t</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>top half
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>b</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>bottom half
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>r</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>right half
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>l</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>left half
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -7892,14 +7841,16 @@
</p>
<p>These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
-20pt (see <a href="#g_t_005ccircle">\circle</a> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
-boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+20pt (see <a href="#g_t_005ccircle"><code>\circle</code></a> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
+frames with a small amount of corner rounding.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cshortstack"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cshortstack">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vector</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\oval</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\vector</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\oval</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cshortstack-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.11 <code>\shortstack</code></h4>
@@ -7913,29 +7864,33 @@
<p>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
</p>
-<p>This labels the <em>y</em> axis.
+<p>This labels the <em class='math'>y</em> axis by writing the word ‘<samp><em class='math'>y</em></samp>’ above
+the word ‘<samp>axis</samp>’.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
-\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
-\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(5,2.5)(-0.75,0)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+ \put(-0.2,2){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+\end{picture}
</pre></div>
<p>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
-In the above example the <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</a> puts the stack flush
-right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
-the left of the <em>y</em> axis.
+In the above example the <code>\makebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><code>\mbox</code> & <code>\makebox</code></a>) puts
+the stack flush right in a zero width box so in total the short stack
+sits slightly to the left of the <em class='math'>y</em> axis.
</p>
<p>The valid positions are:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>r</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Make objects flush right
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>l</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Make objects flush left
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>c</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Center objects (default)
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -7943,11 +7898,13 @@
<span id="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-_005cshortstack-objects_0029"></span>
<p>Separate objects into lines with <code>\\</code>. These stacks are short in
that, unlike in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, here the
-rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+rows are not spaced out to be of even baseline skips. Thus, in
<code>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</code> the first and last rows are taller than
-the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
-usual interline spacing with <code>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</code>,
-or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <code>\shortstack{X \\
+the middle two, and therefore the baseline skip between the two middle
+rows is smaller than that between the third and last row. You can
+adjust row heights and depths either by putting in the usual interline
+spacing with <code>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut"><code>\strut</code></a>),
+or explicitly, via an zero-width box <code>\shortstack{X \\
\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</code> or by using <code>\\</code>’s optional
argument <code>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</code>.
</p>
@@ -7956,9 +7913,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cvector"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cvector">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makebox (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\shortstack</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\shortstack</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cvector-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.12 <code>\vector</code></h4>
@@ -7973,13 +7932,13 @@
<p>Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The
<var>travel</var> is the total horizontal change—it is not the
-length of the vector, it is the change in <em>x</em>. In the special case
+length of the vector, it is the change in <em class='math'>x</em>. In the special case
of vertical vectors, if (<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), then
-<var>travel</var> gives the change in <em>y</em>.
+<var>travel</var> gives the change in <em class='math'>y</em>.
</p>
-<p>For an example see <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+<p>For an example see <a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a>.
</p>
-<p>For elaboration on <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> see <a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a>. As
+<p>For elaboration on <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> see <a href="#g_t_005cline"><code>\line</code></a>. As
there, the values of <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are limited. For
<code>\vector</code> you must chooses integers between -4 and 4,
inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus,
@@ -7988,9 +7947,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\framebox (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vector</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\vector</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.13 <code>\makebox</code> (picture)</h4>
@@ -8006,9 +7967,9 @@
<p>Make a box to hold <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
because <var>rec-width</var> and <var>rec-height</var> are numbers specifying
-distances in terms of the <code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>). This
-command is similar to the normal <code>\makebox</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</a>) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
-command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+distances in terms of the <code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a>). This
+command is similar to the normal <code>\makebox</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><code>\mbox</code> & <code>\makebox</code></a>) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
+command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <code>\unitlength</code> and height 4
times <code>\unitlength</code>.
@@ -8023,19 +7984,19 @@
two of these letters.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>t</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Puts <var>text</var> the top of the box.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>b</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> at the bottom.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>l</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> on the left.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>r</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> on the right.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8043,9 +8004,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frame</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\frame</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.14 <code>\framebox</code> (picture)</h4>
@@ -8058,13 +8021,13 @@
\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>This is the same as <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> except that it puts a frame
+<p>This is the same as <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a> except that it puts a frame
around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is
the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the
<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
-<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>). This command is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts
the text in the center.
@@ -8078,7 +8041,7 @@
<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
-<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> for the values that it can
+<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a> for the values that it can
take.
</p>
<span id="index-_005cfboxrule-1"></span>
@@ -8088,13 +8051,15 @@
</p>
<p>For this command, you must specify the <var>width</var> and <var>height</var>. If
you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
-determined in some other way then either use <code>\fbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox & \framebox</a>) or <code>\frame</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a>).
+determined in some other way then either use <code>\fbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><code>\fbox</code> & <code>\framebox</code></a>) or <code>\frame</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cframe"><code>\frame</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cframe"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cframe">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\dashbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\framebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\dashbox</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cframe-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.15 <code>\frame</code></h4>
@@ -8108,14 +8073,16 @@
<p>Puts a rectangular frame around <var>contents</var>. The reference point is
the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to <code>\framebox</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>), this command puts no extra space is put
-between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cdashbox"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cdashbox">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frame</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\frame</code></a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>picture</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cdashbox-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.19.16 <code>\dashbox</code></h4>
@@ -8131,7 +8098,7 @@
<p>Create a dashed rectangle around <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
-<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>).
+<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture"><code>picture</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The required arguments are: dashes are <var>dash-len</var> units long, with
the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
@@ -8138,7 +8105,7 @@
<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
</p>
<p>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
-<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> for the values that it can
+<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a> for the values that it can
take.
</p>
<p>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <var>dash-len</var>.
@@ -8155,9 +8122,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="quotation-_0026-quote"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="quotation-_0026-quote">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabbing</a>, Previous: <a href="#picture" accesskey="p" rel="prev">picture</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>tabbing</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#picture" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>picture</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="quotation-_0026-quote-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.20 <code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></h3>
@@ -8209,9 +8179,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="tabbing"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="tabbing">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#table" accesskey="n" rel="next">table</a>, Previous: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">quotation & quote</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#table" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>table</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="tabbing-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.21 <code>tabbing</code></h3>
@@ -8235,7 +8207,7 @@
<p>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments
-<code>tabular</code> (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>) or <code>array</code> (see <a href="#array">array</a>) because
+<code>tabular</code> (see <a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a>) or <code>array</code> (see <a href="#array"><code>array</code></a>) because
in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
known in advance.
</p>
@@ -8278,12 +8250,12 @@
</p>
<span id="index-pattern_002c-current-tab-stops_002c-tabbing"></span>
<p>At any point the <code>tabbing</code> environment has a <em>current tab stop
-pattern</em>, a sequence of <em><var>n</var> > 0</em> tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
+pattern</em>, a sequence of <em class='math'><var>n</var> > 0</em> tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
etc. These create <var>n</var> corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is
always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab
stop number <var>i</var> is set if it is assigned a horizontal
position on the page. Tab stop number <var>i</var> can only be set if
-all the stops 0, …, <em>i-1</em> have already been set; normally
+all the stops 0, …, <em class='math'>i-1</em> have already been set; normally
later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
</p>
<p>By default any text typeset in a <code>tabbing</code> environment is typeset
@@ -8291,54 +8263,40 @@
done in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
</p>
<p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
-They are all fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+They are all fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\\ <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005c_005c-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_005c-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\\ <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005c_005c-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>End a tabbed line and typeset it.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Sets a tab stop at the current position.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\> <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\> <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005c_003e"></span>
<p>Advances to the next tab stop.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\<</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_003c"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_003c'><span><code>\<</code><a href='#index-_005c_003c' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\+</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_002b"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_002b'><span><code>\+</code><a href='#index-_005c_002b' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
necessary.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\-</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_002d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_002d'><span><code>\-</code><a href='#index-_005c_002d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
necessary.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
everything from the most recent <code>\></code>, <code>\<</code>, <code>\'</code>,
<code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the previous column and aligned
@@ -8345,9 +8303,7 @@
to the right, flush against the current column’s tab stop.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last
column because there’s no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves
@@ -8358,9 +8314,7 @@
<code>\end{tabbing}</code> command that ends the line.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
-<span id="index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029'><span><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code><a href='#index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005ca_0027-_0028acute-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></span>
<span id="index-_005ca_0060-_0028grave-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></span>
<span id="index-_005ca_003d-_0028macron-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></span>
@@ -8369,9 +8323,7 @@
use the commands <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\kill</code>
-<span id="index-_005ckill"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ckill'><span><code>\kill</code><a href='#index-_005ckill' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except
that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
Any <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
@@ -8378,23 +8330,17 @@
effect.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\poptabs</code>
-<span id="index-_005cpoptabs"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cpoptabs'><span><code>\poptabs</code><a href='#index-_005cpoptabs' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-_005cpoptabs-1"></span>
<p>Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\pushtabs</code>
-<span id="index-_005cpushtabs"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cpushtabs'><span><code>\pushtabs</code><a href='#index-_005cpushtabs' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
tab stop positions in the middle of a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\tabbingsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctabbingsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctabbingsep'><span><code>\tabbingsep</code><a href='#index-_005ctabbingsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Distance of the text moved by <code>\'</code> to left of current tab stop.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8438,15 +8384,17 @@
<p>This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
-(see <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+(see <a href="#verbatim"><code>verbatim</code></a>) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
there are quite a few packages, including <code>algorithm2e</code>,
<code>fancyvrb</code>, <code>listings</code>, and <code>minted</code>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="table"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="table">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabular</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabbing</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>tabular</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>tabbing</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="table-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.22 <code>table</code></h3>
@@ -8495,11 +8443,11 @@
float placement algorithm, see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
</p>
<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
-<span id="index-_005ccaption-1"></span>
-The <code>\caption</code> command is also optional. It specifies caption text
-<var>title</var> for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
-<var>lottitle</var> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
-instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>).
+<span id="index-_005ccaption-2"></span>
+The <code>\caption</code> command is also optional. It specifies caption
+text <var>title</var> for the table (see <a href="#g_t_005ccaption"><code>\caption</code></a>). By default it is
+numbered. If its optional <var>lottitle</var> is present then that text is
+used in the list of tables instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>).
</p>
<p>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -8519,9 +8467,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="tabular"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="tabular">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="n" rel="next">thebibliography</a>, Previous: <a href="#table" accesskey="p" rel="prev">table</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>thebibliography</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#table" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>table</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="tabular-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.23 <code>tabular</code></h3>
@@ -8577,7 +8527,7 @@
<p>The required and optional arguments to <code>tabular</code> consist of:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>pos</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>pos</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional. Specifies the table’s vertical position. The default is to
align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: <code>t</code>
@@ -8589,32 +8539,32 @@
no difference.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>cols</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>cols</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
column and intercolumn material.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>l</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>A column of left-aligned items.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>r</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>A column of right-aligned items.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>c</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>A column of centered items.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>|</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>|</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>@{<var>text or space</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>@{<var>text or space</var>}</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Insert <var>text or space</var> at this location in every row. The <var>text
or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX’s
<code>book</code>, <code>article</code>, and <code>report</code> classes will put on
@@ -8675,7 +8625,7 @@
specifier.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>p{<var>wd</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>p{<var>wd</var>}</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <var>wd</var>, as if
it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}{...}</code> command.
</p>
@@ -8687,10 +8637,10 @@
must appear inside braces, as with <code>{\centering .. \\
..}</code>). Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
-<code>\newline</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>).
+<code>\newline</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline"><code>\newline</code></a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>*{<var>num</var>}{<var>cols</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>*{<var>num</var>}{<var>cols</var>}</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Equivalent to <var>num</var> copies of <var>cols</var>, where <var>num</var> is a
positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers. Thus the
specifier <code>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</code> is equivalent to
@@ -8701,7 +8651,7 @@
</dl>
</dd>
-<dt><var>width</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>width</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required for <code>tabular*</code>, not allowed for <code>tabular</code>. Specifies
the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. The space between columns
should be rubber, as with <code>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</code>, to allow
@@ -8715,9 +8665,7 @@
<p>Parameters that control formatting:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\arrayrulewidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005carrayrulewidth"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005carrayrulewidth'><span><code>\arrayrulewidth</code><a href='#index-_005carrayrulewidth' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="tabular-arrayrulewidth"></span><p>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <code>|</code>,
<code>\hline</code>, and <code>\vline</code> in the <code>tabular</code> and <code>array</code>
environments. The default is ‘<samp>.4pt</samp>’. Change it as in
@@ -8724,24 +8672,18 @@
<code>\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\arraystretch</code>
-<span id="index-_005carraystretch"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005carraystretch'><span><code>\arraystretch</code><a href='#index-_005carraystretch' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="tabular-arraystrech"></span><p>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <code>tabular</code> and
<code>array</code> environments is multiplied. The default is ‘<samp>1</samp>’, for
no scaling. Change it as <code>\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\doublerulesep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cdoublerulesep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cdoublerulesep'><span><code>\doublerulesep</code><a href='#index-_005cdoublerulesep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="tabular-doublerulesep"></span><p>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
<code>||</code> specifier. The default is ‘<samp>2pt</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\tabcolsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005ctabcolsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005ctabcolsep'><span><code>\tabcolsep</code><a href='#index-_005ctabcolsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="tabular-tabcolsep"></span><p>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
‘<samp>6pt</samp>’. Change it with <code>\setlength</code>.
</p>
@@ -8752,22 +8694,19 @@
environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
lines:
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="1">\multicolumn</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make an item spanning several columns.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="2">\vline</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a vertical line.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="3">\cline</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="4">\hline</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="1"><code>\multicolumn</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="2"><code>\vline</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="3"><code>\cline</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="4"><code>\hline</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cmulticolumn"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cmulticolumn">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\vline</code></a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>tabular</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cmulticolumn-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.23.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></h4>
@@ -8851,7 +8790,7 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
- &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
Classical &1730 &1820 \\
Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
@@ -8866,9 +8805,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cvline"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cvline">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multicolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\cline</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>tabular</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cvline-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.23.2 <code>\vline</code></h4>
@@ -8879,7 +8820,7 @@
bar <code>|</code> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
body of a table; typically a table’s vertical lines are specified in
<code>tabular</code>’s <var>cols</var> argument and overridden as needed with
-<code>\multicolumn</code> (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+<code>\multicolumn</code> (see <a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row’s second
entry the <code>\hfill</code> moves the <code>\vline</code> to the left edge of the
@@ -8902,9 +8843,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005ccline"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005ccline">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\hline</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\vline</code></a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>tabular</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005ccline-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.23.3 <code>\cline</code></h4>
@@ -8935,9 +8878,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005chline"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005chline">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\cline</code></a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>tabular</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005chline-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.23.4 <code>\hline</code></h4>
@@ -8962,9 +8907,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="thebibliography"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="thebibliography">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">theorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabular</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>theorem</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>tabular</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="thebibliography-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.24 <code>thebibliography</code></h3>
@@ -9030,28 +8978,25 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-babel-1"></span>
<span id="index-babel-package-1"></span>
-<p>Language support packages such as <samp>babel</samp> will automatically
+<p>Language support packages such as <code>babel</code> will automatically
redefine <code>\refname</code> or <code>\bibname</code> to fit the selected
language.
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#list">list</a>, for the list layout control parameters.
+<p>See <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>, for the list layout control parameters.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="1">\bibitem</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Specify a bibliography item.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="2">\cite</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a bibliography item.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="3">\nocite</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Include an item in the bibliography.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="4">Using BibTeX</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Automatic generation of bibliographies.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="1"><code>\bibitem</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="2"><code>\cite</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="3"><code>\nocite</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="4">Using BibTeX</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cbibitem"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cbibitem">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\cite</code></a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>thebibliography</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cbibitem-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.24.1 <code>\bibitem</code></h4>
@@ -9075,7 +9020,7 @@
<var>cite_key</var> can be any string of
letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>, for an example.
+<p>See <a href="#thebibliography"><code>thebibliography</code></a>, for an example.
</p>
<p>When provided, the optional <var>label</var> becomes the entry label and the
<code>enumi</code> counter is not incremented. With this
@@ -9096,7 +9041,7 @@
<p>the first entry will be styled as ‘<samp>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</samp>’ (The
amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
the <var>widest-label</var> argument of the <code>thebibliography</code>
-environment; see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>.) Similarly, <code>... based on
+environment; see <a href="#thebibliography"><code>thebibliography</code></a>.) Similarly, <code>... based on
\cite{latexdps}</code> will produce ‘<samp>... based on [Lamport 1994]</samp>’.
</p>
<p>If you mix <code>\bibitem</code> entries having a <var>label</var> with those that
@@ -9124,9 +9069,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005ccite"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005ccite">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\nocite</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bibitem</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\nocite</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\bibitem</code></a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>thebibliography</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005ccite-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.24.2 <code>\cite</code></h4>
@@ -9146,7 +9093,7 @@
<p>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
<var>keys</var>. The mandatory <var>keys</var> is a citation key, or a
-comma-separated list of citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>).
+comma-separated list of citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem"><code>\bibitem</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This
</p>
@@ -9175,7 +9122,7 @@
(see <a href="#Jobname">Jobname</a>). For instance, <code>\cite{latexdps}</code> writes
‘<samp>\citation{latexdps}</samp>’ to that file. This information is used by
BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you
-have actually cited; see <a href="#g_t_005cnocite">\nocite</a> also.
+have actually cited; see <a href="#g_t_005cnocite"><code>\nocite</code></a> also.
</p>
<p>If <var>keys</var> is not in your bibliography information then you get
‘<samp>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</samp>’, and in the output
@@ -9183,14 +9130,16 @@
There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
<code>\cite{texbok}</code> then you need to correct the spelling. On the
other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
-information and so changed the <samp>.aux</samp> file (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>) then
+information and so changed the <samp>.aux</samp> file (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem"><code>\bibitem</code></a>) then
the fix may be to run LaTeX again.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnocite"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cnocite">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="n" rel="next">Using BibTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="n" rel="next">Using BibTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\cite</code></a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>thebibliography</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnocite-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.24.3 <code>\nocite</code></h4>
@@ -9206,15 +9155,17 @@
<samp><var>jobname</var>.aux</samp> (see <a href="#Jobname">Jobname</a>).
</p>
<p>The mandatory argument <var>keys</var> is a comma-separated list of one or
-more citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>). This information is used by
+more citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem"><code>\bibitem</code></a>). This information is used by
BibTeX to include these works in your reference list even though you
-have not explicitly cited them (see <a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a>).
+have not explicitly cited them (see <a href="#g_t_005ccite"><code>\cite</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Using-BibTeX"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="subsection" id="Using-BibTeX">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\nocite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\nocite</code></a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>thebibliography</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Using-BibTeX-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</h4>
@@ -9224,13 +9175,13 @@
<span id="index-_005cbibliographystyle"></span>
<span id="index-_005cbibliography"></span>
-<p>As described in <code>thebibliography</code> (see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>), a
+<p>As described in <code>thebibliography</code> (see <a href="#thebibliography"><code>thebibliography</code></a>), a
sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
-documentation on CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a>).
+documentation on CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>).
</p>
-<p>With BibTeX, you don’t use <code>thebibliography</code>
-(see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>). Instead, include these lines.
+<p>With BibTeX, you don’t use the <code>thebibliography</code> environment
+directly (see <a href="#thebibliography"><code>thebibliography</code></a>). Instead, include these lines:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\bibliographystyle{<var>bibstyle</var>}
@@ -9242,25 +9193,25 @@
distributed with BibTeX are:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>alpha</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>alpha</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>plain</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>plain</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Labels are integers.
Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>unsrt</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>unsrt</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
</p></dd>
-<dt><code>abbrv</code></dt>
+<dt><span><code>abbrv</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
</p></dd>
</dl>
<p>Many, many other BibTeX style files exist,
-tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN’s listing
-<a href="https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</a>.
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See the CTAN topic
+<a href="https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty">https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty</a>.
</p>
<p>The <code>\bibliography</code> command is what actually produces the
bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
@@ -9291,12 +9242,73 @@
files, and rely on BibTeX to include in this document only those that
you used.
</p>
+<span id="index-_002a_002c-to-_005cnocite-all-keys"></span>
+<span id="index-_005cnocite-_007b_002a_007d_002c-for-all-keys"></span>
+<p>With BibTeX, the <var>keys</var> argument to <code>\nocite</code> can also be
+the single character ‘<samp>*</samp>’. This means to implicitly cite all
+entries from all given bibliographies.
+</p>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#BibTeX-error-messages" accesskey="1">BibTeX error messages</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="theorem"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsubsection" id="BibTeX-error-messages">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="n" rel="next">titlepage</a>, Previous: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="p" rel="prev">thebibliography</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="u" rel="up">Using BibTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
+<span id="BibTeX-error-messages-1"></span><h4 class="subsubsection">8.24.4.1 BibTeX error messages</h4>
+
+<span id="index-BibTeX-error-messages"></span>
+<span id="index-error-messages_002c-from-BibTeX"></span>
+<span id="index-_002eaux-file-and-BibTeX-commands"></span>
+
+<p>If you forget to use <code>\bibliography</code> or <code>\bibliographystyle</code>
+in your document (or, less likely, any <code>\cite</code> or <code>\nocite</code>
+command), BibTeX will issue an error message. Because BibTeX
+can be used with any program, not just LaTeX, the error messages
+refer to the internal commands read by BibTeX (from the <samp>.aux</samp>
+file), rather than the user-level commands described above.
+</p>
+<p>Here is a table showing internal commands mentioned in the BibTeX
+errors, and the corresponding user-level commands.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt id='index-_005cbibdata'><span><code>\bibdata</code><a href='#index-_005cbibdata' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cbibliography-and-internal-_005cbibdata"></span>
+<p><code>\bibliography</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt id='index-_005cbibstyle'><span><code>\bibstyle</code><a href='#index-_005cbibstyle' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005cbibliographystyle-and-internal-_005cbibstyle"></span>
+<p><code>\bibliographystyle</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt id='index-_005ccitation'><span><code>\citation</code><a href='#index-_005ccitation' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-_005ccite-and-internal-_005ccitation"></span>
+<span id="index-_005cnocite-and-internal-_005ccitation"></span>
+<p><code>\cite</code>, <code>\nocite</code>
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>For example, if your document has no <code>\bibliographystyle</code>
+command, BibTeX complains as follows:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file <var>document</var>.aux
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="theorem">
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>titlepage</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>thebibliography</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
<span id="theorem-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.25 <code>theorem</code></h3>
<span id="index-environment_002c-theorem"></span>
@@ -9314,7 +9326,7 @@
<p>Produces ‘<samp>Theorem <var>n</var></samp>’ in boldface followed by <var>theorem
body</var> in italics. The numbering possibilities for <var>n</var> are described under
-<code>\newtheorem</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>).
+<code>\newtheorem</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
@@ -9343,9 +9355,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="titlepage"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="titlepage">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="n" rel="next">verbatim</a>, Previous: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">theorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>verbatim</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>theorem</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="titlepage-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></h3>
@@ -9393,13 +9407,15 @@
</pre></div>
<p>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
-environment, use <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>).
+environment, use <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle"><code>\maketitle</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="verbatim"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="verbatim">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#verse" accesskey="n" rel="next">verse</a>, Previous: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">titlepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#verse" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>verse</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>titlepage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="verbatim-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.27 <code>verbatim</code></h3>
@@ -9441,7 +9457,7 @@
<p>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
instance in the argument to a <code>\section</code>. This is not the same as
-commands being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>), instead it just cannot work,
+commands being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>), instead it just cannot work,
as the <code>verbatim</code> environment changes the catcode regime before
processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward,
nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has
@@ -9470,18 +9486,18 @@
<p>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
<code>fancyvrb</code>. Another is <code>verbatimbox</code>.
</p>
-<p>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a>).
+<p>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>).
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cverb" accesskey="1">\verb</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cverb" accesskey="1"><code>\verb</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cverb"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="g_t_005cverb">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="u" rel="up">verbatim</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>verbatim</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cverb-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">8.27.1 <code>\verb</code></h4>
@@ -9543,7 +9559,7 @@
<span id="index-minted-package-2"></span>
<p>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
-<code>\verb</code>. One is <samp>listings</samp>, another is <samp>minted</samp>.
+<code>\verb</code>. One is <code>listings</code>, another is <code>minted</code>.
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-cprotect-1"></span>
<span id="index-cprotect-package-1"></span>
@@ -9550,7 +9566,7 @@
<p>You cannot use <code>\verb</code> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
the argument to a <code>\section</code>. It is not a question of <code>\verb</code>
-being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>), instead it just cannot work, as the
+being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>), instead it just cannot work, as the
<code>\verb</code> command changes the catcode regime before reading its
argument, and restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a
macro argument the content of the argument has already be converted to a
@@ -9559,9 +9575,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="verse"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="verse">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="p" rel="prev">verbatim</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>verbatim</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="verse-1"></span><h3 class="section">8.28 <code>verse</code></h3>
@@ -9612,9 +9631,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Line-breaking"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Line-breaking">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environments</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environments</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Line-breaking-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">9 Line breaking</h2>
@@ -9635,30 +9657,23 @@
text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="1">\\</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new line.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="2">\obeycr & \restorecr</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make each input line start a new output line.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="3">\newline</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Break the line
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="4">\- (hyphenation)</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert explicit hyphenation.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="5">\discretionary</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Explicit control of the hyphen character.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="6">\fussy & \sloppy</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Be more or less particular with line breaking.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="7">\hyphenation</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="8">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="1"><code>\\</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="2"><code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="3"><code>\newline</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="4"><code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="5"><code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="6"><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="7"><code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="8"><code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005c_005c"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005c_005c">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="n" rel="next">\obeycr & \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005c_005c-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.1 <code>\\</code></h3>
@@ -9684,16 +9699,16 @@
extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>) and can be negative. The text before
the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
-to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
-<p>The starred form, <code>\\*</code>, tells LaTeX not to start a new page
-between the two lines, by issuing a <code>\nobreak</code>.
-</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
a tale of woe}
</pre></div>
+<p>The starred form, <code>\\*</code>, tells LaTeX not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <code>\nobreak</code>.
+</p>
<p>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
particular, don’t start new paragraphs with <code>\\</code>. Instead leave a
blank line between the two paragraphs. And don’t put in a sequence of
@@ -9701,7 +9716,7 @@
<code>\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
<code>\leavevmode\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
<code>\vspace*{<var>length</var>}</code> if you want the space to not be thrown
-out at the top of a new page (see <a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a>).
+out at the top of a new page (see <a href="#g_t_005cvspace"><code>\vspace</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>\\</code> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
such as in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment or in an
@@ -9708,9 +9723,9 @@
equation environment.
</p>
<p>The <code>\\</code> command is a synonym for <code>\newline</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline"><code>\newline</code></a>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
exception is the <code>p{...}</code> column in a <code>tabular</code>
-environment; see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+environment; see <a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>\\</code> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
so that its definition in normal text, a <code>center</code> environment, a
@@ -9740,9 +9755,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\\</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newline</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\\</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.2 <code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></h3>
@@ -9756,7 +9773,7 @@
<code>\restorecr</code> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
</p>
<p>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use
-<code>verbatim</code> (see <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>) instead.
+<code>verbatim</code> (see <a href="#verbatim"><code>verbatim</code></a>) instead.
</p>
<p>With LaTeX’s usual defaults, this
</p>
@@ -9793,9 +9810,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewline"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewline">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\obeycr & \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewline-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.3 <code>\newline</code></h3>
@@ -9803,10 +9822,10 @@
<span id="index-new-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029"></span>
<p>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
-the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
-(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>), the <code>\newline</code> command is equivalent to
-double-backslash (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>). This command is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+it, so the text before the end of line is not stretched. That is, in
+paragraph mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>), the <code>\newline</code> command is
+equivalent to double-backslash (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c"><code>\\</code></a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>However, the two commands are different inside a <code>tabular</code> or
<code>array</code> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
@@ -9819,7 +9838,7 @@
single cell of the table.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{p{1in}@{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
</pre></div>
@@ -9828,9 +9847,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="n" rel="next">\discretionary</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newline</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newline</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029"></span><h3 class="section">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</h3>
@@ -9839,8 +9860,9 @@
<p>Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
-those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX
-might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+those points and not at any of the other hyphenation points that
+LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
@@ -9866,16 +9888,18 @@
better fit.
</p>
<p>The <code>\-</code> command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
-require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
-like <code>Hef-\linebreak feron</code>. Of course, if you later change the
-text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
+<code>Hef-\linebreak feron</code>. Of course, if you later change the text
+then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
care.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cdiscretionary"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cdiscretionary">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fussy & \sloppy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029"></span><h3 class="section">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</h3>
<span id="index-hyphenation_002c-discretionary"></span>
@@ -9893,10 +9917,10 @@
<p>If a line break occurs at the point where <code>\discretionary</code> appears
then TeX puts <var>pre-break</var> at the end of the current line and puts
<var>post-break</var> at the start of the next line. If there is no line
-break here then TeX puts <var>no-break</var>
+break here then TeX puts <var>no-break</var>.
</p>
<p>In ‘<samp>difficult</samp>’ the three letters <code>ffi</code> form a ligature. But
-TeX can nonetheless break between the two f’s with this.
+TeX can nonetheless break between the two ‘<samp>f</samp>’’s with this.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
@@ -9906,10 +9930,13 @@
automatically by TeX’s hyphenation algorithm.
</p>
+
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hyphenation</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\discretionary</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.6 <code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></h3>
@@ -9924,25 +9951,27 @@
spacing.
</p>
<p>The default is <code>\fussy</code>. Line breaking in a paragraph is
-controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
-<code>\par</code>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
-the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
-the command.
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the end of the
+paragraph, i.e., at the blank line or <code>\par</code> or displayed
+equation ending that paragraph. So to affect the line breaks, include
+that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#sloppypar" accesskey="1">sloppypar</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Environment version of \sloppy command.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#sloppypar" accesskey="1"><code>sloppypar</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="sloppypar"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="sloppypar">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="u" rel="up">\fussy & \sloppy</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="sloppypar-1"></span><h4 class="subsection">9.6.1 <code>sloppypar</code></h4>
-<span id="index-sloppypar"></span>
+<span id="index-environment_002c-sloppypar"></span>
+<span id="index-sloppypar-environment-1"></span>
+
<span id="index-sloppypar-environment"></span>
<p>Synopsis:
@@ -9953,7 +9982,7 @@
\end{sloppypar}
</pre></div>
-<p>Typeset the paragraphs with <code>\sloppy</code> in effect (see <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy & \sloppy</a>). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+<p>Typeset the paragraphs with <code>\sloppy</code> in effect (see <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy"><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a>). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
‘<samp>Overfull box</samp>’ or ‘<samp>Underfull box</samp>’ errors.
</p>
<p>The example is simple.
@@ -9975,9 +10004,12 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005chyphenation"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005chyphenation">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fussy & \sloppy</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005chyphenation-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></h3>
@@ -10001,13 +10033,17 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
-exactly. Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code> commands accumulate.
+exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code>
+commands accumulate.
</p>
+
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hyphenation</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1"></span><h3 class="section">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></h3>
@@ -10031,12 +10067,12 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
-is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
-4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
-or prevent the break. But for instance, <code>\nolinebreak[1]</code> is a
-suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
-more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+is an integer lying between 0 and 4 that allows you to soften the
+instruction. The default is 4, so that without the optional argument
+these commands entirely force or prevent the break. But for instance,
+<code>\nolinebreak[1]</code> is a suggestion that another place may be better.
+The higher the number, the more insistent the request. Both commands
+are fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
standard legal text.
@@ -10048,15 +10084,17 @@
</pre></div>
<p>When you issue <code>\linebreak</code>, the spaces in the line are stretched
-out so that it extends to the right margin. See <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>
-and <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>, to have the spaces not stretched out.
+out so that the break point reaches the right margin. See <a href="#g_t_005c_005c"><code>\\</code></a>
+and <a href="#g_t_005cnewline"><code>\newline</code></a>, to have the spaces not stretched out.
</p>
-
<hr>
-<span id="Page-breaking"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Page-breaking">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Line breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Line breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Page-breaking-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">10 Page breaking</h2>
@@ -10092,22 +10130,19 @@
</p>
<p>See <a href="#Layout">Layout</a>, for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="1">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new page; eject floats.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="2">\newpage</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new page.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="3">\enlargethispage</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Enlarge the current page a bit.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="4">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="1"><code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="2"><code>\newpage</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="3"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="4"><code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newpage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage-1"></span><h3 class="section">10.1 <code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></h3>
@@ -10135,7 +10170,7 @@
two-sided printing, <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also makes the next page of
content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
a blank page. The <code>\clearpage</code> command is robust while
-<code>\cleardoublepage</code> is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<code>\cleardoublepage</code> is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
@@ -10156,7 +10191,7 @@
<p>If you want LaTeX’s standard <code>\chapter</code> command to do this then
add the line <code>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</code>.
</p>
-<p>The command <code>\newpage</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>) also ends the current
+<p>The command <code>\newpage</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage"><code>\newpage</code></a>) also ends the current
page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if LaTeX is in
two-column mode then <code>\newpage</code> ends the current column while
<code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end the current page.
@@ -10164,9 +10199,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewpage"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewpage">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\enlargethispage</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewpage-1"></span><h3 class="section">10.2 <code>\newpage</code></h3>
@@ -10180,7 +10217,7 @@
<pre class="example">\newpage
</pre></div>
-<p>End the current page. This command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<p>End the current page. This command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
@@ -10188,12 +10225,12 @@
</p>
<p>While the commands <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also
end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</a>). And, if LaTeX is in
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>). And, if LaTeX is in
two-column mode then <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end
the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
<code>\newpage</code> only ends the current column.
</p>
-<p>In contrast with <code>\pagebreak</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a>),
+<p>In contrast with <code>\pagebreak</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak"><code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></a>),
the <code>\newpage</code> command will cause the new page to start right where
requested. This
</p>
@@ -10211,9 +10248,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cenlargethispage"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cenlargethispage">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newpage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cenlargethispage-1"></span><h3 class="section">10.3 <code>\enlargethispage</code></h3>
@@ -10229,7 +10268,7 @@
<p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page. The required
argument <var>size</var> must be a rigid length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It may be
-positive or negative. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
@@ -10248,9 +10287,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\enlargethispage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak-1"></span><h3 class="section">10.4 <code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></h3>
@@ -10279,7 +10320,7 @@
prevent the break. But for instance <code>\nopagebreak[1]</code> suggests to
LaTeX that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number,
the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
@@ -10302,14 +10343,25 @@
stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
margin. This can look strange, and if <code>\flushbottom</code> is in effect
this can cause you to get ‘<samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active</samp>’. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>, for a command that
+occurred while \output is active</samp>’. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage"><code>\newpage</code></a>, for a command that
does not have these effects.
</p>
+<span id="index-_005csamepage"></span>
+<span id="index-samepage-environment"></span>
+<p>(There is an obsolete declaration <code>\samepage</code>, which tries to only
+allow a break between two paragraphs. There is a related environment
+<code>samepage</code>, also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For
+more on keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ entry
+<a href="https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk">https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk</a>.)
+</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Footnotes"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Footnotes">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Definitions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Definitions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Footnotes-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">11 Footnotes</h2>
@@ -10334,26 +10386,21 @@
<p>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>).
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="1">\footnote</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert a footnote.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="2">\footnotemark</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert footnote mark only.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="3">\footnotetext</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert footnote text only.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="4">Footnotes in section headings</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Chapter or section titles.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="5">Footnotes in a table</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Table footnotes.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes" accesskey="6">Footnotes of footnotes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Multiple classes of footnotes.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="1"><code>\footnote</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="2"><code>\footnotemark</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="3"><code>\footnotetext</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="4">Footnotes in section headings</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="5">Footnotes in a table</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes" accesskey="6">Footnotes of footnotes</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cfootnote"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cfootnote">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cfootnote-1"></span><h3 class="section">11.1 <code>\footnote</code></h3>
@@ -10387,7 +10434,7 @@
<p>By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
this with something like
<code>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}</code>, which
-uses a sequence of symbols (see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+uses a sequence of symbols (see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
<code>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</code>.
</p>
@@ -10397,9 +10444,7 @@
<span id="index-parameters_002c-for-footnotes"></span>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\footnoterule</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfootnoterule"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cfootnoterule'><span><code>\footnoterule</code><a href='#index-_005cfootnoterule' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="footnote-footnoterule"></span><p>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s
footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
<code>slides</code>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
@@ -10414,11 +10459,10 @@
</pre></div>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\footnotesep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfootnotesep"></span>
-</dt>
-<dd><span id="footnote-footnotesep"></span><p>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<dt id='index-_005cfootnotesep'><span><code>\footnotesep</code><a href='#index-_005cfootnotesep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="footnote-footnotesep"></span><span id="index-strut"></span>
+<p>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut"><code>\strut</code></a>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
<code>\footnotesize</code> fonts (see <a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a>), therefore there is no
extra space between footnotes. This is ‘<samp>6.65pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>10pt</samp>’,
‘<samp>7.7pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>11pt</samp>’, and ‘<samp>8.4pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>12pt</samp>’. Change
@@ -10427,7 +10471,7 @@
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>The <code>\footnote</code> command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<p>The <code>\footnote</code> command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>LaTeX’s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
<code>\footnote</code>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
@@ -10441,13 +10485,15 @@
<code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the <code>footnote</code> counter, so
they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
-shown alphabetically. See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a> and <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a>.
+shown alphabetically. See <a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a> and <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cfootnotemark"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cfootnotemark">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotetext</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnote</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\footnote</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cfootnotemark-1"></span><h3 class="section">11.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></h3>
@@ -10461,15 +10507,15 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
-for the footnote see <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>. The optional argument
+for the footnote see <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>. The optional argument
<var>number</var> causes the command to use that number to determine the
footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
</p>
<p>If you use <code>\footnotemark</code> without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <var>number</var>
-then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote.
+increments the <code>footnote</code> counter, but if you use the optional
+<var>number</var> then it does not. The next example produces several
+consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
@@ -10477,10 +10523,11 @@
and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
</pre></div>
-<p>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
-common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
-both the first and third authors (<code>\thanks</code> is a version of
-<code>footnote</code>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+<p>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of
+the number of the common mark. This example gives the same
+institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors
+(<code>\thanks</code> is a version of <code>\footnote</code>), by-hand giving the
+number of the footnote.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
@@ -10510,7 +10557,7 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-hyperref"></span>
<span id="index-hyperref-package"></span>
-<p>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <samp>cleveref</samp>.
+<p>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <code>cleveref</code>.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
@@ -10524,13 +10571,15 @@
<span id="index-package_002c-hyperref-1"></span>
<span id="index-hyperref-package-1"></span>
-<p>It will work with the package <samp>hyperref</samp>.
+<p>It will work with the package <code>hyperref</code>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cfootnotetext"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cfootnotetext">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in section headings</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in section headings</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cfootnotetext-1"></span><h3 class="section">11.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></h3>
@@ -10544,19 +10593,21 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Place <var>text</var> at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
-<code>\footnotemark</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>) and can come anywhere after
+<code>\footnotemark</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>) and can come anywhere after
that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
The optional argument <var>number</var> changes the number of the footnote
mark.
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a> and <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a>, for usage
+<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark"><code>\footnotemark</code></a> and <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a>, for usage
examples.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Footnotes-in-section-headings"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Footnotes-in-section-headings">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in a table</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotetext</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in a table</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Footnotes-in-section-headings-1"></span><h3 class="section">11.4 Footnotes in section headings</h3>
@@ -10585,7 +10636,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Footnotes-in-a-table"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Footnotes-in-a-table">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes of footnotes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes in section headings</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -10596,7 +10649,7 @@
<p>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code>
command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a
-<code>minipage</code> environment as here (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>).
+<code>minipage</code> environment as here (see <a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{center}
@@ -10607,7 +10660,7 @@
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{%
- Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ Starting with \textit{HMS Surprise}.}
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
@@ -10616,7 +10669,7 @@
<p>Inside a <code>minipage</code>, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
that with something like
<code>\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>).
</p>
<p>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
<code>minipage</code>. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
@@ -10644,8 +10697,11 @@
\end{center}
</pre></div>
-<p>For a floating <code>table</code> environment (see <a href="#table">table</a>), use the
-<samp>tablefootnote</samp> package.
+<span id="index-package_002c-tablefootnote"></span>
+<span id="index-tablefootnote-package"></span>
+
+<p>For a floating <code>table</code> environment (see <a href="#table"><code>table</code></a>), use the
+<code>tablefootnote</code> package.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
@@ -10668,7 +10724,9 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Footnotes-of-footnotes"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Footnotes-of-footnotes">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Previous: <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes in a table</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -10681,7 +10739,7 @@
<p>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
-<samp>bigfoot</samp> extends LaTeX’s default footnote mechanism in many
+<code>bigfoot</code> extends LaTeX’s default footnote mechanism in many
ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -10691,14 +10749,17 @@
...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{%
- First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+ Noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
</pre></div>
<hr>
-<span id="Definitions"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Definitions">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Counters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Counters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Definitions-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">12 Definitions</h2>
@@ -10706,40 +10767,28 @@
<p>LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="1">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">(Re)define a new command.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="2">\providecommand</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new command, if name not used.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="3">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the status of the at-sign character.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="4">\@ifstar</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define your own commands with *-variants.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="5">\newcounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new counter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="6">\newlength</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new length.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="7">\newsavebox</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new box.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="8">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new environment.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="9">\newtheorem</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new theorem-like environment.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new font name.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Using tricky commands.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Discard extra spaces.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#xspace-package">xspace package</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Space after a macro, conditionally.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="1"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="2"><code>\providecommand</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="3"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="4"><code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="5"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="6"><code>\newlength</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="7"><code>\newsavebox</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="8"><code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="9"><code>\newtheorem</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont"><code>\newfont</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend"><code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#xspace-package">xspace package</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="n" rel="next">\providecommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\providecommand</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></h3>
@@ -10785,15 +10834,15 @@
<p>These are the parameters:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>cmd</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>cmd</var></span></dt>
<dd>
-<p>Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>,
-and must not begin with the four letter string <code>\end</code>. For
+<p>Required; <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>,
+and must not begin with the four character string <code>\end</code>. For
<code>\newcommand</code>, it must not be already defined. For
<code>\renewcommand</code>, this name must already be defined.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>nargs</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this
argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
@@ -10801,7 +10850,7 @@
different number of arguments than the old version.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>optargdefault</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>optargdefault</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
(which may be the empty string). If <var>optargsdefault</var> is not present
@@ -10822,7 +10871,7 @@
to the empty string.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>defn</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>defn</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
<code>\<var>cmd</var></code>. The parameters <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>,
... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code> are replaced by the values that you supply when
@@ -10832,10 +10881,11 @@
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
-sequence, as in ‘<samp>\cmd </samp>’. If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command (‘<samp>\cmd{} </samp>’, and
-another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘<samp>\cmd\ </samp>’).
+<p>TeX ignores blanks in the source following a control word
+(see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), as in ‘<samp>\cmd </samp>’. If you actually want a
+space there, one solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command
+(‘<samp>\cmd{} </samp>’, and another solution is to use an explicit control
+space (‘<samp>\cmd\ </samp>’).
</p>
<p>A simple example of defining a new command:
<code>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</code> results in <code>\RS</code> being
@@ -10848,8 +10898,8 @@
to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
something like ‘<samp>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</samp>’.
</p>
-<p>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
-one required argument.
+<p>Here the first definition creates a command with no arguments, and the
+second, one with one required argument.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
@@ -10857,7 +10907,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Use the first as in <code>I highly recommend \student{} to you</code>. The
-second has a variable, so that <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
+second has a variable argument, so that <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
<code>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</code>, which ultimately expands to
something like ‘<samp>Definition~3.14</samp>’.
</p>
@@ -10902,11 +10952,57 @@
<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>.
</p>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Control-sequences" accesskey="1">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cprovidecommand"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="subsection" id="Control-sequences">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Up: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="u" rel="up"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
+<span id="Control-sequence_002c-control-word-and-control-symbol"></span><h4 class="subsection">12.1.1 Control sequence, control word and control symbol</h4>
+
+<p>When reading input TeX converts the sequences of read characters into
+a sequence of <em>tokens</em>. When TeX sees a backslash <code>\</code>, it
+will handle the following characters in a special way in order to make a
+<em>control sequence</em> token.
+</p>
+<p>The control sequences fall into two categories:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> <em>control word</em>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<code>\</code> followed by at least one ASCII letter, followed by at least one
+blank. The sequence of at least one ASCII letter is called the
+<em>control sequence name</em>.
+</li><li> <em>control symbol</em>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<code>\</code> followed by one non-letter character.
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>Blanks after a control word are ignored and do not produce any
+whitespace in the output (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a> and
+<a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></a>).
+</p>
+<p>Just as the <code>\relax</code> command does nothing, the following will print
+‘<samp>Hello!</samp>’:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Hel\relax <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->
+ <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->lo!
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This is because blanks after <code>\relax</code>, including the newline are
+ignored, and blanks at the beginning of a line are also ignored
+(see <a href="#Leading-blanks">Leading blanks</a>).
+</p>
+<hr>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cprovidecommand">
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
<span id="g_t_005cprovidecommand-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.2 <code>\providecommand</code></h3>
<span id="index-_005cprovidecommand"></span>
@@ -10917,12 +11013,12 @@
<p>Synopses, one of:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
-\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
-\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example">\providecommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
@@ -10930,14 +11026,14 @@
as <code>\newcommand</code>. If a command of this name already exists then
this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file
that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
-See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>, for the description of the arguments.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>, for the description of the arguments.
</p>
<p>This example
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
-\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
->From \myaffiliation.
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Lyc\'ee Henri IV}
+From \myaffiliation.
</pre></div>
<p>outputs ‘<samp>From Saint Michael's College</samp>’. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code>,
@@ -10945,9 +11041,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="n" rel="next">\@ifstar</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\providecommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\@ifstar</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\providecommand</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></h3>
@@ -11009,9 +11107,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005c_0040ifstar"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005c_0040ifstar">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005c_0040ifstar-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.4 <code>\@ifstar</code></h3>
@@ -11049,7 +11149,7 @@
different number, or no arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX
document a command using an at-sign <code>@</code> in its name must be
enclosed inside a <code>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</code> block
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This example of <code>\@ifstar</code> defines the command <code>\ciel</code> and a
variant <code>\ciel*</code>. Both have one required argument. A call to
@@ -11092,11 +11192,11 @@
<span id="index-xparse-package-1"></span>
<p>There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of
-<code>\@ifstar</code>. (1) The <samp>suffix</samp> package allows the
+<code>\@ifstar</code>. (1) The <code>suffix</code> package allows the
construct <code>\newcommand\mycommand{<var>unstarred-variant</var>}</code>
followed by
<code>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{<var>starred-variant</var>}</code>.
-(2) LaTeX provides the <samp>xparse</samp> package, which allows
+(2) LaTeX provides the <code>xparse</code> package, which allows
this code:
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -11108,9 +11208,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewcounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewcounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newlength</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\@ifstar</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newlength</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\@ifstar</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewcounter_003a-Allocating-a-counter"></span><h3 class="section">12.5 <code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</h3>
@@ -11136,8 +11238,8 @@
<var>supercounter</var> is incremented. For example, ordinarily
<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time you
increment <var>section</var>, either with <code>\stepcounter</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>), then LaTeX will reset <var>subsection</var> to
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>), then LaTeX will reset <var>subsection</var> to
zero.
</p>
<p>This example
@@ -11164,9 +11266,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewlength"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewlength">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newsavebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewlength-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.6 <code>\newlength</code></h3>
@@ -11179,15 +11283,16 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newlength{<var>arg</var>}
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\<var>len</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Allocate a new length register (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). The required argument
-<var>arg</var> must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The new register holds
-rubber lengths such as <code>72.27pt</code> or <code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code>
-(a LaTeX length register is what plain TeX calls a <code>skip</code>
-register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
-<code>\<var>arg</var></code> must not be already defined.
+<code>\<var>len</var></code> has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under
+normal circumstances. The new register holds rubber lengths such as
+<code>72.27pt</code> or <code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code> (a LaTeX length
+register is what plain TeX calls a <code>skip</code> register). The
+initial value is zero. The control sequence <code>\<var>len</var></code> must not
+be already defined.
</p>
<p>An example:
</p>
@@ -11196,15 +11301,17 @@
</pre></div>
<p>If you forget the backslash then you get ‘<samp>Missing control sequence
-inserted</samp>’. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+inserted</samp>’. If the control sequence already exists then you get
something like ‘<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>’.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewsavebox"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewsavebox">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newlength</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewsavebox-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.7 <code>\newsavebox</code></h3>
@@ -11222,7 +11329,7 @@
material that has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or
manipulate (see <a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a>). The bin name \<var>cmd</var> is required, must
start with a backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command.
-This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
</p>
@@ -11242,9 +11349,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newtheorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newsavebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.8 <code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></h3>
@@ -11285,7 +11394,7 @@
environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>env</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>env</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <code>\</code>.
It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>. For
@@ -11295,7 +11404,7 @@
name of an existing environment.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>nargs</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
arguments appear after the <code>\begin</code>, as in
@@ -11305,7 +11414,7 @@
different number of arguments than the old version.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>optargdefault</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>optargdefault</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
environment is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var> (which
may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the
@@ -11326,7 +11435,7 @@
<code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>begdef</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>begdef</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>. Within <var>begdef</var>, the parameters
<code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, ... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code>, are replaced by the
@@ -11334,7 +11443,7 @@
below.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>enddef</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>enddef</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>. This may not contain any parameters, that is,
you cannot use <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, etc., here (but see the final
@@ -11397,7 +11506,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
-<var>enddef</var>, in this case in a box (see <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox & \savebox</a>).
+<var>enddef</var>, in this case in a box (see <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><code>\sbox</code> & <code>\savebox</code></a>).
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
@@ -11412,9 +11521,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewtheorem"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewtheorem">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newfont</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\newfont</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewtheorem-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.9 <code>\newtheorem</code></h3>
@@ -11454,14 +11565,14 @@
<p>This command creates a counter named <var>name</var>. In addition, unless
the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, inside of the
theorem-like environment the current <code>\ref</code> value will be that of
-<code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+<code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>).
</p>
-<p>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+<p>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Arguments:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><var>name</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>name</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not
begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. It must not be the name of an
existing environment, and the command name <code>\<var>name</var></code> must not
@@ -11468,12 +11579,12 @@
already be defined.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>title</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>title</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
number. For example, ‘<samp>Theorem</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>numbered_within</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>numbered_within</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a sectional
unit such as <code>chapter</code> or <code>section</code>. When the
<var>numbered_within</var> counter is reset then the <var>name</var> environment’s
@@ -11483,7 +11594,7 @@
<code>\the<var>name</var></code> is set to <code>\arabic{<var>name</var>}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><var>numbered_like</var></dt>
+<dt><span><var>numbered_like</var></span></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment. The
new environment will be numbered in sequence with <var>numbered_like</var>.
</p>
@@ -11554,9 +11665,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cnewfont"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cnewfont">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="n" rel="next">\protect</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newtheorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\protect</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cnewfont-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.10 <code>\newfont</code></h3>
@@ -11601,9 +11714,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cprotect"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cprotect">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newfont</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\newfont</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cprotect-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.11 <code>\protect</code></h3>
@@ -11631,9 +11746,9 @@
<em>moving argument</em>. A command is fragile if it can
expand during this process into invalid TeX code. Some examples of
moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption{...}</code>
-command (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>), in the <code>\thanks{...}</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>), and in @-expressions in the <code>tabular</code> and
-<code>array</code> environments (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+command (see <a href="#figure"><code>figure</code></a>), in the <code>\thanks{...}</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle"><code>\maketitle</code></a>), and in @-expressions in the <code>tabular</code> and
+<code>array</code> environments (see <a href="#tabular"><code>tabular</code></a>).
</p>
<p>If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
preceding it with <code>\protect</code>. Every fragile commands must be
@@ -11670,9 +11785,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#xspace-package" accesskey="n" rel="next">xspace package</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\protect</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#xspace-package" accesskey="n" rel="next">xspace package</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\protect</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.12 <code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></h3>
@@ -11693,11 +11810,12 @@
<pre class="example">\ignorespacesafterend
</pre></div>
-<p>Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
-command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
-from plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+<p>Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore blanks (that is, characters of
+catcode 10 such as space or tabulation) after the end of the
+command up to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a
+command from plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
</p>
-<p>The <code>ignorespaces</code> is often used when defining commands via
+<p>The <code>\ignorespaces</code> is often used when defining commands via
<code>\newcommand</code>, or <code>\newenvironment</code>, or <code>\def</code>. The
example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
@@ -11719,7 +11837,7 @@
\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
</pre></div>
-<p>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+<p>A second example shows blanks being removed from the front of text. The
commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
<code>\fullname</code> will reproduce that.
@@ -11742,7 +11860,7 @@
<code>\begin{newenvironment}{<var>env
name</var>}{... \ignorespaces}{...}</code>.
</p>
-<p>To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+<p>To strip blanks off the end of an environment use
<code>\ignorespacesafterend</code>. An example is that this will show a much
larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
between the second and third.
@@ -11767,13 +11885,18 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="xspace-package"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="xspace-package">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="xspace-package-1"></span><h3 class="section">12.13 xspace package</h3>
<span id="index-_005cxspace"></span>
+<span id="index-package_002c-xspace"></span>
+<span id="index-xspace-package"></span>
+
<span id="index-spaces_002c-ignore-around-commands-1"></span>
<span id="index-commands_002c-ignore-spaces-1"></span>
@@ -11785,13 +11908,14 @@
\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\xspace</code> macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a
-space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters.
+<p>The <code>\xspace</code> macro, when used at the end of a command definition,
+adds a space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation
+characters.
</p>
-<p>After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single character
-command names using non-letters such as <code>\$</code>), TeX gobbles white
-space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has ‘<samp>Vermont</samp>’
-placed snugly against the period, without any intervening space.
+<p>After a command control sequence that is a control word (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>, as opposed to control symbols such as <code>\$</code>), TeX
+gobbles blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output
+has ‘<samp>Vermont</samp>’ placed snugly against the period, without any
+intervening space.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
@@ -11799,15 +11923,16 @@
The \VT{} summers are nice.
</pre></div>
-<p>But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy curly
+<p>But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the empty curly
braces or else there would be no space separating ‘<samp>Vermont</samp>’ from
-‘<samp>summers</samp>’. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space
-<code>\ </code> for this. See <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</a>.)
+‘<samp>summers</samp>’. (Many authors instead use a backslash-space
+<code>\ </code> for this. See <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></a>.)
</p>
-<p>The <samp>xspace</samp> package provides <code>\xspace</code>. It is for writing
-commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a
-space after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of
-exceptions. In this example, the dummy braces are not needed.
+<p>The <code>xspace</code> package provides <code>\xspace</code>. It is for writing
+commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be place
+at the very end of the definition of these commands. It inserts a space
+after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of
+exceptions. In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
@@ -11818,21 +11943,25 @@
<p>The default exception list contains the characters <code>,.'/?;:!~-)</code>,
the open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above,
and the commands <code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotemark</code>. Add to that
-list as with <code>\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}</code> and remove
-from that list as with <code>\xspaceremoveexception{!}</code>.
+list as with <code>\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}</code> which adds
+<code>\myfni</code> and <code>\myfnii</code> to the list, and remove from that
+list as with <code>\xspaceremoveexception{!}</code>.
</p>
<p>A comment: many experts prefer not to use <code>\xspace</code>. Putting it in
a definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
-But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because
+But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
<code>\xspace</code> will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
command, and so <code>\xspace</code> can make editing material harder and more
-error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces.
+error-prone than instead always inserting the empty braces.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Counters"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Counters">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="n" rel="next">Lengths</a>, Previous: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Definitions</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="n" rel="next">Lengths</a>, Previous: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Definitions</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Counters-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">13 Counters</h2>
@@ -11849,6 +11978,23 @@
<p>Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard document
classes to control numbering.
</p>
+<span id="index-part-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-chapter-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-section-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-subsection-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-subsubsection-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-paragraph-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-subparagraph-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-page-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-equation-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-figure-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-table-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-footnote-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-mpfootnote-counter-1"></span>
+<span id="index-enumi-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-enumii-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-enumiii-counter"></span>
+<span id="index-enumiv-counter"></span>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
@@ -11858,39 +12004,32 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The <code>mpfootnote</code> counter is used by the <code>\footnote</code> command
-inside of a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>). The counters <code>enumi</code>
+inside of a minipage (see <a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a>). The counters <code>enumi</code>
through <code>enumiv</code> are used in the <code>enumerate</code> environment, for
-up to four levels of nesting (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
+up to four levels of nesting (see <a href="#enumerate"><code>enumerate</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
</p>
-<p>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.
+<p>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a>.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="1">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Print value of a counter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="2">\usecounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3">\value</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="4">\setcounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the value of a counter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="5">\addtocounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add a quantity to a counter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6">\refstepcounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7">\stepcounter</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="8">\day & \month & \year</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Numeric date values.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="1"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="2"><code>\usecounter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3"><code>\value</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="4"><code>\setcounter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="5"><code>\addtocounter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7"><code>\stepcounter</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="8"><code>\day</code> & <code>\month</code> & <code>\year</code></a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\usecounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Printing-counters"></span><h3 class="section">13.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</h3>
@@ -11906,47 +12045,35 @@
start with a backslash.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’,
<small class="enddots">...</small> If the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
you get ‘<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</samp>’
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the counter’s value
is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter
too large.</samp>’
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘<samp>5</samp>’ or ‘<samp>-2</samp>’.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the
counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
LaTeX does not print anything in the output.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the
counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
LaTeX does not print anything in the output.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code>
-<span id="index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d'><span><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code><a href='#index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> using a sequence of nine symbols that
are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
<var>counter</var> should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the
@@ -11957,16 +12084,16 @@
<p>Here are the symbols:
</p>
<table>
-<thead><tr><th width="10%">Number</th><th width="30%">Name</th><th width="30%">Command</th><th width="30%">Symbol</th></tr></thead>
-<tr><td width="10%">1</td><td width="30%">asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast</code></td><td width="30%">*</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">2</td><td width="30%">dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger</code></td><td width="30%">†</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">3</td><td width="30%">ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger</code></td><td width="30%">‡</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">4</td><td width="30%">section-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\S</code></td><td width="30%">§</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">5</td><td width="30%">paragraph-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\P</code></td><td width="30%">¶</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">6</td><td width="30%">double-vert</td><td width="30%"><code>\parallel</code></td><td width="30%">‖</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">7</td><td width="30%">double-asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast\ast</code></td><td width="30%">**</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">8</td><td width="30%">double-dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger\dagger</code></td><td width="30%">††</td></tr>
-<tr><td width="10%">9</td><td width="30%">double-ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></td><td width="30%">‡‡</td></tr>
+<thead><tr><th width="11%">Number</th><th width="30%">Name</th><th width="30%">Command</th><th width="28%">Symbol</th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td width="11%">1</td><td width="30%">asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast</code></td><td width="28%">*</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">2</td><td width="30%">dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger</code></td><td width="28%">†</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">3</td><td width="30%">ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger</code></td><td width="28%">‡</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">4</td><td width="30%">section-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\S</code></td><td width="28%">§</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">5</td><td width="30%">paragraph-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\P</code></td><td width="28%">¶</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">6</td><td width="30%">double-vert</td><td width="30%"><code>\parallel</code></td><td width="28%">‖</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">7</td><td width="30%">double-asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast\ast</code></td><td width="28%">**</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">8</td><td width="30%">double-dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger\dagger</code></td><td width="28%">††</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="11%">9</td><td width="30%">double-ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></td><td width="28%">‡‡</td></tr>
</table>
</dd>
@@ -11974,9 +12101,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cusecounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cusecounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="n" rel="next">\value</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\value</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cusecounter-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.2 <code>\usecounter</code></h3>
@@ -11991,12 +12120,12 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Used in the second argument of the <code>list</code> environment
-(see <a href="#list">list</a>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+(see <a href="#list"><code>list</code></a>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
<var>counter</var>. It initializes <var>counter</var> to zero, and arranges that
when <code>\item</code> is called without its optional argument then
<var>counter</var> is incremented by <code>\refstepcounter</code>, making its value
-be the current <code>ref</code> value (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>). This command is fragile
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+be the current <code>ref</code> value (see <a href="#g_t_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
enumerated with <var>testcounter</var>:
@@ -12014,9 +12143,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cvalue"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cvalue">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\setcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\setcounter</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\usecounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cvalue-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.3 <code>\value</code></h3>
@@ -12045,12 +12176,12 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The <code>\value</code> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
-counter. For that, see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>.
+counter. For that, see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a>.
</p>
<p>It is often used in <code>\setcounter</code> or <code>\addtocounter</code> but
<code>\value</code> can be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such
as in <code>\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}</code>. It must not be
-preceded by <code>\protect</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+preceded by <code>\protect</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This example inserts <code>\hspace{4\parindent}</code>.
</p>
@@ -12061,9 +12192,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csetcounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csetcounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtocounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\value</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\value</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csetcounter-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.4 <code>\setcounter</code></h3>
@@ -12092,9 +12225,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005caddtocounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005caddtocounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\refstepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\setcounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005caddtocounter-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.5 <code>\addtocounter</code></h3>
@@ -12119,9 +12254,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005crefstepcounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005crefstepcounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtocounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005crefstepcounter-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.6 <code>\refstepcounter</code></h3>
@@ -12134,9 +12271,9 @@
</pre></div>
<p>Globally increments the value of <var>counter</var> by one, as does
-<code>\stepcounter</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>). The difference is that this
+<code>\stepcounter</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>). The difference is that this
command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
-definition of “counters numbered within”, see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.)
+definition of “counters numbered within”, see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a>.)
</p>
<p>In addition, this command also defines the current <code>\ref</code> value
to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
@@ -12146,9 +12283,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cstepcounter"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cstepcounter">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="n" rel="next">\day & \month & \year</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\refstepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\day</code> & <code>\month</code> & <code>\year</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cstepcounter-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.7 <code>\stepcounter</code></h3>
@@ -12162,18 +12301,20 @@
<p>Globally adds one to <var>counter</var> and resets all counters numbered
within it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”,
-see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.)
+see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter"><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a>.)
</p>
<p>This command differs from <code>\refstepcounter</code> in that this one does
not influence references; that is, it does not define the current
<code>\ref</code> value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>).
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\stepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear-1"></span><h3 class="section">13.8 <code>\day</code> & <code>\month</code> & <code>\year</code></h3>
@@ -12183,10 +12324,10 @@
<p>LaTeX defines the counter <code>\day</code> for the day of the month
(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <code>\month</code> for the month of
-the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <code>\year</code>.
-When TeX starts up, they are set from the current values on the
-system. The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string
-representing the current day (see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and <code>\year</code> for
+the year. When TeX starts up, they are set from the current values
+on the system. The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string
+representing the current day (see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday"><code>\today</code></a>).
</p>
<p>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
could be incorrect by the end. In addition, TeX does no sanity
@@ -12199,11 +12340,16 @@
<p>gives no error or warning and results in the output ‘<samp>-2, -4</samp>’ (the
bogus month value produces no output).
</p>
-
+<p>See <a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a>, to force the date to a given value from the
+command line.
+</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Lengths"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Lengths">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="n" rel="next">Making paragraphs</a>, Previous: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Counters</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="n" rel="next">Making paragraphs</a>, Previous: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Counters</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Lengths-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">14 Lengths</h2>
@@ -12315,10 +12461,10 @@
\end{minipage}
</pre></div>
-<p>TeX actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
-<code>fil</code>, <code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>. The later ones are more
-infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
-the middle one (see <a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a> and see <a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a>).
+<p>TeX has three levels of infinity for glue components: <code>fil</code>,
+<code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>. The later ones are more infinite than
+the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one
+(see <a href="#g_t_005chfill"><code>\hfill</code></a> and see <a href="#g_t_005cvfill"><code>\vfill</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
that after <code>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</code> and
@@ -12325,30 +12471,23 @@
<code>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</code> then the value of
<code>\zlength</code> is <code>3in</code>.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="1">Units of length</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">The units that LaTeX knows.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="2">\setlength</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the value of a length.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="3">\addtolength</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add a quantity to a length.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="4">\settodepth</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the depth of something.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="5">\settoheight</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the height of something.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="6">\settowidth</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the width of something.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="7">\stretch</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add infinite stretchability.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Expressions" accesskey="8">Expressions</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Compute with lengths and integers.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="1">Units of length</a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="2"><code>\setlength</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="3"><code>\addtolength</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="4"><code>\settodepth</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="5"><code>\settoheight</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="6"><code>\settowidth</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="7"><code>\stretch</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Expressions" accesskey="8">Expressions</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Units-of-length"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="Units-of-length">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\setlength</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Units-of-length-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.1 Units of length</h3>
@@ -12358,93 +12497,99 @@
math mode.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>pt</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-pt"></span>
-<span id="index-point"></span>
-<span id="units-of-length-pt"></span><p>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units
-is 1point = 2.845mm = .2845cm.
+<dt id='index-pt'><span><code>pt</code><a href='#index-pt' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-point"></span>
+<span id="units-of-length-pt"></span><p>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The (approximate) conversion to metric units
+is 1point = .35146mm = .035146cm.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>pc</code></dt>
+<dt id='index-pc'><span><code>pc</code><a href='#index-pc' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-pica"></span>
-<span id="index-pc"></span>
<span id="units-of-length-pc"></span><p>Pica, 12 pt
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>in</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-in"></span>
-<span id="index-inch"></span>
-<span id="units-of-length-in"></span><p>Inch, 72.27 pt
+<dt id='index-in'><span><code>in</code><a href='#index-in' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-inch"></span>
+<span id="units-of-length-in"></span><p>Inch, 72.27 pt
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>bp</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-bp"></span>
-<span id="index-big-point"></span>
+<dt id='index-bp'><span><code>bp</code><a href='#index-bp' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-big-point"></span>
+<span id="index-PostScript-point"></span>
<span id="units-of-length-bp"></span><p>Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>cm</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-centimeter"></span>
-<span id="index-cm"></span>
-<span id="units-of-length-cm"></span><p>Centimeter
+<dt id='index-mm'><span><code>mm</code><a href='#index-mm' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-millimeter"></span>
+<span id="units-of-length-mm"></span><p>Millimeter, 2.845 pt
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>mm</code></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-millimeter"></span>
-<span id="index-mm"></span>
-<span id="units-of-length-mm"></span><p>Millimeter
+<dt id='index-cm'><span><code>cm</code><a href='#index-cm' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-centimeter"></span>
+<span id="units-of-length-cm"></span><p>Centimeter, 10 mm
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>dd</code></dt>
+<dt id='index-dd'><span><code>dd</code><a href='#index-dd' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-didot-point"></span>
-<span id="index-dd"></span>
<span id="units-of-length-dd"></span><p>Didot point, 1.07 pt
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>cc</code></dt>
+<dt id='index-cc'><span><code>cc</code><a href='#index-cc' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-cicero"></span>
-<span id="index-cc"></span>
<span id="units-of-length-cc"></span><p>Cicero, 12 dd
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>sp</code></dt>
+<dt id='index-sp'><span><code>sp</code><a href='#index-sp' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="index-scaled-point"></span>
-<span id="index-sp"></span>
<span id="units-of-length-sp"></span><p>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
+<p>Three other units are defined according to the current font, rather
+than being an absolute dimension.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt id='index-ex-1'><span><code>ex</code><a href='#index-ex-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-x_002dheight"></span>
<span id="index-ex"></span>
-<span id="index-x_002dheight"></span>
-<span id="index-ex-1"></span>
-<span id="index-m_002dwidth"></span>
-<span id="index-em"></span>
-<span id="index-em-1"></span>
-<span id="Lengths_002fem"></span><span id="Lengths_002fen"></span><span id="Lengths_002fex"></span><span id="units-of-length-em"></span><span id="units-of-length-en"></span><span id="units-of-length-ex"></span><p>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
-the font. The x-height of the current font <em>ex</em>, traditionally the
+<span id="Lengths_002fex"></span><span id="units-of-length-ex"></span><p>The x-height of the current font <em>ex</em>, traditionally the
height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
-lengths. Similarly <em>em</em>, traditionally the width of the capital
-letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
-<code>\enspace</code>, which is <code>0.5em</code>). Use of these can help make a
-definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
-of the vertical space between list items given as
-<code>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}</code> is more
-likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
-given in points.
+lengths.
</p>
-<span id="index-mu_002c-math-unit"></span>
-<span id="index-mu"></span>
-<p>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
-<em>mu</em> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family. See <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a>.
+</dd>
+<dt id='index-em-1'><span><code>em</code><a href='#index-em-1' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-m_002dwidth"></span>
+<span id="index-em"></span>
+<span id="Lengths_002fem"></span><span id="units-of-length-em"></span><p>Similarly <em>em</em>, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths. This is also often
+the size of the current font, e.g., a nominal 10pt font will
+have 1em = 10pt. LaTeX has several commands to produce
+horizontal spaces based on the em (see <a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad"><code>\enspace</code> & <code>\quad</code> & <code>\qquad</code></a>).
</p>
+</dd>
+<dt id='index-mu'><span><code>mu</code><a href='#index-mu' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><span id="index-mu_002c-math-unit"></span>
+<span id="units-of-length-mu"></span><p>Finally, in math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms
+of the math unit <em>mu</em>, defined by 1em = 18mu, where the
+em is taken from the current math symbols family. See <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+<p>Using these units can help make a definition work better across font
+changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between list
+items given as <code>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus
+0.01ex}</code> is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed
+than a definition given in points.
+</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csetlength"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csetlength">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtolength</a>, Previous: <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Units of length</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\addtolength</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Units of length</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csetlength-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></h3>
@@ -12454,13 +12599,14 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\setlength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to <var>amount</var>. The length name <var>len</var>
-must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> can be a
-rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
-and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
+<p>Set the length \<var>len</var> to <var>amount</var>. The length name
+<code>\<var>len</var></code> has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under
+normal circumstances. The <var>amount</var> can be a rubber length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in
+any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
</p>
<p>Below, with LaTeX’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
while the second will not.
@@ -12472,19 +12618,19 @@
He said stop going to those places.
</pre></div>
-<p>If you did not declare <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, for example if
-you mistype the above as
+<p>If you did not declare \<var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, for example if
+you mistype it as in
<code>\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}</code>,
then you get an error like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
\sepcindent</samp>’. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
-then you get an error like ‘<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be
-read again> \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}</samp>’
+then you get an error like ‘<samp>Missing number, treated as zero.</samp>’.
</p>
-
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005caddtolength"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005caddtolength">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settodepth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\settodepth</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\setlength</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005caddtolength-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></h3>
@@ -12494,13 +12640,14 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\addtolength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+<pre class="example">\addtolength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Increment the length <var>len</var> by <var>amount</var>. The length name
-<var>len</var> begins with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> is a
-rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
-and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
+<p>Increment the length \<var>len</var> by <var>amount</var>. The length name
+<code>\<var>len</var></code> has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under
+normal circumstances. The <var>amount</var> is a rubber length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in
+any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
</p>
<p>Below, if <code>\parskip</code> starts with the value <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>
</p>
@@ -12513,19 +12660,24 @@
<p>then it has the value <code>1pt plus 1pt</code> for the second paragraph.
</p>
-<p>If you did not declare the length <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, if
-for example you mistype the above as
+<p>If you did not declare \<var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, for example if
+you mistype it as in
+<code>\newlength{\specparindent}\addtolength{\sepcparindent}{...}</code>,
+then you get an error like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\sepcindent</samp>’. If the <var>amount</var> uses some length that has not been
+declared, for instance if for example you mistype the above as
<code>\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}</code>, then you get
something like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</samp>’.
-If you leave off the backslash at the start of <var>len</var>, as in
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of \<var>len</var>, as in
<code>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</code>, then you get something like
‘<samp>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</samp>’.
</p>
-
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csettodepth"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csettodepth">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settoheight</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtolength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\settoheight</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\addtolength</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csettodepth-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.4 <code>\settodepth</code></h3>
@@ -12534,14 +12686,15 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\settodepth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre class="example">\settodepth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
-begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+<p>Set the length \<var>len</var> to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <code>\<var>len</var></code>
+has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under normal circumstances.
</p>
-<p>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+<p>This will print how low the character descenders go.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
@@ -12549,18 +12702,20 @@
\the\alphabetdepth
</pre></div>
-<p>If you did not set aside the length <var>len</var>, if for example you
+<p>If you did not declare \<var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, if for example you
mistype the above as <code>\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}</code>,
then you get something like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\aplhabetdepth</samp>’. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+\aplhabetdepth</samp>’. If you leave the backslash out of \<var>len</var>, as in
<code>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</code> then you get something like
‘<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>’.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csettoheight"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csettoheight">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settowidth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settodepth</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\settowidth</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\settodepth</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csettoheight-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.5 <code>\settoheight</code></h3>
@@ -12569,14 +12724,15 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\settoheight{<var>len</var>}{text}
+<pre class="example">\settoheight{\<var>len</var>}{text}
</pre></div>
-<p>Sets the length <var>len</var> to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the <code>text</code> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
-begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+<p>Sets the length \<var>len</var> to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <code>text</code> argument. The length name <code>\<var>len</var></code>
+has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under normal circumstances.
</p>
-<p>This will show how high the characters go.
+<p>This will print how high the characters go.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetheight}
@@ -12584,19 +12740,21 @@
\the\alphabetheight
</pre></div>
-<p>If no such length <var>len</var> has been declared with <code>\newlength</code>, if
+<p>If no such length \<var>len</var> has been declared with <code>\newlength</code>, if
for example you mistype as
<code>\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}</code>, then you get something
like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight</samp>’. If
-you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+you leave the backslash out of \<var>len</var>, as in
<code>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</code> then you get something like
‘<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>’.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005csettowidth"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005csettowidth">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stretch</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settoheight</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\stretch</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\settoheight</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005csettowidth-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.6 <code>\settowidth</code></h3>
@@ -12605,14 +12763,15 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\settowidth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre class="example">\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
-begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+<p>Set the length \<var>len</var> to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <code>\<var>len</var></code>
+has to be a control sequence (see <a href="#Control-sequences">Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a>), and as such
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code> under normal circumstances.
</p>
-<p>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+<p>This prints the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
@@ -12620,18 +12779,21 @@
\the\alphabetwidth
</pre></div>
-<p>If no such length <var>len</var> has been set aside, if for example you
-mistype the above as <code>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</code>,
-then you get something like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\aplhabetwidth</samp>’. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<p>If no such length \<var>len</var> has been declared with <code>\newlength</code>,
+if for example you mistype the above as
+<code>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</code>, then you get something
+like ‘<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetwidth</samp>’. If
+you leave the backslash out of \<var>len</var>, as in
<code>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</code> then you get something like
‘<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>’.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cstretch"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cstretch">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Expressions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Expressions</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settowidth</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Expressions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Expressions</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\settowidth</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cstretch-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.7 <code>\stretch</code></h3>
@@ -12646,7 +12808,7 @@
<p>Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and <var>number</var> times
<code>\fill</code> units of stretchability (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). The
<var>number</var> can be positive or negative. This command is robust
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this horizontal
example, LaTeX produces three tick marks, and the distance between
@@ -12679,9 +12841,11 @@
<hr>
-<span id="Expressions"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Expressions">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\stretch</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstretch" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\stretch</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Expressions-1"></span><h3 class="section">14.8 Expressions</h3>
@@ -12766,17 +12930,18 @@
<p>TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
doing register assignment. Thus <code>\the\numexpr\dimexpr
1pt\relax\relax</code> will result in ‘<samp>65536</samp>’, which is <code>1pt</code>
-converted to scaled points (TeX’s internal unit) and then coerced
-into an integer. With a <code>\glueexpr</code> here, the stretch and shrink
-would be dropped. Going the other way, a <code>\numexpr</code> inside a
-<code>\dimexpr</code> or <code>\glueexpr</code> will need appropriate units, as in
+converted to scaled points (see <a href="#units-of-length-sp"><code>sp</code></a>,
+TeX’s internal unit) and then coerced into an integer. With a
+<code>\glueexpr</code> here, the stretch and shrink would be dropped. Going
+the other way, a <code>\numexpr</code> inside a <code>\dimexpr</code> or
+<code>\glueexpr</code> will need appropriate units, as in
<code>\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax</code>, which produces
‘<samp>3.0pt</samp>’.
</p>
<p>The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the
-allowed range, numbers must be less than <em>2^{31}</em> in absolute
+allowed range, numbers must be less than <em class='math'>2^{31}</em> in absolute
value, and dimensions or glue components must be less than
-<em>2^{14}</em> points, or <code>mu</code>, or <code>fil</code>, etc. The
+<em class='math'>2^{14}</em> points, or <code>mu</code>, or <code>fil</code>, etc. The
arithmetic operations are performed individually, except for a scaling
operation (a multiplication immediately followed by a division) which
is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit product as
@@ -12791,9 +12956,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Making-paragraphs"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Making-paragraphs">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math formulas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Lengths</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math formulas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Lengths</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Making-paragraphs-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">15 Making paragraphs</h2>
@@ -12801,8 +12969,8 @@
<span id="index-paragraphs"></span>
<p>To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
-paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
-two empty lines.
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, the
+separation of which is made by two empty lines.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
@@ -12817,15 +12985,35 @@
``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
</pre></div>
-<p>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
-character, <code>%</code>.
+<p>A paragraph separator is made of a sequence of at least one blank
+line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank
+line is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as
+space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a <code>%</code> and
+span up to the end of line. In the following example the two columns
+are identical:
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+\begin{document}
+First paragraph.
+
+Second paragraph.
+\newpage
+First paragraph.
+
+ % separator lines may contain blank characters.
+
+Second paragraph.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+
<p>Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph’s contents it divides that
content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
(see <a href="#Line-breaking">Line breaking</a>).
</p>
<p>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don’t put a
-blank line in math mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>); here the line before the
+blank line in math mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>); here the blank line before the
<code>\end{equation}</code>
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -12836,7 +13024,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>will get you the error ‘<samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>’. Similarly, the blank
-line in this <code>section</code> argument
+line in this <code>\section</code> argument
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\section{aaa
@@ -12848,22 +13036,19 @@
complete</samp>’.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="1">\par</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">End the current paragraph.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="2">\indent & \noindent</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="3">\parindent & \parskip</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Space added before paragraphs.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="4">Marginal notes</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Put remarks in the margin.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="1"><code>\par</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="2"><code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="3"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a></li>
+<li><a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="4">Marginal notes</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cpar"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cpar">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="n" rel="next">\indent & \noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cpar-1"></span><h3 class="section">15.1 <code>\par</code></h3>
@@ -12870,8 +13055,8 @@
<span id="index-_005cpar"></span>
<span id="index-paragraph_002c-ending"></span>
-<p>Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two
-consecutive newlines to a <code>\par</code>):
+<p>Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts any sequence
+of one or more blank lines to a <code>\par</code>, <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a>):
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\par
@@ -12879,7 +13064,7 @@
<p>End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
a blank line but the <code>\par</code> command is entirely equivalent. This
-command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>This example uses <code>\par</code> rather than a blank line simply for
readability.
@@ -12889,23 +13074,24 @@
\whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
</pre></div>
-<p>In LR mode or a vertical mode the <code>\par</code> command does nothing but
-it terminates paragraph mode, switching LaTeX to vertical mode
-(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+<p>In LR mode the <code>\par</code> command does nothing and is ignored. In
+paragraph mode, the <code>\par</code> command terminates paragraph mode,
+switching LaTeX to vertical mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
</p>
<p>You cannot use the <code>\par</code> command in a math mode. You also cannot
-use it in the argument of many commands, such as the <code>\section</code>
-command (see <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a> and <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>).
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the sectioning
+commands, e.g. <code>\section</code> (see <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a> and
+<a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as the <code>\paragraph</code>
command. The latter is, like <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>, a
-sectioning unit used by the standard LaTeX documents
-(see <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</a>).
+sectioning command used by the LaTeX document standard classes
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph"><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as <code>\newline</code> or the line
break double backslash, <code>\\</code>. The difference is that <code>\par</code>
ends the paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of
-the between-paragraph vertical space <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</a>).
+the between-paragraph vertical space <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>).
</p>
<p>The output from this example
</p>
@@ -12926,9 +13112,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="n" rel="next">\parindent & \parskip</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\par</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="n" rel="next"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\par</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent-1"></span><h3 class="section">15.2 <code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></h3>
@@ -12951,10 +13139,10 @@
<p>Go into horizontal mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). The <code>\indent</code> command
first outputs an empty box whose width is <code>\parindent</code>. These
-commands are robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+commands are robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>).
</p>
<p>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
-See <a href="#g_t_005cpar">\par</a>, for the difference between this command and <code>\par</code>. To
+See <a href="#g_t_005cpar"><code>\par</code></a>, for the difference between this command and <code>\par</code>. To
start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
paragraph, use <code>\noindent</code>.
</p>
@@ -12985,7 +13173,7 @@
<p>To omit indentation in the entire document put
<code>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</code> in the preamble. If you do that,
you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
-<code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</a>).
+<code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>).
</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-indentfirst-5"></span>
<span id="index-indentfirst-package-5"></span>
@@ -12996,9 +13184,11 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Marginal notes</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\indent & \noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Marginal notes</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip-1"></span><h3 class="section">15.3 <code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></h3>
@@ -13017,7 +13207,7 @@
<p>Both are rubber lengths (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). They affect the
indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside
-minipages (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>), and the vertical space between
+minipages (see <a href="#minipage"><code>minipage</code></a>), and the vertical space between
paragraphs, respectively.
</p>
<p>For example, if this is put in the preamble:
@@ -13030,23 +13220,27 @@
<p>The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead
are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase ‘<samp>x</samp>’.
</p>
-<p>In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for <code>\parindent</code>
-in one-column documents is <code>15pt</code> when the default text size is
-<code>10pt</code>, <code>17pt</code> for <code>11pt</code>, and <code>1.5em</code> for
-<code>12pt</code>. In two-column documents it is <code>1em</code>. (These values
-are set before LaTeX calls <code>\normalfont</code> so <code>em</code> is derived
-from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a different font
-then to set <code>\parindent</code> in units matching that font, do
-<code>\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}</code>.)
+<p>In LaTeX standard class documents, the default value for
+<code>\parindent</code> in one-column documents is <code>15pt</code> when the
+default text size is <code>10pt</code>, <code>17pt</code> for <code>11pt</code>, and
+<code>1.5em</code> for <code>12pt</code>. In two-column documents it is <code>1em</code>.
+(These values are set before LaTeX calls <code>\normalfont</code> so
+<code>em</code> is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use
+a different font then to set <code>\parindent</code> to 1em matching
+that font, put
+<code>\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}</code> in the
+preamble.)
</p>
<p>The default value for <code>\parskip</code> in LaTeX’s standard document
-styles is <code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
+classes is <code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Marginal-notes"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Marginal-notes">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\parindent & \parskip</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev"><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Marginal-notes-1"></span><h3 class="section">15.4 Marginal notes</h3>
@@ -13092,23 +13286,17 @@
<p>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\marginparpush</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginparpush-2"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginparpush-2'><span><code>\marginparpush</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginparpush-2' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="marginal-notes-marginparpush"></span><p>Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘<samp>7pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>12pt</samp>’
documents, ‘<samp>5pt</samp>’ else. See also <a href="#page-layout-parameters-marginparpush">page layout parameters marginparpush</a>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\marginparsep</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginparsep"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginparsep'><span><code>\marginparsep</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginparsep' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="marginal-notes-marginparsep"></span><p>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
‘<samp>11pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>10pt</samp>’ documents, ‘<samp>10pt</samp>’ else.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\marginparwidth</code>
-<span id="index-_005cmarginparwidth-2"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cmarginparwidth-2'><span><code>\marginparwidth</code><a href='#index-_005cmarginparwidth-2' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><span id="marginal-notes-marginparwidth"></span><p>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘<samp>10pt</samp>’ document
is ‘<samp>90pt</samp>’, ‘<samp>83pt</samp>’ for ‘<samp>11pt</samp>’, and ‘<samp>68pt</samp>’ for
‘<samp>12pt</samp>’; ‘<samp>17pt</samp>’ more in each case for a two-sided document.
@@ -13122,9 +13310,12 @@
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Math-formulas"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" id="Math-formulas">
+<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Modes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Making paragraphs</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Modes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Making paragraphs</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<span id="Math-formulas-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">16 Math formulas</h2>
@@ -13200,7 +13391,7 @@
\end{equation}
</pre></div>
-<p>(see <a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a>, see <a href="#equation">equation</a>). The only difference is that
+<p>(see <a href="#displaymath"><code>displaymath</code></a>, see <a href="#equation"><code>equation</code></a>). The only difference is that
with the <code>equation</code> environment, LaTeX puts a formula number
alongside the formula. The construct <code>\[ <var>math</var> \]</code> is
equivalent to <code>\begin{displaymath} <var>math</var>
@@ -13207,34 +13398,6 @@
\end{displaymath}</code>. These environments can only be used in paragraph
mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
</p>
-<span id="index-_005cdisplaystyle"></span>
-<p>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
-One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
-math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
-together.
-</p>
-<p>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
-the inline math mode. For this, the <code>\displaystyle</code> declaration
-forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
-<code>displaymath</code>. Thus <code>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
-x_n\)</code> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
-to it. Another example is that
-</p>
-<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
- \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
- Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
- &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
- Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
- &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
-\end{tabular}
-</pre></div>
-
-<p>because it has no <code>\displaystyle</code>, the ‘<samp>Arithmetic</samp>’ line’s
-fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its <code>\displaystyle</code>,
-the ‘<samp>Geometric</samp>’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with
-characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
-</p>
<span id="index-package_002c-amsmath-5"></span>
<span id="index-amsmath-package-5"></span>
@@ -13246,32 +13409,27 @@
<p>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
-<samp>amsmath</samp> and <samp>amssymb</samp> (also be aware of the <samp>mathtools</samp>
-package that is an extension to, and loads, <samp>amsmath</samp>). New
+<code>amsmath</code> and <code>amssymb</code> (also be aware of the <code>mathtools</code>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <code>amsmath</code>). New
documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
see their documentation on CTAN.
</p>
-<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" accesskey="1">Subscripts & superscripts</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Also known as exponent or index.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="2">Math symbols</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Various mathematical squiggles.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="3">Math functions</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Math function names like sin and exp.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Math-accents" accesskey="4">Math accents</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Accents in math.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining" accesskey="5">Over- and Underlining</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Things over or under formulas.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="6">Spacing in math mode</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
-</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="7">Math miscellany</a></td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Stuff that doesn’t fit anywhere else.
-</td></tr>
-</table>
+<ul class="section-toc">
+<li><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" accesskey="1">Subscripts & superscripts</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="2">Math symbols</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="3">Math functions</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Math-accents" accesskey="4">Math accents</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining" accesskey="5">Over- and Underlining</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="6">Spacing in math mode</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Math-styles" accesskey="7">Math styles</a></li>
+<li><a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="8">Math miscellany</a></li>
+</ul>
<hr>
-<span id="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts"></span><div class="header">
+<div class="section" id="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -13355,11 +13513,13 @@
<p>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as
-<samp>mhchem</samp>; see CTAN.
+<code>mhchem</code>; see CTAN.
</p>
<hr>
-<span id="Math-symbols"></span><div class="header">
+</div>
+<div class="section" id="Math-symbols">
+<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math functions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Subscripts & superscripts</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
@@ -13384,50 +13544,36 @@
which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless
said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
-mode, see <a href="#g_t_005censuremath">\ensuremath</a>.
+mode, see <a href="#g_t_005censuremath"><code>\ensuremath</code></a>.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\|</code>
-<span id="index-_005c_007c"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005c_007c'><span><code>\|</code><a href='#index-_005c_007c' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: <code>\parallel</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\aleph</code>
-<span id="index-_005caleph"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005caleph'><span><code>\aleph</code><a href='#index-_005caleph' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>ℵ Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\alpha</code>
-<span id="index-_005calpha"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005calpha'><span><code>\alpha</code><a href='#index-_005calpha' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>α Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\amalg</code>
-<span id="index-_005camalg"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005camalg'><span><code>\amalg</code><a href='#index-_005camalg' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⨿ Disjoint union (binary)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\angle</code>
-<span id="index-_005cangle"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cangle'><span><code>\angle</code><a href='#index-_005cangle' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>∠ Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
sign <code><</code> and angle bracket <code>\langle</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\approx</code>
-<span id="index-_005capprox"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005capprox'><span><code>\approx</code><a href='#index-_005capprox' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>≈ Almost equal to (relation).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\ast</code>
-<span id="index-_005cast"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cast'><span><code>\ast</code><a href='#index-_005cast' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>∗ Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
(binary). Synonym: <code>*</code>, which is often a superscript or
subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar: <code>\star</code>, which is
@@ -13435,283 +13581,197 @@
sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\asymp</code>
-<span id="index-_005casymp"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005casymp'><span><code>\asymp</code><a href='#index-_005casymp' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\backslash</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbackslash"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbackslash'><span><code>\backslash</code><a href='#index-_005cbackslash' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus <code>\setminus</code>, and
<code>\textbackslash</code> for backslash outside of math mode.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\beta</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbeta"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbeta'><span><code>\beta</code><a href='#index-_005cbeta' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>β Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigcap</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigcap"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigcap'><span><code>\bigcap</code><a href='#index-_005cbigcap' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⋂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
binary intersection <code>\cap</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigcirc</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigcirc"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigcirc'><span><code>\bigcirc</code><a href='#index-_005cbigcirc' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⚪ Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
composition <code>\circ</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigcup</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigcup"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigcup'><span><code>\bigcup</code><a href='#index-_005cbigcup' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⋃ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
union <code>\cup</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigodot</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigodot"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigodot'><span><code>\bigodot</code><a href='#index-_005cbigodot' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⨀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigoplus</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigoplus"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigoplus'><span><code>\bigoplus</code><a href='#index-_005cbigoplus' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⨁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\bigotimes</code>
-<span id="index-_005cbigotimes"></span>
-</dt>
+<dt id='index-_005cbigotimes'><span><code>\bigotimes</code><a href='#index-_005cbigotimes' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>⨂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list.